yr  ^r^^l' 


.■^'■.■-v\>;. 


tji-C'^r 


w. 


UC  NRLF 


B    M    lb3   fill 


L  1  H  K  A  l>i  \' 


og- 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

GIKT     OK 

IVAR  28  1892  ^ 

Received  ,  ,  iSg 

Accessions  Xo.//  ^-^-^"^   Shelf  Xo. 

: \ , ^ 


"r.-r* 


!»*-#i* 


m^m^ 


v^  > 


U.   S.   BUREAU   OF   EDUCATION 
SPECIAL  KBPORT  OX  PUBLK^  hIBUAHIKS  —  PART  II 


E  IT  I.  7i]  S 


DICTIOKARY   CATALOGUE 


CHARLES   A.   CUTTER 


THIRD     EDITION 

Wnil    OoItUKCTlUNS   AND    AlMHTIUXii  .A-XP    AN    ALPII AHKIK  A  I.    INIiKX 


OF  THP. 


BRSIT 


Y 


WA! 


ON 


GOVERN  M  K  N*  T    P  K  I  N  TING    OFFICE 
1  S  D  1 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1875,  by 

CHARLES    A.    CUTTER, 
In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


PR  E  F  A  T  0  K  Y    NOTE. 


There  are  plenty  of  treatises  on  classitieation,  of  wliich  accounts  may 
bo  foiiiKl  ill  Edwards's  Memoirs  of  Libraries  and  rctziioldt's  Bibliotheea 
Biblio<:;rai)liiea.  TlieclassiMeationof  the  St.  Louis  Public  iSchool  Library 
Catah)gue  is  briefly  defended  by  W.  T.  Harris  in  the  preface  (which  is 
reprinted,  with  some  additions,  from  the  Journal  of  Specuhitive  I'hi- 
losopliy  for  1870).  Professor  xVbbot's  plan  is  explained  in  a  pamphlet 
printed  and  in  use  at  Harvard  College  Library,  also  in  his  ''Statement 
rei,pectinjj  tlie  New  Catalogue"  (part  of  the  report  of  the  examining 
committee  of  the  library  for  1803),  and  in  the  North  American  Review 
for  January,  1809.  The  plan  of  Mr.  Schwartz,  librarian  of  the  Ai)[»ren- 
tices'  Library,  New  York,  is  i)artially  set  forth  in  the  preface  to  his  cata- 
logue; and  a  fuller  explanation  is  preparing  for  i)ublication.  For  an 
author-catalogue  there  are  the  famous  91  rules  of  the  British  Museum^ 
(l)retixed  to  the  Catalogue  of  Printed  Books,  Vol.  1, 1841,  or  conveniently 
arranged  in  ali)habetical  order  by  Th.  Nichols  in  his  Handbook  f()r 
Kt'aders  at  tiie  British  Museum,  1800);  Professor  Jewett's  modihcation 
of  them  (Smitlisonian  Keport  on  the  Construction  of  Catalogues,  1S5'J); 
Mr.  F.  B.  Perkins's  further  moditication  (in  the  American  Publisher  for 
1>09),  and  a  chapter  in  the  second  volume  of  ICdwards.t  But  for  a  dic- 
tionary-catalogue as  a  whole,  and  for  most  of  its  parts,  there  is  no  man- 
ual whatever.  Nor  have  any  of  the  above-merdioned  works  attempted 
to  set  forth  the  rules  in  a  systematic  way  or  to  investigate  what  might 
be  called  the  tirst  principles  of  cataloguing.  It  is  to  be  expected  that 
a  first  attempt  will  be  incomplete,  and  I  shall  be  obliged  to  librarians 
for  criticisms,  objections,  or  new  problems,  with  or  without  solutions. 

•  Cnnipilpd  by  a  committee  of  five,  Panizzi,  Tli.  Watts,  J.  Winter  Jones,  J.  H.  Parry, 
anil  K.  Edwards,  in  st'veral  moiitlis  of  hard  lal)i>r. 

t  To  these  may  now  ho  acMed  :  Condensed  rules  for  an  author  and  title  catalogue, 
prepared  by  the  co-operation  committee,  A.  L.  A.  (printed  in  the  Appendix  of  the 
])resent  Rules);  F:  H.  Perkins's  San  Francisc<)  cataloguing  (18<1) ;  C:  Dziatzko's  In- 
struction fiir  die  Ordnung  der  Titel  im  alpliabetischen  Zettelkalalog  der  I'niv.  Hibli- 
othek  zu  Hreslau^li?8()),  of  whichan  adaptation  by  Mr.  K.  A:  Lin«lerfelt  will  shortly 
be  publisiuMl;  Melvil  Dewey's  Condenseil  rules  for  a  card  catahtgue,  with  Uti  sami)le 
cards  (publiMhed  in  the  lAhrnnj  notrn,  v.  1,  no.  2,  IHH!.  and  reprinted  as  •' Kulcs  for 
author  and  classed  catalogs;"  with  changes,  additions,  and  a  "  Bibjiograpliy  of 
catalog  rules  by  Mary  Salome  Culler,  Hoston,  li^8.  and  again  as  "  Library  Scliool 
rules."  Boston,  lfi89);  G.  Fumagalli's  Cataloghi  di  biblioteche  (l^'^T);  H:  B.  Wheat- 
ley's  How  to  catalogue  a  library  (l^Sl));  ami  various  discussions  in  the  Library  jour- 
nal,  the  Xtiier  Auzeiyer,  and  the  Ccntralblalt  fiir  Hibliothikswtten. 

3 


4  rUKFATOliV    NOTE 

AVith   such  assistance  perhaps  a  secDiid  edition  of  these  hints  would 
deserve  the  title  — Rules.^ 

*  III  this  second  edition  I  have  retained  the  discnssions  of  |)rinciides  of  the  tirst 
edition  and  added  others,  because  it  seems  to  me  to  he  quite  as  important  to  teach 
catah)j;uers  the  theory,  so  that  they  can  catalogue  independently  of  rules,  as  to  accus- 
tom theni  to  refer  constantly  to  hard  and  fast  rules.  The  index,  which  will  bo  pub- 
lished sej)arately,  has  been  enlarged  so  as  to  form  an  alphabetical  or  "dictionary" 
arrangement  of  the  rules. 


C  O  N  ^1^  J :  X  T  S . 


General  rciiiark-i  ...                              ......  ..." 

Objects  s 

Means 

Reasons  for  choice  among  nietluxls 

Definitions  (with  a  note  on  clas.silication)  - 

A.  Entry  (Where  to  enter)  I 

1.  Anthor-eatalogue                                               .         l.'> 

A.  Authors.  15 

1.   I't'isoual       .     .  ....  17 

(J.   Who  IS  to  be  considered  author  17 

').   What  part  of  the  name  is  to  be  used 'Ht 

c.   What  form  of  the  name  is  to  be  used  -.M 

•J.  Corporate ...         •..>? 

B.  Substitutes  for  authors 

C.  References 

D.  Economies  :,: 

2.  Title-catalogue ...  :,- 

3.  Subject-catalogue  j.-, 

A.  Entries  considered  separately  .     .               .         -ly 

1.  Choice  between  ditferent  subjects  V) 

•J.  Choice  between  ditiereut  uauies 1,' 

H.   Entries  considered  as  parts  of  a  whole  .",: 

4.  Form-catalogue  .     .  ;,  i 

5.  Analysis  til 
B.  Style  (How  to  enter) il 

1.  Headings  i : 

2.  Titles  (Abridgment,  etc.)  {- 

3.  Editions  7;{ 

4.  Imprints ...         74 

5.  Contents  and  notes  7- 

6.  References .  7 

7.  Capitals  -i 

8.  Pnnctnation,  etc -1 

9.  Arrangement  -  ; 

a.  Headings 

h.  Titles 

c.  Contents .     .        ;»_• 

d.  Subjects  >):t 
Etc.  (Sets,  Rare  books,  etc.)  ....  it-' 
Appendix  : 

I.  A.  L.  A.,  L.  A.  U.  K.,  Bodleian,  Dow.-y's  Rules  Dy 

II.  A.  L.  .\.,  Transliteration  report  IfiH 

III.  A.  L.  A.,  Book  size  report     ...  11') 

.IV.   Edmands  on  alphabeting  HO 

V,  Abbreviations       .          .          .     .  .119 

VI.  Other  catalogues  \Qi', 

VII.  Bibliographical  aiils  iu  cataloguing l-.>rt 


KULES 

FOR   A 

DICTIONARY   CATALOGUE. 


No  code  of  catalop^niiig  could  be  adopted  in  all  points  by  every  one, 
because  the  libraries  for  study  and  the  libraries  for  reading;  have  dif- 
ferent objects,  and  those  which  combine  the  two  do  so  in  different  pro- 
l)orti()ns.  Again,  the  [)reparation  of  a  catalogue  must  vary  as  it  is  to  be 
manuscrii)t  or  i)rinte«l,  and,  if  the  latter,  as  it  is  to  be  merely  an  index 
to  the  library,  giving  in  the  shortest  possible  compass  clues  by  which 
the  public  can  find  books,  or  is  to  attempt  to  furnish  more  information 
on  various  points,  or  tinally  is  to  be  made  with  a  certain  regard  to  what 
may  be  called  style.  Without  i)reteuding  to  exactness,  we  may  divide 
dictionary  catalogues  into  short-title,  tnedium-title,  and  full-title  or  bib 
liograjthic;  typical  examples  of  the  three  being,  1",  the  Boston  Mercan- 
tile (18()«J)  or  the  Cincinnati  Public  (1871);  2",  the  Boston  Public  (18<il 
and  180C),  the  Boston  Athen;eum  (1874-8li);  3",  the  author-jiart  of  the 
Congress  (18G9)  and  the  Surgeon-General's  (1872-74)  or  least  abridj^cd 
of  any,  the  present  card  catalogue  of  the  Boston  Public  Library.  To 
avoid  the  constant  repetition  of  such  phrases  as  "the  full  catalogue  of 
a  large  library  "  and  "a  concise  finding  list,"  I  shall  use  the  three  words 
Short,  Medium,  and  Full  as  proi)er  names,  with  the  preliminary  caution 
that  the  Short  family  are  not  all  of  the  same  si7.e,  that  there  is  more 
than  one  Medium,  and  that  Full  may  be  Fuller  and  Fullest.  Short,  if 
single-columned,  is  generally  a  title-a-liuer;  if  printed  in  double  col- 
umns, it  allows  the  title  occasionally  to  exceed  one  line,  but  not,  if 
possible,  two;  Medium  does  not  limit  itself  in  this  way,  but  it  seldom 
exceeds  four  lines,  and  gets  many  titles  into  a  single  line.  Full  usually 
tills  three  or  four  lines  and  often  takes  six  or  seven  for  a  title. 

The  number  of  the  following  rules  is  not  owing  to  any  complexity  of 
systeni,  but  to  the  numl>«^r  of  cases  to  which  a  few  simple  i)rinciples  have 
to  be  applied.  They  are  especially  designed  for  M«Mlium,  but  may  easily 
be  adapted  to  Short  by  excision  and  marginal  notes.  The  almost  uni- 
versal practice  of  printing  the  shelf-numbers  or  the  class-numbers 
renders  some  of  them  unnecessary  for  town  ami  city  libraries. 

7 


OBJECTS.       MEANS.       KEASONS.       DEFINITIONS. 


OBJECTS.* 

1.  To  enable  a  person  to  find  a  book  of  which  either 

(A)  the  author^ 

(B)  the  title       >  is  kuowu. 
(c)  the  subject  J 

2.  To  show  what  the  library  has 

(D)  by  a  giveu  author 

(E)  on  a  given  subject 

(F)  in  a  given  kind  of  literature. 

3.  To  assist  in  the  choice  of  a  book 

(G)  as  to  its  edition  (bibliographically). 
(H)  as  to  its  character  (literary  or  topical). 

:\[EANS. 

1.  Author-entry  with  the  necessary  references  (for  A  and  d). 

2.  Title-entry  or  title-reference  (for  b). 

3.  Subject  entry,  cross-references,  and  classed  subject- table  (for  c  and  e). 

4.  Form-entry  t  (for  F). 

5.  Giving  edition  and  imprint,  with  notes  when  necessary  (for  g). 

6.  Xotes  (for  H). 

EEASOXS  FOR  CHOICE 

among  the  several  possible  methods  of  attaining  the  objects. 
Other  things  being  equal,  choose  that  entry 

(1)  That  will  probably  be  first  looked  under  by  the  class  of  people 
who  use  the  library  ; 

(2)  That  is  consistent  with  other  entries,  so  that  one  principle  can 
cover  all ; 

(3)  That  will  mass  entries  least  in  places  where  it  is  difficult  to  so 
arrange  them  that  they  can  be  readily  found,  as  under  names  of  nations 
and  cities. 

This  applies  very  slightly  to  entries  under  tirst  words,  because  it  is  easy  and  snfiS- 
cieut  to  arrange  them  by  the  alphabet. 

DEFINITIONS. 

There  is  such  confusion  iu  the  use  of  terms  iu  the  various  prefaces  to  catalogues—  a 
confusion  that  at  once  springs  from  and  leads  to  confusion  of  thought  and  practice  — 
that  it  is  worth  while  to  propose  a  systematic  nomenclature. 


Analysis.     See  Reference,  Analyiical. 


*Note  to  second  edition.  This  statement  of  Objects  and  Means  has  been  criticized ;  but  as  it  has  also 
been  frequently  quoted,  usually  without  change  or  credit,  in  the  prefaces  of  catalogues  and  else-where, 
I  suppose  it  has  on  the  whole  been  approved. 

t  Here  the  whole  is  designated  by  its  most  important  member.  The  full  name  would  be  form-and- 
language  entry.    Kind-entry  would  not  suggest  the  right  idea.  * 


IJKFIMTIOXS.  9 

Anonymous,  piiblislnMl  witliout  tin*  aiitlioi's  iiaiiu'. 

Strictly  a  book  is  not  anonymous  if  tlio  author's  name  a|»i)ear8  anywhoro  in  it,  but 
it  is  safest  to  treat  it  as  anonymous  if  f  be  author's  n.imo  (bies  not  appear  in  tiio  title. 

Note  that  the  words  are  "  in  tbo  title,"  not  "on  the  title-pa>;e."  Sometimes  in 
(lovernment  imblieations  the  autluu's  name  and  the  title  of  bis  work  do  not  appear 
on  the  title-j)a^<i  but  on  a  pa;;i'  imniediately  following.     Sucii  works  are  not  anony- 

MIOIIS. 

Asyndetic^  without  cross-ivfcrouces.     8oe  Syndetic. 

A  utiior,  ill  the  iiarrovvor  sense, is  the  person  who  writes  a  l»ooU ;  in  a  wider 
sense  it  may  be  api)lie(l  to  him  who  is  the  cause  of  the  book's  ex- 
istence by  j)uttin^  toj^'ether  the  writ iiifj^s  of  several  authors  (usually 
called  the  editor,  more  properly  to  be  called  the  collector).  Bodies 
of  men  (societies,  cities,  lej^islative  bodies,  countiies)  are  to  be  con- 
sidered the  autliors  of  their  memoirs,transactious,  journals,  debates, 
rei)orts,  etc. 

Class,  a  collection  of  objects  having  characteristics  in  common. 

Books  are  classitied  by  briii;;ins  tojjether  those  which  have  the  same  characteristics.* 
Of  course  any  characteristics  mi^ht  be  taken,  as  size,  or  bindiuf;,  or  publisher.  Bat 
as  nobody  wants  to  know  what  books  there  are  in  the  library  in  folio,  or  what  (luartos, 
or  what  books  bound  in  russia  or  calf,  or  what  published  by  John  Smith,  or  by  Brown, 
Jones,  and  Robinson,  these  bases  of  classification  are  left  to  the  booksellers  and  auc- 
tioneers and  trade  sales.  Still,  in  case  of  certain  unusual  or  noted  bindinj^s,  as  human 
skin  or  Grolier's,  orearly  or  famous  publishers,  as  Aldus  and  Elzevir,  a  partial  class-list 
is  sometimes  very  properly  made.  But  books  are  most  commonly  brought  together  in 
catalogues  because  they  have  the  same  authors,  or  the  same  subjects,  or  the  same  lit- 
erary form,  or  are  written  in  the  same  language,  or  were  given  by  the  same  donor,  or 
are  designed  for  the  same  chiss  of  readers.  Whin  brought  together  because  they  are 
bythe  same  author,  they  are  not  usually  thought  of  as  classified;  they  form  the  author- 
catalogue,  and  need  no  further  mention  here  except  in  regard  to  arrangement.  The 
classes,  i.  e.,  in  this  case  the  authors,  might  of  course  be  further  classified  according  to 
their  nations,  or  their  professions  (as  the  subjects  are  in  national  or  professional 
biographies),  or  by  any  other  set  of  common  characteristics,  but  for  library  purposes 
an  alphabetical  arrangement  according  to  the  spelling  of  their  names  is  universally 
acknowledged  to  be  the  best. 

The  classification  by  language  is  not  generally  used  in  full.  There  are  catalogues 
in  which  all  the  English  books  are  separated  from  all  the  foreign;  in  others  there  are 
separate  lists  of  French  books  or  German  books.  The  needs  of  each  library  must  de- 
termine whether  it  is  worth  while  to  prepare  such  lists.  It  is  undeniably  useful  in 
almost  any  library  to  make  lists  of  the  belles  lettres  in  the  dilTerent  languages ;  which, 
though  nominally  a  classification  by  language,  is  really  a  classification  by  literary 
form,  the  object  being  to  bring  together  all  the  works  with  a  certain  national  llayor — 
the  French  flavor,  the  German  flavor,  or  it  may  be  a  classing  by  n>ad»'rs,  the  (Jerniau 
books  being  catalogued  together  for  a  German  pojiulation,  the  French  for  the  French, 
and  so  on.  Again,  it  is  useful  to  give  lists  not  of  the  belles  lettres  alone,  but  of  all 
the  works  in  the  rarer  languages,  as  the  Bodleian  and  the  British  Museum  have 
published  separate  lists  of  their  Hebrew  books.  Hero  too  the  circumstances  of  each 
library  must  determine  where  it  shall  draw  the  line  between  those  literatures  which 
it  will  put  by  themselves  and  those  which  it  will  include  and  hide  in  t\w  mass  of  its 
general  catalogue.     Note,  however,  that  some  of  the  ditliculties  of  transliterating 


*  This  note  has  little  direct  beariDK  oa  practice,  bat  by  its  inaertion  here  some  one  interested  in  tlio 

theory  of  catalopiinc  niay  be  saved  the  trouble  of  goiri({  over  the  same  f^'onnd. 


10  DEFINITIONS. 

names  of  modern  Greek,  Russian  anthors,  etc.,  are  removed  by  putting  their  original 
works  in  a  separate  catalogue,  though  trauslationa  still  remain  to  puzzle  ns. 

The  catalogue  by  donors  or  original  owners  is  usually  partial  (as  those  of  the  Dowsei 
Barton,  Prince,  and  Tickuor  libraries).  The  catalogues  by  classes  of  readers  are  also 
jiartial,  hardly  extending  beyond  Juvenile  literature  and  Sunday-school  books- 
Of  course  many  subject  classes  amount  to  tlie  same  thing,  the  class  Medicine  being 
esi)ecialiy  useful  to  medical  men.  Theology  to  the  theologians,  and  so  on. 

Classification  by  subject  and  classilication  by  form  are  the  most  common.  An  ex- 
ample will  best  show  the  distinction  between  them.  Theology,  which  is  itself  a  sub- 
ject, is  also  a  class,  that  is,  it  is  extensive  enough  to  have  its  parts,  its  chapters,  so 
to  speak  (as  Future  Life,  Holy  Spirit,  Regeneration,  Sin,  Trinity),  treated  sepa- 
rately, each  when  so  treated  (whether  in  books  or  only  in  thought)  being  itself  asub- 
ject;  all  these  together,  inasmuch  as  they  possess  this  in  common,  that  they  have  to 
do  with  some  part  of  the  relations  of  God  to  man,  form  the  class  of  subjects  Theology. 
Class,  however,  is  ajujlied  to  Poetry  in  a  different  sense.  It  then  signifies  not  a  col- 
lection of  similar  subjects,  but  a  collection  of  books  resembling  one  another  in  being 
composed  in  that  form  and  with  that  spirit,  whatever  it  is,  which  is  called  poetical. 
In  the  subject-catalogue  class  it  is  used  in  the  first  sense  —  collection  of  similar  sub- 
jects; in  the  form-catalogue  it  is  used  in  the  second  —  list  of  similar  books. 

Most  systems  of  classification  are  mixed,  as  the  following  analysis  of  one  in  actual 
use  in  a  small  library  will  show: 

Art,  science,  and  natural  history.  Siibj. 

History  and  biography.  Subj. 

Poetry.  Form  (literary). 

Encyclopsedias  and  books  of  refer-  Form  (practical), 
ence. 

Travels  and  adventures.  Subj.     (Has  some  similarity  to  a  Form-class.)  - 

Railroads.  Subj. 

Fiction.  Form.     {Novels,  a  subdivision  of  Fiction,  is  properly  a  Form-class; 

but  the  differentia  of  the  more  extensive  class  Fiction  is  not  its 
form,  but  its  nntruth;  imaginary  voyages  and  the  like  of  course 
imitate  the  form  of  the  works  which  they  parody.) 

Belating  to  the  rebellion.  Subj. 

Magazines.  Form  (practical). 

General  literature,  essays,  and  re-  A  mixture:  1.  Hardly  a  class;  that  is  to  say,  it  probably  is  a  collec- 
ligious  works.  tion  of  books  having  only  this  in  common,  that  they  will  not  fit 

into  any  of  the  other  classes;  2.  Form.-  3.  Subj. 

Confining  ourselves  uow  to  classification  by  subjects,  the  word  can  be  used  in  three 
senses : 

1.  Bringing  books  together  which  treat  of  the  same  subject  specifically. 

That  is,  books  which  each  treat  of  the  whole  of  the  subject  and  not  of  a  part 
only. 

2.  Bringing  books  together  whicli  treat  of  similar  subjects. 

Or,  to  express  the  same  thing  differently: 
Bringing  subjects  together  so  as  to  form  a  class. 
A  catalogue  so  made  is  called  a  classed  catalogue. 

3.  Bringing  classes  together  so  as-  to  form  a  system. 

A  catalogue  so  made  should  be  called  a  systematic  catalogue. 
The  three  steps  are  then 

1.  Classifying  the  books  to  make  subject-lists. 

2.  Classifying  the  subject-lists  to  make  classes. 

3.  Classifying  the  clas.ses  to  make  a  systematic  catalogue. 

The  dictionary  stops  in  its  entries  at  the  first  stage,  in  its  cross-references  at  the 
second. 

The  alphabetico-classed  catalogue  stops  at  the  second  stage. 

The  systematic  alone  advances  to  the  third. 

Classification  in  the  first  sense,  it  is  plain,  is  the  same  as  "entry;"  in  the  second 


DEIMNnin.VS.  11 

eeiise  it  ia  the  Hiiiiu)  as  "claa.-t-ontry  ;  "  ami  in    i\n:   lliiid   HOtiso  it  is  tho  Hann;  as  tljo 
"logical  arranj;«'iiioiit"  of"  tho  tahlf  on  ji.  1"^,  umlcr  "  (Jiassod  catal()){in\" 

It  is  worth  while  to  ascertain  tho  relation  of  snhject  and  class  in  tho  subjcct-cata- 
loj^uc.  ASuhjrcl  is  tho  matter  on  which  the  author  is'Heekin;^  to  yive  or  the  reader  to 
olitain  information;  Clasn  is,  as  said  ahove,  a  ;;roujiin;i  of  snhjects  which  have  char- 
acteristics in  common.  A  little  rclloction  will  show  that  the  words  so  nsed  partially 
overlap,*  tho  gonoral  subjects  hcing  class(!st  ami  tiie  classes  heinjj  subjects,  t  but  the 
individual  subjects ^  nover  beiu}?  classes. 

Class  entry,  rej;isterin^'  a  book  iiiidcr  the  naiiu^  of  its  class ;  in  the  sub- 
ject cataU)oiie  used  ill  coutradistiiictiou  to  spe(;itic  entry. 
/•;.  <i.,ii  bookon  reitentance  hasclassentry  under  Theology  ;  its  specilic  entry  would 
be  umler  Repentance.  • 

Classed  caialtujnes  are  ina<le  by  chiss-entry,  whether  the  chisses  so  formed 
are  arranj^ed  hjgically  as  in  the  Systematic  kind  or  alphabetically 
as  ill  the  Alphabetico-classed. 

A  dictionary  catalof^ue  contains  class-headings,  inasmuch  as  it  contains  tho  head- 
ings of  extensivo  subjects,  but  under  them  there  is  no  class  entry,  only  spocidc  entry. 
Tho  syndetic  dictionary  catalogue,  however,  recognizes  their  uatnro  by  its  cross-ref- 
erences, which  constitute  it  iu  .a  certain  degree  an  alphabetico-cla.s.sed  (not  a  Bysto- 
matic)  catalogue.  Moreover,  the  dictionary  catalogue,  withoutceasingtobeone,  might, 
if  it  were  thought  worth  while  (which  it  certainly  is  not),  not  merely  give  titles  under 
specilic  headings  but  repeat  them  under  certain  classes  or  under  all  classes  in  ascend- 
ing series,  e.  g.,  not  merely  have  such  headings  as  Rose,  Geranium,  Fungi,  Lilia- 
ceae,  Phaenoganiia,  Cryptogamia,  but  also  under  Botany  include  all  ihe  titles 
which  appeared  under  Rose,  Geranium,  etc.;  profiled  IIks  headings  Botany,  Cryp- 
togamia, Fungi,  etc.,  were  arranged  alphabetically.  Tho  matter  may  be  tabulated 
thus: 

f  Specific  entry.     (Common  diet,  catal.)      ] 
I   j  Specific  entry  and  class  reference.     (Bost.  [Dictionary    cata- 
]      Pub.  Lib.,  Boston  Atheuii'um.)  j      loguo. 

Alphabetical  ar-J        J^ Specilic  and  class  entry.     (No  example.)  J 
raugemeut.        )  <|      class  entry  with  specific  or  class  sub-l 

entry.     (Noyes.)  [  Alphabetico-cla.saed 

Class  entry  with  chiefly  class  subentry.  j      catalogue. 
I.  I.         (Abbot.)  '    J 


Form    Subject  O 
Clas  aUB.  rn     S 


t  Tho  subjects  Animals,  Horses,  Plants  are  classi's,  .■»  fact  whicli  is  per- 
haps mure  evideut  tu  tbu  eye  ir  W(>  ii.ho  tlio  tt<riiis  Zoology,  Eippology, 
Botany.  The  sululi visions  of  Botany  aiitl  Zoology  iir>  obvious  enough; 
tlio  Muhilivisiona  of  Hippology  may  bo  themselvott  clas»o»,  as  Shetland 
ponies,  Arabian  coursers,  Barbs,  or  individual  horses,  as  Lady  Suffolk, 
Justin  Morgan. 

;  N'i)t  iiii'ii'ly  tlio  concrete  classes.  Natural  history,  Geography,  Herpe- 
tology,  History,  Ichthyology,  Mineralogy,  but  tlic  alistr.n  t  oms.  Mathe- 
matics, Philosophy,  are  plainly  suhjtcts.  Tin-  f.ict  that  some  li.iolvs  treat 
of  tho  siibjeci  I'hilosophy  anil  others  of  philusnphical  subjects,  and  that 
Others  treat  in  u  philosophical  manner  subjects  not  usually  considered  philosophical,  iuIrtHluces  con- 
fusion into  the  matter,  and  siu^lu  examples  may  be  broufjlit  up  in  which  it  seems  as  if  the  classifica- 
tion expressed  the  form  (Crostiwloro's  "  nature  " )  or  sometliiu;;  which  a  friend  calls  tho  "  v.s.Heuco  "  of 
the  book  an<l  not  its  subject,  so  that  we  ou;;bt  to  speak  of  an  "  essence  cataloinie  "  which  mi|;ht  require 
some  special  treatment ;  but  tbu  distinction  can  not  bo  maintainiMl.  It  nii;:bt  be  said,  for  example,  that 
"  GooloK.y  a  proof  of  revelation  "  would  have  for  its  tubjeet  matter  Geology  but  for  its  elat^  Theology  — 
which  is  true,  not  because  class  and  subject  are  incompatible  but  because  this  book  has  two  Hllbit^cts, 
the  first  Geology,  tlie  second  one  of  the  evidences  of  ri>vealed  reliifion,  whiTofore,  as  the  ETidences  are 
a  subili\-ision  of  Theology,  the  book  beloii.;s  under  that  as  a  subject-class. 

§It  is  plain  eIlOll^ll  tliat  Mt.  Jefferson,  John  Milton,  the  Warrior  Iron-clad  are  not  classes.  Coun- 
tries, however,  which  for  most  purposes  it  is  convenient  to  consider  as  individual,  are  in  certaJu  aspect* 
oUwsos;  when  by  the  word  "  Eoi;hind"  wo  mean  "the  English  '  it  la  the  name  of  a  class. 


DEFIMTION! 


lllfllf. 


fClass  entry.  (Undiviilod  classed  catal.) 
!  Class  eutrv  and  subentry  and  finally  spe- 
]  cific  subentry.  (Subdivided  classed 
L     catal.) 


Systematic   cata- 
logue. 


Alphabetical  nrrangpmpnt. 


Specific  he.idings 
in    alphabetical 
order. 

Classes  in  alpha- 
betical order. 

A 

B 

1 

D 

c 

Sp.Tific  hc-Kliniis 
aiiaugeil   logic- 
ally in  classes. 

Clashes  in  logical 
order.                     : 

Specific  dictionary. 

Specific  diet.   l>y  its  cross- references  and 

its    form-e'jtries.       Alphabetico-classed 

catalogue. 
Classed  catalogue  witliout  subdivisions. 
Classed  catalogue  witb  subdivisions. 
B  are  alphabetical. 
D  are  classed. 

B,  D  contain  specific  subjects. 

C,  1)  contain  classes. 


Logical  arrangeuieut. 


The  specific  entries  of  A  and  the  classes  of 
B,  though  brought  together  in  the  same  cata- 
logues (the  class-dictionary  and  the  alpha- 
betico-classed), simply  stand  side  l)y  .side  and 
nature,  because  the  principle  which  brings  them 
But  in  D  the  specific  entries  and 


do  not  unite,  each  preserving  its  ow 
together  —  the  alphabet  —  is  external,  mechanical 
the  classes  become  intimately  united  to  form  a  homogeneous  whole,  because  the  prin- 
ciple which  brings  them  together —  the  relations  of  the  subjects  to  one  another  —  is 
internal,  chemical,  so  to  speak. 

Collector.     See  Author. 

Cross-reference.     See  Reference. 

Dictionary  catalogue,  so  called  because  the  beadingrs  (author,  title,  sub- 
ject, and  form)  are  arranged,  like  the  words  in  adictionary.ln  alpha- 
betical order. 

Dictionary  and  other  alphabetical  catalogues.  These  are  differentiated 
not,  as  is  often  said,  b}'  the  dictionary  having  specific  entry,  but  (1) 
by  its  giving  specific  entries  in  all  cases  and  (2)  by  its  individual 
entry.  , 

Even  the  classed  catalogues  often  have  specific  entry.  "Whenever  a  book  treats  of 
the  whole  subject  of  a  class,  it  is  specifically  entered  under  that  class.  A  theological 
encycloptedia  is  specifically  entered  under  Theology,  and  theology  is  an  uusorbordi- 
nated  class  in  many  systems.  The  alphabetico-classed  catalogues  have  specific  entry 
in  many  more  cases,  because  they  have  many  more  classes.  Profe.'^sor  Abbot  has  such 
headings  as  Ink,  Jute,  Lace.  Leather,  Life-savers,  Locks,  Mortars,  Perfumery, 
Safes,  Salt,  Smoke,  SnoTW,  Varnish,  Vitriol.  Mr.  Noyes  has  scores  of  similar  head- 
ings; but  neither  of  them  permits  individual  entry,  which  the  dictionary-catalogue 
requires.  The  aiphabetico-classed  catalogue  enters  a  life  of  Napoleon  and  a  history 
of  England  under  Biography  and  History  ;  the  dictionary  enters  them  under  Na- 
poleon and  England.     This  is  the  invariable  and  chief  distinction  between  the  two. 

Editor.     See  Author. 

Entry ^  the  registry  of  a  book  in  the  catalogue  with  the  title  and  imprint. 
Author-entry,  such  registry  with  the  author's  name  for  a  heading. 
Title-entry,  registry  under  some  word  of  the  title. 
First-word -entry,  such  entry  made  from  the  first  word  of  the  title 
not  an  article. 


DKKIXITIONS.  13 

Entry  —  coiitiiiiUMl. 

Important  ironl  or  catch  word  entry,  such  entry  made  from  some  word 
of  the  titlcother  than  tlie  first  word  and  not  indicative  of  the  sub- 
ject, Imt  likely  to  be  riMiieiiibtTcd  and  iist'd  by  l)orrowt'rs  in  askinj^ 
for  the  book. 

iSerk's  entry,  entry  of  a  number  of  separate  works  published  under  a 
collective  title  or  half-title  or  title-pajic  caption.  Sncli  are  "The 
English  ("itizen"  series  and  ''American  statesmen." 

SuhJKtivordetitry.  such  entry  made  under  a  word  of  tin*  title  wliiidi 
indicates  the  subject  of  the  book. 

Suhjrct-cntry,  rejj^istry  uuiler  the  name  selected  by  the  (Mtalo;,Mier  to 
indicate  the  subject. 

A  cataloguer  wIjo  should  put  "Tli»>  inst'ct,"  hj-  Michelet,  uiidcr  Entomology  would 
be  inakiug  a  aiihjcct  iiitry :  Duncau's  "  bitroduction  to  entomology"  entered  under 
the  same  head  would  be  at  onco  a  suhji'cl-intry  and  a  eubjectu-ord-ciitrij. 

Form-entry,  registry  under  the  name  of  the  kind  of  literature  to  which 
the  book  belongs. 

Form,  applied  to  a  variety  of  classification  fouuded  on  the  foru)  of  the 
book  classified,  which  may  bo  either  Practical,  as  in  Almanacs,  Dic- 
tionaries, Encyclopaedias,  Gazetteers,  Indexes,  Tables  (the  form  in  these 
being  for  tin'  most  part  alphal)etical ),  or  Lit'iutry,  as  Fiction,  Plays, 
Comedies,  Farces,  Tragedies,  Poetry.  Letters,  Orations,  Sermons  (the 
latter  with  the  subdivisions  Charity,  Election,  Fum-ral,  Installation, 
Ordination,  Thanksgiving,  etc.).  There  are  certain  headings  which 
belong  both  to  the  Subject  and  the  Form  family.  "Encyclopaedias," 
inasmuch  as  the  books  treat  of  all  knowledge,  is  the  most  inclusive 
of  all  the  subject-classes;  inasmuch  as  (with  few  exceptions)  they 
are  in  alphabetic  form,  it  is  a  form-class. 

Heading,  the  word  oy  which  the  alphabetical  jdace  of  an  entiy  in  the 
catalogue  is  determined,  usually  the  name  of  the  author,  of  the 
subject,  or  of  the  literary  or  practical  form,  or  a  word  of  the  title. 

Imprint,  the  indication  of  the  place,  date,  and  form  of  i)rinting. 

Polygraphic,  written  by  several  authors. 

Polytopical,  treating  of  several  toi)ics. 

Will  the  convenience  of  this  word  excuse  the  twist  given  to  the  meaning  of  r6,To5 
in  its  formation  ?  Polygrapliic  might  serve,  as  the  French  use  jiolygraphe  for  a  mis- 
cellaneous writer:  luit  it  will  lie  well  to  have  both  words, — pohjgraphic  denoting  (as 
now)  collections  of  several  works  by  one  or  many  authors,  jiohttopiml  denoting  works 
on  uiany  subjects. 

Reftrencc,  partial  registry  of  a  book  (omitting  the  imprint)  under  author, 
title,  subject,  or  kind,  referring  to  a  more  full  entry  under  some 
other  heading;  occasionally  used  to  denote  merely  entries  without 
imprints,  in  which  the  reference  is  imjilied.  The  distinction  of 
entry  and  reference  is  almost  without  meaning  lor  Short,  as  a  title- 
a  liner  saves  nothing  by  referring  unless  there  are  several  refer- 
ences. 


14  DEFINITIONS. 

Ixtfcreiice  —  contimuHl. 
A  nnbjticaJ  reference^  or,  simply,  an  analytical^the  ve^xfiiry  of  some  part 
of  a  book  or  of  some  work  coiitaiiu'd  in  ji  collection,  referring  totlie 
liea<lin^  under  which  the  book  or  collection  is  entered. 
CroHs-rcference,  reference  from  one  subject  to  another. 
Head  lug  reference,  from  one  form  of  a  headinfj  to  anotlier. 
First  irord-refercncc,  catch -rcord  reference,  suhject-ivordreference,  same 
as  first-word  entry,  etc.,  omittinj;  the  imprint,  and  referring. 
Sericn-entry.     See  Entry. 

Specific  entry,  registering  a  book  under  a  heading  which  expresses  its 
special  subject  as  distinguished  from  entering  it  in  a  class  which 
includes  that  subject. 

E.  g.,  registering  "  The  art  of  painting"  iimlcr  Painting,  or  a  description  of  the 
cactns  umU'r  Cactus.  Putting  theiu  under  Fine  arts  aii<l  Botany  would  be  class- 
entry.     "Specific  entry,"  by  the  way,  has  nothing  to  tlo  with  ".species." 

Subject,  the  theme  or  themes  of  the  book,  whether  stated  in  the  title  or 
not. 
It  is  wortli  noting  that  subjects  are  of  two  sorts:  (I)  the  individual,  as  Goethe, 
Shakespeare,  England,  the  Middle  Ages,  the  ship  Alexandra,  the  dog  Tray,  the 
French  Revolution,  all  of  which  are  concrete;  and  {'i)  general,  as  Man,  History, 
Horse,  Philosophy,  which  may  be  either  concrete  or  abstract.  Every  general  sub- 
ject is  a  class  more  or  less  exteusive.  (See  note  on  Class.)  Some  mistakes  have  also 
arisen  from  not  noting  that  certain  words.  Poetry,  Fiction,  Drama,  etc.,  are  subject- 
headings  for  the  books  written  about  Poetry,  Fiction,  etc.,  and  form-hearings  for 
poems,  novels,  plays,  etc. 

Subject-entry,  Subject  word  entry.     See  Entry. 

Syndetic,  connective,  applied  to  that  kind  of  dictionary  catalogue  which 
binds  its  entries  together  by  means  of  cross-references  so  as  to  form 
a  whole,  the  references  being  made  from  the  most  comprehensive 
subject  to  those  of  the  next  lower  degree  of  comprehensiveness, 
and  from  each  of  these  to  their  subordinate  subjects,  and  vice  versa. 
These  cross-references  correspond  to  and  are  a  good  substitute  for 
the  arrangement  in  a  systematic  catalogue.  References  aiealso 
made  in  the  syndetic  catalogue  to  illustrative  and  coordinate  sub- 
jects, and,  if  it  is  perfect,  from  specific  to  general  subjects. 
Title  in  the  broader  sense  includes  heading,  title  proper,  and  imprint; 
in  the  narrower  (in  which  it  is  hereafter  used)  it  is  the  name  of  the 
book  given  by  the  author  on  the  title-page,  omitting  the  imi)rint, 
but  including  names  of  editors,  translators,  etc.  The  name  of  the 
book  put  on  the  leaf  preceding  the  title  page  is  called  the  half-title; 
and  the  same  term  is  applied  to  lines  indicating  subdivisions  of  the 
book  and  following  the  title;  the  name  given  at  the  head  of  the 
first  page  of  text  is  the  caption.  That  given  at  the  back  of  the  book 
(the  binder''s  title)  should  never  be  used  in  a  catalogue  which  makes 
the  slightest  pretensions  to  carefulness. 
A  title  may  be  either  the  book's  name  (as  "  &c.")  or  its  description  (as  "A  collec- 
tion of  occasional  sermons"),  or  it  may  state  its  subject  (as  "  Synonyms  of  the  New 


AUTHOR-ENTRY.  16 

Testament"),  or  it  may  bo  any  two  or  all  tlinso  of  those  combined  (as  description  ami 
subject,  "Brief  account  of  a  JlM^•m^y  tlirou;;li  Europe;"  name  and  description, 
"  Hai)py  tliouf^hts;"  name  and  sul).jcct,  "  Men's  wives  ;  'allthri;e,  '•  Indi^x  of  dates"). 
Bibliographers  have  established  a  cult  of  the  title- page;  its  slightest  peculiarities 
are  noted;  it  is  followed  religiously,  with  dots  for  omissions,  brackets  for  iiLsertioiis, 
and  uprights  to  mark  tho  end  of  lines;  it  is  oven  imitated  by  the  fac-simile  type  or 
photographic  copying.  These  things  may  concern  tho  cataloguer  of  the  Lenox  Li- 
brary or  the  Prince  collection.  Tho  oidinary  librarian  has  in  general  nothing  to  do 
with  them;  but  it  does  not  follow  that  even  he  is  to  lose  all  respect  for  the  title.  It 
is  the  book's  naiiK!  and  slioulil  not  be  changed  but  by  act  of  legislature.  Our  iieces- 
Bities  oblige  us  to  abbreviate  it,  but  nothing  obliges  us  to  make  additions  to  it  or  to 
change  it  without  giving  notice  to  the  roa<ler  that  wo  have  done  so.  Moreover,  it 
must  intluence  the  entry  of  a  book  more  or  less;  it  determines  tho  title-entry  en- 
tirely; it  affects  the  author-ontry  (see  $  3)  and  the  subject-entry  (seo  $  104).  But  to 
let  it  have  more  power  than  this  is  to  pay  it  a  superstitious  veneration. 

Volume,  a  book  distinf^iiisIicMl  from  otlier  books  or  other  vobiines  of  the 
satno  work  by  having  its  own  title,  paging,  and  register. 

This  ia  tho  bibliographic  nse  of  the  word,  sanctioned  by  the  British  Museum  rules. 
That  is,  it  is  in  this  sense  only  that  it  applies  to  all  the  copies  of  an  edition  as  it  comes 
from  the  printer.  But  there  is  also  a  bibliopegic  and  bibliopolic  use,  to  denote  a  num- 
ber of  pages  bound  together,  which  pages  may  be  several  v(duraes  in  the  other  sense, 
or  a  part  of  a  volume  or  parts  of  several  volumes.  To  avoid  confusion  1  nse  "  vol- 
ume" in  the  present  treatise  as  defined  in  the  Rules  of  (he  British  Museum  catalogue, 
and  I  recommend  this  as  tho  sole  use  in  library  catalogues,  except  in  such  phrases  as 
2  V.  bd.  in  1.  which  means  2  volumes  iu  the  bibliographical  sense  united  by  binding 
so  as  to  form  one  piece  of  matter 


In  the  present  treatise  I  am  regarding  the  dictionary  catalogue  as  consisting  of  an 
author-catalogue,  a  subject-catalogue,  a  more  or  less  complete  title-catalogue,  and  a 
more  or  less  complete  form-catalogue,  all  interwoven  in  om;  alphabetical  order.  The 
greater  part,  however,  of  the  rules  here  given  would  apply  equally  to  these  cata- 
logues when  kei)t  separate. 

These  rules  are  written  primarily  for  a  printed  catalogue;  almost  all  of  them  would 
apply  equally  to  a  card  catalogue. 


I.  AUTHOR-ENTRY. 

A.  Authors. 

1.  Personal. 

a.    Under  ichoiti  as  author. 

Author,!.  Anonymous.  2.  Joint  authors, .'},  4.  Theses,  5.  Pseudo- 
nyms, G,  IMustrators,  7.  Designer,  Cartographer,  Engraver,  S.  Mu- 
sical works,  U.  ljo()ksellers  and  auctioneers,  10,  II.  Comtuentaries,  12. 
Continu;itions  and  in<lexes,  l.>,  lOpitomes,  14.  Revisions,  15.  Excerpts 
and  chrestomathies,  10.  Concordances,  17.  lieporters,  translators,  and 
editors,  18. 


16  AUTH(»K'-KNTHY. 

b.  Ufuhr  n-littf  part  of  the  name. 

Cliristiaii  naiiu',  10.  Siinirtine,  -0.  Title,  21.  Changed  names,  22. 
CoiiipDunil  names,  23.  Prefixes,  24.  Latin  names,  25.  Capes,  lakes, 
etc.,  2(). 

c.  Under  what  form  of  the  name. 

Vernacnlar,  27.  Several  Ijiuguages,  28.  Masculine  and  feminine,  29. 
Various  si)ellings,  30,  31.  Forenames,  32.  Places,  33-35.  Translitera- 
tion, 3G-38. 

2.    COKI'OKATK. 

General  principle,  39.  Places,  40.  Governmental  bodies,  41.  Laws, 
42.  Calendars,  43.  Works  writteu  otticially,  44-4(3.  Articles  to  be 
inquired  after,  47.  Ptcports,  48.  Congresses,  49.  Treaties,  50.  Parties, 
denominations,  orders,  51.  Their  conventions,  conferences,  etc.,  52. 
Ecclesiastical  councils,  53.  Keports  of  committees,  54.  Classes  of  citi- 
zens, 55.     Societies,  5G. 

E.  Substitutes. 

Parts  of  the  author's  name,  57.     Pseudonyms.  58.    Collectors,  59. 

c.  References,  CO,  61. 

D.  Economies,  02-67. 

AUTHORS. 

1.  Make  the  author-entry  under  (a)  the  name  of  the  author  whether 

personal  or  corporate,  or  (b)  some  substitute  for  it. 
In  regard  to  the  author-eatry  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  object  is  not  merely 
to  (acilitate  the  finding  of  a  given,  book  by  an  authors  name.  If  this  were  all,  it 
might  have  been  better  to  make  the  entry  under  the  professed  name  (pseudonym),  or 
miller  the  form  of  name  mentioned  in  the  title  (Bulwer  in  one  book,  Lytton  in  an- 
other, Bulwer  Lytton  in  a  third;  Sherlock,  Th.,  in  that  divine's  earlier  works; 
Bangor,  Th.  [Sherlock],  Bp.  of,  in  later  ones;  Salisbury,  Th.  [Sherlock],  Bp.  ot,'\n 
the  next  issues;  London,  Th.  [Sherlock],  Bp,  of,  in  his  last  works;  Milnes,  R. 
Monckton,  for  "Good  night  and  good  morning,"  and  the  nine  other  works  published 
before  1863,  and  Houghton,  Rich.  M.  M.,  Baron,  for  the  1870  edition  of  "  Good  night 
and  good  morning,"  and  for  other  books  published  since  his  ennoblement),  or  under 
the  name  of  editor  or  translator  when  the  author's  name  is  not  given,  as  proposed  by 
Mr.  Crestadoro.  This  might  have  been  best  with  object  a;  but  we  have  also  object 
D  to  provide  for  —  the  finding  of  all  the  books  of  a  given  author — and  this  can  most 
conveniently  be  done  if  they  are  all  collected  in  one  place. 

2.  Anonymous  books  are  to  be  entered  under  the  name  of  the  author 

whenever  it  is  known. 

If  it  is  not  known  with  certainty  the  entry  may  be  made  under  the  person  to  whom 
the  work  is  attributed,  with  an  explanatory  note  and  a  reference  from  the  first  word, 
or  the  book  may  be  treated  as  anonymous  and  entered  under  the  first  word,  with  a 

uote  "  Attributed  to ,"  and  a  reference  from  the  supposed  author.     The  degree 

of  doubt  will  determine  which  method  is  best. 


UNDER    WHOM    AS    Al'TllUK.  17 

A.  Author. 

1.     I'KKSOXAI.. 

a.   Cnder  wliovi  as  author. 

3.  Enter  works  written  conjointly  by  several  authors  nnih-r  tlie  naino 

of  the  one  lirst  mentioned  on  tlic  title  i)a;;e,  with  leferenees  from 
the  others. 
Tho  writers  of  a  corroMpoiuloiicn  iiml  flit^  icirticiimiits  in  ;i  ilrhato  an-  to  Im  consid- 
ered as  joint  aulhorH. 

Ex.  Schiller.  J-  Christopli  F:  v.     l{rii!fwechsel  zwisclH-n  S.  iiinl  Cotta  ;    ln-raiiHtJ. 
von  ^' oil  mar. 

—  Hriofwochsel  zw.  S.  and  Goethe.     Stntt-,'.,  182'J.     (i  v.     S. 

—  Hriofwechsel  zw.  S.  und  \V:  v.  Humboldt.     Stutty.,  1H30.     S. 
Cotta.     I?ri»f\vfchscl.     .SVc  Schiller,  .):  C.  V:  v. 

Goethe,  .1:  W.  v.     Hriefwi-clisi-l.     Scv  Schiller,  J:  C.  V:  v. 
Humboldt,  K:  W:,  Freihcrr  v.     Iki.fw.ihs.l.     See  Schiller,  .1:  (".  F:  v. 
Many  (•aialo:;nc8  adopt  the  form  of  hcndiiii; 

Schiller,  J:  Ohristoph  F:  v.,  and  Humiboldt,  K:  W:,  Fniherr  w     IJripfwocbsel. 

Stnttg.,  leSO.    S. 
Humboldt,  K:  W:,  Freiherr  v.     Briefwechsel.     iSee  Schiller,  .1:  ('.  F:  v.,  awl 
Humboldt,  K:  W:  v.     But  see  $  240. 
WluMi  roiintrit'H  arc  joint  authors  it  is  better  to  make  full  entries  under  eaeh  and 
arrange  them  as  if  the  country  under  consideration  were  the  only  one.     Facli  country 
puts  its  own  name  lirst  in  its  own  edition  of  a  joint  work  ;  an<l  tho  arrangement  pro- 
l)osed  avoids  an  additional  complexity  under  countries,  which  are  confusing  enough 
at  the  Itest. 

Whether  tlie  joint  authorship  api)ears  in  the  title  or  not  should  make  no  difterenco 
in  the  mode  of  entry  ;  if  one  name  appears  on  the  title,  that  should  he  chosen  for  tho 
entry;  if  none,  take  the  most  important. 

4.  When  donble,  headinj^s  are  used  distinguish  between  joint  authors  of 

one  work  and  two  authors  of  separate  works  joined  in  one  volume. 
In  the  latter  case,  if  there  is  no  collective  title,  the  hea<linfj  sln)ul<l 
be  the  name  of  the  first  author  alone  and  an  analytical  reference 
should  be  made  from  the  second.     (See  §  58  t.) 

Ex.  "The  works  of  Shelley  and  Keats"  would  be  entered  in  full  under  Shelley 
(both  names  being  mentioned  in  the  title,  but  Shelley  alone  in  the  hea«ling),  an<l  an- 
alytically (^J 127)  under  Keats.     In  such  cases  a  double  heading  would  often  mislead. 

5.  For  university  theses  or  dissertations  Dziatzko  fjives  the  followiu},' 

rules: 

I.  Until  about  1750 

«  Unless  the  respondent  is  known  to  be  the  "  atictor"  ("  aut't(»r  et 
respoTidens,"  "  scriptor,"  etc.)  enter  under  the  name  of  the  pra-ses, 
without  reference. 

bU  tlie  respondent  is  "auctor"  enter  undi'r  him,  with  n'ferenco 
from  the  pra/.ses. 

II.  After  17.")()  enter  under  the  resjiontlent,  unle.ss  it  is  known  that 

tho  pra'ses  is  the  author,  when  his  name  will  be  the  heailiuK-  In 
neither  case  refer  from  the  other  name. 

For  universities  where  the  old  custom  wan  k.ut    im  li.Miti.l    it.ih    i-j  tli..  Sw.ili^li, 
Rule  I  ap|)lies  till  the  change  was  made. 
4892  LI 2 


18  PSEUDONYMS.  • 

Where  there  are  two  reapoadeiits,  neither  specilied  as  author,  euter  under  the  first, 
without  reference  from  the  second. 

6.  Euter  pseiulonyruoiis  works  generally  uuder  the  author's  real  name, 
when  it  is  known,  with  a  refereuce  from  the  pseudonym;  buf 
make  the  entry  under  the  pseudonym,  with  a  reference  from  the 
real  name,  when  the  writer  is  better  known  by  the  false  name, 

In  the  lirst  edition  this  rule  was  without  limitation,  and  I  added  th«!  followini;  note 
"One  is  strongly  tempted  to  deviate  from  this  rule  in  the  case  of  writers  like  George 
Eliot  and  George  Sand,  Gavarni  and  Grandville,  who  appear  in  literature  only  under 
their  pseudonyms.  It  would  apparently  be  much  more  convenient  to  enter  their  works 
under  the  name  by  which  alone  they  are  known  aijd  under  which  everybody  but  a 
professed  cataloguer  would  assuredly  look  first.  For  an  author-catalogue  this  might 
be  the  best  plan,  but  in  a  dictionary  catalogue  we  have  to  deal  with  such  people  not 
merely  as  writers  of  books,  but  as  subjects  of  biographies  or  parties  in  trials,  and  in 
such  cases  it  seems  proper  to  use  their  legal  names.  Besides,  if  one  attempts  to  ex- 
empt a  few  noted  writers  from  the  rule  given  above,  where  is  the  line  to  be  drawn? 
No  definite  principle  of  exception  can  bo  laid  down  which  will  guide  either  the  cata- 
loguer or  the  reader;  and  probably  the  confusion  would  in  the  end  produce  greater 
inconvenience  than  the  present  rule.  Moreover,  the  entries  made  by  using  the  pseu- 
donym as  a  heading  would  often  have  to  be  altered.  For  a  long  time  it  would  have 
been  proper  to  enter  the  works  of  Dickens  under  Boz;  the  Dutch  annual  bibliog- 
raphy uniformly  uses  Boz-Dickens  as  a  heading.  No  one  would  think  of  looking 
uuder  Boz  now.  Mark  Twain  is  in  a  transition  state.  The  public  mind  is  divided 
between  Twain  and  Clemens.  The  tendency  is  always  toward  the  use  of  the  real 
name ;  and  that  tendency  will  be  much  helped  in  the  reading  ijublic  if  the  real  name 
is  always  preferred  in  catalogues.  Some  pseudonyms  persistently  adopted  by  autnors 
have  coiue  to  be  considered  as  the  only  names,  as  Voltaire  (see  §  23),  and  the  trans- 
lation Melanchthon.  Perhaps  George  Sand  and  George  Eliot  will  in  time  be  ad- 
judged to  belong  to  the  same  company.  It  would  be  well  if  cataloguers  could  appoint 
some  permanent  committee  with  authoritj''  to  decide  this  and  similar  points  as  from 
time  to  time  they  occur." 

I  am  now  in  favor  of  frequent  entry  under  the  pseudonym,  with  reference  from  the 
real  name.  I  should  recommend  the  pseudonym  as  heading  in  the  case  of  any  popular 
writer  who  has  not  written  under  his  own  name,  provided  he  is  known  to  the  public 
chiefly  by  his  pseudonym,  and  in  the  subject  catalogue  for  any  person  who  is  so 
known.  Examples  are  George  Eliot,  George  Sand,  Gavarni,  Grandville,  Caglios- 
tro,  Cham,  Pierre  Loti,  Daniel  Stern,  in  some  doubtful  cases  a  card  catalogue 
might  profitably  make  entry  both  under  the  real  and  the  false  name.  This  elastic  prac- 
tice will  give  a  little  more  trouble  to  the  cataloguer  than  a  rigid  rule  of  entry  under 
the  real  name,  but  it  will  save  trouble  to  those  who  use  the  catalogue,  which  is  more 
important. 

But  entry  should  not  be  made  under  a  pseudonym  which"  is  used  only  once  or  a  few 
times;  if  the  author  writes  also  under  his  real  name,  if  he  is  known  to  the  contemporary 
public  or  in  literary  history  under  his  real  name,  that  is  to  be  u.sed  for  entry.  It  may 
sometimes  happen  that  an  author  is  well  known  under  a  pseudonym  and  afterwards 
js  better  known  by  his  real  name.  In  that  case  change  the  entries  from  the  false  to 
the  real  name.  If  any  author  uses  two  different  pseudonyms  enter  under  each  the 
works  written  under  it,  with  references  both  ways,  and  from  the  real  name,  until  the 
real  name  becomes  better  known. 

It  is  plain  that  this  practice  of  entering  under  the  best  hiown  name,  whether  real  or 
false,  puts  an  end  to  uniformity  of  entry  between  different  catalogues,  leads  to  in- 
consistency of  entry  in  the  same  catalogue,  and  will  often  throw  the  cataloguer  into 
perplexity  to  decide  which  name  is  best  kuown ;  but  for  the  last  objection  it  must 
be  remembered  that  the  catalogue  is  made  for  the  reader,  not  for  the  cataloguer,  and 


UNDKK    WHOM    AS    AUTIIOK.  19 

for  the  first  two  that  references  will  prevent  any  seriouM  dilTioiilty ;  and  in  the  few 
cases  of  nearly  equal  notoriety,  double  entry  is  an  easy  way  out  of  the  dinicnlty. 

7.  WIkmj  the  illustrations  form  a  very  important  part  of  a  work,  consider 
both  the  author  of  the  text  and  thedesijjuer  —  or  in  certain  cases 
the  en<;raver  —  of  the  plates  to  he  author,  and  make  a  full  entry 
under  each.  Under  the  author  mention  the  designer's  name  in 
the  title,  and  vice  versa. 

Such  works  are:  Walton's  Welsh  aconery,  with  text  by  Hniiiiey;  Wolfs  "WiM 
auiniuls."  witii  text  by  Elliot.  Which  shall  bo  taken  as  .iiitliur  in  tht-  siilijcct  or 
fornit'Mtry  dt'pcnils  upon  the  work  ami  the  subject.  Under  W^ater-color  dra^viugs 
it  would  be  Walton;  under  Wood-eugravings,  Wolf;  under  Wales  and  Zoology, 
thecatalojTucr  ninst  decide  which  illustrates  the  subject  most,  the  writer  or  the  artist. 
K.  g.,  iMuler  Gothic  Architecture  ruj^in  is  undoubtedly  to  be  considered  the  author 
of  his  "Kxaniiiles,"  tlu>n;;h  "the  literary  part"  is  by  E.  J.  Willson;  for  the  illustrator 
was  really  the  author  and  the  text  wa.s  subsidiary  to  the  plates.  It  was  to  carry  out 
Puyin's  idea:^,  not  Willsou'a,  that  the  work  was  published. 

8.  The  designer  or  painter  co[)ied  is  the  author  of  engravings;  the  car- 

tographer is  the  author  of  maps;  the  engraver  in  general  is  to  be 
considered  as  no  more  the  author  than  the  printer.  Hut  in  a 
special  catalogue  of  engravings  the  engraver  would  be  considered 
as  author;  in  any  full  catalogue  references  should  be  made  from 
the  names  of  famous  engravers,  as  Kaimondi,  Miiller,  Steinla, 
Wolle.     An  architect  is  the  author  of  his  designs  and  plans. 

9.  Enter  musical  works  doubly,  under  the  author  of  the  words  and  also 

the  composer  of  the  music. 
Short  and  Medium  will  jjenerally  enter  only  under  the  composer;  Don  Giovanni,  for 
example,  only  under  Mozart  and  not  under  Da  Ponte.      This  economy  especially 
applies  to  songs. 

10.  Booksellers  and  auctioneers  are  to  be  considered  as  the  authors  of 

their  catalogues,  unless  the  contrary  is  expressly  asserted. 
Entering  these  only  under  the  form-heading  Catalogues  belongs  to  the  dark  ages 
of  cataloguing.     Put  the  catalogue  of  a  library  uuiler  the  library's  name.     {^  ot3.) 

11.  Put  the  auctioneer's  catalogue  of  a  public  library  under  the  name 

of  the  library,  of  a  private  library  under  the  name  of  the  owner, 
unless  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  another  person  made  it. 
In  the  latter  case  it  would  aj)pear  in  the  author  (;atalogut'  under 
the  maker's  name,  and  in  the  subject  catalogue  under  the  owner's 
name. 

12.  Enter  commentaries  with  the  text  complete  under  the  author  of  the 

text  and  also  under  the  author  of  tht^  commentary,  provided  that 
is  entitled  "Commentary  on  •  *  •"  and  not"*  *  •  with  a 
commentary." 

In  a  majority  of  cases  this  difference  in  the  title  will  cxjrrespoml  to  a  dilTerence  in 
the  character  of  the  works  and  in  the  expectation  of  the  public  ;  if  in  »ny  particular 
case  the  commentary  preponderates  in  a  title  of  the  second  of  the  forma  above,  a  ref- 
erence can  be  made  from  the  commentator's  n»me. 


20  AUTHORS-:    UNDER    WHAT    PART    OF    NAME. 

13.  Enter  a  continnatiou  or  an  indox,  when  not  written   by  tlie  antbor 

of  theorijjjinal  work  hut  i)rintcHl  with  it,  under  the  same  heading, 
with  an  analytical  reference  from  its  own  author  (§§  164,  194); 
when  printed  separately,  enter  it  under  each  author. 

14.  An  epitome  sliould  be  entered  under  the  original  author,  with  a 

reference  from  the  epitomator. 

Ex.  "Tlio  hoy's  King  Arthur"  uiulcr  Sir  Thomas  Malory,  with  a  reference  from 
Sidney  Lanier. 

15.  A  revision  should  be  entered  under  the  name  of  the  original  author 

unless  it  becomes  substantially  a  new  work. 

There  will  often  be  doubt  on  this  point.  To  determine  it,  notice  whether  the  revis- 
ion is  counted  as  one  of  the  editions  of  the  original  work,  and  whether  it  is  described 
on  the  title-page  as  the  work  of  the  original  author  or  the  reviser,  and  read  and 
weigh  the  prefaces.     Refer  in  all  doubtful  cases. 

IC.  Excerpts  and  chrestomathies  from  a  single  author  go  under  that 
author,  with  a  reference  from  the  excerptor  if  his  introduction 
and  annotations  are  extensive,  or  he  has  added  a  lexicon  of  im- 
portance. 

Ex.  Urlichs'  Chrestomathia  Pliuiaua  goes  under  Plinius,  with  a  reference  from 
Urlifchs. 

17.  Enter  concordances  both  under  their  own  author  and  the  author 

concorded.     The  latter  entry,  however,  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  sub- 
ject-entry. 
Ex.  Cleveland's  Concordance  to  the  poetical  works  ot  Milton,  Brightwell's  Con- 
cordance to  Tennyson,  Mrs.  Furness's  Concordance  to  Shakespeare's  poems. 

18.  Keporters  are  usually  treated  as  authors  of  reports  of  trials,  etc.^ 

Translators  and  editors  are  not  to  be  considered  as  authors.* 
(But  see  Keferences,  §  60.) 

'A  stenographic  reporter  is  hardly  more  an  author  than  the  printer  is;  but  it  is  not 
well  to  attempt  to  make  fine  distinctions. 

^A  collection  of  works  should  be  entered  under  the  translator  if  he  is  also  the  col- 
lector (see  ^  59);  but  again  if  he  translates  another  man's  collection  it  should  oe  put 
under  the  name  of  the  original  collector;  as  Dasent's  "Tales  from  the  North  "  is  really 
a  version  of  part  of  Asbjornsen  and  Moe's  "  Norske  Folkeventyr  '  and  belongs  under 
their  names  as  joint  collectors,  with  a  reference  from  Dasent. 

h.   Under  what  part  of  the  name. 

19.  Put  under  the  Christian  or  forename  : 

a.  Sovereigns  or  princes  of  sovereign  houses.^     Use  the  English  form 
of  the  name  except  for  Greeks  and  Romans. 

•  This  must  include  Popes  eveu  before  the  acquisition  and  after  the  loss  of  the 
temporal  power. 

The  direction  "  Use  the  English  form  of  the  name"  was  a  concession  to  ignorance; 
•when  it  was  given,  that  form  was  almost  alone  employed  in  English  books;  since 
then  the  tone  of  literature  has  changed;  the  desire  for  local  coloring  has  led  to  the 
use  of  foreign  forms,  and  we  have  become  familiarized  with  Louis,  Henri,  Marguerite, 
Carlos,  Karl,  Wilhelm,  Gustaf.  If  th«  present  tendency  continues  we  shall  be  able 
to  treat  princes'  names  like  any  other  foreign  names ;  perhaps  the  next  generation  of 


UNDEli    WHAT    PAKT    OF    NAME.  21 

cataloguers  will  no  more  tolorato  the  h«a<lin<;s  William  I'Jmpcror  of  (iirmani/,  Lewis 
XIV  than  thoy  will  tolmato  Virgil,  Horace,  Pliny.  The  chan^^e,  to  bo  siiro,  would 
•^ivo  rise  to  soino  dilHciilt  (iiicstioiis  of  iiatioii;ility,  lint  it  wonltl  diniiuish  the  uuuibcr 
of  the  titles  now  accninnlatod  under  the  more  coujuion  royal  narneu. 

b.  Persons  canonized. 

Ex.  Thomas  [a  Becket],  AVii/i/. 

c.  Friars  who  by  the  eonstitiitiou  of  their  order  drop  tljeir  surname. 

Add  tlie  name  of  the  family  in  parentheses  and  refer  from  it. 
Ex.  Paolino  da  S.  Bartolomeo  [J.  1*.  Wesdin]. 

d.  Persons  known  under  their  lirst  name  only,  whetlier  or  not  they 

add  that  of  their  native  i)Iace  or  profession  or  rank. 

Ex.  Paulus  Diaamim,  Thomas  IlcisUrbacenxia. 

Similarly  are  to  l>o  treated  a  few  persons  known  almost  entirely  l>y  the  forename, 
as  Michelangelo  Buonarroti,  Raffaello  Santi  (refer  from  Raphael),  Rembrandt 
van  Rhijn.     liefer  always  from  the  family  name. 

e.  Oriental  authors,  including  Jewish  rabbis  whose  works  were  pub- 

lished before  1700. 

Ex.  Abu  Bakr  ibn  Badr.  This  rule  has  Qxceptions.  Sonip  Oriental  writers  are 
known  and  should  ho  entered  under  other  parts  of  their  name  thau  the  first,  as 
''Abu-1-Kasim,  Khalaf  ihn  Abbas,"  or  under  some  appellation  as  "al-Masudi," 
'  at-Tabari.'  (Jriisse's  'Lehrbncli  einer  allgemeinen  Literargeschichto"  is  a  conven- 
ient j^uide  in  this  matter;  he  prints  that  part  of  the  name  by  which  Arabic  writers 
are  commonly  known  in  a  heavier  type  than  the  rest. 

In  Arabic  names  the  words  of  relationship  Abu  (father),  Uinm  (mother),  Ibn, 
Bin  (son),  Abu  (brother),  though  not  to  be  treated  as  names  by  them.selves,  are  yet 
not  to  be  disregarded,  as  proposed  by  Dr.  Dziatzko.  They  form  a  name  in  conjunc- 
tion with  the  word  following  (f.  (/..Abu  Bakr)  and  determine  the  alphabetical  place 
of  the  entry.  Hut  tho  article  al  (changed  by  assonance  to  ad-,  ar-,  as-,  at-,  az-,  ac- 
cording to  the  letter  it  precedes)  is  neglected  (al-Masudi). 

In  all  Oriental  names  the  cataloguer  must  be  careful  not  to  take  titles,  as  Emir, 
Bey,  Pasha,  Sri,  Babu,  Pundit,  for  names. 

In  regard  to  East  Indian  names,  Dr.  Feigl  (Ceutralbl.  f.  Bibl.,  4  :  120)  gives  the  rule: 
If  there  are  two  names,  enter  under  tho  first,  which  is  the  individual  name,  with  a 
reference  from  the  second;  if  there  are  three,  enter  under  tho  third,  which  is  the 
family  name,  with  a  reference  under  the  second. 

20.  Put  under  the  surname  : 

a.  In  general,  all  persons  not  included  under  §  19. 

In  a  few  case.s,  chietly  of  artists,  a  universally-u.sed  sobriiiuet  is  to  be  taken  in 
place  of  the  family  or  forename,  as  Tintoretto  (whost*  real  name  was  (Jiaeonio  Ro- 
busti).  Similar  cases  are  Canaletto  (Antoiuo  Canale  and  also  B.  Belotto),  Cor- 
reggio  (Ant.  Allegri),  Garofalo  (Menvt-nnto  Piero  Tisi).  II  Sodoma  (Oiov.  Ant. 
Bazzi),  Spagnoletto  (.lost'  Ribera),  Uccello  (Pa(di»  Doni).  Always  refer  from  the 
family  name. 

b.  In  particular,  ecclesiastical  dignitaries.     Refer. 
Ex.  Kaye,  John,  ISmltop  of  Lincoln. 

Lincoln,  .John,  HiHltop  of.     Svc  Kaye. 
Bishops  usually  omit  their  family  name,  canons  their  forename,  on  their  title-i)ages, 
ns  "by  Canon  Liddou,"  '"by  the  Bishop  of  Ripon,"  "by  Henry  Edward,  archbishop 
of  Westminster,"  i.  e.,  II:  E:  Manning.     Care  must  be  taken  not  to  treat  Canon  as  a 
funiiaiiu-  or  Edward  as  a  family  name. 
Toht^'n^S^     auTAoi-S  •    ^rVt-t-   u^eit/%.    ^wiWy  'hetma.j  iirhic^   I  tif>*o^H^  u//^ 


22  AUTHOKS:  UNDER  WHAT  PART  OF  NAME. 

c.  Married  worneu,  using  the  last  well-kuown  form.     Refer. 

Wives  often  contiuue  writing,  and  arc  known  in  literature,  only  under  their  maiden 
names  (as  Miss  Freer  or  Fanny  Le'wald),  or  after  a  second  marriage  retain  for  liter- 
ai-y  purposes  the  tirst  husband's  name.  The  cataloguer  should  not  hurry  to  make  a 
change  in  the  name  as  soon  as  he  learns  of  a  marriage.  Let  him  rather  follow  than 
load  the  public. 

21.  Put  under  the  title  : 

British'  and  foreign^  noblemen,  referring  from  earlier  titles  by  which 
they  have  been  known,  and,  in  the  case  of  British  noblemen, 
from  the  family  name. 

Ex.  Chesterfield,  Philip  Dormer  Stanhope,  Ath  Earl  of.     Refer  from  Stanhope. 
Saint-Simon,  Louis  de  Rouvroi,  due  de. 

'  The  British  Museum  and  Mr.  Jewett  enter  British  noblemen  nnder  the  family  name ; 
Mr.  Perkins  prefers  entry  under  titles  for  British  noblemen,  in  which  I  agree  with 
him,  although  the  opposite  practice  is  now  so  well  established.  The  reasons  for  entry 
under  the  title  are  that  British  noblemen  are  always  so  spoken  of,  always  sign  by 
their  titles  only,  and  seldom  jjut  the  family  name  upon  the  title-pages  of  their  books, 
so  that  ninety-nine  in  a  hundred  readers  must  look  under  the  title  first.  The  reasons 
against  it  are  that  the  founders  of  noble  families  are  often  as  well  known — sometimes 
even  better — by  their  family  name  as  by  their  titles  (as  Charles  Jenkiuson  after- 
wards Lord  Liverpool,  Sir  Robert  Walpole  afterwards  Earl  of  Orford);  that  the  same 
man  bears  ditferent  titles  in  different  parts  of  his  life  (thus  P.  Stanhope  published  his 
"History  of  England  from  the  peace  of  Utrecht"  as  Lord  Mahon,and  his  "Reign  of 
Queen  Anne"  as  Earl  Stanhope);  that  it  separates  members  of  the  same  family  (Lord 
Chancellor  Eldon  would  be  under  Eldon  and  his  father  and  all  his  brothers  and  sis- 
ters under  the  family  name  Scott),  and  brings  together  members  of  different  families 
(thus  the  earldom  of  Bath  has  been  held  by  members  of  the  families  of  Shaunde, 
Bourchier,  Granville,  and  Pulteney,  and  the  family  name  of  the  present  Marquis  of 
Bath  is  Thymne),  which  last  argument  would  be  more  to  the  point  in  planning  a 
family  history.  The  same  objections  apply  to  the  entry  of  French  noblemen  under 
their  titles,  about  which  there  can  be  no  hesitation.  The  strongest  argument  in  favor 
of  the  Museum  rule  is  that  it  is  well-established  and  that  it  is  desirable  that  there 
should  be  some  uniform  rule.  Ecclesiastical  dignitaries  stand  on  an  entirely  different 
footing.  There  is  much  more  use  of  the  family  name  and  much  more  change  of  title.  In 
the  first  edition  I  followed  the  British  Museum  rules,  but  I  am  now  in  favor  of  the  more 
popular  method  of  entry  of  noblemen,  namely,  under  their  titles,  except  lohen  the  family 
name  is  decidedlj  belter  known  (Francis  Bacon,  Baron  Verulam,  Horace  Walpole,  4th 
Earl  of  Orford).  In  such  cases  enter  under  the  family  name  and  refer  from  the  title. 
This  rule  was  adopted  by  the  committee  of  the  American  Library  Association  {Lib. 
jnl.,  3:  12-19;  8:  251-254).  The  reasons  pro  and  con  were  discussed  in  Lib.  jnl.,  3: 
13,14.  The  gist  of  them  is:  "  Authors  should  be  put  under  their  names.  The  defi- 
nition of  a  name  is  'that  by  which  a  person  or  thing  is  known.'  British  noblemen 
are  known  by  their  titles,  not  by  their  family  names." 

'^Put  the  military  nobles  and  princes  of  the  French  Empire  under  their  family 
names,  with  references  from  their  titles,  e.  g.,  Lucien  Bonaparte,  Prince  de  Canino, 
MacMahon,  due  de  Magenta. 

22.  Put  the  works  of  authors  who  change  their  name  under  the  latest 

form,  provided  the  new  name  be  legally  and  permanently  adopted. 

Do  not  worry  about  the  proper  form  of  changed  and  transliterated  names,  nor 
spend  much  time  in  hunting  up  facts  and  deciding.  If  the  necessary  references  are 
made,  it  is  of  little  importance  which  form  is  chosen  for  the  main  entry,  provided,  of 
course,  that  the  library  always  chooses  the  same  heading. 

If  the  change  consist  in  the  addition  of  a  name  the  new  name  is  to  be  treated  by 
the  next  rule. 


COMPOUND    NAMES.  23 

23.  Put  comj.ouiKl  nanics  :         ij^C^fty  --A«^  •  »<^"^/"rrus  ;  u>f/!i.  r^^^^c^^  . 
a.  If  Eii^Misli,  imder  the  last  imit  of  the  iiaiiu',  whoii  tin'  first  has  not 

been  used  alone  by  the  author. 

Ex.  Gould.  Sabine  Barinjj-;  but  Halliwpll  (a//crirar(f«  Halliwell-Phillipps),  J.  O., 
because  the  author  wrote  much  uiidtT  th<i  lirHt  iiaiiif. 

This  rule  st-cures  uniforniity;  but,  like  all  rules,  it  sometimes  leads  to  entries  under 
headings  where  nobodj'  would  look  for  them,    liefer. 

h.  If  foreign,  under  the  first  i»art. 

Both  such  compound  names  as  Gentil  Bernard  and  such  as  Oentil  de  Chavagnac. 
There  are  various  exceptions,  when  a  name  has  been  more  known  under  the  last  part, 
as  F^nelon,  not  Salignac  de  Lamothe  Fenelon  ;  Voltaire,  not  Arouet  de  Voltaire ; 
Sternberg,  not  Ungern-Sternberg.  Moreover,  it  is  not  always  easy  to  determine 
what  is  a  eoiniioiind  surname  in  French.  A  convenient  rule  would  be  to  follow  the 
authority  of  Ilo'fer  (Hiog.  j;*'")  i'"*!  Qu<5rard,  in  such  cases,  if  they  always  agreed  ; 
unfortunately,  they  often  differ.  References  are  necessary  whichever  way  one  decides 
each  case,  especially  when  the  second  part  of  a  foreign  comj)ound  name  has  been  used 
alone,  as  Merle  d'Aubigne  (enter  under  Merle  with  a  reference  from  Aubign6).        ._ - 

In  French  a  forename  is  sometimes  joined  to  a  surname  by  a  hy[)hen.  In  such  ^^^^^ 
cases  make  the  entry  under  the  family  name  with  a  reference  from  the  forename,  c.*;.,  ^^" 
entry,  Rochette,  D6sir6  Raoul;  reference,  Raoul-Rochette.     -Sm' Rochette.  *^'* 

c.  In  foreijjn  compound  names  of  women  also,  although  the  first  part 
is  generally  the  maiden  name  and  the  second  the  husband's 
name,  the  entry  should  generally  be  under  the  first,  with  a  refer- 
ence from  the  second.     {See  20,  c.) 

Ex.  Rive-King,  with  cross-reference  from  King,  horn  Rive. 

24.  Put  surnames  preceded  by  prefixes  : 

a.  In  French,  under  the  prefix  when  it  is  or  contains  an  article,  Le,  La, 
L',  Du,  Des;  under  the  word  following  when  the  prefix  is  a  prei»o- 
sition,  de,  d'. 

When  the  name  is  printed  by  the  author  as  one  word  the  entry  is  made  under  the 
preposition,  as  Debucourt,  Decamps. 

h.  In  English,  under  the  prefix,  no  matter  from  what  language  the 
name  is  derived,  as  De  ftuincey,  Van  Buren,  with  references  when 
necessary. 

c.  In  all  other  languages,  under  the  name  following  the  prefix,  as  Gama, 

Vasco  da.  with  references  whenever  the  name  has  been  commonly 
used  in  English  with  the  prefix,  as  Del  Rio,  Vandyck,  Van  Ess. 

But  when  thf  author  prints  his  name  as  one  word  entry  is  made  under  the  prelix, 
as  Vanderhaeghen. 

d.  Naturalized  names  are  to  be  treated  by  the  rules  of  the  nation 

adopting  them. 

Tims  German  names  preceded  by  von  when  belonging  to  Russians  are  to  be  entered 
under  Von.  E.  g.,  <^ollb  Bii.iiih  is  to  bo  entered  as  Von  Vizin  (not  Vizln,  von),  as  this 
is  the  Russian  custom.  So  when  Dutch  names  compounded  with  van  are  adopted  into 
French  or  English  (asVauLaun)  the  Van  is  treated  as  part  of  the  family  name. 

Prefixes  are  d',  de,  de  La  (th<>  name  goes  under  La  not  df),  Des,  Du,  L',  La,  Le,  Les, 
St.,  Ste.  (to  be  arranged  as  if  written  Saint,  Sainte),  Van,  A',  Ap,  O',  Fitz,  M.io 
(which  is  to  be  printed  as  it  is  iu  the  title,  whether  M',  or  Mc,  or  Mac,  but  to  be 
arranged  as  if  written  Mac). 


24  AUTHORS:    UNDEK    WHAT    FORM    OF    NAME. 

25.  Tut  names  of  Latin  autliots  undor  that  part  of  the  name  chosen  in 
Smith's  Dictionary  of  Greek  ami  Itoman  biography,  unless  there 
is  son)e  j^ood  reason  for  not  doing  so. 

20.  Put  names  of  cai)es,  lakes,  mountains,  rivers,  forts,  etc.,  beginning 

with  Cape,  Lake,  Mt.,  etc.,  uiuler  the  word  following  the  prelix, 

but  when  the  name  is  itself  used  as  ii  prefix,  do  not  transpose 

Cape,  etc.,  nor  in  such  names  as  Lsle  of  the  Woods,  Isles  of  iShoals. 

I'.i-.  Cod,  Cape;  George,  Lake;  Washington,  Mt. ;  Moultrie,  Fort;  but  Cape 

Breton  Island.     When  the  luiine  of  a  fort  hecoiues  the  name  of  a  city,  of  course  the 

HI  version  must  be  abandoued,  as  Fort  Wayne. 

c.   Under  ichat  form  of  the  name. 

27.  Give  the  names,  both  family  and  Christian,  in  the  vernacular  form,* 
if  any  instance  occurs  of  the  use  of  that  form  iu  the  printed  pub- 
lications of  the  author.^ 

'The  vernacular  form  of  most  Christian  names  maybe  found  in  Michaelis's  "  Wor- 
terbuch  der  Taufnamen "  (Berlin,  1856).  There  are  also  meagre  lists  in  foreign  dic- 
tionaries. For  the  forms  of  mediaival  names  much  assistance  can  be  had  from 
A.  Potthast's  "  Bibliotheca  historica  medii  aevi,  Berlin,  Weber,  1862,"  O,  and  "Sup- 
plement, 1868,"  O;  also  from  Alfred  Franklin's  "  Dictionnaire  des  uoms,  surnoms,  et 
pseudonymes  latins  de  I'histoire  litt<5raiie  dn  Moyen  Age  (1100  a  1530),  Paris,  1870,"  O. 
(On  the  names  of  sovereigns,  see  ^19;  on  the  Latin  names  of  Greek  authors,  see  §  36 ; 
on  the  names  of  Greek  gods,  see  iJIOO. ) 

-This  is  the  British  Museum  rule.  It  will  obviously  be  sometimes  impossible  and 
often  difficult  to  determine  this  point  in  a  library  of  less  extent  than  the  Museum,  and 
the  cataloguer  must  make  up  his  mind  to  some  inconsistency  in  his  treatment  of  me- 
diaeval names,  and  be  consoled  by  the  knowledge  that  if  proper  references  are  made 
no  harm  will  be  done.  Against  a  too  great  preference  for  the  vernacular  Professor  De 
-.Morgan  writes  in  the  preface  to  his  "Arithmetical  books:  "  "  I  have  not  attempted  to 
translate  the  names  of  tho.se  who  wrote  in  Latin  at  a  time  when  that  language  was 
the  universal  medium  of  communication.  I  consider  that  the  Latin  name  ife  that 
which  the  author  has  left  to  posterity,  and  that  the  practice  of  retaining  it  is  con- 
venient, as  marking,  to  a  certain  extent,  the  epoch  of  his  writings,  and  as  being  the 
appellation  by  which  his  contemporaries  and  successors  cite  him.  It  is  well  to  know 
that  Copernicus,  Dasypodius,  Xylander,  Regiomoutanus, 'and  Clavius  were  Zepernik, 
Eauchfuss,  Holtzmann,  Miiller,  and  Schliissel.  But  as  the  butchers'  bills  of  these 
eminent  men  are  all  lost,  and  their  writings  only  remain,  it  is  best  to  designate  them 
by  the  name  they  bear  on  the  latter  rather  than  the  former." 

The  same  may  be  said  of  Camerarius  (Kiimmerer),  Capito  (Kopflein),  Mercator 
(Kramer),  CEcolanipadius  (Hausscheiu),  where  it  would  be  useless  to  employ  the  ver- 
nacular name;  if  both  forms  are  in  use,  as  iu  the  case  of  Pomeranius  =:  Bugenhagen, 
the  vernacular  should  have  the  preference.  Reuchliu  is  much  more  common  than  its 
equivalent,  Capnio.  ^^^^^^^^  ^^^^ 

Before  the  Reformation ^the  presumption  is  in  favor  of  the  Latin  form  ;  after  it  in 
favor  of  the  vernacular. 

Short  will  cousult  the  convenience  of  his  readers  if  he  uses  the  English  forms  of 
names  like  Homer,  Horace,  Virgil,  in  place  of  Homerus,  Horatius,  Vergilius. 

The  vernacular  nanies  of  the  Middle  Ages  often  appear  in  various  forms.  The 
form  which  has  survived  to  the  present  time  is  to  be  preferred  (as  Jeau  to  Jehan),  un- 
le.^3  a  name  is  commonly  used  in  the  old  form,  as  in  the  romances  Jehan  de  Lanfon. 
Kefer  from  the  one  not  chosen. 


UNDER    WHAT    FORM    OF    NAME.  25 

28.  If  an  autli  )r  li:is  written  in  several  modeiii  lanj^ua^es,  choose  that  in 

which  lie  has  written  most. 

29.  In  laiij;ua<;es  which  use  a  masculine  antl  a  reiniiiine  fonii  of  lainily 

names  (as  Modjeski  and  Modjeska),  use  that  which  the  authoress 
herself  chielly  employs. 

30.  When  an  author's  name  is  variously  spelled,  select  the  best  author- 

ized form  as  heading,  add  the  variants  in  parentheses,  and  make 
references  from  them  to  the  form  adopted. 

Of  <niirso,  fjivat  c-are  must  bn  taken  not  to  cuter  Hc|>ariitfly  works  in  wliieh  iin  author 
spells  Ins  iiiiMie  (iillereutly,  us  Hriaut  anil  Hrvant,  Eastcrbrookes  and  Eslalirook.  Enl- 
nianii  and  Erdtnianu.  On  tlie  other  hand,  dillen-nt  peojde  who  spell  tln-ir  naim-s  dif- 
ferently should  be  separated,  as  Mofuianu  and  Hotrmann,  Maier,  Mair,  Majer,  Mayer, 
Mayr,  Meier,  Meir,  Mejer,  Meyer,  Meyr,  Schiuid,  Schmidt,  Schniied,  Schniiedt,  Sehiiiit, 
Schuutt.     (On  the  arrauj^ernent  of  sucli  names  in  a  card  catalogue  see  ^  '2lH.) 

In  German  Christian  names  there  is  a  want  of  uniformity  in  the  use  of  C  and  K 
(Carl,  Conrad,  Karl,  Konra<l)  ami  f  and  jth  (Adolf,  Adolph).  Occasionally  an  author 
uses  hoth  forms  in  dilVerent  hooks,  or  writinj;  only  in  Latin  (Carolns,  Rudolphus), 
does  not  show  which  form  he  {)refers.  Where  the  author  thus  leaves  the  point  un- 
decided, K  and  f  should  bo  preferred  to  C  and  ph  (except  ni  Christoph)  Swedish 
f  is  to  bo  preferred  to  v,  as  Gustaf,  not  Gustav. 

31.  \N  hen  family  names  are  written  differently  by  different  persons, 

follow  the  spellinji:  adopted  by  each,  even  thouo^h  it  should  se[>- 
arate  father  and  soj. 

32.  Forenames  are  to  be  used  in  the  form  employed  by  their  owners, 

however  unusual,  as  Will  Carleton,  Sally  (Pratt)  McLean,  Hans 
Droysen,  Fritz  Reuter. 

33.  Give  names  of  ])laces  in  the  Engbsh  form.    ^ ^^^'^^^^^o^i^^i^^^ 
Munich  not  Muenchen   or  Miinchen,  Vienna  not  Wien,  AustiriSi  not  Oeater- 

reich.  V 

34.  liut  if  both  the  English  and  the  foreign  forms  are  used  by  English 

writers,  prefer  the  foreign  form. 

35.  Use  the  modern  name  of  a  city  and  refer  to  it  from  the  ancient,  i)ro 

vided  its  existence  has  been  continuous  and  there  is  no  doubt  as 
to  the  identity. 
3G.  In  transliteration  of  names  from  alphabets  of  differently  formed  let- 
ters, use  the  vowels  according  to  their  German  sounds.  {See  Ap- 
pendix II  for  the  report  of  the  Transliteration  Committee  of  the 
American  Library  Association.) 

/.  e.,  a  (not  ah)  for  the  sound  of  a  \n  father,  e  (not  rt)for  the  sound  of  c  in  hc\r  or  of 
a  in  hate,  i  (not  e)  for  the  sound  of  i  in  mien,  u  (not  oo  nor  ou)  for  the  sound  of  h  in  true 
or  of  00  in  moon.  This  practice  makes  transliterations  that  are  likely  to  be  i)ro- 
nouni.ed  in  the  mam  correctly  by  anyone  who  knows  any  lan;:nay;e  but  his  own  (who 
would  naturally  give  foreign  vowel  sounds  to  fonugn  names),  and  will  give  translit- 
erations agreeing  at  least  in  part  with  those  of  other  nations.  In  some  points,  how- 
ever, wo  must  he  careful  not  to  be  misled  by  the  practice  of  foreigners,  and  when  wo 
take  a  name  from  Russian,  for  instance,  through  tlu>  French  or  German,  must  see  to 
it  that  the  necessities  of  their  aljjhahet  have  not  led  tliem  to  use  letters  that  do  not 
suit  onr  system.     A  Freiuhman  writes  forTurgenief  Tourgut'ncf,Vkni\.  for  Golovin  Golo- 


26  AUTHORS  :    TRANSLITERATION. 

tine,  and  uses  ou  for  m,  ch  for  sh,  dj  for  ;,  _;  for  :h,  gu  for  g,  and  qu  for  k.  A  German  for 
Dershavin  writes  Derachawin,  and,  worse  than  that,  is  oblifjed  to  use  the  clumsy  di>ch 
where  an  Enplisliman  can  use  j,  as  Dachellaleddin  for  Jalal-ad-Din,  and  uses  tach  for 
ch  or  tch,  j  for  y  or  j  (Tnrjjenjew),  w  for  c  or/  in  the  ending  of  Russian  names. 

In  .irnhic  names  I  am  advised  by  good  scliolars  to  uniformly  write  a  where  our 
ordinary  Anglicized  names  have  e,  except  for  Ebn  and  Ben,  which  become  Ibn  and 
liin  ;  also  i  for  ee,  and  u  where  o  has  been  commonly  used  ;  in  other  words,  to  uni- 
formly represent  the  vowel  fathaby  a,  kasra  by  i,  and  dharama  by  u.  Thus  Moham- 
med becomes  Muhammad,  Abou  ed-Deen  becomes  Abu  ad-Din.  Of  course  refer- 
ences must  be  made  from  the  corrupt  forms  under  which  various  Arabic  authors  have 
become  known  in  the  West,  unless  it  is  thought  that  the  altered  form  has  been  so 
commonly  used  that  it  must  be  taken  for  the  entry,  as  perhaps  Avicenna  from  Ibn 
Sina,  Averroes  from  Ibn  Roshd. 

In  Danish  names  if  the  type  k  is  not  to  be  had,  use  its  older  equivalent  aa;  in  a 
manuscript  catalogue  the  modern  orthography,  k,  should  be  employed.  Whichever 
is  cho.sen  should  be  uniformly  used,  however  the  names  may  appear  in  the  books. 
The  diphthong  ae  should  not  be  written  ae,  nor  should  6  be  written  oe ;  6,  not  CB, 
should  be  used  for  ^. 

In  old  Dutch  names  write  y  for  the  modern  ij  and  arrange  so. 

In  German  names  used  as  headings,  use  a,  6,  ii,  not  ae,  oe,  ue,  and  arrange  acrord- 
ngly. 

For  ancient  Greek  names  use  the  Latinized  form,  as  Democritus  not  Demokritos, 
Longinus  not  Logginos.  This  holds  good  of  translated  works  as  well  as  of  the  orig- 
inals. It  will  not  do  to  enter  an  Italian  version  of  the  Odyssey  under  Omero,  or  of 
the  Euterpe  under  Erodoto,  or  a  French  version  of  the  Noctes  Atticte  under  Aulu- 
Gelle.  A  college  literary  catalogue  may  safely  use  the  more  nearly  transliterated 
forms  which  are  coming  into  use,  like  Aiskulos,  Homeros,  but  used  in  a  town-library 
catalogue  they  would  only  puzzle  and  mislead  its  readers.  For  that  I  should  prefer 
the  English  forms,  as  Homer,  Horace. 

For  modern  Greek  names  Professor  Abbot  proposes  the  following  plan  :  Works  in 
Romaic  to  be  entered  in  a  supplement,  the  names  not  transliterated  but  printed  in  the 
Greek  type.  Translations  of  works  of  modern  Greek  authors  to  be  put  under  their 
Greek  names  in  the  supplement,  with  references  in  the  main  catalogue  under  the  forms 
(whatever  they  may  be)  which  their  names  assume  in  the  translation.  Original 
works  written  in  French,  German,  English,  etc.,  by  modern  Greek  authors  may  be 
treated  in  the  same  way  if  their  authors  have  not  become  French,  German,  or  English 
by  residence  and  literary  labors,  in  which  case  they  should  be  entered  under  the 
French,  German,  or  English  forms  which  they  have  chosen  for  their  names,  with  cross- 
references,  if  necessary,  from  the  Greek  supplement  to  these  names.  If,  however, 
transliteration  is  attempted  the  following  table  of  equivalents  may  be  used  : 

at  3d  J?  i  /?  V  /£  after  y         g 

av        av  r)v         iv  y         gh  f  x 

£t         ei  01  (B  y  before  /c )  ov         n 

ev         ev  V  J  7^X^^}  p  r 

I  vi  yi  (5         dh  x       ^^ 

When  Hindus  themselves  transliterate  their  names,  use  their  form,  whether  or  not 
according  to  our  rules.     (Appendix  ii.) 

In  Hungarian  names  write  6,  ii,  with  the  diseresis  (not  oe,  ue),  and  arrange  like  the 
English  o,  u. 

In  Spanish  names  use  the  modern  orthography  i  and  j  rather  than  the  ancient  y 
and  X. 

In  Sivedish  names  a,  d,  6,  should  be  so  written  (npt  ae,  oe),  and  arranged  as  the 
English  a,  o.       "     -  "*     '        J  ':••.'•■'  '      -  '    '•  - '  -f  ^    /  ■ 

Ballhorn's  Grammatography  (London,  1861)  will  be  found  very  useful  on  such  points. 


CORPORATE  ENTRY. 


27 


37.  Wheu  an  author  liviuf;  in  a  foreij^n  country  has  transliterated  his 

name  according'  to  the  i)ractici'  of  that  country  and  always  uses 
it  in  that  form,  take  tliat  as  the  heading,  referring  from  the  form 
whiclj  the  name  wouhl  have  under  §;5«>;  but  if  he  has  written 
much  in  his  own  language,  use  the  English  transliterated  form. 
Ex.  Bikelas,  Di'niotrius,  with  referonco  from  Vikelas,  Dmitri. 

38.  If  a  name  which  would  properly  be  8i)elled  by  the  ICnglish  alphabet 

has  been  transliterated  into  a  foreign  alphabet,  refer  from  the 
foreign  form. 
Ex.  Sifner.     Set-  Schiefner. 

2.  Corporate. 
General  2}rinci})h. 

39.  Bodies  of  men  are  to  be  considered  as  authors  of  works  published 

in  their  name  or  by  their  authority. 
The  chief  difBciilty  with  re>;ar(l  to  bodies  of  men  is  to  determine  (1)  what  their 
names  are,  and  ('2)  whether  the  name  or  eome  other  word  shall  be  the  headinjj.  In  re- 
gard to  (2)  the  catalogues  hitherto  published  may  be  regarded  as  a  series  of  experi- 
ments. -No  satisfactory  usage  has  as  yet  been  established.  Local  names  have  always 
very  strong  claims  to  be  headings;  but  to  enter  the  publications  of  all  bodies  of  men 
under  the  places  with  which  the  bodies  are  connected  is  to  push  a  convenient  prac- 
tice so  far  that  it  becomes  inconvenient  and  leads  to  many  rules  entirely  out  of  har- 
mony with  the  rest  of  the  catalogue. 

Details. 

40.  Enter  under  places  (countries,  or  parts  of  countries,  cities,  towns, 

ecclesiastical,  military,  or  judicial  districts)  the  works  published 
officially  b^'  their  rulers  (kings,'  governors,  mayors,  prelates, 
generals  commanding,  courts,^  etc.).  Refer  from  the  name  of  the 
ruler. 

>0f  course  this  does  not  atfect  works  written  privately  by  kings,  etc.,  as  K.  James's 
"Counterblast." 

*  The  relatiou  of  courts  to  judicial  districts  is  a  little  different  from  the  others,  bnt 
it  is  convenient  to  treat  them  alike.     The  opinion  of  a  single  judge  should  be  entered 
under  his  name. 
Ex.  United  States.     Supreme  Court.    Opinions  of  the  judges  in  the  case  of  Smith 
vs.  Turner,  etc. 
Taney,  Roger  Brooke.     Decision  in  the  Merryraan  case. 

41.  Similarly  Congress,  Parliament,  and  other  governmental  boiliesare 

authors  of  their  journals,  acts,  minutes,  laws,  etc. ;  and  other  de- 
partments ot  government  of  their  rejmrts,  and  of  the  works  pub- 
lished by  them  or  under  their  ausi)ices. 
These  are  to  be  entered  under  the  name  ot  tlio  country,  city,  or  town,  and  not  in 
the  main  alphabet  nuder  the  word  Congress,  Parliament,  City  Council,  or  the  like. 

42.  Laws  on  one  or  more  particular  subjects,  whether  digested  or  merely 

collected,  must  have  author  entries  both  under  the  name  of  the 
country  and  under  the  name  of  the  collector  or  digester. 

Ex.  Tilsley's  '  Digest  of  the  stamp  acts"  wouM  appear  both  under  Great  Britain 
and  Tilsley. 


United  States.     President. 
Buchanan. 
Lincoln. 
Johnson. 
Grant. 


28  AUTHORS:  CORPORATE  ENTR\. 

43.  Cak'iidars  of  docuiiieiits,  regesta,  etc.,  are  to  be  entered  under  their 

maker,  with  ti  series-entry  under  tlie  department  which  orders 
ilie  i)ul)lication. 

Ex.  Green,  Mrs.  M..  Anuo  Everett  (Wood).  Calendar  of  state  papers,  domestic, 
Cliarle.s  ii.     The  series-outry  is  under  Great  Britain.     Master  of  the  Rolls. 

44.  Works  written  officially  are  to  be  entered  under  the  name  of  the 

department  of  government  or  society  (see  §  56)  or  ecclesiastical 
district  with  a  reference  from  the  name  of  the  official,  if  it  is 
thought  worth  making. 

Some  libraries  may  refer  always;  most  will  refer  only  when  the  report  has  excep- 
tional importance  (1)  from  its  subject,  (2)  from  the  treatment  of  its  subject,  (3)  from 
its  literary  merits,  (4)  from  the  fame  of  itb  author,  or  (5)  from  having  been  separately 
published.     Horace  Mann's  reports,  for  example,  should  be  catalogued  under  Massa- 
chusetts. Board  of  Education,  to  which  heading  a  reference  should  be  made  from  Mann. 
Presidents'  messages  should  appear  under  United  States.  President.     Proclamations     . 
and  all  other  oflficial  writings  of  kings  should  appear  under  the  name  of  the  country     I 
(division  King  or  Crown),  arranged  by  reigns,  as, 
Great  Britain.     Crown. 
•     Charles  i. 
Charles  II. 
James  ii. 
William  and  Mary. 

45.  In  the  entry  of  Government  publications,  use  for  a  subdivision  the 

name  of  the  office  rather  than  the  title  of  the  officer,  i.  e.,  3Iinis- 
tere  de  la  Marine^  not  Ministre  de  la  Marine,  Registry  of  Deeds, 
not  Beg ister  of  Deeds .^  The  individual  name  of  the  occupant  of 
the  office  for  the  time  being  may  be  added  in  parenthesis  to  the 
name  of  the  office  j^  and  it  should  be  so  added  when  the  publica- 
tion has  an  individual  character. 

'  There  are  cases,  however,  where  the  title  of  the  officer  is  the  only  name  of  the 
office,  as  Illinois.     State  Entomologist. 

^  Great  Britain.     Cjoich,  1377-99  (Richard  li).     A  roll.  etc. 

46.  jMessages  of  a  superior  executive  officer  (as  President  or  Governor) 

transmitting  to  a  legislative  body  or  to  some  higher  executive 
officer  the  report  of  some  inferior  officer  should  be  entered  as  the 
report  of  the  inferior  officer,  provided  the  message  is  merely  in- 
troductory and  contains  no  independent  matter;  provided,  also, 
there  are  not  three  or  more  reports ;  if  there  are,  the  higher  offi- 
cer IS  to  be  regarded  as  the  collecting  editor  (§  59,  ri) ;  in  this  case 
refer  analytically  to  the  superior  officer's  official  title  from  all  the 
inferior  officers  whose  rejiorts  are  so  transmitted. 

47.  "Articles  to  be  inquired  of"  in  ecclesiastical  districts  should  go 

under  the  name  of  the  district;  but  episcopal  charges  are  not  to 
go  under  the  name  of  the  bishopric  unless  they  relate  especially 
to  its  affairs,  in  which  case  they  will  have  a  subject-entry. 
Ex.  York,  Archdeaconry  of.    Articles  to  be  enquired  of  within  the  A.  of  Y. 


COKI'OKATK    KNTKY.  29 

48.  Reports  made  to  a  department,  but  not  by  an  official,  arc  to  be  en- 

tered niider  the  department,  with  either  an  entry,  reference,  or 
analytical  under  the  author  as  circumstances  require. 
Gould's  "  Mullusca  and  hIioIIs"  ami  Cassin'a  "  Mamiiial<>«.v  and  oniitholopy  of  the 
Unitod  Statfs  Kxplnriuj;  Kxiu'ditiDii  uiulrr  Wilkfs''  an*  of  this  natiin-;  m    is  "  Me- 
morial fcn'inoiiifsat  thu  ^Jtravt-s  of  our  solditTs,  collfcfcd  under  authority  of  Con^Ti-ss, 
hy  Frank  Moore.''     (C'oniparu  ^  A'.i.) 

49.  Enter  con<:resses  of  several  nations  under  the  name  of  the  i)lace  of 

meeting  (as  that  usually  gives  them  their  name),  with  references 
from  the  nations  taking  part  in  them  and  from  any  name  by 
which  they  are  popularly  known. 
Ex.  The  Congress  of  London,  of  Paris,  of  Verona. 

50.  Enter  treaties  under  the  name  of  each  of  the  contracting  i)arties, 

with  a  reference  from  the  name  of  the  i>lace,  when  the  treaty  is 
commonly  called  by  that  name,  and  from  any  other  usual  appel- 
lation. 
Ex.  Treaty  of  Versailles,  Barrier  treaty,  Jay's  treaty. 

51.  Enter  the  official  publications  of  any  political  party'  or  religious 

denomination  or  order,^  or  military  order,  under  the  name  of  the 
party,  or  denomination,  or  order.^ 

'  Platforms,  manifestoes,  addres-ses,  etc.,  under  Democratic  Party,  Republican 
Party,  etc. 

•  Conffssiona  of  faith,  creeds,  catechisms,  liturgieSjbreviaries,  missals,  hours,  ortices, 
I)rayer  hooks,  etc.,  under  Baptists,  Benedictines, ,^Catliolic  Church,  Church  of 
England,  etc. 

'That  part  of  a  body  which  belon-js  to  any  place  should  be  entered  under  the  name 
of  the  body,  not  the  place;  e.  g.,  Congregationalists  in  New  England,  Congrega- 
tionalists  in  Massachusetts,  not  New  England  Congregationalists,  Massachu- 
setts Congregationalists.  But  references  must  be  made  from  tlie  place  (indeed  in 
cases  likt!  Massachusetts  Convention,  Essex  Conference,  it  may  be  doubted  whether 
those  well-known  names  should  not  bo  the  headings).  It  is  to  he  noticed  this  rule 
is  just  the  reverse  of  the  one  given  under  Subjects,  ^  97.  Single  churches  have  usu- 
ally been  entered  under  the  place,  a  practice  which  arose  in  American  catalogues 

from  our  way  of  naming  churches   'The  First  Church  in  ,"  "The  Second  Church 

in ,"  etc.,  and  applies  very  well  to  a  mnjority  of  English  churches,  whose  name 

generally  includes  the  name  of  the  parish.  It  is  more  in  accordance  with  dictionary 
l)rinciples  to  limit  the  local  entry  of  churches  t)  First  Church,  et<'.,  and  those  which 
h.ive  only  the  name  of  the  town  or  parish,  and  to  put  .all  others  (as  St.  Sepulchre's, 
St.  Mary  Aldermansbury)  under  their  names,  as  they  read,  and  to  treat  convents 
and  monasteries  in  the  same  way.  (See  ^  5(5,  Rule '2.)  Ofconr.se  the  parish«!S  of  Lon- 
ilon  (as  Kensington,  Marylebone,  Southwark),  like  the  i)arts  of  Boston  (Dorchester, 
Roxbury,  etc.),  or  of  any  other  composite  city,  will  bo  jtut  under  their  own  names, 
not  under  the  name  of  the  city. 

52.  Enter  reports,  journals,  minutes,  etc.,  of  convention.s,  conferences, 

etc.,  under  the  names  of  the  bodies  hohling  the  conferences,  etc. 
When  the  bo(ly  has  no  extict  name'  enter  under  the  name  of  the 
place  of  meeting.- 

'  Some  conventions  are  held  by  bodies  which  have  no  existence  beyond  the  conven- 
tion.    If,  however,  they  have  a  deliuite  name,  use  that ;  ex.,  4th  National  Quarantine 


30  AUTHORS:    COKPORATE    ENTRY. 

and  Sanitary  Convention.  Often  the  uanie  is  given  in  different  forms.  Select  that 
wliicli  appeara  to  be  the  most  authentic,  and  make  references  from  the  others. 

'  In  any  case  it  is  well  to  refer  from  the  name  of  the  place,  and  in  the  case  of  Presi- 
dential conventions  it  is  indispensable. 

Put  the  convention  of  a  county  or  other  named  district  under  the  name  of  the  dis- 
trict, with  a  reference  from  the  town  in  which  it  is  held,  when  it  is  named  in  the 
title-page. 

53.  Enter  ecclesiastical  councils,  both  general  and  special,  under  the 

name  of  tlie  place  of  meeting.  (The  Vatican  Council  under 
Vatican,  not  Rome.)  Refer  from  the  name  of  the  ecclesiastical 
body. 

54.  Enter  reports  of  committees  under  the  name  of  the  body  to  which 

they  belong ;  but  reports  of  "  a  committee  of  citizens,"  etc.,  not 
belonging  to  any  named  body  should  be  put  under  the  name  of 
the  writer,  if  known,  if  not,  of  the  chairman,  or  if  that  is  not 
given,  of  the  first  signer,  or  if  not  signed,  under  the  name  of  the 
place. 

55.  Put  the  anonymous  publications  of  any  class  (not  organized)  of 

citizens  of  a  place  under  the  place. 
Ex.  "Application  to  Parliament  by  the  merchants  of  London"  should  go  under 
London.     Merchants. 

56.  Societies  are  authors  of  their  journals,  memoirs,  proceedings,  trans- 

actions, publications.  (On  publishing-societies,  see  B.  Substi- 
tutes, §  59,  e.) 

The  chief  practices  in  regard  to  societies  have  been  to  enter  them  (1.  British  Mu- 
seum) under  a  special  heading — Academies  —  with  a  geographical  arrangement;  {2. 
Boston  Public  Library,  printed  catalogue)  under  the  name  of  the  place  where  they 
have  their  headquarters;  (3.  Harvard  College  Library  and  Bost.  Pub.  Lib.,  jiresent 
system)  tinder  the  name  of  the  place,  if  it  enters  into  the  legal  name  of  the  society,  other-.  ^  "^  "^ 
wise  under  the  first  word  of  that  name  not  an  article  ;  (4.  Boston  Alheuieum^Englisn  JA'**'' 
societies  under  the  first  word  of  the  society's  name  not  au  article,  foreign  societies  %f«]^' 
under  the  name  of  the  place.     Both  3  and  4  put  under  the  place  all  purely  local  f^*i 
societies,  those  whose  membership  or  objects  are  confined  to  the  place.     The  1st  doestf*^^ 
not  deserve  a  moment's  consideration  ;  such  a  heading  is  out  of  place  in  an  author- 
catalogue,  and  the  geographical  arrangement  only  serves  to  complicate  matters  and 
render  it  more  difficult  to  find  any  particular  academy.*     The  2d  is  utterly  unsuited 
to  American  and  English  societies.     The  3d  practice  is  simple  •  but  it  is  difficult  to 
see  the  advantage  of  the  exception  which  it  makes  to  its  general  rule  of  entry  under 
the  society's  name;  the  exception  does  not  help  the  cataloguer,  for  it  is  just  as  hard 
to  determine  whether  the  place  enters  luto  the  legal  name  as  it  is  to  ascertain  the 
name  ;  it  does  not  help  the  reader,  for  he  has  no  means  of  knowing  whether  the  place 
is  part  of  the  legal  name  or  not.     The  4th  is  simple  and  intelligible ;  it  is  usually 
easy  for  both  cataloguer  and  reader  to  determine  whether  a  society  is  English  or  for- 
eign.    I  shall  mention  two  other  possible  plans,  well  aware  that  there  are  strong 
objections  to  both. 

5x11  PLAN.  Rule  1.  Enter  academies,!  associations,  institutes,  universities,  socie- 
ties, libraries,  galleries,  museums,  colleges,  and  all  similar  bodies,  aud  churches  that 

*  They  are  now  arranged  under  Academies  in  a  single  alphabet  of  places,  so  that 
the  latter — the  most  serious  —  objection  does  not  apply. 

t  That  is  learned  academies  like  the  French  Academy,  not  high  schools. 


CORPORATE    ENTRY.  31 

have  aa  iDdividual  name,  both  EngliMh  and  fon;i;;ii,  according;  to  tlu'ir  corporate 
name,  ncfjlecting  an  initial  article  when  there  iH  one. 

Exception  1.  Enter  the  uiiivcrsitifs  and  the  royal  academies  of  Berlin,  Guttingen, 
Leipzig,  Lisbon,  Madrid,  Munich,  St.  1'eter.sbuig,  Vienna,  etc.,  and  the  "  Institut"  of 
Paris,  under  those  cities.  An  exception  is  an  evil.  This  ono  is  adopted  becausu  the 
universities  and  academies  are  almost  universally  known  by  the  names  of  the  cities, 
and  are  hardly  ever  referred  to  by  the  name  Konigliche,  Real,  etc. 

Exception  2.  Enter  London  guilds  under  the  name  of  the  trade;  e.  g.,  "Stationers' 
Company,'  not  "  Master  and  Keepers  or  Wardens  and  Coenmoualty  of  the  Mysti-ry 
and  Art  of  Stationers  of  the  City  of  London,"  which  is  the  corporate  title.  This 
exception  is  adopted  because  (1)  it  gives  a  heading  easier  to  tiiul,  and  (2)  it  would  bo 
dirticult  in  many  cases  to  ascertain  the  real  names  of  the  London  companies. 

Exception  3.  Enter  bodies  whose  legal  name  begins  with  such  words  as  Board, 
Corporation,  Trustees  under  that  part  of  the  name  by  which  they  are  usually  known. 

E.  g.  Trustees  of  the  Eastern  Dispensary.  Corporation  of  the  Chamber  of  Com- 
merce in  the  City  of  New  York.  rr(>prietr)rs  of  the  Boston  Athenaeum.  Con- 
tributors to  the  Asylum  for  the  Relief  of  Persons  deprived  of  their  Reason. 
Refer  from  the  first  word  of  the  legal  name. 

Exception  4.  Enter  orders  of  knighthood  under  the  signilie.int  word  of  tli(>  English 
title;  as.Garter,  Order  of  the;  Malta,  Knights  of ;  Templars,  Knights ;  Teutonic 
Order. 

Exception  5.  Enter  American  State  historical  and  agricultural  societies  under  the 
name  of  the  State. 

Huh  '2.  a.  Enter  churches  which  have  no  individual  name  and  all  purely  local  be- 
nevolent or  moral  or  similar  societies  under  the  name  of  the  place. 

b.  Y'oung  men's  Christian  associations,  mercantile  library  associations,  and  the  like 
are  to  be  considered  local. 

c.  iiusiuess  firms  or  corporations  (except  national  banks  numbered  as  First  Na- 
tional Bank,  etc.),  libraries,  galleries,  museums,  are  not  to  be  considered  local,  nor 
are  private  schools  local,  but  go  under  their  corporate  name,  or,  if  they  are  not 
corporate,  under  the  name  of  the  proprietor. 

d.  National  libraries  nmseums.  and  galleries  and  libraries,  museums,  and  galleries 
instituted  or  supported  by  a  city  go  under  the  name  of  the  city  ]»rovided  they  have 
not  a  name  of  their  own.  {E.  g.,  the  Boston  Public  Library  goes  under  Boston  ;  but 
the  Reuben  Hoar  Library  of  Littleton  goes  under  Hoar.)  American  public  schools 
should  in  any  case  go  under  the  name  of  the  city.     (Rule  2,  h.) 

€.  If  college  societies  limited  to  one  college  are  considered  local,  they  would  be 
entered  not  under  the  name  of  the  place  but  of  the  college;  if  they  are  treated  by 
rule  1,  as  all  general  college  societies  must  be,  reference  (ti)  must  be  made.  College 
libraries  go  under  the  name  of  the  college.  The  colleges  of  an  English  university 
and  the  schools  of  an  American  university  go  under  the  name  of  the  university. 
Refer  (1)  from  all  the  varying  forms  of  the  society's  name. 

(2)  from  important  words  in  the  society's  name,  when  the  first  word  is  unlikely 

to  be  thought  of. 
(.3)  from  the  name  of  the  city  where  the  Bociety  is  situated. 

(4)  from  the  motto  in  the  names  of  Dutch  societies. 

(5)  from  the  names  of  the  royal  societies  of  Berlin,  etc. 
(G)  from  colleges  to  college  .societies. 

(7)  from  such  words  as  Gallery.  Museum,  etc.,  to  all  the  galleries,  ninsenms, 
etc.,  contained  in  the  catalogue. 


32  AUTHORS:    CORPORATE    ENTRY. 

/Universities,  j^alierios,  etc.,  called  merely  Imperial,  Royal,  National  aud  the  like 
arc  not  to  be  considered  as  having  individual  names,  except  the  National  Gallery 
of  London. 

V  Hiiildings  are  for  the  most  part  provided  for  in  the  above  rules  as  niu.senms,  galle- 
ries, libraries,  churches,  etc.  Any  others  should  bo  entered  under  their  names,  with 
a  reference  from  the  city. 

h  If  a  firm's  name  is  in  the  form  Raphael  Friedlander  und  Sohn  it  might  be  put  ^ 
as  it  reads,  i.  e.,  under  R,  or  reversed,  i.  e.,  Frie^dlaadex  jm.d_SQhn,  Raphael.  I  pr^ilt 
jircfer  the  latter,  because  the  consulter  is  much  more  likely  to  remember  the  fannly 
than  the  christian  name.  Whether  the  Chiistain  name  is  written  at  the  end  or  thus, 
Town  (John)  aud  Bowers  (Henry),  all  firms  should  be  arranged  after  all  the  other 
entries  of  the  tirst  family  name,  i.  e.,  Friedlander  und  Sohn  after  all  the  Fried- 
landers.  The  same  reason  applies  to  other  bodies  whose  legal  name  begins  with  a 
forename. 

The  plan  might  be  tabulated  thus: 


Under  name. 


Churches  not  numbered  and  not  named 

from  the  place. 
Societies  not  local. 
English  and  American  academies. 

Colleges,  universities,  libraries,  galleries, 
museums,  having  an  individual  name. 

Private  schools. 

Business  lirms  and  corporations. 

Loudon  guilds  (name  of  trade). 


Under  place. 


Churches  numbered  or  otherwise  named 

from  the  place. 
Societies  purely  local. 
Academies  and  universities  of  the  Euro- 
pean Continent  and  of  South  America. 
National  or  municipal  colleges,  libraries, 
galleries,  museums,  not  having  an  in- 
dividual name. 
Public  schools. 
Municipal  corporations. 
State  historical  societies  and  State  agri- 
cultural societies  (name  of  state). 
/45      Ex.  Amiens.     Academie  des  Sciences,  Agriculture,  Commerce,  Belles-Let- 
v-„,  J.         ,tres,  et  Arts  du  Department  de  la  SomrneL.     (Rule.  1,  exc.  1.) 

rlo  Association' Scientifiqvte  Algerienne,  Algiers.  ^(Rule  1.)  uW.-^  J*i«j»t-'«-  • 

Mo  Athenee  de  Vaucluse,  Jiv;/(iOH.     (Rulel.) 

"H^^        Barbers  and  Surgeons  of  London  (Mystery  and  Commonalty  of),  after- 

'  icards  Royal  College  of  Surgeons.   See  Royal  College  of  Surgeons, 

y^  Boston  {Mass.)  Fiibliv  Library.     (Rule  2,  d.) 

«  Boston.      TVeUs  School.     (Rule  2,  d.) 

^  Boston  Athenaeum.     (Rule  1,  exc.  3,  Rule  2,  c.) 

Boston,  First  Church  of.     (Rule  2,  f?.)  ..       .        „   ,         •  r      O*    V:*^C, 

t,  British  Museum.     (Rule2,  rf.)  C«i.7«it^'^  "I 

.     "  Cambridge  (J/rtss.),  First  Church  of.     (Rule  2.) 

^o         Chauncy  Hall  School,  Boston,  J7«ss.     (Rule  2  c.) 

y<  •■        Chemins  de  Fer  de  Paris  a  Lyon  et  a  la  Mediterran;>e,  Comp.  des.   (Rule 2,  c.) 
"         Christiania.     Videnskabs-Selskab.     (Rule  1,  exc.  1.) 

Clarke  (W.  B.).  &  Co.     (Rule  2.  c.)Uo^  Cltrr^e9h£*t,t.3  .  ) 
y«.      Congres  International  des  AmericaiiiSTes.     (Rulel)        K-ef^rjr^  Ti^rncint^*] 
•  I       Firenze.     Galleria  Imperiale.     (Rule  2,/.) 
»        Freemasons  in  loiva.     {^  ^AK) 

/V<      Genootschap  "Oefening  kv/eekt  Kunst,"  Amsterdam.     (Rule  1,  and  ref.  4.) 
♦       Geschichts-  und  Alterthumsforschende    Gesellschaft   des   Osterlandes, 
AUenburrj.     (Rule  1.) 
y^'     Gottingen.     K.  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften.     (Rule  1,  exc.  1.) 
Great  Britain.     FnrUament.     {^  A\.) 
Harvard  College.     (Rulel) 

Harvard  College.     Lawrence  Scientific  School.     (Rule  1,  2,  e.) 
Harvard  College.     Library.     (Rule  1,  2,  e.) 


SUBSTITIIFIS.  33 

f^"  Hermitage,  Gallerie  de  1',  St.^Piteriibar^/.     (Itiilo  2,d.) 

/«3  Houghton  &  Mifnin.     (Kiilo2,  c.) 

•'  L^Internationale.     (Uiihs  1.) 

'^"  Intime  Club,  /'«»i».     (Rulo  1.)  K»-fr»- 

y«5  Loudon.     Merchants.     (^  55.) 

fiti  Louvre,  Gallerie  du,  Pariti^     (Riilo  2,  d.) 

'•  Museum  of  Fine  Arts,  liostnu,  }f(iHs.     (Uiiln  2,  c.) 

V*5  Madrid.     R.  Academia  de  la  Historia.     (Kiilo  1,  exc.  1.) 

f^"  National  Gallery.  London.     (Kiil.^2./.) 

/**  "5^  Na^tionaL Quarantine  and  Sanitary  Convention.5w(^  52'.) 

•<  New  England  Trust  Co.,  Hoslon,  Mush.     (KuNi  2,  r.) 

«  New  York.     Chamber  of  Commerce.     (Rule  1.  i-xc.  3,  Rule  2,  c.) 

"  New  York.     First  National  Bank.     (Rule,  2,  c.) 

"  New  York.     Young  Men's  Christian  Association.     (Riili-  2,  6.) 

^v  Or  San  Michele,  Chiesa  di,  rionnrr.     (Rule  1.) 

y*s  Paris.     Biblioth^que  Nationale.     (Rule  2,  </, /.) 

.-  <MiK.     A  i>/  llanard.     (Rule  2,  e.) 

7V<.  Prado,  Museo  del,  .U^rfrW.     (Rnlo2,  rf.) 

••  Pratt  (Enoch)  Free  Library,  Unit.,  Md.     (Rule  2,  d,  A.) 

y*-S  San  Francisco.     Mercantile  Library  Assoc.     (Rule  2,  b.) 

^^  Societe  de  I'Agriculture  de  I'Orne,  Alencqjr.     (Rule  1.) 

—  Stationers'  Company,  l.ondoji.     (Rulo  1,  exc.  2.) 

Templars,  Knights.     (Rul<^  2,  exc.  4.) 

y*^  Tiibingen.     Eberhard-Karls  Universitat.     (Rulo  1,  exc.  1.) 

LUnion  Generale,  I'arix.     (Rulo  2,  r.)  t/yyi^frsi^  ^i  <*»^arrtU  ."^K 

-yfs  United  States.     Library  of  CongresD.     (MO.)  i;w,v..r3ftq- •/   Ca)<n,~cicU>  . 

"  Vatican  Council.     {^  53.)  ^ 

"  Verona,  Congress  of.     {^  49.) 

Versailles,  Treaty  of.     See .     (^^  50.) 

"    Wisconsin,  State  Historical  Society  of.,  t^Rulo  1.  exc.  5.) 
''  —  WIt>j"v»«'") '"••'ij     ^i*     K/-M  «v/*i-citi^    <»f   •rt^cmO.Vx. 

Tho  Gth  vv\s  has  tuo  saui*'  pult5a^  the  5tii,  huu  no  oxceptiou.s.  It  may  be  preferred 
by  thortf,  who  think  the  atlvautage  of  haviuj;  a  sinyle  luufonu  rule  greater  than  the 
inconvenieuce  of  unusual  headings. 

Perhai)3  from  habit  I  prefer  the  4tii  plan.  Of  the  other  plans  experience  confirms 
me  in  the  belief  that  the  .5th  pla.v  is  the  best.  The  A.  L.  A.  adopted  the  Oth  plan. 
I  have  used  it  ever  since  in  tho  Library  journal,  and  I  do  not  thiuk  it  works  well. 

B.  Substitutes. 

Substitutes  for  the  author's   name  (to  be  chosen  in  the  follo\ving 
order)  are  — 
57.  Part  of  the  author's  name  when  only  a  part  is  known. 

Ex.  Forabook  "by  J.  H.  Far  .  .,"or"by  L.  M.  P.,"  or  ''by  Ddg.,"or  "by  — Isd— ," 
the  entry  is  to  be  made  under  Par...,  J.  B.,  P.,  L.  M.,  Ddg.,  —Isd—.  If  the  last 
initials  are  evidently,  from  the  style  <>f  printing,  those  of  a  title,  the  entry  will  be 
under  tho  initial  preceding  them;  thus  for  books  "by  B.  F.,  D.D."  or  "by  M.  V.  R., 
Gent.,"  or  "  by  X.  Y.  Z.,  V.D.,'  the  entry  is  to  bo  made  under  P.,  B.,  D.l).,  and  R., 
M.  P.,  dent.,  and  Z.,  X.  Y.,  D.I).  In  such  ca.se  it  is  .safest  to  have  also  a  reference 
from  the  bust  initial  to  tho  one  cho.sou,  as  D.,  X.  Y.  Z.  D.  Siv  Z.,  X.  Y.,  D.I).  It  is 
often  well  to  make  a  reference  from  the  tirst  wctnl  (title-reference).  This  mode  of 
entry  ensures  the  easy  finding  of  a  particular  book  and  brings  together  all  of  an 
author's  works  in  which  tho  same  letters  are  used,  and  sometimes  leads  to  the  discov- 
ery of  a  real  name. 

Even  mere  printer's  marks,  as  ""*  or  .  .  .  ,  or  !  !  !  ,  unaccompanied  by  any  letters, 
though  they  can  not  bo  considered  as  names,  may  bo  used  as  headings  for  a  reference 
4802  LI 3 


•34  AUTHORS  :    SUIJSTITUTES. 

for  the  sake  of  Itriiifjiiig  togftlier  all  the  works  of  an  author  using  them;  but  each 
■work  Bhonhl  also  have  title  entry  if  anonymous. 

-58.  A  pseiulonyni,  tbat  is,  a  false  name ;  as,  Jobu  Phenix,  Mark  Twain. 

If  the  author's  real  uauio  is  known,  make  the  entry  under  that,  with  a  reference  from 
The  pseudonym;  but  jf..the  writer  is  uigch  better  known  by  thft  psendonyjiij_entflr 
unilfr  that,  with  a  reference  from  the  real  name.     (See  note  under  ^  6.) 

A  i>lirasi> — "One  who  h)ves  his  country,"  "A  friend  to  peace" — or  even  a  shorter 
appellation  — "A  lawyer  " —  is  not  a  name.  References  might  be  made  from  these  to  the 
word  under  which  the  book  is  entered,  but  they  would  swell  the  catalogue  and  rarely 
lie  of  use.  Appellatives  beginning  with  the  definite  article, like  "The  Prig,"  "The 
Old  Shekarry,"  "The  Duchess,"  are  not  vague  like  "A  lover  of  justice,"  and  when 
constantly  used  should  be  treated  as  names  in  the  way  either  of  entry  or  reference. 
Latin  phrases,  like  "Amator  patriie,"  should  be  treated  as  names  and  the  entry  made 
under  the  last  word ;  as,  Patriae,  Amator.  But  it  should  not  be  made  under  i»atro- 
nymic  adjectives,  or  certain  words  like  junior,  senior,  evidently  intended  to  qualify 
the  name,  not  to  be  taken  as  the  name;  i.  e.,  the  heading  for  a  book  "by  Phileleu- 
therus  Lipsiensis"  would  not  be  Lipsiensis,  Phileleutherus,  but  Phileleutherus 
Lipsieusis ;  Vanity  Fair  Album  by  Jehu  Junior  would  go  under  Jehu  junior,  not 
Junior,  Jehu.  In  such  cases  a  reference  from  the  word  which  is  not  taken  as  the 
heading  will  be  an  additional  safeguard. 

Pseudonyms  like  Aunt  Jane,  Cousin  Mary,  Uncle  John,  should  be  entered  under 
the  second  word,  although  it  is  evidently  not  a  family  name  but  a  forename;  it  is  all 
the  name  that  we  have. 

The  word  Auonymus  may  be  considered  as  a  pseudonym  when  used  as  follows : 
"Anonymi  introductio  in,"  etc. 

A  foreign  article  beginning  a  pseudonym  used  in  an  English  work  is  considered  as 
a  part  of  the  name ;  as,  El-Mukattem,  pseud. 

59.  Collector. 

That  is,  the  one  who  is  responsible  for  the  existence  of  a  collection.  A  collection  is 
made  by  putting  together,  with  a  collective  title,  three  or  more  works  by  different 
authors,  so  as  to  make  one  work. 

Examples:  Johnson's  "Little  classics,"  Bucbou's  "Collection  des  m^moires." 

a.  This  rale  does  not  apply  to  the  collector  (editor)  of  a  periodical. 
(§  73.) 

h.  Several  works  published  together  without  a  collective  title  are  to 
be  put  under  that  author's  name  which  appears  first  on  the  title- 
page,  even  though  the  collector's  name  is  also  there;  in  other 
words,  he  is  then  to  be  considered  merely  as  the  editor.    (See  §  4.) 
Thus,  "The  fraternitye  of  vacaboudes,  by. I.  Awdeley;  A  caueat  for  common  curse- 
tors,  by  T.  Harman  ;  A  sermon  in  praise  of  thieves,  by  Parson  Haben  or  Hyberdyne  ; 
those  parts  of  The  groundworke  of  conny-catching  that  differ  from  Harman's  Caueat : 
ed.  by  E.  Viles  and  F.  J.  Furnivall,"  should  be  entered  not  under  Viles,  E.,  and  Fur- 
nivall,  F.  J.,  but  under  Awdeley;  but  if  it  had  been  entitled  "Early  tracts  on  vag- 
abonds and  beggars;  edited  by  E.  Viles  and  F.  J.  Furnivall,"  it  would  properly  be 
put  under  the  editors. 

c.  If  the  collector's  name  is  known,  the  collection  is  to  be  put  under  it, 
whether  it  occurs  on  the  title-page  or  not.  If  his  name  is  not 
known,  enter  the  collection  like  any  anonymous  work,  under  the 
first  word  of  the  collective  title.  In  either  case  the  separate 
works  forming  the  collection  must  be  entered  under  their  respect- 
ive authors.  (See  V.  Analysis.)  Title-references  are  also  often 
necessary.    (See  II.      Titles.) 


SUJJSl 


rUTKS.       KKFKIM'.NCKS.  35 


<il' 


•Ko 


d.  A  colloctiou  known  chietiy  by  its  title  iimy  Im  piity^uiKler  that  Jb*  __ 
\n4i-rt«  under  the  collector.  /,Un 

Tht^  older  collections,  liko  Graevius'a  Tbo.saiims  ttntWiiiitatiiin  Uotnanariuu,  Orono- 
vius's  Tlicsiiunis  Graeciiriiiii  iiiitiiiiiitutiiin,  aro  known  and  roforrod  to  by  tlioir  col- 
lectors'nuinrs  hut  of  lato  years  a  swarm  of  series  'American  statesnion  serUfs,  etc.)  <i 
has  arisen  which  are  known  wholly  by  their  titles,  nn<ler  which  they  should  ho  en-  ^ 
tered  in  fnll,  with  contents,  to  save  the  time  of  the  searcher.  Tht'^^entry  iinder  the 
editor  is  necessary  becau.so  ho  is  really  the  author  of  the  series,  hnt  it  may  he  brief, 
with  a  reference  for  the  •'  ConlenlH"  to  the  title-entry. 

e.  Societies  like  the  Canulen,  (3hetharn,  Ilakliiyt  are  collectors  of  the 

series  of  works  published  by  them,  of  which  a  list  should  be  j,nven 
under  their  names. 
Hut  every  such  work  lillinj;  one  or  more  volumes  shonhl  be  entered  separately  under 
its  author  or  title  as  if  it  were  published  iiulependently,  and  should  have  the  same 
Hubject-entry.  (See  $  125.)  Works  that  fill  part  of  a  volume  are  to  bo  entered  analyt- 
ically (See  $  126.)  Of  "ourse  any  volume  consisting  of  three  or  more  treatises,  put 
together  with  a  collective  title  by  the  society,  should  be  entered  under  it  as  col- 
lector, if  no  collector's  name  is  given. 

For  anonymous  works,  see  Title-entry,  §  G8.     For  trials,  see  §  G4. 

C.   liEFKKENCES. 

60.  Make  references 

(§  3.)  From  joint  authors  (after  the  first)  to  the  first. 

(§  5.)  From  the  pneses  to  the  respondent  or  defendant  of  a  thesis,  or 
vice  versa. 

(§  G.)  From  pseudonyms,  initials,  and  part  of  names. 

(§§  ''jS.)  From  imi>ortant  illustrators  when  not  important  enough  ft)r 
an  entry. 

(§  12.)  From  commentators  who  are  not  entitled  to  an  entry,  if  the 
commentary  i)reponderates  or  for  any  reason  is  likely  to  be 
looked  for  under  the  commentator's  name.  Where  the  line  of 
omission  shall  be  drawn  depends  on  the  fullness  of  the  cata- 
logue. 
(§§  13-16.)  From  the  authors  of  continuations,  indexes,  and  of  intro- 
ductions of  some  length,  also  in  some  cases,  of  epitomes,  re- 
visions, and  excer[)ts. 

(§  18.)  From  the  names  of  reporters,  translators,  and  editors  of  anon- 
ymous works  and  of  works  not  anonymous  which  are  commonly 
known  by  the  name  of  tlieir  editors  or  translators. 
Ex.  Some  translations  from  the  German  by  Mrs.  Witter  are  wrongly  lettered  as  if 
she  were  the  author,  and  are  therefore  asked  for  by  her  name. 

(§19  a.)  From  the  foreign  f«)rm  of  names  of  sovereigns,  whenever  they 

are  likely  to  be  looked  for  under  that  form. 
(§  19  b,  c.)  From  the  family  name  of  persons  canonized,  and  of  friars 

who  drop  the  family  name  on  entering  their  order. 
(§  19  e.)  From  such  i)arts  of  Oriental  names  as  reciuire  it. 
(§  20.)  From  the  names  of  English  sees  and  dciineries. 


36  AUTHORS :     KEFEKENCES. 

(§  LM)  ('.)  From  the  maiden  names  or  unused  married  names  of  wives  to 
tlie  one  used  in  the  catal()<;ue,  provided  tliey  have  written 
under  the  earlier  names  or  for  any  other  reason  are  likely  to 
be  looked  for  under  them. 
(§  21.)  From  the  family  names  of  British  noblemen  to  the  titles,  or 
vice  versa,  if  the  entry  is  made  under  the  family  name. 
From  the  family  names  of  foreign  noblemen,  when  they  are 

known  by  them  wholly  or  in  part. 
From  any  other  title  by  which  a  man  may  be  better  known 
than  by  his  real  name. 

As,  "Claimant,  The."'     The  Diary  of  the  Shah  of  Persia,  catalogued  under  Nassi- 
ad-Din,  requires  a  refereuce  from  Shah. 
(§22.)  From  the  earlier  forms  of  names  that  are  changed. 
(§  23.)  From  the  part  of  compound  names  which  is  not  used  for  entry 

to  the  part  which  is,  whenever  it  seems  necessary. 
(§  24.)  From  the  prefixes  of  foreign  names  when  they  have  been  com- 

njonly  used  in  combination  with  the  last  part. 
Ex.  From  Vandyck  to  Dyck,  A.  van,  from  Degerando  to  Gerando,  and  De  Can- 
dolle  to  Caudolle. 

(§  25.)  From  the  alternative  part  of  Latin  names. 
(§5  27-38.)  From  all  forms  of  a  name  varying  either  by  spelling,  trans- 
lation, or  transliteration  that  do  not  come  into  immediate  jux- 
taposition with  the  one  chosen. 
This  should  be  done  whether  the  rejected  form  occurs  in  the  title  of  a  book  in  the 
library  or  not.     The  object  of  a  reference  is  to  enable  the  reader  to  find  the  works  of 
HP  author,  not  merely  a  particular  book,  and  the  reader  may  have  seen  the  author  re- 
fe*  red  to  under  the  rejected  form  whether  the  library  has  a  book  with  that  form  or  not. 

(§§  40,  44,  48.)  From  the  authors  of  official  writings  (with  discretion). 
(§  49.)  From  nations  taking  part  in  a  congress  to  the  place  of  meeting. 
(§  52.)  From  the  places  where  conventions  are  held  to  the  names  of  the 

bodies  holding  them. 
(§  53.)  From  the  name  of  an  ecclesiastical  body  to  the  headings  under 

which  the  councils  of  the  body  are  entered. 
(§  56.)  A  list  of  references  is  given  in  the  note. 

(§  57.)  From  part  of  the  author's  name  appearing  on  the  title-page  to 
the  whole  name  if  discovered. 
From  the  last  initial  given  on  a  title-page  to  the  one  chosen  for 
the  entry. 
(§58.)  From  a  pseudonym  to  the  real  name  when  discovered. 

From  some  phraseological  pseudonyms,  especially  if  brief. 
Ex.  From  Lawyer,  when  an  anonymous  work  is  said  to  be  "by  a  lawyer."     For 
Full  only. 

From  editors  and  translators. 

If  it  is  thought  worth  while  to  give  a  complete  view  of  the  literary  and  artistic 
activity  of  every  author  so  far  as  it  is  represented  in  the  library,  of  course  references 
from  editors,  translators,  illustrators,  cartographers,  engravers,  etc.,  must  be  made. 
But  this  completeness  is  not  usually  sought  even  in  large  libraries.     Such  references 


REFERENCES.   ECONOMIES.  37 

are  also  undeniably  a  help  in  fiiuliujj  hooks.  Hut  th«y  increase  the  bulk  and  the  cost 
of  ji  catalogue  so  much  iiiid  aro  comparatively  of  ho  littK)  use  that  ordinary  libraries 
must  content  thomst'lves  with  a  selection,  tliouf^h  tho  btvst-mado  Hclcction  is  certain 
to  occasion  comj)laints  that  the  really  useful  ones  have  been  omitted  and  tiie  least 
important  made.     Tho  chief  classes  of  necessary  references  of  this  sort  are — 

(1.)  From  the  editors  of  periodicals  to  the  title-entry,  when  tho  periodical  is  com- 
monly called  by  the  etlitor's  name,  as  Poggendorirs  Anualen,  Silliman's  Journal. 

(•2.)  From  the  names  of  editors  and  translators  wliioh  an^  habitually  mentioned  in 
connection  with  a  work,  so  that  it  is  as  likely  to  bo  looked  for  under  the  editor's  name 
as  under  the  author's  name.  When  the  form  is  a  combination  of  author's  and  i-ditor's 
name,  as  Heyne's  Virgil,  Leverett's  Cicero,  the  reference,  though  conveuient,  is  cer- 
tainly not  necessary,  inasmuch  as  a  person  of  ordinary  intelligence  could  hardly  fail, 
not  finding  what  he  wanted  under  one  name,  to  try  the  other. 

(r?.)  From  the  names  of  those  who  have  made  jioetical  versions,  on  the  ground  that 
their  work  is  something  more  than  mere  translation. 

(4.)  From  the  translators  of  anonymous  works,  because  the  title  of  the  original  will 
generally  be  unknown  to  the  searcher.  This  is  less  necessary  for  famous  works; 
thus  J.  Scott's  version  of  tho  Arabian  Nights  would  probably  be  looked  for  under 
Arabian  nights  rather  than  under  Scott;  but  ii  makes  assurance  doubly  sure. 

(.'>.)  From  tho  names  of  translators,  editors,  etc.,  of  Oriental  works,  because  Occi- 
dental readers  are  much  more  likely  to  remember  these  names  than  those  of  the 
authors. 

It  may  be  thought  that  an  excessive  number  of  references  is  recomuiended,  l»ut  it 
is  plain  that  wherever  there  can  be  a  reasonable  doubt  among  cataloguers  under  what 
head  a  book  ought  to  be  entered,  it  should  have  at  least  a  reference  under  each  head. 
The  object  of  an  author-catalogue  is  to  enable  one  to  find  the  book  ;  if  that  object  is 
not  attained  the  book  might  as  well  not  be  catalogued  at  all. 
Gl.  Make  oxjilainitorv  notes  uiuler  such  words  as  Congress,  Parliament, 
Academies,  Societies,  and  others  in  regard  to  wliose  entry  there  is 
a  diverse  usafie,  stating  what  is  the  rule  of  the  catalogue. 

D.  Economies. 

G2.  In  the  titlealiners  references  are  not  an  economy;  they  occupy  as 
much  room  as  an  entry,  and  therefore  the  imprint  may  as  well 
be  given  wltenever  the  reference  does  not  take  the  phice  of  sev- 
eral titles. 
G3.  Mr.  Perkins  would  catalogue  directories,  state  registers,  and  local 
gazetteers  under  the  name  of  the  i)lace,  omitting  the  author- 
entry      This  is  for  Short  alone,  and  sliould  never  be  done  by  Full 
or  Medium. 
G4.  Trials  of  crown,  state,  and  (;rimiual  cases  may  be  entered  only  under 
the  name  of  the  defendant,  and  trials  of  civil  cases  under  the 
parties  to  the  suit,  treated  like  Joint  authors,  and  trials  relating  to 
vesssels  under  the  name  of  the  ves.st'l  (subjec^t-entries  of  course). 
But  Full  and  jjcrhaps  Medium  should  make  author-entries  under 
the  reporter.     It  may  be  doubted,  however,  whether  a  steno- 
graphic reporter  is  entitled  to  be  considered  an  author  any  more 
than  a  type-setter. 
Collected  reports  of  trials  will  of  course  (^  59)  go  under  the  collector;  for  subject- 
entry  they  come  under  the  ]>lace  over  which  the  court  has  jurisdiction,  and  if  they 
relate  to  a  single  crime  (as  murder),  under  that  also. 


38  TITLP>ENTRY. 

Of).  Often  in  analysis  it  may  bo  worth  wliile  lo  make  a  subject-entry  and 

not  an  author-entry,  or  vice  versa. 
GO,  An  economical  device  in  some  favor  is  to  omit  the  entry  under  the 

author's  name  when  the  library  contains  ou\j  one  work  by  him. 

Py  this  practice  many  famous  authors,  of  whom  no  small  library  is  likely  to  con- 
tain moro  tliau  one  work  (such  as  Boswell,  Dauto,  Gibbon,  Lamb,  Macaulay,  Milton, 
iiuU-ed  almost  any  of  the  English  poets),  will  not  appear  in  the  catalogue  ;  while  the 
man  who  has  written  both  a  First  class  reader  and  a  Second  class  reader,  or  a  Mental 
arithmetic  and  a  Written  arithmetic,  or  two  Sunday-school  books,  must  be  included. 
It  is  not  necessary  to  say  more  to  show  the  absurdity  of  the  rule.  If  some  authors 
must  be  omitted,  let  it  be  those  who  the  librarian  knows  are  never  called  for,  whether 
they  have  written  one  or  fifty  works 

67.  Another  objectionable  economy  is  to  put  biographies  under  the  name 
of  the  subject  alone,  omitting  author-entry,  so  tliat  there  is  no 
means  of  ascertaining  whether  the  library  possesses  all  the  works 
of  a  given  author. 


II.  TITLE-ENTRY. 

First-word  entry.     (Anonymous  works,  68-72;  Periodicals,  73,  74; 

Fiction,  7o  ;  What  is  a  first  word,  76-80.) 
Changed  titles,  81-83. 

First- word  reference.     (Plays  and  poems,  84;  other  works,  85.) 
Catch-word  reference.     (Anonymous  works,  86  a  ;  other  works,  86  b.) 
Subject-word  entry.     (Anonymous  biographies,  87.) 
Subject- word  reference.     (Anonymous  works,  88  a;  other  works, 88  b.) 
Title-reference  to  corporate  entries,  89. 
Title-reference  from  subtitles,  90. 
Double  title-pages,  91. 


TITLE-ENTRY. 

68.  Make  a  first-word  entry  for  alP  anonymous  works,^  except  anon- 
ymous biographies,  which  are  to  be  entered  under  the  name  of  the 
subject  of  the  life.^  (If  the  author's  name  can  be  ascertained 
insert  it  within  brackets.) 

I  Of  course  there  are  exceptions  to  this  rule.  There  are  works  which  are  always 
known  by  certain  names,  under  which  they  should  be  entered,  although  the  title-pages 
of  different  editions  may  not  begin  with  this  name,  or  may  not  even  contain  it.  The 
most  noteworthy  example  is  Bible,  which  is  the  best  heading  —  in  an  English  cata- 
logue—  for  the  Bible  and  for  any  of  its  parts  in  whatever  language  written  and  under 
whatever  title  published. 

This  is  the  British  Museum  rule.  It  is  of  a  piece  with  putting  all  periodicals  under 
the  heading  Periodicals  and  all  publications  of  learned  societies  under  the  head 
Academies.  It  would  be  much  more  in  accordance  with  dictionary  principles  to 
put  the  separate  books  of  the  Bible  each  under  its  own  name  as  given  in  the  revised 


TITLK-KNTKY.  39 

English  version  (Matthew,  (Jospi'l  nf,  not  Gospel  of  Matthow),  with  nil  necessary 
references. 

Under  the  present  nih-,  references  shonlil  lie  made  to  Bible  from  Testameut,  Old 
Testament,  New  Testaiueut,  Gospels,  Apocrypha,  Psalms,  Pentateuch,  tin* 
names  of  the  single  hooks,  and  from  sncli  well-known  names  as  Breeches  IJihhi. 
Speaker's  commentary. 

In  cataloguing  the  anonymous  hooks  of  tho  Middle  AgeH,  "Iticipit"  or  "Hero 
hegyns,"  or  "Book  tho  tirstof,"  and  Hiuiilar  phrases  are  not  to  ho  considered  as  first 
words.  Thus  the  history  of  the  Soveu  Sagos  appears  nnder  the  following  variety  of 
title: 

1.  Ineipit  hisloria  septem  sapiontu  Rome.     [Cir.  1475.] 

2.  In  hoc  opnscnlo  sunt  siilitilitat-es  septr^  .sapieutu  rouie  valde  perntiles.     [Later.] 

3.  llistoria  septeni  Niipientnm  Koime.     14U0. 

4.  Historia  caluninie  uouercalis  (|ue  septein  sapieutu  iuscrihitur.     14'J0. 

5.  Ludus  septeni  sapientuin.     [Cir.  1560.] 

And  the  titles  of  the  versions  are  equally  various: 

1.  Li  romans  des  sept  sages. 

2.  Li  roinaus  de  Dolopathos. 

3.  Les  sept  sages  do  Roiue. 

4.  Les  sept  saiges  de  romme. 

5.  Los  siete  sahios  de  Roma.  ' 

6.  Hienach  volget  ein  gar  schouo  Cronick  vn  hystori  auss  deun  Gcschichten  der 

Romeru. 

7.  Die  hystorio  nan  die  seuen  wise  mannen  van  Romen. 

8.  Hystory  of  the  seuen  maystera  of  Rome. 

9.  The  Hystorie  of  the  seven  wise  maisters  of  Rome. 

10.  The  sevin  seages. 

11.  De  siu  sive  mestere. 

Of  course  it  will  not  do  to  catalogue  these  severally  under  Incipit,  Hoc,  Historia, 
Ludus,  Romans,  Sept,  Siete,  Hienach,  Hystorie,  Hystory,  Sevin,  and  Siu.  In  this  and 
other  prose  and  poetical  romances  of  the  Middle  Ages  the  heading  must  he  taken  in 
general  from  the  suhject  of  the  romance ;  the  name  appearing  of  course  in  the  orig- 
inal language,  with  all  necessary  references  from  other  forms.  In  the  present  case 
all  the  editions  would  he  collected  under  Septem  sapientes,*  with  references  from 
Ludus,  Sept  sages,  Siete  sahios,  Hienach,  and  Seven,  provided  the  lihrary  has  so  many 
editions. 

Somewhat  similarly  collections  of  papers  known  hy  the  name  of  a  princij>al  con- 
trihutor  or  a  previous  owner  or  of  the  house  where  they  were  found  should  he  en- 
tered under  such  name,  or,  if  they  must  he  entered  under  the  name  of  an  editor, 
should  have  a  reference  from  such  name;  ex.,  Dudley  papers,  Winthrop  jtapers,  etc. 

A  title  like  "The  modern  Plutarch''  <loes  not  mean  to  imply  that  the  work  is  writ- 
ten hy  Plutarchus ;  such  a  hook  would  ho  treated  as  anonymous,  unless  it  ha<l  an 
editor. 

« A  catalogue  of  authors  alone  finds  the  entry  of  its  anonymous  books  a  source  of 
incongruity.  The  dictionary  catalogue  has  no  such  trouble.  It  does  not  attempt  to 
enter  them  in  the  author-catalogue  until  the  author's  name  is  known. 

=>  For  a  smaller  catalogue  this  may  read  "  excei>t  anonymous  works  relating  to  a 
pers<tn,  city,  or  other  .subject  distinctly  mentioned  in  the  title,  which  are  to  be  put 
under  the  name  of  the  person,  city,  or  subject."  In  tho  catalogue  of  a  larger  library 
wliero  more  exactness  ("red  tape,"  "pedantry")  is  indispensable,  biography  should 
be  the  only  exception,  the  place  of  entry  under  subjects  and  under  largo  cities  being 

*  Since  this  wa.s  in  type  I  have  rouie  to  the  cnnohi8inn  that  all  these  should  be  entered  under  SaA- 
dabad  (Liit.  Syntipas),  the  repu»<-d  author  of  tho  original  Indian  roui.-»nce.  But  the  exaniph-  will  si  ill 
g.Tv^  to  Hhow  the  great  variety  in  ineiliieval  titles,  and  tho  iuconveuience  of  followioR  »  strict  flrst- 
wurd  rule. 


40  TITLE-ENTKY. 

too  doubtful.  And  in  planninj^  a  inauuscriptcatalogne,  it  should  be  remembered  that 
u  small  library  may  grow  into  a  large  one,  and  that  if  the  catalogue  is  made  in  the 
best  way  at  first  there  will  be  uo  need  of  alteration. 

If  a  book's  title-i)age  is  lost,  and  it  is  impossible  to  ascertain  what  it  was  from 
other  copies  or  other  editions, or  from  catalogues  or  bibliographies,  use  the  half-title 
or  the  running  title,  stating  the  fact;  if  it  has  neither,  manufacture  a  title,  within 
brackets.     Such  an  entry  will  require  many  references. 

(JO.  A  single  inscription  by  an  unknown  author  needs  no  title  entry,  but 
should  have  subject-entry  under  the  subject  of  which  it  treats, 
or  the  name  of  the  place  where  i*;  is  fouud,  or  both. 

70.  When  the  author's  name  is  known,  it  will  be  enough  ibr  Medium  to 

make  not  an  entry  under  the  first  word,  but  a  reference  from  it 
to  the  author.  The  shelf-mark  or  class-mark  should  always  be 
given  with  this  reference,  that  the  man  who  merely  wishes  to  get 
the  book  need  not  have  to  look  in  two  places  for  the  mark.  If 
there  are  several  editions  all  the  marks  should  be  given,  which 
is  not  satisfactory-  unless  the  iuiprints  are  also  given,  that  is,  un- 
less an  entry  Is  made  and  not  merely  a  reference. 
The  entry  (or  reference)  for  an  anonymous  work  should  be  made, 
even  if  the  author's  name  is  given  in  another  edition. 

71.  An  anouyuious  work  which  forms  a  part  of  a  larger  whole  is  to  be 

entered  where  the  whole  would  be,  with  a  reference  from  its  own 
title. 

Ex.  New  testament.     See  Bible. 

Die  Klage.     See  Nibelungenlied. 

72.  Translations  of  anonymous  works  should  be  entered  under  the  same 

heading  as  the  original,  whether  the  library-  possesses  the  original 

or  not. 

Ex.  Gisli'3  saga.     Story  of  Gisli  the  outlaw,  from  the  Icelandic,  by  G.  W.  Dasent. 

So  Perron's  translation,  called  by  him  "  Glaive  descouronnes,"  would  appear  under 

Baif-al-tidjun  ;  and  the  Arabian  nights'  entertainments  under  Alif  laila.    Criticisms  of 

anonymous  works  must  be  put  under  the  heading  of  the  work  criticised. 

73.  Periodicals  are  to  be  treated  as  anonymous  and  entered  under  the 

first  word. 

Ex.  Popular  science  monthly,  Littell'a  living  age. 

When  a  periodical  changes  its  title  the  whole  may  be  catalogued  under  the  orig- 
inal title,  with  an  explanatory  note  there  and  a  reference  from  the  new  title  to  the 
old  ;  or  each  part  may  be  catalogued  under  its  own  title,  with  references,  "For  a  con- 
tinuation, sec     ,"  "For  the  previous  volumes,  see        ." 

Treat  almanacs  and  other  annuals  as  periodicals.  Do  not  confound  periodicals  with 
Bcrials.  The  four  characteristics  of  a  periodical  are :  (1)  that  it  be  published  at  inter- 
vals usually  but  not  necessarily  regular:  (2)  in  general  that  the  publication  be  in- 
tended to  continue  indefinitely  ;  (3)  that  it  be  written  by  a  number  of  contributors 
under  the  supervision  of  one  or  more  editors ;  (4)  that  it  consist  of  articles  on  various 
subjects,  so  that  a  set  of  the  work  does  not  form  an  organic  whole.  The  2d,  3d,  and 
4th  criteria  exclude  works  like  Trollope's  "  The  way  we  live  now,"  and  the  "  Ency- 
clopedia Britaunica."  There  are  some  exceptions  to  the  3a,  as  "  Brownson's  quarterly 
review." 


TJTLK-ENTKV.  41 

Make  a  reference  from  tho  name  of  llio  editor  when  the  periodical  is  commonly 
called  by  his  name,  as  in  the  ease  of  Sillimaii's  Journal  of  science. 

The  Memoirs,  Proceedin^js,  Transaetinns  of  a  society  are  periodicals  in  point  of  (1) 
occasional  |)ul>lieation,  ('i)  indelinitu  eontinnanee,  and — so  far  as  they  contain  any- 
thing beyond  tho  record  of  thosociety's  ineetinjjs  —  of  (4)  variety  of  snbject ;  bnt  they 
lack  the  :Jd  characteristic,  variety  of  authorship,  inasmnch  as  the  memoirs  or  other 
papers  j;iven  in  addition  to  "  proceedinjjs  "  j)roper  may  bo  considered  as  the  work  of 
the  society  acting  through  its  members;  the  society,  therefore,  is  the  author,  and 
t  lie  Transactions,  etc.,  need  not  have  title-entry.  The:e  are,  however,  some  "Jour- 
nals'' ])nblished  by  or  "  under  the  auspices  of"  societies  which  are  really  ])eriodical8, 
and  should  be  so  treated  in  entry,  tho  society  being  not  the  author  but  the  editor. 
Again,  there  are  works  which  occupy  a  bonhirland  between  the  twoela-^ses,  in  regard 
to  which  the  pn/zled  cataloguer  should  remember  that  it  is  not  of  mucli  importance 
which  way  he  decides,  jirovided  he  is  careful  to  make  all  necessary  references.  Ex- 
amples of  such  doubtful  cases  are  "Aljiine  journal :  a  record  of  mountain  adventure 
and  scientilic  observation.  By  members  of  the  Alpine  Club;  "  which  contains  nothing 
of  or  about  the  Club  itself;  — "Journal  oi  the  American  Institute,  a  montlily  publica- 
tion devoted  to  the  interest  of  agriculture,  commerce,  etc.  Edited  by  a  committee, 
members  of  the  Institute,"  and  "  Journal  of  the  Society  of  Arts  and  of  The  InstitutinuH 
in  I'nion,"  both  of  which  are  journals  both  in  the  sense  of  record  of  proceedings  and 
of  periodical  publication. 

Newspaper  titles  are  troublesome.     It  is  not  unconimou  for  the  name  of  the  place    ^ 
to  be  included  in  the  name  on  the  first  page  (as  The  Boston  .^gis),  but  to  be  dropped   ^ 
over  the  editorial  column,  or  vice  versa,  or  to  be  used  for  some  years  and  afterwards    ■* 
dropped,  or  vice  versa.     The  searcher  can  not  always  remember  whether  it  is  used  or 
not.     It  would  be  well,  therefore,  to  give  under  each  name  of  a  city  the  title  of  everj* 
newspaper  published  there  which  the  library  has. 

74.  Collections  of  extracts  from  a  periodical  should  go  under  the  name 

of  the  periodical. 

Ex.  Life,  Verses  from. 
Punch,  A  bowl  of. 

75,  Make  a  first-word  entry  or  reference  for  all  works  of  prose  fiction. 

(Include  the  author's  name  in  the  entry.) 

Er.  Daughter  of  Heth  :  novel,  by  W.  Black.     London,  1874.     3  v.     O. 

The  reason  is  that  novels  are  known  more  by  their  titles  than  by  their  authors' 
names.  Whether  to  make  an  entry  or  a  reference  depends  on  the  space  at  command. 
An  entry  means  giving  the  book-marks  for  every  edition.  With  a  reference  this  may  be 
done;  but  a  reference  without  them  obliges  the  reader  to  turn  to  the  author-entry 
for  such  details,  which  is  objectionable.  It  is  better  to  give  all  the  book-marks  with 
the  title. 

If  the  name  of  the  hero  or  heroine  enters  into  tho  title  the  entry  should  be  made 
under  that;  ex.,  David  Copperfield,  Life  and  adventures  of,  by  C.  Dickens. 

70,  When  a  title  begins  with  an  article,  the  heading  of  a  first- word 
entry  or  reference  is  the  word  following  tlie  article. 
Ex.  Centaur,  The,  not  fabulous,  not  The  centaur  not  fabulous.  The  entry  has 
commonly  been  made  under  the  first  wonl  "not  an  article  or  preposition."  But  it  is 
found  to  work  badly  to  except  the  preposition  in  the  titles  of  novels  and  plays,  and 
it  is  awkward  to  omit  or  transpose  it  in  any  case.  One  reason  for  excepting  th'; 
article  —  that  there  n-ouldbean  immense  accumulation  of  titles  under  the  unimportant 
words  A,  The,  Le,  Der,  Uuo,  etc.  —  is  not  so  strong  in  the  case  of  prepositions;  the 
other — that  it  is  ditlicult  to  remember  with  what  article  a  given  title  begins  — hardly 
applies  at  all  to  prepositions.     The  preposition  is  full  as  likely  to  fasten  itself  in  the 


42  TITLE-KNTKY. 

iiicmorv  as  tho  word  thai  follows  it.  Tiie  strongest  argument  in  favor  of  confiuing 
jirepo.sit ion-entry  to  fiction  and  tlie  drama  is  that  in  other  cases  the  word  following 
the  preposition  will  probably  be  a  subject-word,  so  that  one  entry  will  do  the  work 
of  two.  This  will  occasionally  be  true,  but  not  often  enough,  I  think,  to  make  much 
difference. 

77.  AVheu  a  foreifjn  phrase  is  used  as  an  English  title,  refer  from  the 

article  as  well  as  from  the  following  word. 

Ex.  El  Fureidis  should  have  rel'orenceHto  Cummins  both  under  E  and  F  ;  L'arra- 
tiata  both  under  L'  and  A  to  Heyse. 

78.  When  a  title  begins  with  a  word  expressive  of  the  number  which 

the  work  holds  in  a  series  the  first  word  entry  or  reference  is  to 

be  made  under  the  next  word. 
Ex.  Collection  of  papers,  8th,  vot  Eighth  collection.  Letter,  1st  and  2d,  to  the 
Ministry,  not  First  letter,  etc..  under  F,  and  Second  letter  under  S.  When  the  nu- 
meral comes  after  a  word  like  Book  or  Part  (as  frequently  in  Latin  after  Liber,  Pars, 
Tomus,  Volumen)  both  are  to  be  neglected  and  the  word  following  pnt  into  the  nom- 
inative and  used  as  a  heading;  e.g.,  "  Pars  prima  epistolarum"  is  to  be  entered  under 
Epistolae.  Similarly  Evening,  Morning,  Daily,  and  Weekly  should  be  disregarded  in 
titles  of  newspapers,  otherwise  we  should  have  the  morning  edition  at  one  end  of  the 
catalogue  and  the  evening  at  the  other.  So  "Appendix  to,"  "  Continuation  of"  "  Sup- 
plement to"  (but  not  "Reply  to"),  are  to  be  disregarded  when  they  are  followed  by  the 
title  of  the  work  continued.  "  Reply  to"  and  similar  beginnings  are  to  be  put  under 
Reply,  etc.,  with  a  subject-entry  under  the  author  of  the  work  replied  to. 

79.  When  the  first  word  of  a  title  is  spelled  unusually,  all  the  editions 

should  be  entered  under  the  word  spelled  in  the  modern  or  correct 
way,  with  a  reference  from  the  form  adopted  in  the  title. 

Ex.  The  hystorie  of  the  saints  would  be  entered  — 
History.]  The  hystorie  of  the  saints. 

We  enter  under  the  common  spelling  (1)  in  order  to  get  all  editions  of  a  work  to- 
gether, (2)  because  the  reader  can  not  be  expected  to  know  exactly  how  the  word  is 
misspelled  in  tbe  title,  and  will  generally  look  first  under  the  correct  spelling. 

Of  two  spellings  equally  correct,  choose  one  and  refer  from  the  other. 

80.  When  the  first  word  of  a  title  is  in  an  oblique  case,  use  the  nomi- 

native as  a  heading. 

Ex.  Put  Monumeutorum  antiquae  sculpturae  quae  supersunt  under  Monumenta. 

81.  If  the  title  has  various  forms,  refer  from  any  that  differ  enough  to 

affect  the  alphabetical  order. 

See  the  example  in  §  68. 

82.  Modern  anonymous  works  whose  titles  are  changed  in  different 

editions  may  be  entered  under  the  first,  with  a  reference  under 
the  later ;  but  the  most  satisfactory  method  is  to  enter  in  full  in 
both  places. 

83.  Anonymons  works  that  change  their  titles  in  successive  volumes 

are  to  be  entered  under  the  first  title,  with  a  reference  from  the 
later,  unless  the  greater  part  of  the  work  has  the  later  title,  or 
the  whole  is  much  better  known  by  the  later  title,  in  which  case 
entry  should  be  made  under  that. 


TITl.K-KKFKKKNCE.  43 

84.  Make  ii  lirst-word  rcfert'iKH*  to  the  aiitlior  for  all  plays,  and  for  poems 
of  some  lenjj^th  or  importanci'  or  ii()tori«'ty. 

Ex,  All's  well  that  euds  well.     Sie  Shakespeare,  W. 
Nothing  to  wear.     See  Butler,  W.  A. 

Of  coins*' entries  are  better  tliaii  references  for  the  reader;  the  latter  are  recom- 
mended hero  merely  for  economy,  which  will  bo  found  to  be  considerable  when  there 
are  ujany  editions  of  a  play.  It  is  miali  better  to  distribute  these  like  any  other  title- 
references,  tlironi^h  the  alphabet,  than,  as  some  have  done,  to  collect  the  titles  of  novels 
toj^etiier  in  one  plac<'  and  of  idays  in  another.  A  man  not  nnfreqiiently  wishes  to  (ind 
a  book  whose  title  he  lias  heard  ot  without  leartiin-^  whether  it  was  a  novel,  a  i>lay, 
a  poem,  or  a  book  of  travels. 

If  the  catch-word  of  the  title  of  a  novel,  poem,  or  play  is  the  name  of  a  real  person 
who  is  its  subject,  it  is  optional  to  make  a  reference,  as  in  vS  ^'<'>,  or  a  biofjraphical  entry 
under  the  family  name,  or  both. 

Ex.  Paul  Revere's  ride.     See  Longfellow,  II.  W. 
or  Revere,  Paul.     Lonokellow,  II.  W.     {In  hin  Tales  of  a  way-side  inn.) 

d)ii.  Make  a  first-word  reference  to  the  author  for  other  works  which  are 
likely  to  be  inquired  for  under  the  first  word  of  the  title,  whether 
because  the  author-entry  of  the  work  is  not  obvious  from  the  title,' 
becau.se  the  title  «loes  uot  indicate  the  subject,^  or  because  it  is  of 
a  striking?  form,^  or  because  the  book  is  commonly  known  by  its 
title,*  or  for  any  other  good  reason. 

>  Codex  .Sinaiticus;  ed.  Tischendorf  (entered  under  Bible). 

'Cuppe's  "'Heaven  open  to  all  men"  needs  a  /t^/f-reference,  because  for  its  subject 
it  would  be  put  under  Universal  salvation  or  Future  punishment.  Duration  of. 
Hutton'a  "Plays  and  players"  is  merely  an  account  of  the  New  York  stage.  Keary'a 
"Nations  around*' does  not  suggest  any  subject  at  all. 

*  Border  and  bastille. 

*  Diviua  commedia. 

In  a  majority  of  cases,  when  a  subject-word  entry  is  made,  no  first-word  reference 
is  needed ;  but,  if  the  title  is  striking,  there  should  be  a  first-word  reference,  or  a  ref- 
erence from  that  part  of  the  title  which  is  striking.  Title-references  should  not  gen- 
erally be  made  from  certain  common  titles,  as  "Sermons  on  varioussuljjects,"  "Essays, 
historical  and  literary."  and  should  be  made  from  less  common  collective  words,  as 
"Century  of  painters,"  "Century  of  praise,"  etc.  References  should  bo  liberally 
made  to  the  works  of  such  authors  as  Brown,  Jones,  Schmidt,  Smith,  Wihson:  if  one 
has  forgotten  the  Christian  name,  it  is  a  work  of  too  much  time  to  find  the  book  under 
the  author,  and  one  looks  at  once  for  a  subject-  or  a  title-entry  or  reference.  And  a 
reference  will  facilitate  the  finding  of  many  coll(>ctions  entered  proju-rly  uiiil.-r  the 
editor;  for  it  is  ea.sy  to  forget  an  editor's  name,  an<l  often  dinicuilt  to  determine  the 
subject-entry  of  a  collection. 

To  sum  up,  then,  make  a  title-reference  when  the  author's  name  is  common,  the  title 
memorable,  or  the  subject  obscure. 

8G.  INIake  a  catch-word  reference  or  references  — 

a.  For  all  anonymous  works  which  admit  of  it,  if  their  subject  does 
not  appear  distinctly  from  the  title.  To  be  made  to  the  author 
if  known,  otlierwise  to  the  first  word. 

Ex.  Scarlet  gowns.  True  and  exact  account  of  the.  .'^r.True.  H'-re  Cardinals  i» 
the  subject,  but  the  word  «loes  not  incur  in  th.-  title;  True  is  the  lir.st  word  and  is 
therefore  taken  for  the  heading;   iMit  Scarlet  gowns  is  a  phrase  very  likely  to  r.iiiairi 


44  TITLE-KEFEKENCE. 

ill  tlit>  memory  of  anyone  who  had  Hoen  the  title,  and  therefore  the  reference  is  made. 
Books  published  under  a  comparatively  unknown  pseudonym  should  have  either  a 
first-word  or  a  catch-word  reference,  unless  their  subject-entry  can  be  easily  inferred 
from  the  title. 

b.  For  other  works  wliicli  are  likely  to  be  iuqaired  for  not  under  the 
first  word  but  under  the  catch-word  of  the  title.  To  be  made  to 
the  author. 

Ex.  The  fac-similo  of  the  Laurentiau  ms.  of  Sophocles  ujight  be  spoken  of  or  re- 
ferred to  as  "The  Laurentiau  ms."  simply. 

It  is  not  easy  to  decide  when  to  make  such  entries  nor  how  many  to  make.  "An 
account  of  the  baronial  mansions  of  England  in  the  olden  time"  may  be  asked  for  as 
"  Baronial  halls"  or  as  "  English  baronial  halls"  or  perhaps  as  "  Mansions  of  the  olden 
time."  If  references  are  made  from  all  possible  headings  which  might  occur  to  an  in- 
accurate memory,  there  will  be  no  end  to  the  catalogue 

87.  Make  a  subject-word  entry  for  all  anonymous  biographies  and  works 

of  a  biographical  character.     (See  §  68,  note  3.) 
Ex.  Cromwell,   Oliver.      Perfect  politician,  The;    life  of  Cromwell.      London, 
1681.     8°. 
—    Trkason's  masterpiece  ;  or.  Conference  between  Oliver  and  a  committee 
of  Parliament.     London,  1680      8°. 
For  greater  security  this  latter  ought  to  have  also  a  first-word  reference. 

88.  Make  a  subject- word  reference — 

a.  For  all  anonymous  works  which  admit  of  it,  to  the  author  if  known, 

otherwise  to  the  first  word. 

When  the  subject-word  is  the  same  as  the  heading  of  the  subject-entry  this  reference 
need  not  be  made;  but  it  will  not  do  to  omit  an  important  title-entry  when  there  are 
many  titles  under  the  subject-heading  or  they  are  much  subdivided,  so  that  ii  would 
be  difficult  to  find  the  title-entry  there.  Thus  an  anonymous  book,  "  France  and  the 
Pope,"  -would  no  doubt  have  a  subject-entry  under  some  subdivision  of  Prance,  but 
as  this  in  a  large  catalogue  would  be  little  help  towards  finding  the  book,  it  should 
also  have  a  reference  among  the  titles  whicb  follow  the  subject  France.  Of  course 
if  there  were  only  a  dozen  titles  under  France  one  entry  would  be  enough. 

b.  For  other  works,  when  the  subject- word  is  not  the  same  as  the 

name  of  the  subject  selected  by  the  cataloguer. 

In  this  case,  however,  a  cross-reference,  which  will  answer  for  all  titles,  is  to  be 
preferred  to  a  collection  of  subject  word  references,  being  more  economical  and  nearly 
as  convenient  to  the  inquirer.  Suppose,  for  instance,  that  Insects  is  preferred  as  a 
subject-name  to  Entomology.  It  will  be  better  and  more  sparing  of  space  to  say 
once  for  all  ''Entomology.  See  Insects,"  referring  a  man  to  a  part  of  the  catalogue 
where  he  will  find  not  only  the  book  he  seeks  but  many  similar  ones,  than  to  make 
number  of  references  like  these  : 

Entomologie,  Cours  de.     See  Latreille,  P.  A. 

Entomologique,  Bibliographic.     See  Percheron,  A. 

Entomology,  Dialogues  on.     See  Dialogues. 

Entomology,  Elements  of.     See  Dallas,  W.  S. ;  Ruschenberger,  W.  S.W. 

Entomology,  Introduction  to.     See  Duncan,  J. ;  Kirby,  W. 
which  will  serve  his  turn  only  for  the  particular  book  he  has  in  mind,  and  serve  it 
very  little  better  than  the  general  reference. 


TirLE-UKKEKKNCK.       SUBJECTS.  45 

89.  Make  title  references  (tirat-word,  cjitcli-\V(H(l,  or  subject-word)  for 

works  which  are  entered  unth-r  tho  iiumcs  of  societies  or  of  ^'ov- 

ernmenls. 
Ex.  Consular  reports,     ^cc  U.  S.  Connular  Sircice. 

The  reason  for  this  ia  that  tho  in(|iiircr  iniglit  not  think  of  lookin;;  for  Mnch  works 
unch'r  thoso  headinj^s  or  nii;;ht  bo  nnablo  to  timl  thoni  in  tlio  mass  of  tiths  under  the 
larger  eonntrius,  France,  (Jreat  l{ritai;i,  United  States.  But  in  view  of  tlie  room 
which  such  references  wonid  lill,  if  made  from  all  j^overnniental  titles,  it  seems  best 
to  state  the  rule  for  the  entry  of  governmental  and  society  itnbiications  very  dis- 
tinctly in  the  preface  and  then  to  reqnire  and  presuppose  a  certain  ucqnaiataucu  with 
the  plan  of  the  catalogue  on  the  part  of  thoso  who  use  it,  ami  omit  all  reference  for 
ordinary  ollicial  reports,  making  them  only  for  works  which  have  become  part  of 
literature,  and  are  likely  to  be  much  in([nired  for ;  as,  tho  "Astronomical  exploring 
expedition,"  ''Connaissanco  des  temps,"  "Description  do  I'Tlgypte,"  "Documents 
inedits,''  "Philosophical  trausactions,"  etc.  Of  course  absolute  uniformity  can  not 
be  secured  in  this  way,  but  absolute  uniformity  is  not  very  important.  Even  if  occa- 
sionally a  reference  of  this  kind  fails  to  bo  made  which  might  reasonably  be  required, 
those  which  are  made  will  be  useful.  It  is  easy  to  add  the  reference  wanted  ia  a 
manuscript  catalogue  or  in  the  inevitable  supplement  of  a  printed  catalogue. 

90.  Title  references  must  sometimes  be  made  from  subtitles  and  half- 

titles. 
Because  some  books  are  known  and  referred  to  by  them  rather  than  by  the  full 
title.     For  the  same  reasou  the  binder's  title,  used  on  the  original  l)inding,  maj-  de- 
serve a  reference  (never  au  entry) ;  and  also  titles  commonly  given  to  books  though 
not  appearing  anywhere  in  them,  as  Breeches  Bible,  Speaker's  commentary. 

91.  If  a  book  has  several  title-paj^es  use  the  most  general,  giving  the 

others,  if  necessary,  in  a  note  or  as  contents. 
This  occurs  especially  in  German  books.  The  rule  above  should  be  followed  even 
when  the  library  has  only  one  of  the  parts.  But  under  the  subject-heading  the  sub- 
title which  corresponds  to  that  subject  may  be  used,  the  general  title  being  given  in 
a  parenthesis  after  the  imprint,  so  as  to  preserve  the  connection  of  the  subject-  and 
title-entries.  L'x.  Saxony,  House  of.  Vehse,  E.  Geschichte  der  Hiife  des  Hauses 
Sachsen.     Hamburg,  1854.     7  v.     -".     (Vol.  i»d-34  of  his  Gesch.  d.  deut.  Hofe.) 

III.  SUBJECTS. 
A.  Entries  considered  separately. 

1.    ClIOICK    HKTWEKN'    DIKKKUENT   SUKJKCTB. 

Between  general  and  specific,  93 ;  Between  person  and  country,  94; 
Between  event  and  country,  9");  Between  subject  and  couutry,  90,  97; 
Between  subjects  that  overlap,  98. 

2.    CUOICE    IJETWEKN    IHKIKKKNT    NAMES. 

Language,  100;  Synonyms,  101-103;  Subject-word  and  subject,  107; 
Homonyms,  105;  Compound  headings,  100, 107;  Double  entry,  10S-ll:3; 
Vessels,  113;  Civil  actions,  114;  Reviews,  comments,  etc.,  115. 

B.  Entries  con.sidered  as  parts  of  a  whole. 

Cross-references,  119,  120;  Synoptical  table.  liM. 


4G  SUBJECT-ENTRY. 

SUBJECTS, 
A.  Entries  considered  separately. 

92.  Some  questions  in  rey:ai(l  to  tbe  place  of  entry  are  common  to  the 

author-  and  tlie  subject-catalogue;  because  individuals  (persons, 
places,  ships,  etc.)  may  be  at  once  authors  and  subjects.  For 
these  questions  consult  Part  I,  and  also  §  100  of  the  present  part. 

Ill  a  dictionary  catalogue  some  books  can  not  profitably  have  subject-entry,  be- 
cause they  not  only  have  no  one  subject  but  do  not  even  belong  to  any  class  of  sub- 
jects. 

A  collection  is  to  bo  eii+ered  under  the  word  which  expresses  its  subject  or  its  general 
tendency.  The  memoirs,  transactions,  proceedings,  etc.,  of  a  society  should  be  entered 
under  name  of  the  object  for  which  the  society  is  founded.  When  there  are  many 
societies  under  one  head,  it  is  economical  to  refer  merely;  as,  from  Agriculture  or 
Agricultural  societies  to  the  various  names. 

The  importance  of  deciding  aright  where  any  given  subject  shall  be  entered  is  in 
inverse  proportion  to  the  difficulty  of  decision.  If  there  is  no  obvious  principle  to 
guide  the  cataloguer,  it  is  plain  there  will  be  no  reason  why  the  public  should  expect 
to  find  the  eutry  under  one  heading  rather  than  another,  and  therefore  in  regard  to 
the  public  it  matters  not  which  is  chosen.  But  it  is  better  that  such  decisions  should 
be  made  to  conform  when  possible  to  some  general  system,  as  there  is  then  more  like- 
lihood that  they  will  be  decided  alike  by  different  cataloguers,  and  that  a  usage  will 
grow  up  which  the  public  will  finally  learn  and  profit  by,  as  a  usage  has  grown  up 
in  regard  to  the  author-entry  of  French  names  containing  De,  Du,  La,  etc. 

1.  Choice  between  different  subjects. 
a.  Between  general  and  specific. 

93.  Enter  a  work  under  its  subject-heading,  not  under  the  heading  of  a 

class  which  includes  that  subject. 

Ex.  Put  Lady  Gust's  book  on  "The  cat"  under  Cat,  not  under  Zoology  or  Mam- 
mals, or  Domiestic  animals;  and  put  Garnier's  "Le  fer"  under  Iron,  not  under 
Metals  or  Metallurgy. 

This  rule  of  "  specific  eutry"  is  the  main  distinction  between  the  dictionary-cata- 
logue and  the  alphabetico-classed. 

Some  subjects  have  no  name;  they  are  spoken  of  only  by  a  phrase  or  by  several 
phrases  not  definite  enough  to  be  used  as  a  heading.  A  book  may  be  written  on  the 
movements  of  fluids  in  plants,  a  very  definite  object  of  investigation,  but  as  yet 
nameless;  it  must  be  put  under  Botany  (Physiological).  Bat  if  several  works  were 
written  on  it  and  it  was  called,  lot  us  say,  Phythydraulics,  it  would  be  seen  that, 
under  this  rule,  it  no  more  ought  to  be  under  Botany  than  Circulation  of  the  blood 
under  Zoology.  Thirty  years  ago  "  Fertilization  of  flowers"  could  hardly  have  been 
used  as  a  heading  ;  but  late  writings  have  raised  it  to  the  status  of  a  subject.  There 
a,re  thousands  of  possible  matters  of  investigation,  some  of  which  are  fiom  time  to 
time  discussed,  but  before  the  catalogue  can  profitably  follow  its  "specific"  rule  in 
regard  to  them  they  must  attain  a  certain  individuality  as  objects  of  inquiry,  and  be 
given  some  sort  of  name,  otherwise  we  must  assign  them  class-entry. 

And  it  is  not  always  easy  to  decide  -what  is  a  distinct  subject.  Many  catalogues 
have  a  heading  Preaching.  Is  Extempore  preaching  a  sufficiently  distinct  matter  to 
have  a  heading  of  its  own?     There  are  a  number  of  books  on  this  branch  of  the  sub- 


SUBJECT-ENTUY.  47 

ject.  In  this  particular  case  the  ililliciilty  can  ho  avoidiMl  hy  inakiujj  the  heatliiijr 
"Preaching  Tvithout  notes."  Many  mich  (incHtions  may  \n'-  Hiniilariy  hoIvimI,  with 
pmhaps  Mitud  .salisfiiiliiin  to  the  maker  of  the  catalogue  than  ti)  its  nsorH;  hut  many 
(lui'stions  will  remain. 

Then,  mixml  with  this,  and  .somntimos  hardly  distinj^ni.sliahle  from  it,  is  theca.se  «>f 
suhjeets  whose  names  hegin  within  an  unimportant  adjective  or  uoiin,— Arc  of  the 
meridian,  Cai>tiuo  of  pro[>erty  at  sea,  Se;^iuent  of  a  circle,  (Quadrature  of  tlie  circle. 
All  that  can  he  said  in  such  cases  is  that,  if  the  subject  he  commonly  recognized  and 
the  name  accepted  or  likely  to  be  accoi)ted  by  usage,  ihe  entry  must  be  matlo  under 
it.     For  the  fuller  discussion  of  compouml  headings,  s.ie  ^^  lUO,  107. 

On  the  other  hand,<liniculty  arises  from  the  public,  or  a  part  of  it,  being  accus- 
tomed to  think  of  certain  subjects  in  conuectiou  with  their  including  classes,  which 
especially  happens  to  those  persons  who  have  used  classed  catalogues  or  the  dic- 
tionary catalogues  in  which  specilication  is  only  partially  carried  out;  so  that  there 
is  a  temptation  to  enter  certain  books  doubly,  once  luuler  the  specific  heading  to 
satisfy  the  rule,  and  once  uiuler  the  class  to  satisfy  the  public.  The  dictionary  prin- 
ciple does  not  forbid  this.  If  room  can  bo  spared,  the  cataloguer  may  put  what  he 
pleases  under  an  extensive  subject  (a  class),  provided  he  puts  the  less  com|)rehensive 
works  also  under  their  respective  specific  headings.  The  objection  to  this  is  that,  if 
all  the  specifics  are  thus  entered,  the  bulk  of  the  catalogue  is  enormously  increased  ; 
and  that,  if  a  selection  is  made,  it  must  depen<l  entirely  upon  the  "judguuMit,"'  i.  c, 
the  i)repossessions  and  accidental  associations, of  the  cataloguer,  and  there  will  beau 
end  to  all  uuiformity,  ami  probably  the  public  will  not  bo  better  satisfied,  not  under- 
stauding  why  they  do  not  find  class-entry  in  all  cases. 

b.   Choice  hclivcen  person  and  country. 

94,  Pat  iiiuler  the  name  of  a  king  or  other  ruler  all  his  biographies,  and 

works  purporting  to  be  histories  of  his  reign;  but  enter  under 
the  country  all  histories  which  include  more  than  his  reign  and 
accounts  of  events  which  happened  during  the  reign,  and  all 
political  pamphlets  not  directly  criticising  his  conduct. 

The  first  part  of  this  rule  is  analogous  to  that  by  which  the  works  of  a  king  of  a 
private  nature  are  put  uuder  his  name,  and  all  his  public  writings  under  the  country  ; 
putting  histories  of  the  reign  uuder  the  king  is  partly  subject-  and  partly  title-entry. 
Books  of  this  sort  have  really  two  subjects  and  ought  to  be  entered  twice  (e.  g.,  Bou- 
taric's  "  La  France  sous  Philippe  le  bel") ;  the  rule  above  is  simply  an  economical 
device  to  save  room  at  the  expense  of  convenience.  Perhaps  a  better  practice  would 
be  to  enter  all  lives  of  kings  as  well  as  histories  of  their  reigns  under  the  country 
only,  with  a  reference  from  the  king. 

Similarly  there  are  some  biographies  and  autobiographies  which  have  such  a  very 
large  proportion  of  history  that  they  ought  to  appear  both  under  the  man  and  the 
country.  In  general  we  merely  refer  from  the  countij',  but  occasionally  nothing  but 
double  entry  will  suffice.  Whether  they  Nhall  ajipear  by  way  of  entry  or  merely  be 
mentioned  in  a  note,  must  he  determined  by  circumstances. 

c.  Choice  biticeen  event  and  tountry. 

95.  Events'  or  periods^  in  the  history  of  a  country  which  have  a  proper 

name  may  be  entered  uniler  that  name  with  a  reference  from  the 
country;  those  whose  name  is  common  to  many  countri  s'  should 
be  entered  under  the  country. 
> St.  Bartholomew's  day.         -Fronde.        'lievolution  ;  Restoration;  Civil  war. 


48  SUBJECT-ENTRY. 

d.   Choice  between  stthjeet  {or  form)  and  country 

96.  The  only  satisfactory  method  is  double  entry  under  the  local  and 

the  scientific  subject  —  to  put,  for  instance,  a  work  on  the  geoloj;y 
of  California  under  both  California  and  Geology,  and  to  carry  out 
this  practice  through  the  catalogue,  so  that  the  geographical 
student  shall  not  be  obliged  to  search  for  works  on  California 
under  Botany,  Geology,  Natural  history.  Palaeontology,  Zoology,  and 
a  dozen  similar  headings,  and  the  scientist  shall  not  be  sent  to 
California,  England.  Russia,  and  a  score  of  other  places  to  find  the 
various  treatises  on  geology.  But  as  this  profusion  of  entry 
would  make  the  catalogue  very  long,  we  are  generally  obliged  to 
choose  between  country  and  scientific  subject. 

97.  A  work  treating  of  a  general  subject  with  special  reference  to  a 

place  is  to  be  entered  under  the  place,  with  merely  a  reference 
from  the  subject. 

Ex.  Put  Flagg's  "  Birds  and  seasons  of  New  England"  under  New  England,  and 
nudtT  Ornithology  say  See  also  New  England.  As  New  England  ornithology  and 
Ornithology  of  New  England  are  merely  different  names  nt  the  same  specific  sub- 
ject, it  may  be  asked  why  we  prefer  the  first.  Because  entry  under  Ornithology  of 
New  England,  though  by  itself  specific  entry,  is  when  taken  in  connection  with  the 
entries  that  would  be  grouped  around  it  (Ornithology,  Ornithology  of  America, 
Ornithology  of  Scotland,  etc.),  in  effect  class-entry;  whereas  the  similar  grouping 
under  New  England  doe.s  not  make  that  a  class,  inasmuch  as  New  England  botany, 
New  England  history,  New  England  ornithology  are  not  parte  of  New  England, 
but  simply  the  individual  New  England  considered  in  various  aspects.  Of  course  the 
dictionary  catalogue  in  choosing  between  a  class  and  an  individual  prefers  the  latter. 
Its  object  is  to  show  at  one  view  all  the  sides  of  each  object ;  the  classed  catalogue 
shows  together  the  same  side  of  many  objects. 

There  is  not  as  yet  much  uniformity  in  catalogues,  nor  dees  any  carry  out  this  prin- 
ciple so  absolutely  as  the  more  obvious  "  specific"  rule  is  obeyed.  The  Boston  Public 
Library  Supplement  of  1866,  for  instance,  has  under  the  countTj  Antiquiiu 8,  Coinage,  De- 
scription and  Historii,  Language,  Religion  (subjects),  and  Literature,  and  even  Elocution 
and  Poetry  (forms),  but  not  Ballads  nor  Periodicals,  which  appear  under  those  words. 
Yet  when  Ballads  are  called  Volkslieder  they  appear  under  the  country  Germany,—  an 
instance  of  the  independence  of  the  title  produced  by  foreign  languages,  the  English 
title  being  entered  by  form-word,  the  foreign  works  having  national  classification,  re- 
gardless of  the  title.  There  are  many  other  classes  that  in  most  catalogues  at  present, 
instead  of  being  confined  to  ffeneral  works,  absorb  books  which  should  rather  have 
local  entry,  as  Vases,  Gems,  Sculpture,  Painting,  and  other  branches  of  the  fine  arts, 
Ballads,  Epigrams,  Plays,  and  other  forms  of  literature.  In  catalogues  of  merely 
English  libraries  this  is  perhaps  as  well  (see  §  122),  but  the  multiplication  of  books 
and  the  accession  of  foreign  literatures  render  more  system  necessary. 

To  show  the  procedure  under  this  rule,  suppose  we  have  a  collection  of  books  on 
coins.  Let  the  general  works  go  under  Numismatics ;  let  works  on  any  particular 
coin,  as  a  Pine-tree  shilling  or  a  Queen  Anne's  farthing,  go  under  the  name  of  the 
coin  ;  let  works  on  the  coins  of  a  country  be  put  under  its  uame  ;  refer  from  the  coun- 
try to  all  the  particular  coins  on  which  you  have  monographs,  and  from  Numismatics 
both  to  all  the  separate  coins  and  to  all  the  countries  on  whose  coinage  you  have 
treatises. 


SUBJECT-ENTKY.  49 

e.  Between  anhjtclH  thai  onrlnj). 

98.  Among  subjects  tbat  overhij)  clinosc  tlw  one  thiit  i»ropon(U*riites, 
with  ii  reference  troni  the  other. 

Ex.  Any  completo  treatise  on  doiiicHtic  animals  will  rdvcr  :i  larj^o  i>art  of  the  fjroiiinl 
of  Vftfrinary  ini'dicinc;  lint  it  is  iiniiecossary  ti>  iMitcr  all  tlm  works  on  (loiiicHf  ic  ani- 
mals II mli'i- Veterinary  medicine;  a  notn  to  this  otli'ct  is  Hullicit-nt.  Astronomy 
and  Geology  overlap  in  ro^^ard  to  the  orij^in  of  the  eartli,  Geology  and  Physical 
geography  in  re^^ard  to  its  present  condition.  Any  particnlar  hook  must  he  classified 
with  one  or  the  other  snhject  according  as  the  geological  or  geographical  treatment 
prevails. 

2.    CHOICR    BKTWF.KN    1>IKKKRKN1     NAMKS. 

90.  Geni'ral  rules,  always  ai)i)licnl)le,  for  the  (ihoioeof  names  of  subjects 
can  no  more  be  given  tlian  rnles  withont  ex(!eption  in  grammar. 
Usage  in  both  cases  is  the  sni)reme  arbiter, —  the  usage,  in  the 
present  case,  not  of  the  cataloguer  but  of  the  public  in  speaking 
of  subjects. 

/.  I.auyuage. 

100.  When  possible  let  the  heading  be  in  English,  but  a  foreign  word 

may  be  used  when  no  English  word  expresses  the  subject  of  a 
book. 

Ei.  £corcheurs,  Emigres,  Raskolnik.  Many  terms  of  the  Roman  or  civil  law  are 
not  exactly  translatahle  ;  neither  Fanlt  nor  Crime  gives  the  idea  of  Culpa;  the  Dehitor 
iuops  is  not  our  hankrupt  or  insolvent ;  he  would  have  been  very  glad  to  have  the 
privileges  of  a  hankrupt.  Some  other  technical  terms,  and  some  names  of  bodies, 
sects,  events,  slionld  be  left  in  the  original  language.  The  use  of  the  Latin  nann-s  of 
Greek  deities  (Jupiter,  Neptune,  Venus,  in  place  of  Zeus,  Poseidon,  Aphrodite)  is  a 
manifest  inaccuracy.  Yet  it  may  be  defended  on  the  plea:  (1)  that  the  Latin  naim  s 
are  at  present  more  familiar  to  the  majority  of  readers;  (2)  that  it  would  be  diflimlt 
to  divide  the  literature,  or  if  it  were  done,  many  books  must  be  put  both  under  Zeus 
and  Jupiter.  Poseidon  and  Neptune,  etc.,  filling  considerable  room  with  no  jirac- 
tical  advantage. 

On  the  language  of  place  names,  see  $  33, 35. 

g.  Sipionyma. 

101.  Of  two  exactly  synonymous  names  choose  one  and  make  a  reference 

from  the  other. 

Ex.  Poisons  and  Toxicology;  Antiquities  and  Archseology ;  Insects  and  Ento- 
mology;  Warming  and  Heating;  Pacific  Ocean  and  South  Sea  There  are  some 
cases  in  which  sep;irat<'  headings  (Hydraulics  and  Mechanics  of  Fluids),  which  can 
not  be  combined,  cover  books  almost  identical  in  character,  so  that  the  ini|uirer  must 
look  under  both.  This  is  an  evil ;  but  there  is  no  reason  ft)r  increasing  the  evil  by 
separating  headings  that  are  really  synonymous,  certainly  not  for  dividing  a  subject 
in  this  way  for  verbal  causes  and  giving  no  hint  that  it  has  been  divided. 

It  sometimes  happens  that  a  ditVerent  name  is  given  to  the  same  subject  at  difterent 
periods  of  its  history.  When  the  method  of  stinly  of  the  subject,  or  its  objects,  or  the 
ideas  connected  with  it,  are  very  ditVerent  at  those  two  periods  (as  in  tlie  c:ise  of 
Alchemy  and  Chemistry),  of  course"  there  must  be  two  headings.  There  is  not  so 
much  reason  for  sejjarating  Fluxions  ami  Differential  calculus,  which  differ  only  in 
notation.  And  there  is  no  reason  at  all  for  separating  Natural  Philosophy  and 
4892  Li i 


50  SUBJECT-ENTRY. 

Physics.  I  am  loltl  that  medical  nomenclature  lias  cbauged  largely  three  times 
within  the  present  century.  How  is  the  cataloguer,  unless  ho  happens  to  be  a  med- 
ical uiau,  to  escape  occasionally  putting  works  on  one  disease  under  three  different 
heads  f 

To  arrive  at  a  decision  in  any  case  one  must  balance  the  advantages  on  the  one 
hand  of  having  all  that  relates  to  a  subject  together,  and  on  the  other  of  making  that 
economical  conjunction  of  title-entry  and  of  sul)ject-entry  which  comes  from  follow- 
ing the  titles  of  the  books  in  selecting  names  for  their  subjects. 

In  choosing  between  synonymous  headings  prefer  the  one  that  — 

(a)  is  most  familiar  to  that  class  of  people  who  consult  the  library  ;  a  natural  his- 
tory society  will  of  course  use  the  scientific  name,  a  town  library  would  equally  of 
course  use  the-  ])oi)ular  name  —  Butterflies  rather  than  Lepidoptera,  Horse  rather 
than  Bquus  caballus.  But  the  scientific  may  be  preferable  when  the  common  name 
is  ambiguous  or  of  ill-defined  extent. 

{b)  is  most  used  in  other  catalogues. 

(c)  has  fewest  meanings  other  than  the  sense  in  which  it  is  to  be  employed. 

{(l)  comes  first  in  the  alphabet,  so  that  the  reference  from  the  other  can  be  made  to 
the  exact  page  of  the  catalogue. 

(e)  brings  the  subject  into  the  neighborhood  of  other  related  subjects.  It  is,  for 
instance,  often  an  advantage  to  have  near  any  art  or  science  the  lives  of  those  who 
have  been  famous  in  it;  as.  Art,  Artists;  Painters,  Painting;  Historians,  History. 
If  one  were  hesitating  between  Conjuring,  Juggling,  Legerdemain,  Prestidigita- 
tion, and  Sleight  of  hand,  it  would  be  in  favor  of  Conjuring  or  Prestidigitation 
that  one  could  enter  by  their  side  Conjurors  or  Prestidigitators. 

Sometimes  one  and  sometimes  another  of  these  reasons  must  prevail.  Each  case  is 
to  be  decided  on  its  own  merits. 

102.  In  choosing  between  two  names  not  exactlj'  synonymous,  consider 

whether  there  is  difference  enough  to  require  separate  entry  ;  if 
not,  treat  them  as  synonymous. 
Ex.  Culture  and  Civilization,  Culture  and  Education. 

103.  Of  two  subjects  exactly  opposite  choose  one  and  refer  from  the  other. 
Ex.  Temperance  and  Intemperance,  Free  Trade  and  Protection,  Authority  (in 

religion)  and  Private  judgment.  Reasons  for  choice  the  same  as  between  synonyms. 
To  this  rule  there  may  be  exceptions.  It  may  be  best  that  works  on  theism  and 
atheism  should  be  put  together,  perhaps  under  the  heading  God ;  but  Theists  and 
Atheists  as  bodies  of  religious  believers  ought  certainly  to  go  under  those  two  head- 
ings, and  therefore  it  is  appropriate  to  put  works  in  defence  of  theistic  doctrines  and 
those  in  defence  of  atheistic  doctrines  under  Theism  and  Atheism. 

h.  Suhjcct-u-ord  and  subject. 

104.  Enter  books  under  the  word  which  best  expresses  their  subject, 

whether  it  occurs  in  the  title  or  not. 
It  is  strange  that  the  delusion  ever  should  have  arisen  that  "  a  catalogue  must  of 
necessity  confine  itself  to  titles  only  of  books."  If  it  does,  it  can  not  enter  that  very 
considerable  number  of  books  whose  titles  make  no  mention  or  only  an  obscure  or  a 
defective  mention  of  their  subjects  {^  85),  and  it  is  at  the  mercy  of  deceptive  titles 
(e.  g.,  Channing's  sermon  "  On  a  future  life,"  which  treats  of  Heaven  only,  Irviug's 
History  of  New  York,  Gulliver's  Travels).  A  man  who  is  looking  up  the  history  of 
the  Christian  church  does  not  care  in  the  least  whether  the  books  on  it  were  called  by 
their  authors  church  histories  or  ecclesiastical  histories;  and  the  cataloguer  also 
should  not  care  if  he  can  avoid  it.  The  title  rules  the  title-catalogue;  let  it  confine 
itself  to  that  province. 


COMPOUND    SUIJJIXT-NAMLS.  51 

i.   lloinoiitjms. 

105.  Ciircfully  separate  the  entries  on  «litVereiit  subjects  beariii;^  tin* 

same  name,  or  take  some  otlirr  lieadin};  in  place  of  one  of  the 

lionionyiiis. 
E,  g.,  it  will  not  do  to  confound  works  on  tlio  v«';;etul)l»!  kin;;doin  with  works  on 
vegetaltles,  in  tho  sense  of  kitciicn-Kardi-n  plants ;  t  Im  first  would  l»«i  propfri y  (Mitt-ri-d 
unilor  Botany.  Ottley'a  "  Italian  school  of  design  "  or  u  work  on  "  W.ij^nrr  and  his 
scliool"  arc  not  to  bo  put  under  Education.  Special  care  is  of  course  ncuded  with 
forcif^n  titlci;  tht*  cataloguer  may  bo  easily  misled  by  the  sound  if  he  is  not  on  his 
;.;uard.  I  have  seen  Lancelot's  "  Jardin  des  racines  j.;rec(iues"  classed  with  works  on 
Gardening,  Stephanus  Byzantinus  "De  Dodono  [urbe  Molossidis]  "  put  umler  Dodo 
with  a  reference  from  Ornithology,  and  Garnier  '"Sur  I'autorit^  paternelle"  among 
the  works  on  the  Chri.«ttian  Fathers. 

j.   Compound  suhject-namea. 

106.  The  name  of  a  subject  may  be  — 
(rt)  A  sin;j;le  word,  as  Botany,  Ethics. 

Or  several  words  taken  together,  either — 

(6)  A  noun  preceded  by  au  adjective,  as  Ancient  history,  Capital  punishment, 
Moral  philosophy. 

((■)  A  MOM II  pircetled  by  another  noun  used  like  an  adjective,  as  Death  penalty, 
Flow^er  fertilization. 

{d)  A  noun  (■(•iiuccted  with  another  by  a  preposition,  as  Penalty  of  death,  Ferti- 
lization of  flowers. 

(«')  A  noun  connected  with  another  by  "and,"  as  Ancients  and  moderns. 

(/)  A  sentence,  as  in  the  titles  "Sur  la  rfegle  Paterua  paternis  materna  ma- 
ternis"  and  "Do  usir  paroemiae  juris  Germanic!,  Der  Letzte  thut  die  Thiire  zu;'' 
where  the  whole  phrase  would  bo  the  subject  of  the  dissertation. 

There  arc  tliree  main  courses  open: 

(I)  We  can  consider  the  subject  to  be  the  phrase  as  it  reads,  as  Agricultural  chem- 
istry. Survival  of  the  fittest,  which  is  the  only  possible  method  in  (<i)  ami  uiidoulit- 
edly  the  best  method  in  (c),  (c),  and  (/),  and  in  most  cases  of  proper  names,  aa 
Democratic  Party,  White  Mountains,  Missouri  River  (but  see  $  26). 

(-2)  We  can  make  our  entry  in  {b),  (c),  and  (rf)  uuder  what  wo  consider  the  most 
si^^niticant  wonl  of  the  phrase,  inverting  the  order  of  the  words  if  necessary;  as, 
Probabilities  (instearl  of  Theory  of  probabilities);  Earth,  Ki^uri'  of  the;  Species, 
Ori^'in  of  the.  the  word  Orij^iti  hem  beitu,'  hy  itself  of  no  account  ;  Alimentary  canal, 
Canal  being  by  itself  of  n«>  account;  Political  economy.  Political  being  hen-  the  maio 
word  and  economy  by  itself  having  a  meaning  entirely  ditlerent  from  that  which  it 
has  in  this  connection. 

(,3)  Wo  can  take  the  phrase  as  it  reads  in  (c),  (d),  (e),  and  (/).  but  make  a  special 
rule  for  a  noun  i)receded  by  an  adjective  (6),. A>«'.  'hat  all  such  phrases  shall  when 
possible  be  reduced  to  their  e<iMivaleut  nouns,  as  Moral  philosophy  to  Ethics  or  to 
Morals,  Intellectual  or  Mental  philosophy  to  Intellect  or  Mind.  Natural  phi- 
losophy lo  Physics.  Sanitary  science  lo  Hygiene,  Scientific  men  to  Scientists, 
Social  science  to  Sociology;  and,  necondly,  that  in  all  cases  where  such  reduction 
is  impossible  the  words  shall  be  iuvert«-d  and  the  noun  taken  as  the  heading,  as 
Chamistry,  Agricultural;  Chemistry,  Organi<-:  Anatomy,  Comparative ;  History, 
Ancient;  History,  Kcclesiastical ;  History,  Modern;  History,  Natural;  History, 
Sacred." 

•  This  rule  is  propoiioil  by  Mr.  Sctiwartz  nod  carried  oat,  with  some  exceptions,  in  his  catalogue  of 
the  Now  York  Apprentice.^'  Library. 


.)-  COMPOUxND    SUHJECT-NAMES. 

The  objection  to  (1)  is  that  it  may  bo  pushed  to  an  absurd  extent  in  the  case  (b). 
A  man  might  phiusibly  assert  that  Ancient  E<5ypt  is  a  distinct  8ui>ject  from  Modern 
Ejjypf,  liavinji  a  recognized  name  of  its  own,  as  much  so  as  Ancient  history,  and 
might  therefore  (hMuaud  that  the  one  shouhl  be  put  under  A  (Ancient)  and  the  other 
nnih'r  M  (Modern)*  and  similar  claims  might  be  made  in  the  case  of  all  subject-names 
to  which  an  adjective  is  ever  prehxed,  which  would  result  in  filling  the  catalogue 
with  a  host  of  unexpected  and  therefore  useless  headings.  Nevertheless  the  rule  seems 
to  me  the  best  if  due  discrimination  be  used  in  choosing  subject-names. 

The  objection  to  (2)  is  that  there  would  often  be  disagreement  as  to  what  is  "  the 
most  important  word  of  the  phrase,"  so  that  the  rule  would  be  no  guide  to  the  reader. 
But  in  connection  with  (1)  and  as  a  guard  agaiust  its  excesses  (2)  has  its  value.  The 
combined  rule  might  read  : 

107.  Enter  a  compound  subject  name  by  its  first  word,  inverting  the 
plirase  only  when  some  other  word  is  decidedly  more  significant 
or  is  often  used  alone  with  the  same  meaning  as  the  whole  name. 

Ex.  Special  providences  and  Providence,  Proper  names  and  Names. 
It  must  be  confessed  that  this  rule  is  somewhat  vague  and  that  it  would  be  often  of 
doubtful  application,  and  that  on  the  other  hand  (3)  is  clear  and  easy  to  follow.     But 
there  are  objections  to  (3).     It  would  put  a  great  many  subjects  under  words  where 
nobody  unacquainted  with  the  rule  would  expect  to  tiud  them. 
Works  on  the  would  hardly  be  looked  for  under 

Alimentary  canal  Canal. 

Dangerous  classes  Classes. 

Digestive  organs  Organs. 

Dispensing  power  Power. 

Domestic  economy  Economy. 

Ecclesiastical  polity  Polity. 

Final  causes  Causes. 

Gastric  juice  Juice. 

Laboring  classes  Classes. 

Military  art  Art. 

Parliamentary  practice  Practice. 

Political  econemy  Economy. 

Solar  system  System. 

Suspended  animation  Animation. 

Zodiacal  light  Light. 

Another  objection  is  that  in  most  cases  the  noun  expresses  a  class,  the  adjective 
limits  the  noun,  and  makes  the  name  that  of  a  subclass  (as  International  law.  Remit- 
tent disease.  Secret  societies,  Sumptuary  laws,  Typhoid  fever,  Venemous  insects, 
Whig  i^arty.  Woolen  manufactures),  and  to  adopt  the  noun  (the  class)  as  the  heading 
is  to  violate  the  fundamental  principle  of  the  dictionary  catalogue.  The  rule  is 
urged,  however,  not  on  the  ground  of  propriety  or  congruity  with  the  rest  of  the  sys- 
tem but  simply  as  convenient,  as  a  purely  arbitrary  rule  which  once  understood  will 
be  a  certain  guide  for  the  reader.  "If  he  is  told  that  he  shall  always  find  a  subject 
arranged  under  its  substantive  form  and  never  under  an  adjective  he  can  hardly  fail 
to  find  it.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  he  is  told  that  Comparative  anatomy  is  under  C 
and  Morbid  anatomy  under  A,  that  Physical  geography  is  under  P  and  Mathematical 
geography  under  G,  he  will  only  be  bewildered,  and  accuse  the  cataloguer  of  making 
distinctions  that  it  requires  too  much  study  to  appreciate.  Theoretically  the  distinc- 
tions may  be  justified,  but  practically  the  simpler  way  of  using  the  noun  only  is  more 

*  Which  would  be  much  like  putting  Williams's  "Shakespeare's  Youth"  under  Youthful  Shake- 
speare.   Individuals  should  not  be  divided. 


COMPOUND    SirUJECT-NAMKS,  .53 

easily  jj^raspeil  l>y  tho  coiiiiiioii  luinil.     And  tUo  Hyutoraof  clasaifyiut;  naiiiOH  under  the 
Huniiiinu  i.s  j)r<)ci.sely  analogon.s  ;  *   lima 

Smith,  JdIiu, 

Smith,  Josi'ph, 

Smith,  William, 
wciiis  to  nil"  ti)  bi;  ananjjod  on  tlio  sanio  i)rinciplo  as 

History,  Ancient, 

History,  KLi-lt'.siastical, 

History,  ModtMii, 

History,  Siuivd.'' t 

Tiiis  is  plan-sible.  If  the  public  conld  ever  got  aa  accustomed  to  the  inversion  of 
subject-names  as  they  are  to  tho  inversion  of  personal  names  the  rule  would  undoubt- 
edly be  very  convenient ;  but  it  mi;j;ht  be  dillicult  to  teach  the  rule.  The  cataloj^ue 
treatment  of  personal  names  is  familiar  to  every  ou<(,  because  it  is  used  in  all  cata- 
lof^ues,  dictionaries,  directories,  and  indoxt^s.  lint  there  are  less  than  three  hundred 
subject-names  consistinj;  of  adjective  and  noun  in  a  catalogue  which  has  probably 
over  00,000  names  of  persons.  The  use  of  the  rule  would  be  so  infrequiMit  that  it 
would  not  remain  in  the  memory.  And  it  should  be  observed  that  the  confusion 
caused  by  the  ditVerent  treatment  of  Morbid  anatomy  and  Comparative  anatomy 
would  only  occur  to  a  man  who  was  examining  the  system  of  the  catalogue,  and  not 
to  the  ordinary  user.  A  man  looks  in  the  catalogue  for  treatises  on  Comparative 
anatomy;  he  liuds  it,  where  he  (irst  looks,  under  C.  Ho  does  not  know  anything 
alxiut  thedisi)osition  of  works  on  Morbid  anatomy,  and  is  not  confused  by  it.  Another 
man  looks  for  works  on  Morbid  anatomy  and  under  M  he  is  referred  to  Anatomy, 
Morbid,  t  He  finds  there  what  he  wants  and  does  not  stop  to  notice  that  Comparative 
anatomy  is  not  there,  but  under  C,  conse(iuently  he  is  not  puzzled  by  that.  And 
even  those  who  are  taking  a  general  survey  of  all  that  the  library  possesses  on  anatomy 
would  probatdy  be  too  intent  upon  their  oi)ject  to  pause  and  criticise  the  arrange- 
ment, provided  the  reference  from  Anatomy  to  Comparative  Anatomy  were  per- 
fectly clear,  so  that  they  ran  no  risk  of  overlooking  it  and  had  no  ditficuUy  in  tiuding 
the  subject  referred  to. 

The  speciHc-entry  rule  is  one  which  the  reader  of  a  dictionary  catalogue  must  learn 
if  he  Is  to  use  it  with  any  facility;  it  is  much  better  that  he  should  not  be  burdened 
with  learning  an  exception  to  this,  which  the  noun  rule  certainly  is. 

It  ought  also  to  be  noticed  that  this  plan  does  not  escapt*  all  the  dirtlculties  of  the 
others.  In  reducing,  for  instance,  Intellectual  i)hilosophy  or  Moral  philosophy,  will 
you  say  Mind  or  Intellect,  Morals  or  Kthics?  And  the  reader  will  not  always  know 
what  the  equivalent  noun  is,  — that  Physics  =  Natural  Philosoidiy,  for  example,  and 
Hygiene^Sanitary  science.  Nor  does  it  help  us  at  all  to  decide  whether  to  prefer 
Botanical  morphology  or  Morphological  botany.  These  dilHculties,  which  beset  any 
rule,  are  only  mentioned  here  lest  too  much  should  be  expected  froni  a  plan  whii-h  at 
first  sight  seems  to  solve  all  problems. 

The  practice  of  reducing  a  name  to  the  substantive  form  is  often  a  gooil  one;  but 
shoulil  not  l)e  insisted  upon  as  an  iuvarial)le  rule,  as  it  might  lead  to  the  adoption  of 
some  very  out-of-the-way  names.  .\s  a  mere  matter  of  form  Xebuhe  is  to  be  preferred 
for  a  hea<ling  to  Nebular  hypothesis.  Pantheism  to  Pantheistic  theory,  Lyceums  to 
Lyceum  system,  etc. 


'  But  if  aoalogiott  are  to  have  any  wi-iKht,  why  should  we  follnw  tliat  of  naraen  of  p«t»od«.  which  are 
inviTtecl,  more  than  that  of  names  of  pliices,  which  are  not !  We  i\o  not  say  Mountain*,  White; 
Regions,  Ant.irctic;  Sea,  Rod;  why  Hlioiild  wo  say  Anatomy,  Coinp.»rativo ;  Arts,  i1ul«,  Sjrsleoi, 
IJrunoiiiaii  1  —  C. 

t  Sclnvartz.  Hlightly  altered. 

tTliis  i.M  on  the  supposition  that  Murhid  Anatomy  has  been  considered  by  tho  catalogacr  not  to  bo 
a  distinct  subject,  entitled  to  a  name  of  its  own. 


54  COMPOUND    SUBJECT-NAMES. 

In  (/>),  ((■),  and  (d)  the  same  subject  can  often  be  named  in  diffenMit  ways;  as, 

(b)  Capital  punishment.  Floral  fertilization. 

(c)  Death  penalty.  Flower  fertilization. 
{(i)  Penalty  of  death.                                                Fertilization  of  flowers. 

Is  tlRMi-  any  iniiiciplc  upon  which  the  choice  between  these  three  ean  be  made,  so 
thiit  the  eataioffuer  shall  always  enter  books  on  the  Haine  .subject  under  the  same 
heading?  I  see  none.  When  there  is  any  decided  usage  (i.  e.,  custom  of  the  public 
to  designate  the  subjects  by  one  of  the  names  rather  than  bj'  the  others)  let  it  be 
foUowed;  that  is  to  say,  if,  in  the  examples  given  above,  the  more  customary  phrases 
are  Capital  punishment,  Fertilization  of  flowers,  then  we  must  use  those  names, 
preferring  in  the  tirst  case  the  name  which  begins  with  an  adjective  to  its  equivalent 
beginning  with  a  noun,  and  in  the  other  the  nan1c  beginning  with  a  noun  to  its 
equivalent  beginning  with  an  adjective.  As  is  often  the  case  in  language,  usage  will 
be  found  not  to  follow  any  uniform  course. 

If  usage  manifests  no  preference  for  either  name,  we  can  not  employ  the  two  in- 
differently ;  we  must  choose  one  ;  and  some  slight  guide  to  choice  in  certain  cases  may 
perhaps  be  found.  On  examination  of  the  phrases  above,  it  appears  that  they  are  not 
all  of  the  same  composition.  In  Comparative  anatomy,  Capital  punishment,  the 
noun  is  the  name  of  a  general  subject,  one  of  whose  subdivisions  is  indicated  by  the 
adjective.  And  Capital,  Comparative  have  only  this  limiting  power;  they  do  not 
imply  any  general  subject.  But  Ancient  history,  Mediaeval  history,  etc.,  may  be 
viewed  not  only  in  this  way  (History  the  class,  Ancient  history  and  Mediieval  history  . 
the  subdivisions)  but  also  as  equivalent  to  Antiquity :  Hintorii,  Middle  Ages :  History 
(as  we  say  Europe  :  Historii),  in  which  case  the  adjectives  (Ancient,  Medueval)  imply 
a  subject  and  the  noun  (History)  indicates  the  aspect  in  which  the  subject  is  viewed. 
Here,  then,  we  choose  Ancient  and  Medieeval  as  the  heading,  on  the  principle  of  ij  68. 
So  in  (fe)  and  (c)  each  of  the  nouns  in  turn  may  be  considered  as  expressing  the  more 
general  idea  and  the  other  as  limiting  it ;  e.g.,  we  can  have  various  headings  for  Death 
considered  in  ditiereut  lights,  among  others  as  a  penalty  ;  and  we  can  have  headings 
of  various  sorts  of  penalties,  among  others  death.  It  is  evident  that  this  collection 
of  penalties  taken  together  makes  np  a  class,  and  therefore  this  belongs  to  a  style  of 
entry  which  the  dictionary  catalogue  is  expected  to  avoid;  but  the  series  of  headings 
beginning  with  the  word  Death  would  not  make  a  class,  being  merely  different  aspects 
of  the  same  thing,  not  diflferent  subordinate  parts  of  the  same  subject. 

When  an  adjective  implies  the  name  of  a  place,  as  in  French  literature,  German 
philosophy,  Greek  art,  it  is  mo,st  convenient  on  th&  whole  to  make  the  subject  a 
division  under  the  country.  In  this  way  all  that  relates  to  a  country  is  brought  to- 
gether and  arranged  in  one  alphabetical  series  of  subjects  under  its  name  (see  §  258). 
It  is  not  of  the  slighest  importance  that  this  introduces  the  appearance  of  an  alpha- 
betico-classed  catalogue,  so  long  as  the  main  object  of  a  dictionary,  ready  reference, 
is  attained.  Of  course  Hebrew  language,  Latin  language,  Latin  literature,  and 
Punic  language  can  not  be  so  treated;  it  is  the  custom  and  is  probably  best  not  to 
put  English  language  and  English  literature  under  England,  as  they  have  extended 
far  bevond  the  place  of  their  origin;  books  on  the  language  spoken  in  the  United 
States  <'-o  with  those  on  the  English  language  except  the  few  on  Americanisms, 
which  are  .separated,  like  accounts  of  any  other  dialect.  Our  literature  can  not  be 
treateil  satisfactorily.  It  is  never  called  United  States  literature,  and  no  one  would 
expect  to  find  it  under  United  States.  On  the  other  hand  the  name  American  prop- 
erly should  include  Canadian  literature  and  all  the  Spanish  literature  of  South  Amer- 
ica.    It  is,  however,  the  best  name  we  have. 

A-.  Double  entry. 

108.  It  is  plain  that  almost  every  book  will  appear  several  times  in  the  catalogue: 
Under  author,  if  he  is  known. 
Under  first  word  of  title,  if  the  book  is  anonymous  or  the  title  is  memorable. 


I)()i:i{Li:    srU.JKCT-K.N  TKV.  55 

Under  oacli  distinct  subject. 

Under  foitii-heiidiii;^  i"  niauy  cases. 

Under  iiiiiiiy  other  lieadiiiji;.s  by  way  of  cross-reference. 

And  this  is  necessary  if  the  various  objects  eiiiinierated  on  p.  8  are  to  be  ai  lamed 
qni(!kiy.  But  iiiasriuich  as  tlie  extent  and  l  iierefore  tlie  cost  of  tlie  catuhi;;ne  increases 
in  direct  proportion  with  the  mnltiplieation  of  entries,  it  becomes  worth  wliihi  to 
inqniro  whether  some  of  these  can  not  bo  dispensed  with  l>y  devices  wliieh  will  suit 
the  inquirer  as  well  or  nearly  as  well.  Such  economies  are  mentioned  in  ^^  'J'J-U?, 
li:?,  111. 
109.  Enter  a  polytopical  book  uiuUt  each  (iistiiict  siibjoct. 

Ex.  "An  art  journey  in  Italy  and  Greece  ;"  "The  history  of  France  and  England 
compared;"  "Handbook  ofdraw^ing  and  engraving." 

But  some  of  the  subjects  may  be  omitted  if  their  treatment  is  so  sii;;lit  that  it  is 
not  worth  while  to  take  any  notice  of  them,  which  is  occasionally  the  case  even  when 
they  are  mentioned  on  the  title-paRC.  Sometimes  an  analytical  can  take  the  place  of 
a  full  entry  for  the  less  important  topics.  The  points  to  be  considered  arc:  ( I )  Would 
this  book  be  of  any  use  to  one  who  is  lookinjj  up  this  subject!  (2)  Is  the  entry  or 
reference  necessary  as  a  subject-word  entry  or  reference  (that  is,  to  one  who  is  looking 
for  this  bookH 

Some  books  are  polytopical  which  do  not  appear  to  be  so  at  lirst  siyht.  A  collection 
of  portraits  of  Germans,  for  example,  has  the  subject  Qermaus,  and  so  far  as  it  has 
any  artistic  value  mifjlit  be  (pioted  as  om^  of  the  illustrative  works  under  the  subject 
Portrait  painting  or  Portrait  engraving.*  If  the  liiograjihical  interest  were  all, 
the  <;enerai  collections  would  be  put  under  Portraits  and  the  national  collections  (an 
"American  portrait  gallery,"  "Zwei  Hundert  Bildnisse  deiitscher  Miinner")  under 
countries,  with  references  from  the  general  heading  to  the  various  couutriea,  as 
directed  in  ^  07.  If  the  artistic  interest  were  alone  considered,  the  general  titles 
would  l)e  pub^uuder  Portraits,  and  collections  by  painters  or  engravers  of  particular 
schools  would  be  juit  under  the  names  of  the  schools;  which  would  amount  to  nearly 
the  same  arrangement  as  the  previous. 

So  in  regard  to  Hymns,  there  are  three  sources  of  interest,  the  devotional,  the 
literary  (which  would  lead  to  national  subdivision),  and  the  denominational ;  a  sim- 
ilar treatment  would  place  general  collections  under  Hymns,  collections  in  any  lan- 
guage under  the  national  heading,  with  either  double  entry  under  the  name  of  the 
denomination  or  a  reference  from  that  to  the  national  heading,  specifying  whicli  of 
the  collections  there  enumerated  belong  to  the  denomination.  But  the  <levotional 
interest  so  decidedly  preponderates  that  it  has  been  customary  to  collect  everything 
under  the  form-heading  Hymns. 

In  Full,  almanacs  will  have  forin-entry  under  Almanacs  and  subject-entry  uiuler 
the  district  about  which  they  give  information. 

Sometimes  if  an  ordinary  reference  he  made  from  one  subject  to  another  th"  title 
referred  to  can  not  easily  be  found.  A  reference  from  Architecture  to  Spain .  Archi- 
tecliire,  is  convenient,  but  a  reference  to  the  same  heading  from  Gothic  architecture 
is  not,  because  it  obliges  the  incjuirer  to  look  through  the  whole  list  of  Spanish  .archi- 
tecture to  find  perhaps  one  title  on  the  Gothic.  In  like  manner  there  w<uihl  be  few 
entries  of  works  on  vases  under  most  countries,  so  that  u«>  division  f'ainn  would  be 
made,  and  the  inquirer  must  search  for  his  book  among  a  number  of  titles  on  Art. 
And  if  the  reference  were  made  th(<  other  way —  from  the  country  to  Vases  —  the  in- 
quirer would  V)e  in  the  sa'iie  plight.  There  is  no  need,  however,  of  double  entry.  If 
merely  the  name  of  the  partieiil.ir  author  or  authors  referred  to  under  any  subject  l»e 
inserted  in  the  refen'iice,  the  wlioje  ditVieulty  vanishes. 

Kt.  Gothic  architecture.    [Various  titles.]   See  tihoSpain;  Jrchitectttre(STRKKT). 

It  is  to  be  noted  tliat  herein  Short  has  a  great  advantage;  it  does  not  lose  no  ninoh 


It  also  bclonxa  to  the  lU-n  Portraits,  liiK  ttiat  is  io  tlio  Form  cataluKUP,  cot  tlio  SubJect-cat*lo)(a«. 


56  DOUBLE    SUB.IECT-ENTKY.       MISCELLANIES. 

by  double  entry  and  can  atl'onl  to  make  it  in  many  cases  where  Metliiun  must  for 
economy  put  the  reader  to  some  trouble.  The  notes,  too,  in  such  catalogues  as  the 
Quincy  or  the  Boston  Public  history-list  afford  a  couveuient  way  of  briefly  inserting 
considerable  double  entry  where  it  is  thought  expedient  witlioutany  apparent  incon- 
sistency. 

110.  If  a  book  [)uriK)rts  to  treat  of  several  subjects,  which  together  make 

the  wliole  or  a  great  part  of  oue  more  general,  it  may  be  put  either 
under  each  of  the  special  subjects,  or  under  the  general  subject, 
and  in  the  latter  case  it  may  or  u)ay  not  have  analytical  refer- 
ences from  the  specific  subjects,  according  as  the  treatises  are  more 
or  less  distinct  and  more  or  less  important. 
E.  g,,  "A  treatise  on  anatomy,  physiology,  pathology,  and  therapeutics,"  which 
iliight  be  put  under  each  of  those  four  headings,  ought  rather  to  be  entered  under 
Medicine,  in  which  case,  if  the  separate  parts  are  by  different  authors,  analyticals 
might  very  well  be  made  under  the  four  headings;   and  at  any  rate  an  analytical 
under  the  first  would  occasionally  be  useful  as  equivalent  to  a  subject-word  reference. 

111.  When  a  considerable  number  of  books  might  all  be  entered  under 

the  same  two  or  more  headings,  entry  under  one  will  be  sufficient, 
with  a  reference  from  the  others. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  iu  printing  it  were  noticed  that  under  any  subject  only  one 
or  two  titles  were  covered  by  the  cross-references  to  countries  (as  from  Sculpture  to 
Greece,  Italy,  Denmark'),  it  may  be  thought  that  double  entry  under  nation  and 
sui)ject  would  be  preferable.  A  man  is  provoked  if  he  turns  to  another  part  of  the 
catalogue  to  hud  there  only  one  title.  However,  it  should  be  remembered  that  one 
or  two  titles  repeated  under  each  of  many  subjects  will  amount  to  a  considerable 
number  in  the  whole.  The  want  of  uuiformity  produced  by  this  mixture  of  reference 
and  double  entry  is  of  less  iraportauce. 

112.  When  there  are  many  editions  of  a  book,  it  is  allowable  to  merely 

refer  under  the  subject  to  the  author-entry.  In  a  college  library, 
for  instance,  the  full  entry  of  all  the  editions  of  the  classics  under 
their  appropriate  subjects  (as  of  the  Georgics  under  Agriculture, 
of  Thucydides  under  Greek  history,  and  Polybius  under  Roman 
history)  would  be  a  waste  of  room ;  it  is  enough  to  mention  the 
best  edition  and  refer  for  other  editions  and  translations  to  the 
author's  name. 

/.  Miscellaneous  rules  and  examples. 

113.  Trials  relating  to  a  vessel  should  bei)ut  under  its  name;  Short  would 

make  no  other  entry.     Exploring  expeditious  or  voyages  in  a 
named  vessel  should  have  at  least  a  reference  from  the  name. 
Ex.  Jeune  Eugenie.     Mason,  W.  P.     Report.     Boston,  1822.     8". 
Herald,  H.  M.  S.,  Voyage  of  the.     See  Seemann,  B. 

114.  A  civil  action  is  to  be  entered  under  that  party  to  it  who  is  first 

named  on  the  title-page,  with  a  reference  from  the  other. 

In  Short  (and  in  Medium  and  Full,  if  the  report  is  anonymous)  this  will  be  the  only 
entry, — unless  the  case  illustrates  some  subject,  iu  which  case  entry  or  reference  under 
that  will  be  needed.     Patent  cases  furnish  the  most  common  examples  of  subject -entry 


MISCKLLAXIES.       SI'IJ.IKCT    KKFKKKN'CES.  57 

of  trials,  hut  ev(»ry<>iii'  will  rointMiihiT  trials  in  wlii(;li  points  of  ecclcHiastiral  law,  of 
nitnlical  jiniapriideiu'e,  otc,  have  heen  so  I'lilly  ilisc  ii.s.si-il  ;ih  to  roinpiil  rnf<T«'n<!i)  from 
those  snhjeotH. 

115.  Kilter  "  Review  of,"  "  Remaiks  on,"  "  <  'omment.s  on  "  tmder  tin';  au- 
thor leviewed  (as  a  coiiihiiied  siibjeet  ami  .sul)je<;t-\vor«l  entry), 
and,  if  worth  while,  under  tlie  subject  of  the  hook  reviewed. 

1 1(».  Tiio  distinction  between  Bibliography  and  Literary  history  is,  with 
reference  to  the  books  on  those  subjects,  a  di.stinction  of  more 
or  less;  the  two  classes  of  books  run  into  each  other  ami  it  is  hard 
to  draw  the  line  between  them. 

117.  Any  theoIo<;ical  library  will  i)robal)ly  «'ontain  books  whi(di  treat  — 

(1)  of  the  four  last  thinj^s,  death,  Jiidj^ment,  heaven,  antl  hell. 

(2)  of  the  nature  of  the  life  after  death,  a  iniich  more  exttMisive  tiues- 

tion  than  (t). 

(3)  whether  there  is  any  future  life,  without  retjard  to  its  nature. 

(4)  of  the  retribution  after  death  for  the  {^ood  ami  for  the  evil  deeds 

<loiie  in  this  life. 

(5)  whether  there  is  any  retribution  for  evil  in  a  future  life. 
(G)  what  is  its  nature. 

(7)  how  lon^ does  it  last 

Here  aro  seven  (inestioiis  on  nearly  the  same  subject-matter,  and  there  are  six  names 
for  them.  (It  will  be  found,  by  the  way,  that  althoufjh  there  are  some  books  treating 
of  each  separately,  many  of  the  works  overlap  as  the  sulijeets  do,  and  that  the  titles 
are  no  guide  whatever  to  the  contents  of  the  books.)  Two  main  courses  are  open  to 
tht>  cataloguer  : 

1st.  To  make  one  heading,  as  Future  life,  cover  the  whole,  with  subdivisions.  In 
this  way  the  catalogue  becomes  classed  to  a  certain  extent.  No  matter,  if  that  is  on 
the  whole  the  more  convenient  arrangement ; 

2d.  More  consistently,  to  make  four  headings:  Eschatology  (covering  the  lst(|nes- 
tion,  fonr  last  things,  with  references  to  each  of  them).  Future  life  (its  natiire,  in- 
cluding retribution  both  for  good  and  evil,  'id  and  4th  (luestious).  Future  punishment 
(existence,  nature,  duration,  and  so  including  universalism,  «  ith  n'ffretues  to  Turga- 
tory  and  Hell,  covering  the  5th,  Gth,  and  7th  questions),  Immortality  (is  there  auyf 
3d  question). 

B.  Entries  consideued  as  parts  of  a  whole. 

118.  The  systematic  catalogue  undertakes  to  exhibit  a  scientilie  arrangement  of  the 
books  in  a  library  in  the  belief  that  it  will  thus  best  aid  those  who  wouhl  pursue  any 
extensive  or  thorough  study.  The  dictionary  catalogue  sets  out  with  another  oltject 
and  a  different  method,  but  having  attained  that  object  — facility  of  reference— is  at 
liberty  to  try  to  secure  some  of  the  advantages  of  classillcation  an<l  system  in  it.s  own 
way.  Its  subject-entries,  individual,  general,  limited,  extensive,  thrown  together 
without  any  logical  arrangement,  in  most  absurd  proximity  —  Abscess  tollowed  by 
Absenteeism  and  that  l>y  Absolution,  Club  foot  next  to  Clubs,  and  Communion  to 
Communism,  while  Christianity  and  Theology,  Bibliography  and  Literary  his- 
tory are  sei)arated  by  half  the  length  (»f  the  catalogue  —are  a  mass  of  utterly  disron- 
iiected  particles  without  any  relation  to  one  another,  each  useful  in  itself  but  only  by 
itself.  But  by  a  well-<levi.sed  net-work  of  cross- referencts  the  mob  becomes  an  army, 
of  which  each  part  is  capable  of  assisting  many  other  parts.  The  efl'ectivo  force  of 
the  catalogue  is  immensely  increased. 


58  SUBJECT    REFERENCES. 

110.  Make  roforeiices  from  jxeneral  subjects  to  their  various  subordinate 
subjects  and  also  to  coordinate  and  illustrative  subjects. 

Cross-references  should  be  lUiule  by  Full  froui  Classes  of  persons  (Merchants,  Law- 
yers, Artists,  Quakers,  etc.)  to  iudividuals  belonging  to  those  classes;  from  Cities 
to  persons  connected  with  them  by  birth  or  residence,  or  at  least  to  those  who  have 
taken  part  in  the  municipal  afl'airs  or  rendered  the  city  illustrious;  from  Countries 
to  their  colonies,  provinces,  counties,  cities,  etc.  (unless  their  number  is  so  great  or 
the  divisions  are  so  well  known  that  reference  is  useless);  also,  under  the  division 
Ilialorji  to  rulers  and  statesmen,  under  Literature  to  authors,  under  Art  to  artists,  and 
so  on;  from  other  Subjects  to  all  their  parts,  and  to  the  names  of  persons  distin- 
guished for  discoveries  in  them  or  knowledge  of  them.  Short  and  Medium  will  make 
such  of  these  references  as  seem  most  likely  to  be  useful. 

The  construction  of  this  system  may  be  carried  on  simultaneously  with  the  ordinary 
cataloguing  of  the  library,  each  book  as  it  goes  through  the  cataloguer's  bauds  not 
merely  receiving  its  author-  and  subject-entries,  but  also  suggesting  the  appropriate 
cross-reference;  but  when  all  the  books  are  catalogued  the  system  will  not  be  com- 
plete. References  are  needed  not  merely  to  the  specific  from  the  general  but  to  the 
general  from  the  more  general  and  to  that  from  the  most  general.  There  must  be  a 
pyramid  of  references,  and  this  can  be  made  only  by  a  final  revision  after  the  com- 
pletion of  the  cataloguing.  The  best  method  is  to  draw  otf  in  a  single  column  a  list 
of  all  the  subject-headings  that  have  been  made,  to  write  opposite  them  their  includ- 
ing classes  in  a  second  column  and  the  including  classes  of  these  in  a  third  column  ; 
then  to  write  these  classes  as  headings  to  cards  and  under  them  the  subjects  that  stood 
respectively  opposite  to  them  in  the  list,  to  arrange  the  cards  alphabetically,  verify 
the  references,  and  supplement  them  by  thinking  of  all  likely  subordinate  headings 
and  ascertaining  whether  they  are  in  the  catalogue,  and  also  by  considering  what  an 
inquirer  would  like  to  be  told  or  reminded  of  if  he  were  looking  up  the  subject  nnder 
consideration.     In  this  way  a  reasonably  complete  list  may  be  made. 

It  will,  however,  often  happen  that  there  is  no  entry  under  the  including  subject. 
Take  a  simple  instance.  The  catalogue,  we  will  suppose,  contains  twenty  histories 
of  towns  belonging  to  seven  counties  in  Connecticut.  In  the  revision  described  above 
references  have  been  made  both  from  Connecticut  to  these  counties  and  to  the  towns 
from  the  counties,  but  only  three  of  the  counties  have  any  titles  under  them.  The 
others  would  not  make  their  appearance  in  the  catalogue  at  all  if  there  were  no  cross- 
references.  And  as  this  will  happen  continually,  it  follows  that  the  system  will  very 
greatly  increase  the  number  of  headings  and  therefore  the  length  of  the  catalogue. 
Such  fullness  may  be  allowable  in  regard  to  the  state  which  contains  the  library, 
which,  of  course,  should  be  treated  with  exceptional  completeness.  It  may  possibly 
be  worth  while  for  all  the  States  of  the  Union  and  for  England,  bnt  to  attempt  to  do 
the  same  for  all  countries  and  all  subjects  is  too  much.  A  modification  of  the  plan 
must  be  introduced  which  will  make  it  much  less  complete  but  still  useful.  With 
many  subjects  the  next  heading  in  the  ascending  series  must  be  skipped,  and  the 
references  massed  under  one  still  higher  ;  in  the  supposed  case,  for  example,  the  ref- 
erences to  all  the  towns  will  be  made  under  Connecticut  and  under  those  counties 
alone  which  have  any  other  entry  under  them. 

120.  Make  references  occasionally  from  specific  to  general  subjects. 

Of  course  much  information  about  limited  topics  is  to  be  found  in  more  general 
works;  the  very  best  description  of  a  single  plant  or  of  a  family  of  plants  may  per- 
haps be  contained  in  a  botanical  eucycloptedia.  This  fact,  however,  must  be  im- 
})ressed  upon  the  inquirer  in  the  preface  of  the  catalogue  or  in  a  printed  card  giving 
directions  for  its  use;  it  is  out  of  the  question  to  make  all  possible  references  of  the 
ascending  kind.  From  Cathedrals,  for  example,  one  would  naturally  refer  to 
Christian  art  and  to  Ecclesiastical  architecture,  because  works  on  those  subjects 
will  contain  more  or  less  on  cathedrals.     But  so  will  histories  of  architecture  and 


FOKM-KNTKY.  59 

histories  of  English,  Froiich,  (Jeniian,  or  Spanish  arcliitoctnro ;  so  will  tnivcls  in 
Entjhind,  Franuo,  Gerniuny,  Italy,  Spain.  Ami  unyono  who  ilesired  to  tuko  an  ahso- 
Inti'ly  coinplcto  survey  of  the  snliject,  or  who  was  willing  to  spend  unlimited  tinn;  in 
getting  information  on  some  detail,  would  have  to  eonsnlt  such  books.  Yet  tho  cata- 
loguer may  very  excusably  not  think  of  referring  to  tli(»se  subjects,  or  if  he  thinks  of 
it  may  deem  the  connection  too  remote  to  justify  reference,  and  that  he  Mhould  bo 
overloading  the  catalogue  with  what  would  bo  gen<'rally  useless. 

Then*  are  many  things  that  are  seMoni  used,  and  then  |ierhapH  but  for  an  instant, 
and  yet  their  existence  is  justified  because  when  wanted  they  are  indis|tensable,  or 
because  they  make  useful  what  is  otherwise  useless:  a  policy  of  insurance,  life  pre- 
servers in  a  steamer,  the  index  of  a  book,  largo  parts  of  the  catalogue  of  a  Iil)rary, 
among  others  the  cross -re  fere  noes.  Of  such  a  nature,  but  much  less  useful,  more 
easily  dispensed  with,  is  a 

121.  Synoptical  table  of  subjects. 

I  mention  its  possibility  hero;  I  do  not  advise  its  construction,  because  there  is 
little  chance  that  the  result  would  compeusate  for  the  immense  labor. 

IV.  FORM-ENTRY. 

National  entry  has  already  beeu  discussed  under  Subjects  {^  97). 

122.  Make  a  forrn-eutry  for  collections  of  works  in  any  form  of  literature. 

In  the  catalogues  of  libraries  consisting  chielly  of  English  books,  if  it  is  thought 
most  convenient  to  make  form-entries  under  the  headings  Poetry,  Drama,  Fiction,  it 
may  be  done,  because  for  those  libraries  Poetry  is  synonymous  with  English  poetry, 
ami  so  on  ;  but  if  a  library  has  any  considerable  number  of  books  in  foreign  lan- 
guages the  national  classilication  sliould  be  strictly  followed;  that  is  to  say,  entries 
should  be  made  under  Euglish  drama,  English  fiction,  English  poetry,  Latin  po- 
etry, etc.;  only  those  collections  of  plays,  novels,  poems  that  include  specimens  of 
several  literatures  being  put  under  Drama,  Fiction,  Poetry.  Or  the  English  plays, 
novels,  poems,  etc.,  inaj'  be  entered  under  Drama,  Fiction,  I'oetry,  etc.,  and  the  dra- 
matic works,  etc.,  of  foreign  literatures  under  the  names  of  the  several  literature.s. 

The  rule  above  contines  itself  to  collections.  It  would  be  convenient  to  have  full 
lists  of  the  single  works  in  the  library  in  all  the  various  kinds  of  literature,  and  when 
space  can  be  afforded  they  ought  to  bo  given  ;  if  there  is  not  room  for  them,  references 
must  be  made  under  these  headings  to  the  names  of  all  the  single  authors  ;  an  unsat- 
isfactory substitute,  it  is  true,  but  better  than  entire  omission.  Note,  however,  that 
there  is  much  less  need  of  these  lists  in  libraries  which  give  their  freciuenters  access 
to  the  shelves  than  where  such  access  is  «lenied,  so  that  borrowers  must  depend  en- 
tirely on  the  catalogue.  In  the  case  of  English  fiction  a  form-list  is  of  such  constant 
use  that  nearly  all  libraries  have  separate  fiction  catalogues. 

It  has  been  objected  that  such  lists  of  novels,  plays,  etc.,  do  not  suit  the  genius  of 
the  dictionary  catalogue.  The  objection  is  of  no  importance  if  true;  if  s'ich  lists  are 
useful  they  ought  to  be  given.  There  is  nothing  in  the  dictionary  plan  which  makes 
them  hard  to  use  if  iiKserted.  But  the  objection  is  not  well  founded.  I'nder  the 
names  of  certain  subjects  wo  give  lists  of  the  authors  who  have  treated  of  those  sub- 
jects; under  the  names  of  certain  kinds  of  literature  we  give  lists  of  the  authors  who 
have  written  books  in  tho.so  forms  ;  the  cases  are  parallel.  The  divisions  of  fiction.  It 
must  be  understood,  are  not  the  authors  who  have  written  novels  but  the  dilTerent 
kinds  of  novels  which  they  have  written ;  they  are  either  such  varieties  as  "  Histor- 
ical fiction,"  ".Sea  stories,"  "  Religious  novels,"  or  such  as  "English  fiction,"  *'  French 
fiction."  The  first  divisions  we  do  not  make  for  single  works  because  it  would  bo 
very  ditlicult  to  do  so  and  of  little  use  ;  but  if  there  were  collections  in  those  classes 
we  should  certainly  introduce  sm-h  he.idings.  The  second  tlivision  (by  language)  is 
made  as  it  is  in  Poetry  and  Drama,  both  for  single  works  and  collections. 


CO  FOKM-ENTKY.       ANALYSIS. 

Then?  is  no  reason  hut  \v:v*t  of  room  why  only  collections  sbonld  be  entered  nnder 
form-headings.  The  lirst  entries  of  collections  were  merely  title-entries,  and  Mr. 
Crestadoro  is  the  only  person  who  has  thuujjht  that  plays,  etc.,  deserve  two  title- 
entries,  one  from  the  lirst  word,  the  other  from  what  we  might  call  tiie  form-word.  It 
a  not  nninteresting  to  watch  the  steps  by  which  the  fully  organized  ((iiadruple  syn- 
letic  dictionary  catalogue  is  gradually  developing  from  the  simple  subject-word 
udex. 

123.  ]Make  a  form-entry  for  siugle  works  iu  the  rarer  literatures,  as 

Japanese,  or  Kalmuc,  or  Cherokee. 

References  can  be  substituted,  if  necessary. 

124.  Make  a  form-entry  of  encyclopaedias,  indexes,  and  works  of  similar 

jjractical  form,  the  general  ones  under  the  headings  Encyclopae- 
dias, etc.,  the  special  ones  in  groups  under  their  appropriate 
subjects. 

Thus  an  agricultural  dictionary  will  not  be  entered  under  Dictionaries,  but  under 
Agriculture,  iu  a  little  division  Dictionaries.  Now  and  then  some  one  asks  for  "a 
grammar,"  "the  dictionary."  It  does  not  follow  that  it  would  be  well  to  jumble  to- 
gether, under  a  form-heading.  Grammars  or  Dictionaries,  all  grammars  aud  lexi- 
cons in  all  languages.  Those  who  inciuire  so  vaguely  must  be  made  to  state  their 
wishes  more  definitely.  The  cataloguer  does  his  part  if  he  inserts  a  note  under  such 
headings  exjjlanatory  of  the  practice  of  the  catalogue;  as 

Grammar.     [First  a  list  of  woiks  on  general  grammar,  then] 
Note.  For  grammars  of  any  language,  see  the  name  of  the  language. 

V.  ANALYSIS. 

125.  Enter  iu  full  every  work,  forming  a  part  of  a  set,  which  fills  a  whole 

volume  or  several  volumes. 

Ex.  Colombo,  C.  Select  letters  rel.  to  his  four  voyages  to  the  New  World  ;  tr.  and 
ed.  by  R.  H.  Major.     London,  1847.     8".     (Vol.  2  of  the  Hakluyt  Soc.) 

126.  Enter  analytically,  that  is  without  imprint  — 

a.  Every  work,  forming  part  of  a  set,  which  has  a  separate  title-page 

and  paging,  but  forms  only  part  of  a  volume  of  the  set. 

Ex.  Fairholt,  F.  W.  The  civic  garland;  songs  from  London  pageants,  with  iutrod. 
and  notes.     {In  Percy  Society,  v.  19.     1845.) 

Full  must  and  Medium  may  make  a  full  entry  in  this  case  also.  That  is  to  say.  Full 
will  draw  the  line  at  a  separate  title-page.  Short  and  perhaps  Medium  at  filling  a 
volume.  Those  catalogues  which  give  no  imprints  at  all  and  those  which  give  no 
imprints  nnder  subjects  will  of  course  give  none  for  analyticals. 

b.  Every  work  which,  though  not  separately  paged  or  not  having  a 

title-page,   has   been    published  separately,  whether   before  or 
since  its  publication  in  the  work  under  treatment. 
Ex.  Dickens,  C.  J.  F.     Little  Dorrit.     (In  Harper's  mag.,  v.  12-1.0, 1855-57.) 

c.  Under  author.,  (1)  every  separate  article  or  treiatise  over       '  pages 

in  length ;  (2)  treatises  of  noted  authors ;  (3)  noted  works  even 
if  by  authors  otherwise  obscure. 

'This  limi^  must  be  determined  by  each  library  for  itself,  with  the  understanding 
that  there  may  be  occasional  exceptions. 


ANALYSIS.       STYLK.  61 

d.  IJiHliM-  subject  tn»atis(>s  iinportimt  citlifr  (1)  aHContiiiiiiiij,'  th(M)ri;:iii 

of  a  scii'uce  or  a  controversy  or  dcvflopiii*,'  \w\\  views,  or  (!,')  as 
treatinj;  the  subject  ably  or  K'vinj?  important  information,  or 
(3)  for  Ien{;tli. 

Al)8oluto  uniformity  is  uiiattjiiiiablc  ;  i)n)l)ahly  no  nnc  will  lii>  ahlo  to  draw  tho  line 
always  at  the  same  lieight.  It  is  most  desirablu  —  ami  fortunatoiy  eiuiieHt  —  to  make 
analysis  when  the  subjeot  is  well  inarkcil,  as  of  hio^raphios  or  histories  of  towns,  or 
mono>^raphs  on  any  subject.  General  treatises  or  vaj^ne  essays  are  much  harder  to 
classify  ami  much  less  valuable  for  analysis.  In  analyzinjj  collections  of  essays 
ori}:;inal  articles  should  bo  broujjht  out  in  preference  to  reviews,  which  are  commonly 
not  worth  touchinj;  (except  in  a  very  full  catalogue)  either  under  the  author  of  the 
work  nniowed  or  under  its  subject.  Of  course  exception  may  be  nuide  for  famous 
reviews  or  for  good  reviews  of  famous  works.  A  work  giving  a  careful  literary  esti- 
mate of  an  author  may  be  an  exception  to  this  remark ;  reviews  of  the  "  Works"  of 
any  author  are  most  likely  to  contain  such  an  estimate.  Many  reviews,  like  Macau- 
lay's,  are  important  for  their  treatuumt  of  the  subject  and  not  worth  uoticing  under 
the  book  reviewed,  which  is  merely  a  pretext  for  the  article. 

e.  Make  analytical  ftf/p-references  for  stories  in  a  collection  when  they 

are  likely  to  be  inquired  for  separately. 

127.  Make  analyticals  for  the  secojul  and  suV)sequent  authors  of  a  book 

written  {but  not  conjointly)  by  several  autijors.  (8ee  §  4.) 
Sometimesit  is  better  to  give  full  entry  under  two  headings  than  to  make  the  second 
analytical.  Ex.  A  "Short  account  of  the  application  to  Parliau)ent  by  the  merchants 
of  London,  with  the  substance  of  the  evidence  as  sninined  up  by  Mr.  (Jlover,"  is  to 
be  entered  under  London.  MirchaiitK,  as  tirst  author,  but  as  Glover's  part  is  two- 
thirds  of  the  whole,  it  should  also  be  entered  under  him,  the  entry  iu  each  case  beiug 
made  full  enough  not  to  mislead. 

128.  In  analyticals  it  is  well  to  give  the  date  of  the  book  referred  to  and 

also,  though  less  necessary,  to  state  the  pages  which  contain  the 
article.  Many  readers  will  not  notice  these  details,  but  they  will 
do  no  one  anj-  harm  and  will  assist  the  careful  student. 


VI.  STYLE. 

A.  Headings. 

Type,  130-134.  Italics,  131.  Pseud.,  135,  130.  Ed.,  137.  Family 
name,  138.  Christian  name,  139,  140.  To  distinguish  authors  of  the 
same  name,  139-144.  To  distinguish  subject  headings,  145.  Dashes, 
140.     Keferences,  147. 

B.  Titles. 

Order,  148,  149.  Abridgment,  15(»-100.  Articles,  151,  152.  Unnec- 
essary words,  153, 153.^.  Dates,  154.  Initials,  155.  Abbreviations,  1.56. 
Numbers,  157.  Position,  158.  "Same,"  159.  Words  to  be  retained, 
100-104.    Analyticals,  104.     Exact  copying,  1G5.     Language,  167,  168. 


62  STYLE. 

Translations,  1G8,  1C9.    Trausposition  of  tbe  article,  170.    Anon.,  171- 
173.     Lord,  Gen.,  ed.,  174.     Trausliteration,  175. 

c.  Editions,  176,  177. 

D.  Imprints. 

Tbe  parts  of  an  imprint  and  their  order,  178.  Transliteration,  179. 
Abbreviations,  1<S0.  Two  or  more  jdaces,  181,  182.  Publisher's  name, 
183.  Colophon,  184.  Dates,  185-194.  Number  of  volumes,  195.  Typo- 
graphical form,  196.     Maps,  197. 

E.  Contents,  198-200,  and  Notes,  201. 

F.  Kefeeences,  202,  203. 

FF.  Language,  204. 

G.  Capitals,  205,  206. 

H.  Punctuation,  Accents,  Brackets  and  Parentheses,  Italics, 
etc.,  207-212. 

I.  Arrangement. 

Order  of  tbe  English  alphabet,  213.  Headings,  214-239.  Person, 
place,  title,  subject,  form,  214.  Forenames,  215,  216.  M',  etc.,  217. 
Famil}'  names  nearly  alike,  218.  Family  names  the  same,  219.  Fore- 
names the  same,  220.  Forenames  not  generally  used,  221,  222.  Fore- 
names changed,  223.  Titles,  Sees,  224.  Possessive  case,  225.  Greek 
and  Latin  names,  226.  Compound  names,  227-232.  Pseudonyms,  233. 
Incomplete  names,  234.  Signs,  235.  Every  word  regarded,  236.  Ab- 
breviations, 237.  Titles,  240-252.  Under  an  author,  240-248.  Edi- 
tions, 242,  243.  Numerals,  244.  Translations,  245.  Biographies,  etc., 
246.  Criticisms,  247.  Analytical,  248,  249.  Under  countries,  250- 
252.  Synopsis,  252.  Bible,  252.  Contents,  253.  Subjects,  254- 
258.  Homonyms,  254.  Topical  arrangement,  255.  Chronological  ar- 
rangement, 256.     Cross-references,  257.     Divisions,  258. 

J.  Etc. 

Supplement,  259.  An  economy,  260.  Incunabula  and  other  rare 
books,  261. 

STYLE. 

129.  Uniformity  for  its  own  sake  is  of  very  little  account ;  for  the  sake 
of  intelligibility,  to  prevent  perplexity  and  misunderstanding,  it 
is  worth  something.  And  it  is  well  to  be  uniform,  merely  to  avoid 
the  question,  "  Why  were  you  not  consistent?" 


STYLi::    UKADINGS.  G3 

A.  Deadings. 

130.  Print  lieadinfjs  in  some,  insirkcd  type. 

Hither  heavy-fiiccd  (best,  if  it  can  bo  had  not  too  black),  hiiuiII  capitals  (hanilsoiiif ), 
or  italics  (least  i)leasmy);  never  capitals  (iijt;ly  and  hard  to  read).  Christian  names 
should  be  in  ordinarj'  type;  to  make  them  like  the  heading;  is  confusing,  to  have  a 
special  type  for  them  wonld  be  extrava;;ant. 

131.  Italicj/e  titles  of  honor  and  similar  distinguisliin;,'  words. 

Earl,  Mrs.,  llev.,  of  Paris,  Alexandrinus,  etc.,  also  the  name  of  a  country  or  state 
following  the  name  of  a  town,  as  Wilton,  N.  H.,  Cambridge,  Eng.  CF*  These  words 
are  to  be  italicized  only  in  the  headings  and  not  in  the  title.  They  are  italicized  in 
the  heading  to  distinguish  the  name  and  bring  it  out  clearly;  there  is  no  neetl  of 
such  distinction  in  titles.  Do  not  print  Badeau,  Gen.  A.  Life  of  (ien.  Grant.  If 
the  heading  is  italicized,  the  words  Mrs.,  Earl,  etc.,  must  be  distinguished  from  it  in 
some  other  way. 

132.  Print  the  headings  of  all  the  four  kinds  of  entry  (author,  title,  sub- 

ject, form)  in  the  same  kind  of  type. 
In  some  indexes  a  distinction  is  made  between  persona  and  places  or  between  anthors 
and  subjects,  but  in  a  catalogue  varieties  of  type  must  be  reserved  for  more  important 
distinctions.  The  Catalogue  of  the  Library  of  the  Interior  Department  uses  a  heavy- 
faced  title  type  for  authors  and  a  light-faced  antique  for  other  entries,  with  very  sat- 
isfiictory  effect;  but  such  typographical  luxuries  are  not  within  general  reach. 

133.  Print  the  whole  of  an  author-,  title-,  or  form-headinjj  in  the  special 

type ;  also  an  alt«unative  faniily  name  and  the  family  name  of 

the  second  of  Joint  authors,  if  both  authors  are  put  into  the  head- 

iu}?  (§  240),  and  the  family  names  of  British  nobliMnen. 

Er.  Cervantes  Saavedra,  Varnhagen  von  Euse,  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  Bicknell 

&  Goodhue,  American  Antiquarian  Society,  Comparative  anatomy,  Political 

economy ,  Chasteillon  ( I.at.  Castalio  or  Castellio),  >S. ;  Craik,  G.  L.,  ami  Kuight,  C; 

Manchester,  W.  Drogo  Montagu,  Ith  Duke  oj. 

134.  Print  the  first  word  of  a  title-entry  in  the  special  type. 

Ex.  Rough  diamond.  But  compound  words,  whether  hyphened  or  not,  should  be 
printed  wholly  in  the  heading  typo  ;  as,  Out  of  door  amusements.  London,  ldG4.  8". 
This  is  merely  for  looks ;  the  kintl  of  type  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  arrangement. 

135.  Add  i)>ieud.  to  the  heading  for  all  sorts  ot  false  names  of  whatever 

origin. 

So  much  is  necessary  to  prevent  mistake  on  the  part  of  the  public  ;  but  it  is  a  waute 
of  time  for  the  cataloguer  to  rack  his  brains  to  discover  which  of  the  ingenious  names 
invented  by  Pienjuin  de  Gembloux  (cryptonym,  geonym,  phrenonym,  etc.)  is  appli- 
cable to  each  case  ;  for  the  only  result  is  that  readers  are  puzzled.  A  list  of  these 
terms  may  be  found  in  the  Notice  of  Qudrard  by  Olphar  Hamst  [i.  t.,  R.  Thomas]. 
London,  18(57. 

The  unauthorized  assumption  of  any  name  should  be  indicated  by  such  phra.sc8  as 
as  called,  ralliiiii  himself,  dil,  soi  disani,  ae  diccnte  or  die  si  dice,  (jue  sc  dice  or  se  dicendione, 
(jciiannt,  neiiocmd,  etc. 

13G.  When  an  author  uses  a  single  i)seu(l()nym  add  it  to  his  nanu'.  un- 
less the  entry  is  made  under  the  psi'udonym;  when  the  pseudo- 
nym is  used  only  in  one  work,  and  ditferent  ones  in  other  works, 
include  it  in  that  title,  followed  by  [pseud.]. 
Ex.  Clemens,  S.  C.  (pseud.  Mark  Twain). 

Godwin,  Wni.     The  looking-glass;  by  T   .MarclitVe  [pseud.]. 


fi4  STYLE  :    HEADINGS. 

137.  Add  cd.  to  tlie  beading  when  it  is  needed  to  show  that  a  book  is 
merely  i)ut  together,  not  written,  by  the  author  in  hand. 

Tlie  title  usually  shows  this  fact  clearly  euongli  without  ed.  Short  would  oiuit  to 
uote  the  fact,  and  in  Full,  perhaps  even  in  Medium,  it  is  better  to  state  it  in  the  title 
than  in  the  heading.     The  distinction,  after  all,  is  rarely  of  practical  vahie, 

13S.  lU'peat  the  family  name  for  each  i>er.son. 
A'./.  Smith,  Caleb.     Sermon.  1  (         Smith,  Caleb.     Sermon. 

Smith,  Charles.     Address.  >    not    <^  ,  Charles.     Address. 

Smith,  Conrad.     Narrative.       J  1  ,  Conrad.     Narrative. 

139.  Distinguish  authors  whose  family  name  is  the  same  by  giving  the 

forename  in  full  or  by  initials. 

In  a  card  catalogue  the  names  should  always  be  given  in  full ;  in  printing,  initials 
are  often  used  to  save  room;  but  the  saving  is  small,  and  the  advantages  of  full 
names  are  so  considerable  that  any  cataloguer  who  is  relieved  from  the  necessity  of 
the  greatest  possible  compression  ought  to  give  them.  For  the  more  common  fore- 
names fullness  can  be  combined  with  economy  by  the  use  of  the  colon  abbreviations 
(C:  =  Charles,  etc.  See  Appendix  V.)  Under  subjects  it  is  rare  that  two  persons  of 
even  the  same  family  name  come  together  and  initials  are  sufiScient;  but  here  also 
the  colon  initials  should  be  used.  Au  exception  may  well  be  made  in  the  case  of 
men  always  known  by  a  double  name ;  as,  Sydney  Smith  or  Bayard  Taylor.  Nobody 
talks  of  Smith  or  Taylor.  Taylor,  B.,  conveys  no  idea  whatever  to  most  readers. 
Taylor,  Bayard,  they  know.  "When  one  name  alone  is  usual,  as  Gladstone,  Shakes- 
peare, and  when  both  forms  are  used,  as  Dickens  and  Charles  Dickens,  initials  will 
sutfice.  Of  course  there  can  be  uo  uniformity  in  such  practice,  but  there  will  be  util- 
ity, which  is  better. 

Forenames  used  by  the  author  in  a  diminutive  or  otherwise  varied  form  may  be 
given  in  that  form. 

Ex.  Carleton,  Will :  McLean,  Sally ;  Renter,  Fritz. 

140.  Mark  in  some  way  those  forenames  which  are  usually  omitted  by 

the  author,  and  neglect  them  in  the  arrangement. 

Ex.  Collins,  (\Ym.)  Wilkie;  Gerard,  (Ce'cile)  Jules  (Basile).  This  is  of  practical 
use.  The  consulter  running  over  the  Collinses  is  puzzled  by  the  unusual  name  unless 
some  generally  accepted  sign  shows  him  that  it  is  unusual.  He  does  not  quickly 
recognize  Charles  Dickens  in  Dickens,  Charles  John  Huffam  ;  or  Leigh  Hunt  in 
Hunt,  James  Henry  Leigh;  or  Max  Miiller  in  Miiller,  Friedrich  Max.  Besides,  the 
eye  finds  the  well-known  name  m^re  quickly  if  the  others  are,  as  it  were,  pushed  aside. 
The  most  common  methods  of  distinction  are  inclosure  in  parentheses  and  spacing: 
Guizot,  (Francois  Pierre)  Guillaume,  or  Guizot,  Francois  Pierre  Guillaume. 
The  latter  is  objectionable  as  unusual,  as  taking  too  much  room,  and  as  making  em- 
phatic the  very  part  of  the  name  which  one  -wants  to  hide.  I  prefer  the  style, 
Dickens,  Charles  {in  full  C:  J:  Huflfam).  See  *  221.  But  in  those  catalogues  in 
which  all  Christian  names  are  inclosed  in  parentheses,  some  other  sign  must  of  course 
be  used  to  mark  the  less  usual  names. 

141.  Distinguish  authors  whose  family  and  forenames  are  the  same  by 

the  dates  of  their  birth  and  death,  or,  if  these  are  not  known, 
by  some  other  label. 

Ex.  Bp.,  C.  E.,  Capt.,  Col.,  D.D.,  F.R.S.,  etc.,  always  to  be  printed  in  italics. 
In  a  manuscript  catalogue,  in  preparing  which  of  course  one  never  knows  how 
many  new  names  may  be  added,  sach  titles  should  be  given  to  every  name.    In  print- 


HKAUINGS.  65 

ing,  if  room  is  an  objoct,  they  may  bo  omittcil  cxcopt  wlien  iiccdcil  for  tlm  clistirit  tion 
of  synonymous  anthors.  Noto,  howover,  that  many  pcrsonH  arc  commonly  known  and 
spokun  of  by  a  titlo  ratli»»r  than  by  their  first  namr,  ami  it  is  a  convenience  for  the 
nnin  who  isiookinj;,  for  instance,  for  tiie  life  of  (Jen.  (Jreem-,  whoHo  Christian  name 
he  does  not  know,  to  see  at  once,  as  tie  rnns  his  eye  over  the  listof  (Jreenes,  which  aro 
generals,  without  having  to  read  ail  the  titles  of  books  written  by  or  about  the 
Oreenesiu  order  to  identify  him.  For  the  same  reason  .)/>■«.  slvould  always  l)e  given  with 
tlie  name  of  a  marrietl  woman,  whether  the  forename  which  follows  is  her  own  or  her 
husband's;  even  when  the  following  form  is  adopted,  "Hall,  Mih.  Anna  Maria  (Fielil- 
ing),  «•«/<!  o/S.  C,"  which  isalwaysto  be  done  when  in  Inr  tilltsshe  uses  her  husband's 
initials.  In  this  case  a  reference  should  bo  made  from  Hall,  Mih.  S.  ('.,  to  Hall,  Mih. 
A.  M.,  and  so  in  similar  cases.  If  forenames  are  represented  under  subjects  by  their 
initials,  it  is  well  to  give  Mixaor  Mrs.  with  the  names  of  female  anthors.  The  leailer 
who  would  like  to  read  a  book  by  Miss  Cobbe  on  a  certain  suliject  may  not  feel  sure 
tiiat  Cobbe,  F.  P.,  is  Miss  Cobbe. 

As  late  as  ITtiO  unmarried  women  were  usually  styled  ,l//«. ;  as,  Mrs.  Lepel,  Mr.«. 
Woflington,  Mrs.  niount,  and  among  writers  Mrs.  Hannah  More.  There  is  ni» objection 
to  followiu"'  this  practice  in  cataloguing,  as  the  object  of  the  cataloguer  is  not  tt) 
furnish  biographical  information  but  to  identify  the  people  catalogueil. 

142.  Titles  of  Eiifjlishwonien  are  to  be  treated  by  the  foUowiii;!  rules:* 
lu  the  matter  of  titles  aii  Euj^lishwotnaii  in  inarryiii<,'  has  every- 
thing- to  gain  and  nothing  to  lose.     If  she  marries  above  her 
own  rank  she  takes  her  husband's  title  in  exchange  for  her  own, 
if  below  her  own  rank  she  keeps  her  own  title. 

Titles  of  married  women. 

a.  The  wife  of  a  peer  takes  her  husband's  style. 

That  is.  she  is  Baroness,  Viscountess,  Mandiioness,  etc.  In  cataloguing,  say 
Brassey,  Annie  (Allnntt),  Baroness;  not  Brassey,  Annie  (Allnutt),  Lady. 

b.  The  wife  of  a  knight  or  baronet  is  Lady.     Whether  this  title  pre- 

cedes or  follow.*;  her  forename  depends  upon  whether  she  had  a 
title  before  her  marriage. 

That  is,  if  Lady  Mary  Smith  marries  Sir  John  Hrown  (either  knight  or  baronet), 
she  is  Lady  Mary  Brown,  also  if  Hon.  Mary  Smith  marries  Sir  .John  Brown  (knight 
or  baronet )  she  is  Latly  Mary  Brown  ;  but  if  Miss  Mary  Smith  marries  Sir  John  Brown 
(knight  or  baronet),  she  becomes  Mary,  Lady  Brown. 

c.  A  maid  of  honor  retains  her  lion,  after  marriage,  unless,  ofcuur.se, 

it  is  merged  into  a  higher  title. 
Thus,  if  she  marries  a  baronet  she  is  the  Hon'''*'  Lady  Brown,  if  a  peer  the  Lady 
So  and  So,  in  either  case  as  though  she  had  been  a  peei's  daughter. 

d.  Tlie  wife  of  an  earl's  (or  higher  peer's)  younger  son  is  never  the 

Hon'''"'  Lady;  if  she  u.sed  the  Lady  before  marriage  in  her  own 
right  she  does  not,  of  course,  add  anything  by  sucii  marriage,  but 
the  wife  of  a  younger  son  of  a  lower  peer  than  an  earl  is  Hon'"'' 
Mrs.  (not  Lady)  —  the  youtiger  children  of  all  i)eers  using,  of 
cour.se,  the  family  name,  with  or  without  their  forenames,  accord- 
ing to  their  rank. 


•  Pnpared  by  Mi««  May  Seymour  an>l  Mr.  F.  Wells  ynUUkta*  (Lib.  JttL.  13:  SSI,  JWl. 
48<)L;    I.I ."> 


6(»  stvlk:   11  i:a  dings. 

e.  If  the  lady  to  whom  the  title  Hon.  belong^s  in  virtue  of  her  father's 

rank  marries  a  commoner,  she  retains  her  title,  becoming:  lion. 

Lady,  if  she  marries  a  knight  or  baronet;  and  lion.  Mrs.,  if  her 

husband  has  no  title. 

None  of  theso  courtesy  titles  are  inherited  by  the  chihlieu  of  those  who  bear  Iheiii, 

the  third  generation  of  even  the  highest  peer  being  simply  couimouers  unless  raised 

in  rank  by  marriage  or  merit. 

Titles  of  nnman'nd  women. 

/.  The  title  Lady  belongs  to  daughters  of  all  noblemen  not  lower 

than  earl. 
g.  The  title  Hon.  belongs  to  daughters  of  viscounts  and  barons;  also 
to  an  untitled  woman  who  becomes  maid  of  honor  to  the  Queen, 
and  this  title  is  retained  after  she  leaves  the  service.  If  a  woman 
who  has  the  title  Lady  becomes  maid  of  honor  she  does  not  ac- 
quire the  title  Hon. 
143.  Distinctive  epithets  to  be  in  the  same  language  as  the  name. 

Ex.  Kniaz,  Fiirst  von,  Freiherr  zu,  due  de  Magenta,  Bishop  of  Lincoln,  e'veque  de  Ifeaux ; 
but  Emperor  of  (lermany,  King  of  France,  uot  Kaiser  and  roi,  because  names  of  sover- 
eign princes  are  giveu  in  English.  Treat  in  the  same  way  patronymics  habitually 
joined  with  a  person's  name;  as,  Clemens  Alexandrinus. 

1J:4:.  Prefixes  {?.  e.,  titles  which  in  speaking  come  before  the  name),  as, 

Hon.,  Mrs.,  Rev.,  etc.,  should  be  placed  before  the  Christian  name 

(as  Smith,  Capt.  John),  and  suflixes  as  Jr.,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  after  it 

(as  Channing,  James  Ellery,  D.B.). 

Hereditary  titles  generally  follow  the  Christian  name,  as  Derby,  Thomas  Stanley, 

\.U  Earl  of  ;    but  British  courtesy  titles  ((.  e.,  those  given  to  the  younger  sons  of 

dukes  and  marques'=es)  precede,  as  Wellesley,  Lord  Cbarles  ("2d  son  of  the  Duke  of 

Wellington).     In  other  languages  than  English,  French,  and  German  the  title  usually 

precedes  the  forename;  as,  Alfieri,  Con <e  Vittorio.     Occasionally  a  French  nobleman 

uniformly  places  his  title  before  his  forenames;  as,  Gaspariu,  Comte  Agenor  de. 

Lord  should  be  replaced  by  the  exact  title  in  the  names  of  English  noblemen,  e.  g., 
Lord  Macaulay  should  be  entered  as  Macaulay,  1st  Baron.  Lord  in  th«  title  of 
Scotch  judges  follows  the  family  name;  as,  Karnes,  H.  Home,  aftenvards  Lord. 
The  title  Baronet  is  giveu  in  the  form  Scott,  Sir  Walter,  Bart. 
Patronymic  phrases,  as  of  Dedham,  follow  all  the  names;  but  they  must  immedi- 
ately follow  the.  family  nan  e  when  they  are  always  used  in  close  connection  with  it, 
as  Girault  de  St.  Farjeau,  Eus5be;  similarly  atne,  Jils,jeune,  as  Dumas./??8,  Alexandre; 
Didot  fls,  Ambroise.  Latin  appellatives  should  not  in  general  be  separated  from 
their  uouns  by  a  comma;  as,  Ceesar  Heisterbacensis. 

lis.  Distinguish  two  subject-headings  which  are  spelled  alike  by  itali- 
cized phrases  in  parentheses. 

Ex.  Ccdculus  {in  mathematics). 
Calculus  {in  medicine). 

14G.  ^Medium  avoids  the  repetition  of  the  heading  with  all  titles  after 
the  first  by  using  a  dash.     Short  usually  employs  indention. 
Indention  takes  as  much  room  as  the  dash  and  is  much  less  clear.     There  should 
always  be  at  least  a  hair-space  between  the  end  of  the  dash  and  the  next  letter;  in- 
deed that  is  the  rule  of  all  good  printing.     Under  a  subject  the  repetition  of  the 


TITLKS    (ulM)i:i.',   AliKIDGMKNT).  G7 

author's  name  is  indiriitt-d  l»_v  a  sfcoiid  dasli.*     (Tin-  rfpftitiim  of  tin-  title  iH  shown 
by  tliu  word  Same.) 

Cobbett,  Wni.     Kini^iiant's  ;,Miidi-.  Atheism.     I5i:kciii:k.  I..     Li'i-tiin-s.  eVc. 

—  A    littlo     plain    Engiisli.      London,        —  Uknti.kv,  1{.     ConriitatiDn  of  A. 

179.'..     8".                                                     —  -  Folly  <.f  A.  and  d.-JHni. 
-r-   Same.     Phila.,  179."..     8'».  , Matter  and  motion. 

—  Porcupine's  works.  | Fotiikrhy,  M.     Atheomastix. 

147.  Print  in  the  special  type  a  heading  occnrring  in  other  parts  of  the 
catalogue,  when  a  reference  is  intended. 
After  See  or  In,  or  when  iu  a  note  some  book  containod  in  tin-  catalogue  ia  referred 
to;  as,  "For  a  discussion  of  the  authorship,  hcv  Oraesse's  Lehrbuch." 


B.  Titlp:s. 

1.  Okdkk. 

148.  Preserve  the  order  of  words  of  the  title. 

Short  will  depart  from  the  order  whenever  it  can  not  otherwise  abridge  the  title; 
Medium  and  Full  will  do  the  same,  but  they  will  bracket  all  words  iutrodnced  out  of 
their  orij»inal  place  as  much  as  if  they  did  not  occur  in  the  title  at  all. 

149.  When  the  title-page  begins  with  the  indication  of  the  series  to 

which  the  book  belongs,  followed  by  the  title  of  the  book,  trans- 
pose the  series  name  to  a  parenthesis  after  the  imprint,  including 
the  number  in  the  series,  when  the  series  is  numbered. 

Ex,  American  commonwealths.  Virginia;  a  history  of  the  people,  by  Johu  Esten 
Cooke,  wouhl  bo  entered  Cooke,  J:  E.  Virginia;  a  history  of  the  people.  Boston, 
ldS3.     D.     (Amer.  commonwealths.) 

2.  Abridomkxt. 

150.  The  more  careful  and  student-like  the  i)robable  n.se  of  the  library 

tlie  fuller  the  title  should  be, —  fuller,  that  is,  of  information,  not 
of  words.  Many  a  title  a  yard  long  does  not  convey  as  much 
meaning  as  two  well-chosen  words.  No  preci.se  rule  can  be  given 
for  abridgment.  The  title  must  not  be  .so  much  shortened  that 
the  book  shall  be  confounded  with  any  other  book  of  the  same 
author  or  any  other  edition  of  the  .same  book,  or  that  it  shall  fail 
to  be  recognized  by  those  who  know  it  or  have  been  referred  to  it 
by  title,  or  that  it  shall  convey  a  false  or  insutlicicnt  idea  of  the 
nature  of  the  work  and  (under  the  subject)  of  its  theme  and  its 

'After  trying  several  experiments  I  have  settled  upon  tbc  futlowiug  as  producing  the  best  effect: 
Put 

before  tbe  secoutl  and  followiii-;  Hues  of  a  title  3  em  i|iia4U. 

before  anil  .ifttr  the  em  dasli  that denotis  repetition  nn  en  quad 

before  nud  after  the  double  da.sh  (iin  em  dash  followeil  by  an  en  dxHlii  an  en  quad, 

between  tlie  p.irts  of  the  double  dash  a  .'»  em  space, 

before  Saiuf.  in  addition  to  the  re>;ular  «n  <|uad  a5-em  spare, 

before  the  lirst  line  of  X<jte»  and  Otntent$  an  em  ipiad. 

(Do  uot  indent  the  other  lines  of  Kote.H  and  Contents  .it  all.) 
Itefore  the  ]dace  of  publication  an  em  quad, 

between  the  date  and  the  size-mark  an  eu  quad  and  a  5  em  tt[uice. 


xr.c. 


68  stylk:  titlhs  (ahkidgment). 

method  of  treatinjij  its  theme.'  On  the  other  hand,  it  must  not 
retain  anythin*;  which  coiiUl  reasonably  be  inferred  from  the  rest 
of  the  title  or  from  its  position  under  a  given  heading.^ 

151.  Omit  the  preliminary  article  when  it  can  be  done  without  altering 
the  sense  or  too  much  offending  the  ear.     ^^  '^^^  ''^  "^i-^-nc^   6r--.-»>,», 

irr.   ./so.  ^'•-    ^'fe^ 

It  will  not  do  even  for  Short  to  catalogue  "  On  the  true,  the  beautiful,  and  the 
good  "  thus: 

Cousin,  V.     True,  beautiful,  good;  _:„ 

but  a  list  of  Buckstone'a  plajs  may  as  well  be  printed 


—  Breach  of  promise,  comedy. 

—  Christening,  farce. 

—  Dead  shot,  farce. 


—  Dream  at  sea. 

—  Kiss  in  the  dark,  farce. 

—  Lesson  for  ladies,  com., 


though  the  meaning  of  "Christening"  and  "The  christening"  is  slightly  different, 
and  "Kiss  in  the  dark"  might  be  taken  for  an  injunction,  -n^hereas  "A  kiss  in  the 
dark"  is  evidently  only  a  title.  Still  neither  Short  nor  Medium  should  hesitate  to 
omit  even  in  these  cases.  Besides  the  economy,  the  alphabetical  order  is  brought  out 
more  clearly  by  this  omission.  That  can  also  be  done  awkwardly  by  transposing  the 
article;  as, 

—  Breach  of  promise,  The  ;  com.  I    —  Dead  shot.  The ;  farce. 

—  Christening,  The  ;  farce.  |    —  Dream  at  sea,  The. 

152.  Short  omits  articles  in  the  title. 

Ex.  "Observations  upon  an  alteration  of  the  charter  of  the  Bank  of  England"  is 
abridged  :  "Alteration  of  charter  of  Bank  of  England,"  which  is  certainly  not  eupho- 
nious, but  is  as  intelligible  as  if  it  were.  Medium  usually  indulges  in  the  luxury  of 
good  English.  Perhaps  in  time  a  catalogue  style  will  be  adopted  in  which  these 
elisions  shall  be  not  merely  allowed,  but  required.  It  may  be  possible  to  increase  the 
number  of  cataloguing  signs.  We  have  now  8°  where  we  once  had  octavo,  then  8vo. 
Why  not  insist  upon  N.  Y.  for  New  York,  L.  for  London,  P.  for  Paris,  etc.,  as  a  few 
adventurous  libraries  have  done  ?  Why  not  make  free  substitution  of  commas  for 
words,  and  leave  out  articles  and  prepositions  in  titles  wherever  the  sense  will  still 
remain  gleanable  ? 

153.  Omit  puffs  ^  and  many  descriptive  words  which  are  implied  either 

by  the  rest  of  the  title*  or  by  the  custom  of  books  of  the  class 

•  This  clause  must  be  very  differently  interpreted  according  to  the  character  of  the 
catalogue.  It  expresses  rather  the  object  to  be  aimed  at  than  the  point  which  an 
ordinary  catalogue  can  expect  to  reach.  To  fully  describe  and  characterize  every 
book  is  impossible  for  most  cataloguers.  Still  by  a  little  management  much  may  be 
briefly  done.  The  words  drama,  play,  novel,  historical  novel,  poem,  retained  from  or 
inserted  in  the  title  tell  a  great  deal  in  a  little  space. 

=  It  must  make  these  omissions  not  merely  that  the  catalogue  maybe  short  but  that 
consulting  it  may  be  easy.  Other  things  being  equal,  that  title  is  best  which  can  be 
taken  in  at  a  glance.  What  has  been  said  in  defence  of  full  titles  may  be  true,  that 
•'  it  takes  longer  to  abridge  a  title  than  to  copy  it  in  full,"  but  it  is  also  true  that  it 
takes  longer  for  the  printer  to  set  the  unabridged  title,  and  longer  for  the  reader  to 
ascertain  its  meaning,  and  a  long-title  catalogue,  besides  being  more  expensive,  is 
more  bulky  and  therefore  less  convenient. 

^Ex.  A  (plain)  treatise  on ;  an  (exact  and  full)  account. 

■•In  "Compendious  pocket  dictionary,"  either  compendious  or  pocket  is  superfluons. 


TITLKS    (AISKIDU.MKNT).  G9 

lunler  treatiiieiit,'  and  tlioso  «U\scrii)tive  phrases  whiili,  tlioii;,'h 
they  add  to  the  siiifiiilicaiice  ot  tlie  title,  do  not  i;ivc  enouj,'h  in- 
formation to  ])ay  lor  their  retention.^ 
153i.  Omit  all  other  unnecessary  words. 

In  the  follo\viii<;  examples  I  uso  tho  tloublo  ((  ))  to  indicate  what  overy  catalogue 
ought  to  omit,  thi-  sinyif  (     )  to  iudicate  what  may  well  bo  omitted. 

Ed.  alt.  (prioro  emcndatior). 

2"  «Sd.  (un<jmentce). 

'2d  ed.  (with  additions  and  imptovenifuts). 

with  ((au  appendix  containing))  jiruhlems. 

((a  collection  of))  papers  relating  to  the  war  in  IiuliiU 

((a  series  of))  letters. 

((On  the))  brick  architecture  of  tho  north  of  Italy. 

(debate)  on  ((the  subject  of))  tho  impressment  bill. 

ou  ((the  question  of))  a  financial  agent. 

((being  some))  account  of  his  travels. 

in  ((the  year))  1875. 

Sermons  ((ou  various  subjects)).  X.  B.  Must  occasionally  be  retained  to  distin- 
guish dirt'erent  collections  of  sermons  by  the  same  author. 

The  grounds  of  infant  damnation  ((considered  iu))  (a)  sermon  ((preached))  Nov.  5, 
(1717).     Boston,  1717.     O. 

Sermon  (the  Lord's  day  after  the)  iutermeut  of. 

Opera  ((qnaj  extaut))  (omnia). 

Geology  ((of  the  State))  of  Maine. 

Tables  for  ((the  use  of))  civil  engineers. 

Ivetlections  ((suggested  by  a  perusal  of))'  J.  II.  Palmer's  ((pau'phlet  on  the)) 
"Causes  (and  conse(jueuces)  of  the  war."' 

Occasioned  by  his  ((book  entitled))  "  True  narrative." 

defended  against  ((the  cavils  of))  G.  Martin. 

Howe  during  his  command  (of  the  King's  troops)  in  North  America. 

So  a  "Discourse  iu  Albany,  Feb.  27,  1848,  occasioned  by  the  death  of  John  Quiucy 
Adams,  etc.  Albany,  1848.  O.,"  would  become  Disc,  Albany,  Feb. '27,  death  of  J.  Q. 
Adams.  Albany,  1848.  0.,  iu  Medium;  and  Short  would  proliably  omit  "Albany, 
Feb.  27." 

154.  For  chronological  i)hrases  use  dates. 

Ex.  For  '"from  the  accession  of  Edward  ill.  to  the  death  of  Henry  viii.,"  say  [1327- 
1547]. 

155.  In  Short  and  Medium  use  initials  for  all  Christian  names  intro- 

duced in  titles,  notes, andcontent.s, and vimit  the  initials  altogether 
for  famous  men  uide.ss  there  are  two  of  the  same  name. 
Ex.  Write   "  Life  of  L.  V.  Bell,"  "ed.  by  F.  J.  Furuivali,"  but  "  Lives  of  Cicero, 
Milton,  Tell,  Washington;"  and  distinguish  by  initials  the  liachs,  Grimms,  Hum- 
boldts,  SihU'gels.     Short  may  as  well  omit  tho  initials  of  editors,  translators,  etc. 
E.  (J.,  Dante.     Divine  comedy  ;  tr.  by  Cayley.     London,  1851-54.     4  v.     S. 

—  A'ame.     Tr.  by  Wright.     Lon<lon,  liohn,  1854.     O. 

—  Same.     Tr.  by  Longfellow.     Boston,  1867.     3  v.     O. 


'  Ex.  Nekrolog,  1790-1800  (euthaltend  Nachrichteii  von  dem  Leben  merkwilrdiger 
1  diesem  Jahre  verstorVicuer  I't-rsonen). 

*  "by  an  American  not  by  birth  but  by  the  love  of  liberty." 
3  Substitute  [on]. 


70  STYLE:    TITLES    (ABRIDGMENT). 

15G.  Abbreviate  certain  coniinou  words  always,  and  less  common  words 
in  a  long  title  which  can  not  be  shortened  in  any  other  way. 

Abbreviations  should  suggest  the  word  for  which  they  are  used,  and  should  uot,  if 
it  can  be  avoided,  suggest  auy  other.  When  one  abbreviation  is  used  for  two  words, 
if  the  context  does  uot  determine  the  sense  the  abbreviation  must  be  lengthened. 
The  most  common  and  useful  are  Abp.  (Archbishop),  a.  d.  Lat.  (aus  dem  Lateiu- 
ischeu),  add.  (additions),  Amer.  or  Am.  (American),  anon,  (anonymous),  app.  (ap- 
pondix),  Auil.,  Ausg.,  or  even  A.  (Aullage,  Ausgabe),  bibl.  (biblical,  bibliographical, 
bibliothcca,  etc.),  biog.  (biographical,  biography),  lip.  (Bishoj)),  B.  S.  L.,  etc.  (Bohn'a 
scieutitic  library,  etc.),  Chr.  (Christian),  class,  (classical),  col.  or  coll.  (collections,' 
college),  com.  (commerce,  committee),  comp.  (compi,led,  compiler),  cone,  (concerning), 
dept.  (department),  dom.  (domestic),  ed.  (edited,  edition,  editor),  encyc.  (encyclo- 
p:edia),  If.  (folios  or  leaves),  geog.,  geol.,  geom.  (geology,  geography,  geometry),  ges, 
(gesammelte),  Ges.  or  Gesch.  (Geschichte),  Gr.  (Great,  Greek),  H.  F.  L.  (Harper's 
family  library),  hrsg.  (herausgegeben),  imp.  (imperfect),  incl.  (including),  int.  (in- 
toruo),  lib.  (library),  mem.  (memoir),  mis.  or  miscel'.  (miscellaueons),  nat.  (natural), 
n.  d.  (no  date  of  publication),  n.  p.  (no  place),  n.  s.  (new  series),  n.  t.-p.  (no  title- 
page),  uouv.  (nouvelle),  obi.  (oblong),  p.  pp.  (page,  pages),  pseud,  (pseudonym, 
pseudonymous),  pt.  (part),  pub.  (published),  rec.  (recensnit),  rel.  (relating,  relative), 
rept.  (report),  rev.  (review,  revised),  s.  or  ser.  (series),  siimm.  (siimmtlich),  sm.  (small), 
HOC  (society),  l.-p.  mat.,  t.-p.  w.  (title-page  mutilated,  wanting),  tr,  (translated, 
traduit,  tradotto,  etc.),  trans,  (transactions),  n.  (und),  iibers.  (iibersetzt),  v.  (volume), 
V.  (von,  but  give  van  in  full),  w.  (wanting).     For  others  see  Appendix  V.,  pp.  119-126. 

157.  Express  nnmbers  by  Arabic  figures  instead  of  words. 

Ex.  With  30,000  (not  thirty  thousand)  men;  but  Charles  ii.,  in  place  of  King 
Charles  the  Second. 

158.  In  Short  omit  all  that  can  be  expressed  by  position. 

Ex.  In  a  title-entry 
Hovr  to  observe.     H.  Martineau 9287 

and  in  a  subject-entry 

Horse.    Carver,  J.    Age  of  the.     Phila.,  1818.     12« 9077 

Murray,  W.  H.     The  perfect.    Bost.,  1873.     8" 1694 

If  this  is  thought  too  disagreeable,  use  an  initial  for  the  heading  when  it  is  repeated 
in  the  title  ;  as  : 

Horse.     Carver,  J.     AgeoftlieH.     Phila.,  1818.     12° 9077 

Murray,  W.  H.    The  perfect  H.     Bost.,  1873.    8" 1694 

Simpson,  H.     H.  portraiture.    N.  Y.,  1868.     12" 7407 

159.  In  cataloguing  dififereut  editions  of  a  book  avoid  the  repetition  of 

the  title  by  using  "  Same.'''' 
.Ex.  Chaucer,  G.     Canterbury  tales;  [ed.]  by  T.  Tyrwhitt.    London,  1822.    5  v.    8o- 

—    Same.     Ed.  by  T.  Wright.     London,  1847-51.     3  v.  8°. 
The  word  following  Same  should  generally  begin  with  a  capital. 

160.  Eetain  under  the  author  only  what  is  necessary  to  distinguish  the 

work  from  other  works  of  the  same  writer,  but  under  the  subject 
what  is  needed  to  state  the  subject  and  show  how  it  is  treated. 
The  preface  of  an  excellent  catalogue  remarks  that  "  the  primary  object  of  subject- 
entries  is  to  inf>  rm  the  reader  ivho  have  written  upon  a  given  topic  rather  than  what 
has  been  written."  This  is  a  mistake.  The  inquirer  wishes  to  know  both ;  in  fact 
he  wants  to  know  who  have  written  about  it  because  their  character  will  suggest  to 
him  what  they  have  written. 


TITLKS:    (AUKlDiiMKNT).  71 

161.  Retain  both  of  alteriiativi"  titles. 

Ex,  Knights  aud  sea-kiiigH;  or,  Tlie  Middlo  A);(^s. 

The  reason  is  that  the  book  may  be  roferied  to  by  either  title. 

1G2.  Ketain  in  the  author  entry  the  first  words  of  the  title;  h't  tlie 
abridgement  be  made  farther  on. 

Becanse  (1)  it  facilitates  library  work,  by  rendering  the  identification  of  the  book 
qnicker  and  surer;  (*2)  if  there  is  no  part  of  the  title  which  ninst  be  given,  two  per- 
sons may  abridge  so  differently  that  not  a  single  word  sjiall  be  the  samr  in  the  two 
abridged  titles,  so  that  two  works  will  be  made  out  of  one  (I  have  often  known  this 
to  happen);  (:{)  books  are  fre(inently  referred  to  by  the  lirst  wt)r(l  of  the  title fOrassi's 
"Notiiie  snllo  stato  presente  degli  Stati  Uniti''  may  be  (|note<l  as  Grass i :  Notizie). 
Short,  however,  can  probably  not  afford  to  retain  tlrst  words  in  all  eases.  Half  the 
phrases  nsed  at  the  beginning  of  titles  add  little  or  nothing  to  the  meaning,  snr-ii  an 
"Treatise  on,"  "  System  of,"  "  Series  of  lectnres  on,"  "Practical  hints  on  the  <|nanti- 
tative  pronnuciation  of  Latin"  (bore  "Practical  hints"  belongs  in  the  preface,  not 
in  the  title,  to  which  it  really  adds  nothing  whatever).  "  History  of"  mnst  often  be 
retained  nnder  the  snbject.     One  can  say 

Young,  Sir  W.     Athens,     ".id  ed.     London,  1804  ; 
bnt  under  Athens  that  would  not  be  enough  ;  it  would  be  necessary  to  write 

Yot'XG,  Sir  W.  History  of  Athens, 
to  di^^tinguish  it  from  such  works  as  Stuart's  "Anticiuities  of  Athens,"  and  Leake'a 
"Topography  of  Athens."  But  if  there  are  enough  titles  untler  Athens  to  a«lmitof  the 
subheadings  Art.  Anti(ii(itic8,  Hiator;/,  the  words  "History  of"  again  become  nnnecea- 
sary.  Medium  ought  always  to  retain  first  words  under  author,  and  man  omit  them 
under  subject ;  but  sueli  phrases  as  "  Manual  of,"  "  Lectures  on,"  do  much  to  explain 
the  character  of  the  book,  and  for  that  reason  ouglit  often  to  be  retained. 

ilottoes,  however,  at  the  top  of  the  title-page  (often  separated  by  a  line  from  the 
real  title)  may  be  neglected.  Sometimes  such  snperscriiitions  are  important,  gener- 
ally not. 

When  the  author's  name  alone  or  his  name  aud  titles  are  lirst  on  the  title-page,  as 
is  fre(|ueutly  the  case  in  old  Latin  and  modern  French  books,  omit  them.  Ejample : 
Jani  Jacobi  Boissardi  Vesuutini  de  divinatioue. 

A  custom  has  grown  up  of  late,  particularly  in  French  publications,  of  putting  at 
the  top  of  the  title-page,  Ixfore  the  title  proper,  the  name  of  the  .series  to  which  the 
work  belongs  or  else  what  might  be  called  the  classification  of  the  book.  The  name 
of  the  series  should  be  given  in  parentheses  after  the  imprint.  The  cataloguer  may 
retain  or  omit  the  classification  at  his  discretion.  To  avoid  all  possibility  of  mistake 
Full  will  mark  the  omission  of  these  words  by  ... 

163.  Do  not  by  abridgment  render  the  words  retained  false  or  mean- 

ingless or  ungramniatical. 

3.  [Miscellaneous  Rules  and  Remarks. 

164.  In  analyticals,  if  there  are  several  entries  under  the  author  referred 

to,  give  the  first  word  or  words  of  the  title  referred  t(»,  so  that 

the  entry  can  easily  be  found;  if  there  are  few  entries  take  cue 

or  two  words  which  unmistaksibly  identify  the  book. 

A  word  or  two  is  enough'  and  those  abbreviate*!  if  po.ssible  ;'  Imt  sometimes,  when 

the  article  has  an  insuflicient  or  no  title  it  is  well  to  give  more  of  tin-  title  nf  the  book 

in  which  it  is  contained,  if  that  is  more  communicative;  c.  y.,  Wordsworth,  J. 

Grammatical   introduction.     (/«   hii>  Fragments  «)f  early  Latin.     ItT-l.),  where  "of 

early  Latin"   explains  "grammatical    introduction."     The   date   should  always  be 

given  to  .show  in  what  edition  of  the  work  the  passage  is  contained  aud  also  to  what 

period  the  ideas  belong.     Giving  the  pages  facilitates  reference. 


72  .style:    TITLKS. 

'(//I  Mueller,  F.  M.  Chips,  v.  1.  18G7.)  not  (In  Mueller,  F.  M.  Chips  from  a 
GiMiiiaii  workshop,  v.  1.     Ir^tw.) 

^I)l  Graevius.     Thes.  Rom.  anti(i.,  v.  10.     1(599.) 

1G5.  The  title  is  to  be  copied,  so  tar  as  it  is  coj)ie(l,  exactly.  Omissions 
may  be  made  without  givin<;-  notice  to  the  reader,  unless  by  etc. 
when  the  sentence  is  manifestly  unfinished. •  Additions  made  to 
a  title  are  to  be  marked  by  inclosinj;  the  words  in  brackets  [  ].2 
All  additions  to  be  in  the  sann^  language  as  the  title;  if  this  can 
not  be  done,  put  the  addition  into  a  note.^  After  a  word  spelled 
wrongly  or  unusually  insert  [sic].* 

'  The  use  of  ...  is  suited  ouly  to  bibliographies.  I  do  uot  see  why  eveu  Fnil  should 
use  this  sign,  except  for  very  rare  or  typographieally-importaut  books.  The  title  in 
n  catalogue  is  uot  intended  to  be  a  substitute  for  the  book  itself  aud  must  leave  some 
(Hiestions  to  be  answered  by  the  latter.  Bnt  if  the  ...  are  used  they  should  be 
printed  as  a  group,  separated  from  the  word  or  punctuation  mark  which  they  follow 
or  precede  by  a  slight  space,  as  .   ...  or  ...  . 

'The  use  of  [  ]  is  important,  both  as  a  check  on  indiscriminate  addition  and  as  an 
aid  to  ideutihcation.  It  will  not  often  be  of  use  in  the  latter  respect,  but  as  one  can 
never  tell  wheu  it  will  be  needed  it  must  be  employed  always. 

^The  intercalation  of  Englisli  words  in  a  foreign  title  is  extremely  awkward. 

<  Ex.  The  beginning  end  {sic]  end  of  drinking. 

1G6.  If  the  title-page  is  lost  and  the  title  can  uot  be  ascertained,  use  the 
half-title  or  the  running  title,  stating  that  fact;  if  the  book  has 
neither,  manufacture  a  title,  putting  it  in  brackets. 
1G7.   State  in  what  language  the  book  is  written  unless  it  is  evident 
from  the  title. 
Ex.  Aelianus.     De  natura  animalium  [Gr.  et  Lat. ]. 

Aeschines.     Orations  on  the  crown  [Gr.],  with  Eug.  notes. 

168.  Eetain  in  or  add  to  the  title  of  a  translation  words  stating  from 

what  language  it  was  made,  unless   that  is  evident  from  the 
author's  name  or  is  shown  by  its  position  after  the  original  title. 

Ex.    Beckford,  Wm.     Vathek  ;  [tr.  fr.  the  French]. 

Leasing,  Gotthold  Ephraim.     Laocoon ;  tr.  by  £.  Frothingham. 
Euripides.     'Itt-u/iVtoc  arecpavijiopog. 

—     EiKj.     The  crowned  Hippolytus;  tr.  by  M.  P.  Fitz-Gerald. 

169.  In  the  entry  of  translations  after  the  original  give  the  translated 

title,  preceded  by  the  name  of  the  language  of  the  version. 

This  is  for  the  good  of  persons  unacquainted  with  the  original  language,  who  would 
uot  know  the  book  by  the  foreign  title,  and  also  to  identify  the  book,  different  trans- 
lations not  always  having  the  same  title. 

Sand,  George.     Le  chateau  des  d^sertes. 

—  Eng.     The  castle  in  the  wilderness. 

—  L'homme  de  neige. 

—  Eng.     The  snow  man. 
Dante.     Divina  commedia. 

—  Eng.     Vision  of  hell,  purgatory,  and  paradise ;  tr.  by  Gary, 
Divine  comedy  ;  tr.  by  Cayley. 

170.  In  anonymous  titles  entered  under  the  first  word  put  the  trans- 

posed article  after  the  first  phrase. 
Ex.  Ame  en  peine,  Une,  not  Atne,  Une,  en  peine. 


TITLES.       KDITIOXS.  73 

171.  Under  tlip  iiutlior  distiii^iiisli  tlif  titU's  of  aiionyiiioiis  hooks. 
Enclosing  the  dash  in  brackets  is  ugly  [ — ]  ;  «Miclo8inj;  tho  title  in  lirackt'ts  is  mis- 
leading, as  if  the  title  were  false.  Stars  (')  or  daggers  (t)  are  sometimes  prefixed  to 
the  title,  but  they  are  often  used  for  other  purposes  and  they  throw  tho  titles  out  of 
line.  [Jnoh.]  may  be  used  between  the  title  and  the  imprint;  tin  the  same  posi- 
tion would  take  less  room  and  as  soon  as  accepted  would  be  equally  intelligiblo  ;  it 
lias  occasionally  been  used. 

172.  In  the  prehiiiinary  card  catiUo^iie  enclose  in  hrackets  the  name  of 

the  author  of  an  anonymous  or  i)seuih)nymous  work.     This  may 
be  extended  to  cases  where  tlie  name  is  only  implied. 
I'Jx.  '•  I5y  the  Bishop  of  Hipon,"  ''  M.  Tullii  oratio;  "   meaning  M.  Tullii  Ciceronis 
oratio,  or  Cat.  used  iu  ohl  editions  for  Catullus. 

173.  In  the  title-entry  of  au  anonymous  work  insert  the  author's  name 

in  brackets. 
AV.  Colloquies  of  E J \v.  Osborne;  [by  M.  A.  Manning].     London,  IHfiO.     S. 

174.  Words  like  Lord,  Gen.,  Rev.,  King,  ed.,  tr.,  occurrinjj  in  the  title 

are  not  to  be  italicized. 

175.  When  the  title  is  in  an  alphabet  which  <lififers  from  the  English, 

transliterate  the  first  few  words  and  add  a  translation. 

Er.  [Pisni  Kusskaho  uaroda  ;  Songs  of  the  Russian  people.] 

When  the  title  is  in  Greek,  followed  by  a  Latin  translation,  it  is  customary  to  ase 
the  latter  aloue,  and  the  same  may  be  done  in  the  case  of  other  languages.  But  for 
identilication  it  is  necessary  that  some  part  of  the  book's  own  title  should  be  printed. 
It  is  not  enough  to  give  merely  a  made  title  or  a  translation. 

c.  Editions. 

ITf).  Distinguish  editions  by  the  number,  the  name  of  the  editor,  trans- 
lator, etc.,  and  by  mentioning  in  i>arentheses  (not  brackets)  after 
the  imprint  the  collection,  library,  series,  to  which  it  belong.s,  or 
the  name  of  the  society  by  which  it  is  published. 
Ex.  4thed.,IUth  thous.,  Newed.,  e  1.  by  T.  Good,  (Bohn'sstandard  library),  (Weale's 
series,  v.  20),  (Camden  Soc,  v.  3).     It  is  shorter  and  nearly  as  useful  to  give  Bohn, 
Weale,  etc.,  as  publishers  in  the  imprint,  —  London,  Bohn,  I-<t>7.     O. 
The  various  editions  of  ditl'erent  volumes  may  be  stated  thus: 
Hales,  Stephen.     Statical  essays.    (Vol.  1,  3d  ed.)     London,  173:3,  33.     2  v.     O. 
The  siiecitication  of  edition  is  necessary :  (1)  for  the  student,  who  often  wants  a 
particular  edition  and  cares  no  more  for  another  than  he  would  for  an  entirely  diflVrent 
work;  (2)   in  the  library  service,  to  ])rovent  the  rejection  of  works  which  are  not 
really  duplicates.     And  the  number  of  tho  edition  is  a  fact  iu  the  literary  history  of 
the  author  worth  preserving  under  his  name;  under  the  subject  it  is  some  guarantee 
for  the  repute,  if  not  for  the  value,  of  the  work. 

177.  Full  will  note  carefully  wht'ther  there  is  any  change  in  a  new  edi- 
tion, or  whether  it  is  merely  what  the  (Jermans  call  a  title-edition 
(the  same  matter  with  a  new  title-page).  Medium  and  Short 
generally  content  themselves  with  noting  the  number  of  the  edi- 
tion.    iShort  olteu  takea  no  notice  of  the  edition. 


74  STYLE:  IMPKINTS. 

D.  Imprints. 

178.  The  imprint  consists  of  place  of  publication,  publisher's  name, 

(late,  number  of  volumes,  number  of  pages,  number  of  maps, 
engravings,  and  the  like,  and  typographic  form,  which  are  to  be 
given  in  the  above  order. 

Washington,  1875.  2  v.  7,  441,  (12);  4,  424  p.  O.  ;  20  engr.,  24  photographs,  4 
maps.  The  imprint  proper  consists  merely  of  place,  date,  form,  and  nnmber  of  vol- 
nnips  (Wash.,  1875.  2  v.  O).  The  other  details  are  given  by  Medium  in  particular 
cases.  Full  gives  them  always,  but  it  may  be  doubted  -whether  their  use  is  frequent 
enough  to  pay  for  the  very  cousiderable  increase  in  the  trouble  of  cataloguing.  It  is 
worth  while  to  show  by  some  sign  (as  |>hi.)  that  the  pages  are  less  than  100  or  than  50 
(40  is  the  limit  of  the  French  Bibliothfeque  Nationale),  for  the  fact  is  easily  ascer- 
tained, and  the  mark  fills  little  space  and  may  prevent  some  one  sending  for  a  book 
he  does  not  care  to  look  at.  It  is  not  an  exact  designation,  but  many  things  arense- 
ful  which  are  not  exact.  On  the  other  hand  an  inquirer  might  occasionally  fail  to  see 
the  best  treatise  on  his  subject,  thinking  it  too  short  to  be  of  any  value.  Neither 
Short  nor  Medium  should  give  the  exact  number  of  maps,  plates,  etc.,  but  it  is  well 
worth  while,  especially  for  a  popular  library,  to  add  the  word  illus.  to  the  titles  of 
books  in  which  the  illustrations  are  at  all  prominent,  and,  under  Biography,  to  note 
the  presence  of  portraits. 

Imprints  are  indispensable  in  a  catalogue  designed  for  scholars,  that  is  for  college 
libraries,  for  historical  or  scientific  libraries,  and  for  large  city  libraries.  They  may 
not  be  of  much  use  to  nine  persons  in  ten  who  use  those  libraries,  but  they  should  be 
inserted  for  the  tenth  person.  But  in  the  majority  of  popular  city  and  town  libraries 
neither  the  character  of  the  readers  nor  of  the  books  justifies  their  insertion.  Their 
place  may  be  much  better  filled  (as  in  the  Quincy  catalogue)  with  more  important 
matter  —  with  "  Illus."  or  "  Portraits"  or  a  word  or  two  explaining  an  obscure  title. 
But  the  number  of  volumes  should  invariably  be  given.  And  the  year  of  publication 
is  important  under  subjects. 

Epithets  like  "  Large  paper,"  which  are  applicable,  generally,  to  only  a  part  of  the 
copies  of  a  book,  should  be  mentioned  after  all  the  details  which  apply  to  the  whole 
edition  (place,  date,  number  of  volume,  etc.). 

179.  Do  not  translate  the  name  of  the  place  of  publication,  but  if  it  is 

not  in  a  Eomau  alphabet  transliterate  it. 
Gottingen,  notGottingen  ;  Miinchen,  not  Munich  ;  Wien,  not  Vienna;  Londini.not 
Loudon;  Lisboa,  not  Lisbon,  when  the  first  are  the  forms  on  the  title-page.     So 
[Moskva],  Moskau,  Moscou,  Moscow,  according  as  the  imprint  is  in  Russian,  German, 
French,  or  English. 

180.  Use  abbreviations  and  even  initials  for  names  of  the  most  common 

places  of  publication. 

Ex.  Bait.,  Berl.,  Bost.,  Camb.,  Cin.,  Cop.  or  Copenh.,  Got.,  L.  (London),  Lisb., 
Lpz.,  Madr.,  N.  O.,  N.  Y.,  Oxf.,  P.  (Paris),  Phila.,  St.  P.  (St.  Petersburg),  Yen.,  Wash. ; 
and  use  the  ordinary  abbreviations  for  state  names.     (A  list  is  given  in  Appendix  V.) 

181.  If  there  is  more  than  one  place  of  publication  Short  and  Medium 

should  give  only  one. 

If  the  places  are  connected  by  "and,"  as  London  and  Edinburgh,  New  York  and 
London,  take  the  first ;  if  they  are  unconnected,  as 

Berlin  Paris  Genfeve 

H.  Bailli^re 
take  that  which  proves  on  examination  to  be  the  real  place  of  publication.     In  this 
economy  there  is  some  danger  of  cataloguing  the  same  book  at  different  times  with 


IMI'KINT.S.  Tf) 

difToreiit  iinpriiits,  .and  makiiiji  two  ('(litioiiHout  of  oiio;  hut  Jilittlf  watclifiiliii-ss  will 
]ireveiit  this. 

182.  If  tli«'  i)liit;('  (lilVcis  in  the  tlillcrJMit  voliiiiu's,  statr  the  l';i<t. 
Kx.   History  of  Eiiylaixl.     Vol.  l-'J,  Host  on  ;  I!-.'.,  N.  Y..  lHf,7-t,y.     .^  v.     ( ». 
1S3.  Print  imhii.sliers'  iiaiucs,  when  it  i.s  iiece.ssary  to  j^ivi;  iIkmu,  altor 
tJK'  place. 

ICs.  London,  I'ickeiiiijj,  IH4'J  ;  AiitwcrixMi,  hi  mi  Clacs  di«  fJraiit'.  Tln>  i>iihlish«r'8 
name  innst  not  bo  mistnkun  f<ir  tlio  place.  I  have  seen  n  iIozimi  hooks  (;ata]o;;ticd  us 
Rodliold,  1H.'>-.  D  ;  Redfiehl  hcing  a  Now  York  ituhlisher  who  had  a  fancy  for  making 
his  namo  tlu'  most  ])rominont  ohject  in  tho  iiupn'nt  of  his  hooks. 

184.  If  tlie  place  or  date  given  at  the  end  of  the  book  ditfeis  fiom  tliat 

on  the  title-i)a<?e,  or  if  place  and  date  arc  j^iven  there  otdy,  tln'y 
shonld  be  printed  in  brackets. 

Ex.  Augsb.,  15*25  \_co}oi)h<m  Niiremb.,  l.VJIi]. 
Lpz.,  Ico/.  15711. 

185.  In  early  works  the  date  is  sometimes  given  without  the  century,  as 

^'im  vierten  Jahre,"  /.  e.,  1G04.     Of  course  the  century  should  be 
8upi>lied  in  brackets. 
18G.  Masonic  dates  should  be  followed  by  the  date  in  the  usual  form. 
Ex.  .5-:«4  [1s;m].    o. 

187.  Chronograms  should  be  interpreted  and  given  in  Arabic;  numerals. 
Ex.  M«  DiiCit  Christ Vs  =  1704. 

188.  When  the  place  or  date  is  given  falsely,  whether  intentionally  or 

by  a  typographical  error,  add  the  true  place  or  date  in  lii;uktts. 
if  it  can  be  ascertained. 
Ex.  Londou,  1975  [1775].     O.     Bo.ston,  18S7  [ISSf.].     O. 

I'ari.s,  L-^4  [mi-stake  for  1^74].     O.     En  Sui.sse  [Paris],  17G9. 

189.  When  the  i)lace  or  date  is  not  given,  supply  it  in  brackt-ts,  if  it  can 
be  ascertained.  I  f  neither  is  discoverable,  write  n.  p.  { =  no  place), 
n.  d,  (  =  no  date),  to  show  that  the  omission  of  place  and  date  is 
not  an  oversight. 

Ex.  n.  p.,  n.  d.     O. 

190.  But  avoid  n.  d.,  and  if  po.s.sible  give  the  decade  or  at  least  the  cen- 

tury, even  if  an  interrogation  point  must  be  added. 

Ex.   London,  [17—].     Q. 
I'hila.,  [Id2-f]     O. 

191.  Print  the  date  in  Arabic  numerals. 
Ex.  1517  for  MDXVII  or  CIO  10  XIIIX. 

When  the  snbirrangt'intmt  of  the  catalo<;no  is  hy  (hiti-s  (as  in  tliat  of  tlie  Amor. 
Philos.  .Society),  it  may  ho  well  to  place  the  date  nniformly  at  the  end  of  the  line  in 
this  order:  O.  Wash..  l'-*(J4.  Otherwise  the  best  order  is  to  pnt  the  phu-o  and  date 
immediately  after  the  title,  boeaiise  like  it  they  are  taken  from  the  title-pa^e.  The 
form,  which  is  not  copied  but  is  tlie  eatalo;^ue.r's  own  assertion,  then  comes  last.  The 
dates  can  bo  made  prominent  in  a  chronolo;;ical  arrati<;ement  by  printing  them  in 
heavy  typo,  as  in  Prof.  Abbot's  "  Litoratnre  of  tho  doctrine  of  a  future  life."  la 
Very  Short  tho  Germau  stylo  of  priutiug  dates  should  be  adupteU,  7A'i  (i.  c,  1742), 
875  (i.  c,  lti75). 


7G  STVLK:    IMl'K'INTS. 

19i'.  When  (lififerent  volumes  of  a  work  were  published  at  dififereiit  times, 
j(ive  the  extreme  dates. 

Ex.  Paris,  1840-4'2.  O.  Sometinics  Vol.  1  is  of  tlie  'M  ed.  and  itw  datt-  in  later 
than  that  of  Vol.2.  This  is  in  Modinni:  (Vol.  1,  lid  ed.)  1874,  69-73.  f)  v.  O;  in 
Short  nioroly  1869-74. 

193.  In  catalojETuing  reprints,  Full  should  j,nve  the  date  of  the  original 

edition. 
Ex.  Ascham.  K.     Toxophilus,  154;").     Loudon,  187(1.     O.  (Arbor's  reprints.) 

or  3d  ed.     London,  1857  [1st  ed.  ir)42].     O. 
The  labor  of  always  hunting  up  the  original  date  is  so  great  that  Medium  may  be 
allowed  to  give  it  when  it  can  easily  he  ascertained,  and  omit  it  in  other  cases. 

In  a  printed  catalogue,  if  tbe  first  edition  is  in  the  library,  of  course  its  date  ueed 
not  l>o  given  with  the  sub«e<ineut  editions. 

194.  In  analyticals  Medium  and  Full  should  give  the  date  of  the  work 

referred  to,  and  the  number  of  pages;  Short  should  specify  at  least 
which  volume  is  meant. 

The  date,  if  it  be  that  of  original  publication,  tends  to  show  the  style  of  treatment ; 
if  it  be  that  of  a  reprint  or  of  "  Works  "  it  shows  which  of  the  various  editions  iu  the 
library  is  meant.  The  numher  of  pages  will  help  the  reader  to  decide  whether  the 
reference  is  worth  looking  up. 

The  Birmingham  Free  Library  has  an  ingenious  way  of  printing  analyticals.  The 
title  is  iu  long  primer  type,  the  parenthesis  is  iu  pearl,  of  which  two  lines  will  justify 
with  one  of  the  long  primer. 

Fossils.     Recent  and  fossil  shells  by  Woodward  (^^"^o'^r""') 

Gleig,  G.  R.  Eminent  military  commanders  ( p„j'ilTo'fa.79-'2K )  3  duo  1832. 
By  this  arrangement  the  analytical  nature  of  the  reference  is  made  much  clearer  and 
often  a  line  is  saved.     But  it  is  very  troublesome  to  the  printer. 

195.  Give  the  number  of  volumes. 

An  imperfect  set  can  be  catalogued  thus  : 
Vol.  2-4,  6-7.     Bost.,  1830.     5  v.    O,  or 
Bost.,  1830,     7v.  (V.  5w.).     O. 

7  v.  O  means  Vol.  1-7  if  nothing  is  said  to  the  contrary,  and  any  number  of  missing 
volumes  can  be  enumerated  in  the  second  of  these  forms;  but  as  the  first  volumes  of 
periodicals  are  often  missing,  the  exception  may  be  made  of  always  cataloguing  them 
iu  the  first  form.  Whatever  Short  may  be  forced  to  do  by  its  system  of  charging 
books.  Medium  and  Full  ought  to  give  the  number  of  volumes  bibliographically,  that 
is  to  say,  they  should  count  only  that  a  volume  which  has  its  owu  title,  paging,  and 
register.  If  the  parts  of  a  work  have  a  continuous  register  or  a  continuous  paging 
they  form  one  volume ;  but  if  they  are  called  Vol.  1,  Vol.  2  on  the  title-page  they  may 
be  described  as  1  v.  in  2.  For  the  bibliographical  cataloguer  binding  has  nothing  to 
do  with  the  matter.  That  the  binder  has  joined  two  or  more  thin  volumes  or  divided 
a  thick  one  ought  to  be  recorded  iu  the  accessions-book  and  iu  the  shelf-list,  but  if 
not  worth  notice  in  the  catalogue;  if  mentioned  at  all  it  should  be  iu  such  a  way 
that  the  description  of  the  accidental  condition  of  a  single  copy  in  a  particular  library 
shall  not  be  mistaken  for  an  assertion  applicable  to  a  whole  edition  (thus,  1  v.  bd.  in 
2,  or  2  V.  bd.  in  1,  as  the  case  may  be).  A  work  which  has  a  title-page,  but  is  con. 
uected  with  another  work  by  mention  on  its  title-page  as  part  of  the  volume,  or  by 
continuous  paging  or  register,  is  said  to  be  appended  to  that  work. 

196.  Let  the  signs  f°,  4°,  8°,  etc.,  if  used,  represent  the  fold  of  the  sheet  as 

ascertained  from  the  signature,  not  be  guessed  Irom  the  size. 

In  the  older  books  this  is  important,  and  iu  modern  books  the  distinction  between 
the  octavo  and  the  duodecimo  series  is  so  easiiv  ascertained  that  it  is  not  worth  while 


IMI'KINTS.  77 

to  bo  inaccnratP.  Tin-  si/.t*  may  J)t^  iimro  exactly  iiiditati'd,  if  it  in  thoiif^ht  worth 
while,  hy  I.  or  HIM.,  s(i.,()lil.,  prclixiMl  to  tim  fold,  as  1.  H",  hiii.  1".  Tlie  "vc)"(ir  "mo" 
ahoiild  l)t«  npiesrMit.-d  hy  a  siiinTior"  if  it  can  ho  liad,  otliorwimi  a  decree-mark  o, 
thoiiyh  manifestly  improper,  must  1(0  employed;  it  has  ahiiiidant  nsa>;o  in  itH  favor. 

Another  method  of  giving  the  form  is  f"(H),  4"  (2),  h''(4),  in  wiiich  (",  4",  H"  indicato 
the  apparent  form  of  the  hook  as  tho  terms  folio,  quarto,  octavo  are  generally  nnder- 
stood,  and  the  lignres  within  the  parentheses  show  tlll^  nnmlier  of  ImvcH  intervening 
between  the  snccessivo  signatnres. 

"In  the  folio  the  sheet  of  paper  makes  two  leaves  or  four  pages,  in  the  I"  fonr 
leaves,  in  the  H-  eight,  in  tho  12"  twelve,  and  so  on.  When  a  shei-t  of  jjaper  is  ffddod 
into  six  leaves,  making  what  ought  to  bo  a  (»"  book,  it  is  calh-d  a  12'*  i>rinted  in  half 
sheets,  because  such  printing  is  always  done  with  half-sized  paper,  or  with  half-sheets, 
so  as  to  give  a  12"  size.  From  a  very  early  period  it  has  lieen  universal  to  distin- 
gnish  tho  sheets  by  ditlorent  letters  called  signatures.  At  present  a  sheet  has  A  on 
the  lirst  leaf  or  Al  on  tho  tirst  loaf  and  A2  on  tho  second,  which  is  enough  for  tho 
folder's  purpose.  But  in  former  times  the  signatures  were  generally  carried  on 
through  half  the  sheet,  and  sometimes  through  the  whole.  Again,  in  modern  times, 
no  sheet  ever  goes  into  and  forms  part  of  another;  that  is,  no  leaf  of  any  one  shoot 
ever  lies  between  two  loaves  of  another.  But  in  tho  sixteenth  century,  and  ovon 
later  in  Italy,  it  was  common  enough  to  print  in  qniro-fashion,  tho  same  letter  being 
used  for  the  whole  quire,  and  the  leaves  of  the  quire  distinguished  as  they  wore  suc- 
cessively placed  inside  of  one  another  by  tho  figures  2,  H,  4,  so  that  a  book  actually 
printed  in  folio  might  have  the  signatures  of  a  modern  octavo.  In  exact  bibliography 
such  books  are  sometimes  described  as  'folio  in  twos,'  '  folio  in  fours.'  Rules  are 
given  for  determining  the  form  of  printing  by  the  water-lines  of  the  paper  and  by 
tho  catchwords.  It  is  supposed  that  tho  latter  are  always  at  the  end  of  tho  sheet, 
and  also  that  the  water-lines  are  perpendicular  in  folio,  octavo,  and  decimo-octavo 
books,  horizontal  in  quarto  and  duodecimo.  But  in  the  lirst  place  a  groat  many  old 
books  have  catchwords  at  the  bottom  of  every  page,  many  have  none  at  all ;  and  as  to 
tho  rule  of  water-lines,  there  arc  exceptions  to  every  case  of  it."* 

For  aiiytbing  but  exact  bibliognipliical  description  it  is  better  to  take 
no  accoiiut  of  the  fold  of  the  sheet,  but  either  to  give  tlie  size  in  centi- 
meters or  to  use  the  notation  of  the  American  T.ibrary  Association  (see 
Appendix  III,  p.  115),  which  is  founded  on  measurement. 

Fe,  anything  less  than  10  centimeters. 


Tt, 

between 

I  10    and  12^ 

centimeters, 

T, 

S, 

12A  and  l'> 
V,    and  17i 

D, 

" 

17i  and  20 

o. 

20    and  2.-. 

Q. 

25    and  :50 

F, 

over 

:{0: 

centimeters. 

F', 

u 

40 
fjO 

« 

And  so  on. 

197.  Maps  may  be  identilii'd  nther  by  giving  the  .scale  or  by  measure- 
ment. 

The  measure  (in  centimeters)  should  be  taken  from  tho  inner  margin  of  the  de- 
grees, unless  the  map  extends  lieyond  it,  in  which  case  measure  to  the  farthest  point; 
pictures  at  the  side  aro  not  to  l)e  included  in  tho  moasuro  unloHS  they  como  within 
tho  degree-mark.    The  perpendicular  measure  to  be  stated  tirst,  thou  tho  horizontal. 


'  Dc  Moff^aa,  «ll«red. 


78  style:  contents  and  notes. 

E.  Contents  and  notes. 

198.  Give  (under  the  author)  a  list  of  the  conteuts  of  books  containing 

several  works  by  the  same  author,  or  works  by  several  authors, 
or  works  on  several  subjects,  or  a  single  work  on  a  number  of 
distinct  subjects,'  especially  if  the  collective  title  does  not  suffi- 
ciently describe  them.* 
'As  a  oolloction  of  lives. 

•Only  Full  can  jjjive  the  contents  of  all  such  works,  including  the  memoirs,  trans- 
actions,  etc.,  of  all  the  learned  societies.  And  in  an  analytical  catalogue  this  is  much 
less  important.  When  every  separate  treatise  is  entered  in  its  proper  places  under  the 
names  of  its  author  and  of  its  subject,  why  should  it  be  given  again  in  a  long  column 
of  fine  type  which  few  persons  will  ever  read  ?  Because,  if  analysis  is  not  complete, 
conteuts  supplement  it ;  and  one  who  has  forgotten  author  and  subject  may  occasion- 
ally recall  them  by  looking  over  a  "contenis;"  and  this  list  is,  so  far  as  it  goes,  a  sub- 
stitute for  a  classed  catalogue  in  this  respect.  Moreover,  the  "  contents"  is  needed  to 
fully  explain  the  character  of  the  subject-entry  (see  ^  4).  In  the  division  Biography 
under  countries  we  have  many  such  titles  as  "Memoirs  of  eminent  Englishwomen," 
"  British  senators,"  "  Political  portraits."  It  is  an  advantage  to  the  reader,  though 
perhaps  neither  a  great  nor  a  frequent  advantage,  to  be  able  to  find  out  from  the  cata- 
logue what  Englishwomen  and  what  British  senators  he  shall  find  described  in  the 
books.     No  catalogue  can  be  considered  complete  that  omits  such  information. 

For  collected  works  of  any  author  '^contents"  have  been  found  so  useful  that  even 
Short  often  gives  them,  especially  of  late,  and  strange  to  say,  not  rarely  prints  them 
in  the  most  extravagant  style,  allowing  a  line  for  each  item.  One  may  sometimes  see 
a  quarter  of  a  page  left  bare  from  this  cause. 

199.  When  a  single  work  fills  several  volumes  give  the  contents  under 

the  author,  provided  the  division  is  definite  and  easily  described. 

Object,  that  the  inquirer  may  know  which  volume  he  wants;  application,  chiefly 
to  dictionaries  and  historical  works  ;  method,  in  general,  giving  dates  and  letters  of 
the  alphabet,  which  take  little  room.  It  is  particularly  important  also  to  fully  de- 
scribe in  this  way  very  bulky  works;  Walton's  Polyglott  is  a  good  example,  in  con- 
sulting which,  without  such  a  guide,  one  may  have  to  handle  ten  gigantic  folios. 

200.  Under  the  subject  repeat  so  much  of  the  contents  as  is  necessary 

to  show  how  the  subject  is  treated  or  what  part  is  treated  in  the 
different  volumes. 

This  is  particularly  desirable  in  works  with  an  insufficiently  descriptive  title  which 
treat  of  several  subjects,  for  which  under  each  heading  will  be  given  its  appropriate 
part  of  the  conteuts.  For  example,  Hugo's  "  Jus  civile  Autejustiuiaueum  "  contains 
the  originals  of  Antejustiniau  law,  but  this  does  not  appear  from  its  title,  and  if  it 
did,  it  would  be  hardly  worth  while  to  save  a  few  lines  by  obliging  the  reader  to  turn 
to  Hugo  to  ascertain  just  what  is  in  the  book.  On  the  other  hand,  the  conteuts  of 
Pertz's  "Monumenta  Germaniae  historica"  is  so  long  that  only  Fullest  can  afford  to 
give  it  under  Germany  as  well  as  under  Pertz.  In  such  a  case  the  reader  feels  it  to 
be  more  reasonable  that  he  should  be  referred. 

The  contents  is  often  more  useful  under  subject-heading  than  under  author;  but  it 
is  best  that  there  should  be  one  uniform  place  where  it  can  always  be  found,  and 
where  the  whole  of  it  can  be  found,  and  that  place  should  be  the  author-catalogue. 

201.  Put  into  notes  (in  small  type)  that  information  which  is  not  given 

in  the  title  but  is  required  to  be  given  by  the  plan  of  the  catalogue. 


NOTES.       liKKEUENCES.  79 

Notes  have  sovornl  olijects  : 

1.  To  j;ivo  any  information  aljoiit  tlio  autlior,  tiit>  I'onn  of  liiH  nam«>,  hin  pHcudo- 
nyniM,  etc.,  about  tlio  (litlerciit  editions  or  plact-s  of  pulilicatioii,  or  ali<Mit  the  fjap.s  in 
a  set  (especially  of  poriodicaKs),  which  can  not  be  indnded  in  the  tilhi  without  making 
it  di8i»roportiouat;ely  lon<;.  Short,  ospocially  if  without  imprints,  can  get  many  of 
these  into  the  title;  which  it  is  well  to  do,  for  a  short  note  is  not  economical. 

2.  To  explain  the  title  or  correct  any  misapprehension  to  which  it  might  lead.  In 
a  popular  library  the  boys  take  out  "The  cruise  of  the  Retsy,"  imagining  it  to  be  an- 
other "Cruise  of  the  Midge." 

3.  To  direct  the  attention  of  persons  not  familiar  with  litoraturo  to  the  best  books. 
The  main  i>rinciples  of  such  annotating  are  simple,  (a. )  The  notes  should  characterize 
the  best  books  only;  to  insert  tiiem  under  every  author  would  only  confuse  ami  weary; 
if  few  they  \vill  arrest  attention  much  better.  Dull  books  and  morally  bail  books 
should  bo  left  in  obscurity.  Under  .some  of  the  poorer  works  which  have  attained 
unmerited  popularity  a  brief  protest  may  bo  made  ;  it  will  probably  be  ineffectual; 
but  it  can  do  no  harm  to  call  Miihlbach  unreliable  or  Tupper  commonplace,  (b. )  They 
should  be  brief  and  pointed.  Perhaps  after  this  direction  it  is  necessary  to  add  that 
they  should  be  true. 

4.  To  lay  out  courses  of  reading  for  that  numerous  class  who  are  desirous  of  "  im- 
proving their  minds,"  and  are  willing  to  spend  considerable  effort  and  time  but  know 
neither  where  to  begin  or  how  to  go  on. 

5.  To  state  what  is  the  practice  of  the  catalogue  in  the  entry  of  the  publications  of 
Congress,  Parliament,  Academies,  Societies,  etc.,  the  notes  to  be  made  under  tho.se 
words. 

F.  References. 

202,  In  references  use  the  word  Sec  when  there  is  no  entry  nnder  the 

lieading  from  which  the  reference  is  made;  See  also  when  there 
is  one. 
Ex.  Death  penalty.     See  Capital  punishment. 
Horticulture.     Li.ndlky,  J.     Theory  of  H. 
.sV(  tihii  Flowers  ;  —Fruit. 
Not  Vide  ;  the  language  of  an  English  catalogue  should  bo  English. 

203.  References  must  be  brief. 

Yet  the  convenience  of  the  public  must  not  be  sacrificed  to  brevity.  If,  for  instance, 
several  authors  had  used  the  .same  pseudonym,  the  titles  of  their  respective  works 
should  bo  given  in  the  references  that  the  reader  may  know  uiuler  which  of  the 
autiiors  ho  will  find  the  work  he  is  in  .search  of,  and  not  have  to  turn  to  all  three. 

Detlef,  Carl,  pseud.     See  Baur,  C. 
is  the  usual  form  of  reference;  but  it  is  not  enough  for  Maiiiiitnu. 

Hamilton,  pseud.     Essay  on  a  congress  of  nations.     Sir  "Whitman,  (J.  H. 

Hamilton,  pseud.     Hamilton.     No.  1,  etc.     Sec  Carey,  M. 

Anaiyt:«;il  references  to  treatises  of  the  .same  author  or  on  the  same  subject,  con- 
tained in  different  volumes  of  the  same  work,  may  be  mad"  tluis: 

Charles,  .V.  ( ).  Reformatory  and  refuge  union.  ( In  National  Assoc.  Prom.  Soo. 
Sci.  Trans.,  H(;u.)  —  Refornjatory  legislation.  (/»  Trans.,  Mil.)  —  Punishment  and 
reformation  ni  America.     (In  Tran.s.,  18(33.) 

Comets.  Pkirce,  B.  Connection  of  comets  with  the  solar  system.  (//lAmer. 
Assoc.  I'roc,  v.  i>.  IS50.)— Hi-HBARD,  J.  S.  Biela's  «loublo  comet.  (Inv.-*.)  — 
KiUKWDoii,  1).     Mean  distances  of  the  periodic  comet.     (/«  v.  12.     IH.VJ. ) 

The  signs  <^  >  have  been  used  instead  of  (  )  in  aualytical  references  to  mean 
"  contained  in."    They  are  more  conspicuous,  —  unnecessarily  .so. 


80  style:  kefekencks,  language,  capitals. 

References  are  frequently  printed  in  smaller  type  than  the  rest  of  the  catalogue. 
Tills  is  well  when  there  are  enough  not  to  be  overlooked ;  but  a  single  reference 
from  one  form  of  a  name  to  another,  or  from  one  subject-name  to  its  synonym,  should 
hi-  in  the  title  typo,  not  in  the  note  typo,  e.  g. 

Bell,  \v\o\\^  pseud.     Av  Bronte.  An iie. 
Gardening.  i<ee  Horticulture. 

Similarly  notes  oxplainitig  the  practice  of  tho  catalogue  {^^  61,  201  no.  .'))  should 
be  made  typographically  conspicuous. 

G.  Language. 

204.  The  language  of  the  coin[)iler's  part  of  an  English  catalogue 
should  be  English. 

Therefore  all  notes,  explanations,  and  such  words  as  in,  see,  see  also,  note,  contents, 
and  (between  joint  authors),  and  others,  n.  p.,  n.  d.,  should  be  English;  however,  etc., 
q.  v.,  and  sic  may  be  used. 

For  the  language  of  headings,  see  ^  27-36.  In  the  entry  of  Government  publi- 
cations the  name  of  the  couutry  or  city  will  have  the  English  form  (^  'd'.i,  34),  but 
the  name  of  the  department  should  usually  be  in  the  language  of  the  couutry,  e.  g.  : 
Italy.     Ministero  di  AgricoUiira. 

But  for  countries  like  Russia,  Turkey,  Japau,  where  the  vernacular  name  could 
not  easily  be  ascertained,  an  English  form  may  be  used. 

For  titles  see  ^'^  165-169,  17.5  ;  put  the  specifications  of  the  kdition  in  the  language 
of  the  title,  also  the  imprint  (^  179),  contents,  notes,  and  references. 

H.  Capitals. 

205.  In  English  nse  an  initial  capital 

1.  for  the  first  word, 

a.  of  every  sentence, 

b.  of  every  title  quoted, 
:/Vo, c.  of  every  alternative  title, 

2.  for  all  proper  names 

a.  of  persons  and  places,  ^        , 

b.  of  bodies,//^A  7T«mO  I  e^«^  separate  word  not  an  article 
-^  _  c.  of  noted  events  and  periods,  J  «^'  preposition. 

N.  B.  This  does  not  include  names  of  genera,  species,  etc.,  in  the  auimal  and 
vegetable  kingdoms,  which  in  an  ordinary  catalogue  should  not  be  capitalized  ;  as 
digitalis  purpurea,  raia  batis,  the  horse. 

3.  for  adjectives  and  other  derivatives  from  proper  names  when  they 

have  a  direct  reference  to  the  person,  place,  etc.,  from  which 
they  are  derived. 

4.  for  titles  of  honor  standing  instead  of  a  proper  name. 

Ex.  \b.  Reply  to  the  Essay  on  the  discovery  of  America. 

Ic.  Institutio  legalis  ;  or.  Introduction  to  the  laws  of  England.  But  it  is  bet- 
ter, when  the  sense  will  permit,  to  omit  the  "or"  aud  consider  the  second 
title  as  a  clause  explanatory  of  the  first,  as  Institutio  legalis  ;  introduc- 
tion to  the  laws  of  England. 

91b.  Society  for  Promoting  the  Dittusion  of  Useful  Knowledge. 

2c.  Boston  Massacre,  French  Revolution,  Gunpov.der  Plot,  Middle  Ages. 

4.    The  Eari  of  Derby,  hut  John  Stanley,  earl  ot  Derby. 


CAPITALS.       PL'NCTUATION  81 

20G.   Ill  foreij,'!!  laii^MKi^ey,  use  iuitiiil  capitals 

5.  lor  1<(,  l^j'irs- 

6.  (Persons  and  places)  a.  In  (hrman  and  Ihinish  for  every  noun  and 

lor  adjectives  derived  from  nan)eH  of  persons,  but  for  no  others. 
h.  In  tlio  Romance  lan^uajies  {Italion,  French^  SpaniHh,  Portuyuene) 

and  in  Stredish  and   Greek  lor  projjer  names  of  persons  and 

l)laces,  but  not  f»)r  adjectives  derived  ffUm  them. 
c,  in  Latin  and  Dutch  for  i)roper  names  and  also  for  the  adjectives 

derived  from  them,  but  not  for  common  nouns. 

7.  (Bodies)  as  in  I^jU^dish,  except  that  in  German  and  Danixh  only  the 

nouns  are  to  be  capitalized,  and  adjectives  when  they  be<,nn  the 
name. 

8.  (Invents  and  periods)  as  in  Eufjlish,  with  the  same  exception. 

9.  (Titles)  in  German  and  Danish':! hwi  not  in  the  ivo»/n«re  lancuacres, 

in  Latin  or  in  Greek.  ^ 

Ex.  (ia.  l)io   HoiiieriBcho  Frago,  but  Die  griecbischen  Scbolieii.     In  many  German 
books  capitals  are  not  used  evL-n  for  adjectives  derived  from  personal  names. 
i\h.  Los  Fran^ais,  but  le  jn'uple  fran^ais. 

7.  Soci6t6  de  I'llistoire  de  France. 

8.  Lo  Moyen  Ago,  la  Revolution   Franyaise,  Die  franzosiscbe   Kevolution.     The 

French,  however,  now  generally  print  lo  nioyen  4ge,  la  r^^volutictn  fniu- 
Caise.  Capitals  are  to  bo  avoided,  because  in  the  short  sentences  of  wliicli 
a  catalogue  consists  they  confuse  rather  than  help  the  eye.  For  this  rea- 
son it  is  better  not  to  capitalize  names  in  natural  history  whether  English 
or  Latin  (bee,  rana  pipiens,  liliaceio,  etc.).  Several  libraries  following 
the  lead  of  the  Congress  catalogue  have  discarded  capitals  for  (.ierinuu 
uouus.  Grimm's  authority  is  alleged  in  justification,  but  Grimm's  example 
is  followed  by  a  very  small  minority  even  of  German  scholars,  and  the 
titles  so  printed  still  have  an  awkward  look  to  most  readers.  The  liostoa 
Public  Library  also  goes  to  an  extreme  in  its  avoidance  of  ca]iitals,  not 
using  them  for  such  proper  names  as  methodists,  protestant  episcopal 
church,  royal  society,  etc. 
The  names  of  languages  are  not  to  be  capitalized  in  the  Komance  languages,  as 
"traduit  de  I'anglais,"  "in  francese." 

Titles  of  honor  are  not  to  \n\  capitalized  in  the  Romance  languages,  .is  comte,  conte, 
marchese.     But  Monsieur,  Madame,  Sifjtior,  Don,  Donna  always  begin  with  cajiitals. 

Use  capitals  (or,  better,  small  capitals)  for  numbers  after  the  names  of  kings 
(Charles  in.  or  Henry  IV.)  and  for  single-letter  abbreviations  (A.  D.,  H.  C,  H.  M.  S., 
F.  R.  S.  E.,  etc.,  or  A.  1).,  K.  K.  s.  K.,  etc.).  Butn.  p.  no  jdace,  n.  t.  jt.  no  title-page,  may 
be  in  lower-case  letters  or  small  capitals,  and  b.  born,  d.  died,  ms.  manuscript,  should 
be  in  lower  case. 

n.    PUNCTUATION,    KTC. 

207.  Let  each  entry  consist  of  four  (or  live)  sentences: 

1.  the  headinji,  Cicero,  Marcus  Tullius. 

2.  the  title,  iuchuliug  editors  y      Brutus  de  claris  oratoribus ;  erkl. 

and  translators,  S  von  ().  Jahn. 

3.  the  edition,  I'e  Aiitl. 

48U1-'  Li G 


82  STYLE  :    PUNCTUATION,   ETC. 

4.  the   imprint,   as   given    by 


the  book, 


Berlin,  1S56. 


5.  the    part    of    tlie    imprint  » 
added  by  the  cataloguer,   i 

Which,  if  not  the  first  title  under  Cicero,  would  read: 

—  Brutus  de  Claris  oratoribus ;  erkl.  von  O.  Jahn.  2e  Aufl.  Berlin, 
185G.     O. 

Separate  by  a;  the  title  proper  from  the  phrase  relating  to  the  editor,  translator, 
etc.  This  requires  a  niininimn  of  capitals.  It  will  occasionally  happen  that  the  title 
can  not  be  thrown  into  one  sentence,  but  that  should  al\v.ay8  be  done  when  pos- 
sible. It  is  usual  to  separate  4  and  5.  The  French,  however,  make  one  sentence  of 
them  (Paris,  ld64,  in-12).  This  has  the  advantage  of  agreeing  with  the  best  form  of 
quoting  a  title  ("  see  his  Memoirs,  London,  1874,  O.  in  which,"  etc.).  It  is  useless  for 
one  who  abridges  titles  to  make  any  attempt  to  follow  the  punctuation.  The  spell- 
ing should  be  retained,'  but  it  is  hardly  worth  while  for  Short  or  Medium  to  imitate 
the  old  printers  in  their  indiscriminate  use  of  i  and  j,  u  and  v. 

A  library  may  have  a  collection  of  books  or  a  few  volumes  which  from  their  rarity 
deserve  to  be  catalogued  with  every  bibliographical  nicety,  with  the  most  exact 
copying  of  punctuation,  spelling,  aud  forms  of  letters,  and  even  with  marks  to  show 
where  the  lines  of  the  title  end.  Such  collections  are  the  Prince  and  the  Tickuor 
books  in  the  Boston  Public  Library,  such  single  books  are  fifteeuers  or  the  rarest 
Americana.  Yet  it  may  be  questioned  whether  a  library  does  well  to  redescribe  books 
already  fully  described  by  Hain,  Harrisse,  Thiele,  Trommel,  Stevens,  or  Sabin.  A 
simple  reference  to  these  works  will  generally  suffice  (^  261). 

208.  Supply  the  proper  accents  if  they  are  not  given  in  the  title. 

In  French  aud  Greek  titles  printed  in  capitals  the  accents  are  often  omitted.  In 
the  titles  of  rare  books,  copied  exactly,  accents  should  not  be  supplied. 

209.  Use  [  ]  only  for  words  adtled  to  the  title,  and  (  )  to  express  inclusion. 

Ex.  Talbot,  E.  A.     Five  years'  residence  in  Canada,  [1818-23]. 
Maguire,  J.  F.     Canada,     (//i  7us  Irish  in  America.     1808.) 
Bale,  J.     Kinge  Johu,a  play;  ed.  by  J.  P.  Collier.    Westm.,  1838.     4".     (Cam- 
den Soc,  V.  2.) 

?10.  If  any  title  contains  [  ^  or  (  )  omit  them,  using  commas  instead. 

One  sign  should  never  be  used  to  express  two  things,  if  that  can  be  avoided  ;  each 
should  have  one  definite  meaning.  Also  alter  —  into  ,  or  ;  or  .  as  the  context  may 
require. 

211.  Use  italics  for  the  words  See  or  See  also  in  references,  In  and  In 

Jiis  in  analyticals,  and  for  Same,  Note,  Contents,  and  Namely,  and 
for  etc.  when  used  to  indicate  omission  of  part  of  the  title,  also 
for  subdivisions  of  subjects  (as  France,  History). 

212.  In  long  Contents  make  the  division  of  the  volumes  plain  either  by 

heavy-faced  volume-numbers  or  by  giving  each  volume  a  sepa- 
rate paragraj)h. 
Anyone  will  recoil  from  the  labor  of  looking  through  a  long  undivided  mass  of  small 

type;  moreover  the  reader  ought  to  be  able  to  determine  at  once  in  what  volume  any 

article  whose  title  he  is  reading  is  contained. 


AKKAXGEMENT.  83 

I.  AUUANGEMENT.* 

213.  Arrange  entries  according  to  the  Kn;ilisli  alpliabct,  whatever  the 

order  of  the  alphabet  in  which  a  Ibicign  nam*'  niigiit  have  to  be 

entered  in  its  original  hmguage. 

Treat  I  unci  J,  U  and  V,  as  Hcimratc  letter.s;  ij,  at  least  in  tin*  oM»'r  Diitrli  iiarnea, 

Bhoiihl  be  arranged  as  y ;  ilo  not  put  Spanish  names  heginninn  with  Ch,  LI,  1^,  ufter 

all  other  names  beginning  with  C,  L,  and  N,  as  is  done  by  tlm  Spanisii  Aiademy,  nor 

a,  a,  se,  6,  0  at  the  t-nd  of  the  alphabet,  as  is  done  liy  the  Swedes  and  iJanes,  nor  the 

German  a,  o,  ii,  as  if  written  ae,  oe,  ue  (excejjt  Goethe).     If  two  names  are  spelled 

exactly  alike  except  for  the  nnilant  (as  Mliller  and  Mnller)  arrange  by  the  forenames. 


t  (as  Mnller  an 
(jMn  JVl^all 

irilKADIN'GS 


GS. 

214.  When  the  same  word  serves  for  several  kinds  of  licading  let  the 

order  be  tlie  following:  person,  phii-e,  followed  by  snl>ject  (ex- 
cept person  or  place),  form,  and  title. 
Arrangement  ninst  be  arbitrary.     This  order  is  easy  to  remember,  because  it  fol- 
lows the  course  of  cataloguing;  we  put  down  first  the  author,  theu  th»<  title.     The 
subject  and  form,  expressed  sometimes  in  more  than  one  word,  and  the  title,  almost 
always  having  more  than  one  word,  must  be  arranged  among  themselves  by  the  usual 
rules.    Of  course,  the  person  considered  as  a  subject  can  not  be  separated  from  the 
person  as  anther.     As  the  place  may  be  either  author  or  subject  or  both,  it  may  come 
between  the  two. 
Ex.  "Washington,  George,  (person)         I        Homes,  If.  A.  (person) 

Washington,  Z>.  C      (place)  |        Homes  family.  (persons) 

I        Homes.  (subject) 

I        Homes  and  shrines,  (title) 

215.  Forenames  used  as  headings  precede  surnames. 
A'r.  Christian  ii.  Francis  ii. 

Christian,  .lames.  Francis,  Abraham. 

Christian  art.  Francis  and  .Jane. 

21G.  Headings  like  Charles,  George,  tienry,  when  very  numerous,  must 
be  di\'ided  into  classes,  in  this  order:  Saints,  Popes,  Emperors, 
Kings,  Princes  and  Noblemen,  others.  The  Saints  are  sub- 
arranged  by  their  usual  appellatives,  the  Popes  by  their  number, 
Sovereigns  and  Sovereign  princes  in  alphabetical  order  of  coun- 
tries, aiul  under  countries  numerically.  Other  persons  are  subar- 
ranged  by  their  usual  ap[)ellatives,  neglecting  the  jirepositions.  * 


Ex.  Peter,  Saint. 
Peter,  I'opc. 

Peter  the  Great,  Emptror  of  Ilussia. 
Peter  ii.  of  Aragon. 
Peter  iil.  of  Arayon. 
Peter  l.  of  Portugal. 
Peter,  Dnkc  of  Xetrrasth. 


Peter,  of  Groi^imjfn,  cnthunia't 

Pieter. 
Peter,  .John  Henry. 
Peter.  Lake. 
Peter,  Mt. 

Peter  Lewis,  a  true  tale 
Peter-Hansen,  Krik. 


'  So  that  Thomas  de  Insula  and  Thomas  [nxiilanuM  may  not  be  separated. 
When  there  are  two  appellatives  coming  in  dilb'rent  jtarts  of  the  alphabet,  refer 
from  the  rejected  one,  as  Thomas  CantiiaricnHim,     Ste  Thomas  Meckel. 

•On  this  subject  consult  Appendix  IV.  pp.  llft-118:  aUo  p.  3&-69  of  Dr.  C:  Driatzko'n  "Instruciioo 
fur  die  Ordnung  der  Titel  im  alphntx-tinchen  Z)>tt<>lkatalog  der  Univ.-Bibliothck  in  i}r«al«a,  Berlin. 
18*6,"  74  pp.  O  (the  first  35  pp.  ore  a  tnatise  on  Kntry). 


84  STYLE  :    AKKANGEMENT    OF    HEADINGS. 

217.  Arrange  i)roi)er  luiiues  beginning  Nvitli  M',  Mc,  £t.,  Ste.  as  if  spelled 

Mac,  Saint,  Sainte. 
Becausi'  tliey  an.-  m>  inonounced.     But  L'  is  uot  arrauyed  as  La  or  Le,  nor  O'  as  if 
it  Btood  for  Of,  because  they  are  uot  so  pronounced. 

218.  In  a  card  catalogue  mix  iu  one  alphabet  names  that  differ  slightly 

in  spelling  and  come  close  together  iu  the  alphabet. 
Ex.  Clark  and  Clarke,  and  the  French  names  beginning  with  Saint  and  Sainte. 
The  names  should  be  sj)elled  correctly,  but  the  difference  of  spelling  disregarded  by 
the  arranger.  But  the  exceptional  order  should  be  clearly  indicated.  A  guide  block 
should  have  the  inscription  Clark  and  Clarke,  and  there  should  be  a  reference  guide 
block,  Clarke.  Sec  Clark.  The  most  common  spelling  should  go  first;  if  the  forms 
are  equally  used,  let  that  precede  that  comes  first  iu  alphabetical  order. 

219.  Arrange  by  the  forename  headings  iu  which  the  family  name  is 

the  same. 

No  attention  is  to  be  paid  to  prefixes,  as  Bp.,  Capt.,  Dr.,  Hon.,  Sir,  Fraidein,  Mi88, 
Mlh.,  Alme.,  Mrs.,  or  to  suffixes,  as  D.D.,  F.R.S.,  LL.D.,  etc.  Iu  regard  to  Eun- 
garian  names,  observe  that  the  name  appears  on  the  title-page  as  itdoes  in  a  catalogue, 
the  family  name  first,  followed  by  the  Christian  name  ;  as,  "  Elbe8z616sek  ;  irta  bir6 
Eotvos  Jozsef. 

220.  When  the  forenames  are  the  same  arrange  chronologically. 

Again,  no  attention  is  to  be  paid  to  the  titles  Sir,  etc.  The  alphabetical  principle 
is  of  no  use  here  because  no  one  can  know  beforehand  which  of  many  pos.sible  titles 
we  have  taken  to  arrange  by,  whereas  some  one  may  know  when  the  author  whom 
he  is  seeking  lived.     Of  course  JBt-ow-ti  ,  J«.. 

Brown,  T.  L.,  comes  before   .  3-r-«wrvvXt 

Bro-wrn,  Thomas,  for  the  same  rfefl^u  that  J3>-rirvLrT-^  ^'  ^  • 

Brown  comes  before  *7»,A-^ 

Browne.  ^^^'^^^'^L . 

221.  Forenames  not  generally  used  should  be  neglected  iu  the  arrauge- 

ment. 

When  an  author  is  generally  known  by  one  of  several  forenames  he  will  be  looked 
for  by  that  alone,  and  that  aloue  should  determine  the  arrangement,  at  least  in  a  card 
catalogue.  Instances  are:  Agassiz,  (J  :)  L:  (Rudolph),  Cleveland,  (Stephen ).Grover, 
Collins,  (W:)  Wilkie,  Cook,  (Flavins  Josephus  A;hoh"«  us)  Joseph,  Dobson,  (H:) 
Austin,  Dore,  (Paul)  Gustav.     The  form  should  be 

Harte,  Bret  {full  name  Francis  Bret),  or  Harte,  Bret  {in  full  Francis  Bret). 
Make  refereuces  wheuever  the  omission  of  a  name  will  change  the  alphabetical  ar- 
rangement, as  from  Miiller,  F:  Max,  to  Miiller,  Max. 

But  if  they  are  counted  in  arranging  they  should  be  spaced  or  parenthesized, 
because  when  there  are  several  persons  with  the  same  family  name  the  spacing  or 
parenthesiziug  assists  the  eye  in  picking  out  the  right  one.     Thus  if  we  have 

Franklin,  Johu,  d.  1759, 

Franklin,  Sir  John.  d.  1863, 

Franklin,  John  Andrew, 

Franklin,  John  Charles, 

Franklin,  John/D avid) 
the  reader  not  knowing  of  the  name  David  would  expect  to  find  the  last  among  the 
simple  Johns,  but  seeing  the  David  spaced  would  understand  that  it  was  a  rarel^ 
used  name.     This  supposes  that  he  knows  the  system,  but  one  can  not  have  a  con- 
densed catalogue  without  obliging  the  reader  to  learn  how  to  use  it.    (See  ^  140.) 


85 


222.  If  im  iUithor  usos  both  the  sliortrr  ainl  the   li)ti;,'»T  loniis  in  (lifTer- 

ent  works  and  yet  is  decidedly  bctti-r  known  l)y  tlie  shorter, 
urranf^e  by  that. 

Ex.  Miiller,  Max  (i/i  full  V:  Max).     OtlnTwiso  j^ive  and  arraiij^t*  l»y  all  tlu«  iiatii»-H. 

223.  If  a  i)erson's  forenames  occur  difttMetitly  in  ditferent  l)ooks  or  «lif- 

ferent  authorities,  or  occur  in  a<litVerent  onler,  or  the  person  has 
changed  one  or  more  of  liis  tbrenanies,  arrange  by  one  form  (the 
best  known  or  the  hitest)  and  refer  from  the  oth«'rs  if  alphalieti- 
cally  separated. 

224.  Arrange  a  nobleman's  title,  under  which  entry  is  made,  and  the 

name  of  a  bishop's  see,  from  which  reference  is  made  to  the  fam- 
ily name,  among  the  personal  names,  not  with  the  places. 

Danby,  John. 

Danby,  TliomaH  Osborne,  Farl  of. 

Dauby,  Win. 


Danby.  Kng. 

Holland,  (". 

Holland,  H:  E.  Fox-Vassal.  W/i  lUiron. 

Holland,  H:  R.  Fox-Vassal, :?(/ />aron. 

Holland  \_the  countnj'\. 


Ex.  London.  Alfred.  , 

London,  David,  Bji.  of. 

London,  .lohn. 

London,  Coini. 

London,  Euij. 
not  London.  .Tolin. 

London,  David,  />>.  of. 

London,  Coun. 
nor  London,  John. 

London,  Comi. 

London.  David,  Bj>.  of. 

London,  Eikj.  i 

225.  The  possessive  case  singular  should  be  arranged  with  the  plural. 

TIr'  alphabet  demands  thi.s,  and  I  seo  no  reason  to  make  an  exception  which  oaD 
not  be  made  in  foreign  langnages. 

Bride  of  Lammermoor.  |       Boys'  ami  girls'  book. 

Brides  and  bridals.  I       Boy's  King  Arthur. 

Bride's  choice.  |      Boys  of  '76. 

220.  Arrange  Greek  aiul  Latin  personal  names  by  their  patronymics  or 
oth(  r  appellatives. 
Ex.  Dionysius. 

Dionysius  Jrcopagita. 

DionyBius  Chalcidetisin.  —  tiot       nf  'nrtleis 

Dionysius  (ienuensis. 

227.  Arrange  English  personal  names  compounded  \sr\th  prefixes  as  sin- 
gle words;  also  those  foreign  names  in  which  the  prefix  is  not 
transposed  (see  §  24). 

/.'jr.  Demonstration. 
De  Montfort. 
Demophilus. 
De  Morgan. 
Demosthenes. 

This  is  the  nniversal  cnstom,  founded  on  thofai-tth.it  the  prefixes  i»ro  ofl<>n  not 
separated  in  printing  fntm  the  following  part  of  the  n.ime.  It  would,  of  course,  be 
wrong  to  liave  Demorgan  in  one  place  and  De  Morgan  in  another. 


Other  such  names  are  Ap  Thonia".  De« 
Barres.  Dn  Chailhi,  Fitz  Allen,  La  .Motte 
Fou<|ii<^,  Le  S.ige,  Mac  Fingal,  O'Neal, 
Saint-Rt'^al,  Sainte-Beuve,  Van  Buren. 


86  .srvu::  ai;kanui:mi;n  r  <»f  hkadings 

'J2S.  Arrjiuge  i>ersi)iial  names  conipouiuleil  of  two  names  with  or  with- 
out a  hyphen  after  the  first  name  but  before  the  next  longer 
word. 

Ex.  Fonte,  Harl.  df. 

Fonte  Resbecq,  Au^uste. 
Fontenay,  l.oiiis. 
Foiitenay  Mareuil,  Franfois. 

329.  In  the  preliminary  card  catalogue  it  is  best  to  arrange  these  by 
the  first  name,  neglecting  the  second  entirely^  and  subarranging 
by  forenames. 

The  reason  is  (1)  that  authors  do  not  ahvays  use  the  second  part  of  tlicir  names, 
and  (-2)  that  the,  single  alphabet  is  eiwiier  to  use  in  a  card  catalogue. 

Ex.  Halliwell  {afterwards  Halli'well-Phillipps),  James  Orcliard. 

'  Except  when  the  lirst  family  names  and  forenames  of  two  persons  are  the  same, 
when  the  one  with  a  second  part  will  come  after  the  other;  but  if  both  have  a  sec- 
ond part,  snbarrauge  by  these  second  parts  when  they  dift'er. 

2o0.  Arrange  compound  names  of  places  as  separate  words. 

Ex.  New,  John.  not  New,  John. 

New  Hampshire.  New  h-gion  of  Satan. 

New  legion  of  Satan.  Newark. 

New  Sydenham  Society.  Newfoundland. 

New  York.  New  Hampshire. 

Newark.  Newspapers. 

Newfoundland.  New  Sydenham  Society. 

Newspapers.  New  York. 

231.  Arrange  names  of  societies  as  separate  words. 
See  New  Sydenham  Society  in  the  list  above. 

232.  Arrange  as  single  words  compound  words  which  ax^  printed  as  one. 

Ex.  Bookseller,  Bookplates.  Sometimes  such  words  are  printed  on  title-pages  as 
two  words;  in  such  case  do  the  same  in  copying  the  title,  but  if  the  word  is  used  as 
a  heading  follow  the  authority  of  a  dictionary  ;  each  library  should  select  some  one 
dictionary  as  its  standard. 


233.  Arrange  liypliened  words  as  if  separate. 

Grave  and  Reverend  Club. 

Grave  County. 

Grave  Creek. 

Grave-digger. 

Grave-moiinds. 

Grave  objections. 

Grave  de  Mezeray,  Autoine. 

Gravel. 

Gravestone. 

Graveyard. 

Out  and  about. 

Out  in  the  cold,  a  song. 

Out-of-door  Parliament. 

Outer  darkness,  The. 


Ex.  Happy  home. 

Happy-Thought  Hall. 
Happy  thoughts. 
Home  and  hearth. 
Home  rule. 
Homely  traits. 
Homer. 
Sing,  i^send. 
Sing,  James. 
Sing,  James,  pseud. 
Sing-Sing  Prison. 
Singapore. 
Singing. 


aki{angi:mi:nt  ok  iikadings.  87 

234.  Arrange  pseudonyms  after  the  correspomliiifi  real  name. 

Ex.  Andrew,  pxcuil. 
Andrew,  St. 
Andrew^,  St.,  pneud. 
Andrew,  Jobn. 
Andrew,  J ohu,  pseud. 
Andrew,  John  All)ion, 

235.  Arranj^'e  incomplete  names  by  the  letters.     If  the  same  letters  are 

followi'tl  l)y  (lillerent  .sij,Mis,  if  there  are  no  forenames,  arran;;e  in 
the  order  of  the  complexity  of  signs;  but  if  there  are  forenames 
arrange  by  them. 

Ex.  Far  from  the  world. 
Far. . . 
Far'-" 
Far**',  B.F. 
Far. . . ,  J.  B. 
Parr,  Jobu. 

236.  If  signs  without  any  letters  are  used  as  headings  (§  57)  (as  ...  or 

ttt)  put  them  all  before  the  first  entries  under  the  letter  A. 

237.  The  arrangement  of  title-entries  is  first  by  the  heading  words; 

if  they  are  the  same,  then  by  the  next  word  ;  if  that  is  the  same, 
by  the  next;  and  so  on.  Every  word,  articles  and  prepositioQS 
included,  is  to  be  regarded;  but  not  a  trausi)Osed  article. 

Ex.  Uncovenanted  niorcies. 

Under  a  cloud. 

Under  thi^  ban. 

Under  tbe  <irt'en\vood  tree  ;  a  novel. 

Under  the  ^^rfcnwood  tree;  a  poem. 

Under  wbicb  king. 

Undone  task,  Tbe. 

Undone  task  done. 
Hero  tbe  transposed  Tbe  is  non-existent  for  the  arranger. 

It  makes  no  ditierence  whether  tbe  words  are  connected  with  one  another  in  eense 
ornot;  the  searcher  should  not  be  compelled  to  think  of  that.  Let  the  arrangement  be 
by  words  as  ordinarily  printed.  Thus  Home  rule  is  one  id. -a  but  it  is  two  words,  and 
its  place  must  be  determined  prini.irily  i>y  its  lirst  word  Home,  which  brings  it  before 
Homeless.  If  it  were  printed  Homerule  it  would  com"  alter  Homeless.  Similarly 
Art  amateur  is  one  phrase,  but  as  ilu^  lirst  word  Art  is  followed  by  a  word  beginning 
with  am,  it  must  come  before  Art  and  artists,  although  its  parts  are  more  closely 
connected  than  tbe  parts  of  the  latter  phrase. 

Tlie  French  d'  and  1'  are  not  to  be  treated  iis  part  of  the  following  word: 
Ex.  Art  d'6conomiser.  not  Art  de  faire. 

Art  d'etre  grandpfere.  Art  de  linguistique. 

Art  d'instniire.  Art  de  I'lnstruction. 

Art  de  faire.  Art  d'«5coiiomiser. 

Art  .le  I'instruction.  Art  des  uiiucs. 

Art  de  linguisti(iue.  Art  d'fitro  graudpftre. 

Art  des  mines.  Art  digne. 

Art  digne.  Art  d'iustruire. 


88  STYLE:    AKRANGKMKNT    OF    HEADINGS    AND    TITLES. 

238.  Arrange  titles  beginning  witii    numeral   figures  (not  expressing 

the  number  of  the  work  in  a  series,  §  244)  as  if  the  figures  were 
written  out  in  the  language  of  the  rest  of  the  title. 
Ex.  100  deutachcr  MiinnL'r  =  Ein  hniidort  dcntHclio  Miinuer ;  1812  =  Mil  huit  cent 
douze. 

239.  Arrange  abbreviations  as  if  spelled  in  full ;  but  elisions  as  they  are 

printed. 
Ex.  Dr.,  M.,  Mile.,  Mine.,  Mr.,  Mrs.,  as  Doctor,  Monsieur,  etc. 
But  WhoM  be  a  king  ? 

Who  killed  Cock  Robin  ? 
Who's  to  blame  ? 
J^^The  arrangement  recommended  iu  $§  227-232  suits  the  eye  best  and  requires  as 
little  knowledge  or  thought  as  any  to  use.  The  exception  made  in  ^  227  is  required 
by  universal  practice  and  by  the  fact  that  a  very  large  part  of  the  personal  uanios 
beginning  with  prefixes  are  commonly  printed  as  one  word.  Names  of  places  begin- 
ning with  New,  Old,  Red,  Blue,  Green,  etc.  (which  might  be  likened  to  the  prefixes 
De,  Dos,  Du, etc.,  and  made  the  ground  of  a  similar  exception),  are  much  less  fre- 
quently printed  as  one,  and  when  they  are  the  accent  is  different.  Moreover  the  words 
New,  Old,  etc.,  have  an  independent  meaning  and  occuras  personal  n.Tmes,  first  words' 
of  titles,  or  of  the  names  of  societies,  as  in  the  examples  in  ^  230.  The  reason  for 
separatiug  New  Hampshire  and  Newark  in  the  first  example  is  patent  to  every  con- 
suiter  at  a  glance  ;  the  reason  for  the  different  positions  of  New  legion  and  New  York 
in  the  second  example  would  not  be  clear  and  would  have  to  be  thought  out;  and  it 
is  not  well  to  demand  thought  from  those  who  use  the  catalogue  if  it  can  be  avoided. 

2.  Titles. 

240.  Under  an  author's  name  adopt  the  following  order:  (1)  Complete 

(or  nearly  complete)  works,  (2)  Extracts  from  the  complete  works, 
(3)  Single  works,  whether  by  him  alone  or  written  in  conjunction 
with  another  author,  (4)  Works  about  him. 

Nos.  1-3  come  first  as  belonging  to  the  author-catalogue ;  4  comes  last  as  belonging 
to  the  subject-catalogue. 

It  is  better  to  let  the  smaller  collections  come  in  their  alphabetical  place  with  the 
eino-le  works.  The  single  works  of  a  voluminous  author  (as  Aristotle,  Cicero,  Homer, 
Shakespere)  should  be  so  printed  that  the  different  titles  will  strike  the  eye  readily. 
If  the  "cotiients"  of  the  collected  words  are  not  printed  alphabetically,  it  is  well 
to  insert  under  the  titles  of  the  chief  single  works  a  reference  to  the  particular  vol- 
umes of  the  collections  in  which  they  are  to  be  found.  (See  Boston  Athenaeum  catal., 
art.  Goethe.)  Two  works  published  together  are  arranged  by  the  first  title,  with 
reference  from  the  second. 

Extracts  from  single  works  come  immediately  after  the  respective  works. 

A  spurious  work  is  arranged  with  the  single  works,  but  with  a  note  stating  the 
epuriousness.  But  if  the  author's  name  is  used  as  a  pseudonym  the  entry  should  have 
a  separate  heading  after  all  the  works ;  as,  Browne,  H.  History.  Browne,  H., 
pseud.     Stones  from  the  old  quarry.     See  Ellison,  H. 

If  there  are  only  two  Joint  authors  both  may  appear  in  the  heading,  but  the  entry 
ehoald  be  arranged  among  the  works  written  by  the  first  author  alone;  if  there  are 
more  than  two  the  heading  may  be  made  in  the  form  Smith,  John,  and  others.  The 
usual  practice  hitherto  has  been  to  arrange  entries  by  joint  authors  after  the  works 
written  by  the  first  author  alone,  and  this  was  recommended  in  the  first  edition  in 
regard  both  to  the  form  of  the  heading  and  the  arrangement ;  but  although  it  is  pleas- 
ing to  a  classifying  mind,  it  is  practically  objectionable  because  a  reader,  not  know- 
ing that  the  book  he  is  looking  for  is  a  joint  production,  and  not  finding  it  in  the  first 


AKKANGKMKNT    OF    TITLKS.  89 

serii-a  of  titlea,  may  suppose  that  it  ia  uot  in  tho  lil>rary.  Tliitt  danj^or  i.s  greatest  in 
a  card  catalojjiie,  where  it  entirely  overweighs  tho  somewhat  visionary  ailvantage  of 
the  separate  arrangement.  Th«j  arrangement  of  a  card  catah)gue  8lionhl  bo  as  simple 
as  i>ossil)le,  because  the  reader  havin;;  only  o'lo  card  at  a  time  under  his  eyes  can  not 
easily  see  what  the  arrangement  is.  On  the  printed  page,  wheni  he  takes  in  many 
titles  at  a  glance,  more  classification  can  be  ventured  upon  ;  there  the  <langer  is  eon- 
fined  to  the  more  voluminous  authors;  vl'"!""  there  are  few  titles  tho  consnltor  will 
read  them  all  and  so  will  not  miss  any.  On  tho  printed  page,  too,  tho  mixing  in  of 
joint  autliurs  interrupts  to  tho  eyo  tho  alphabetical  order  of  titles  ;  c.  g., 
Dod,  T.     Anamites  and  their  country. 

—  and  otlwrn.     Harracouta. 

—  Carriiioo,  a  voyage  to  the  interior. 

—  and  "White,  E.     Dahomey  and  the  slave  trade. 

—  Elephauta,  its  caves  and  their  images. 

This  tritlitjg  inconvenience  can  bo  easily  avoided,  however,  by  including  tho  sec- 
ond name  in  the  title;  e.  g., 
Dod,  T.     Anamites. 

—  Barracouta,  by  D.  [and  others]. 

—  Carriboo. 

—  Dahomey,  by  Dod  and  E.  White. 

—  Elephanta. 

When  the  form  Smith,  John,  and  others  is  used,  Full  w  ill  give  a  list  of  the  "others" 
in  a  note.  They  aio  not  put  into  a  heading  merely  because  there  is  not  room  for 
many  names  on  the  first  line  of  a  card,  and  in  a  printed  catalogue  the  information 
seems  more  in  place  in  a  note  than  in  a  very  long  heading. 

241.  lu  the  order  of  titles  take  account  of  every  word  except  initial 

articles.     If  two  titles  have  the  same  words  arrange  by  date  of 
imprint,  the  earliest  first. 

Ex.  Address  of  Southern  delegates  in  Congress. 
Address  of  the  people  of  Great  Britain. 
Address  of  twenty  thousand  loyal  Protestant  apprentices. 
Address  on  national  education. 
Address  to  a  provincial  bashaw. 

Address  to  Christians,  recommending  the  distribution 
Hussou,  F.     Vie  d'une  grande  dame. 

—  Vie  dans  le  Sahel. 
Maaon,  T.     The  corner  stone. 

—  A  wall  of  defence. 

242.  Arrange  different  editions  of  the  same  works  chronologically. 

L    -»>,*/-    £■!■.  Homervis.     Carmina[Gr.];  cumannot.,  cur.C.  (;.  Ileyne.    Lips.,  1802.    Sr.   8». 
^cu'^ri        --  -'^aine.     [Gr.];  cum  notis  et  proleg.  R.  P.  Knight.     Londini.  l-fiW.     4». 
<^7.oTi-»"l.      —  Saiiir.     [Gr.  J;  ed.  J.  Bekker.     Bonuae,  1858.     '2  v.     8". 

Bartlett.  .John.     Collection  of  familiar  quotations.     :id  ed.     Camb.,  IrW.     12". 

—  Same.      Jth  ed.     Boston,  180.3.     12°. 

—  .S.jHif.     8th  ed.     Boston,  1882.     16°. 

243.  Undated  editions  should  have  the  date  .supplied  as  nearly  as  may 

be;  absolutely  undatable  editions  should  precede  date<l  editions. 
241.  Disregard  numerals  commencing  a  title  before  such  words  as  lie- 
port,  Annual  report. 

Xot  First  report,  but  General  aeeount 
Fourth  report.  -4«»,  ;^t,  t«h  report. 

General  account,  u    ,      -r-       i   i    u 

Second  report.  ' 


90  STYLE:    AKKANGEMENT    OF    TITLES 

245.  Arrange  translations  immediately  after  the  original,  prefixing  the 
name  of  llie  langnage  into  which  they  are  made;  if  there  are 
several,  arrange  the  languages  alphabetically. 

Ex.  Cicero.     De  officiis.     [Various  editions,  arranged  cbrouologically.] 

—  Same.     Erkl.  von  O.  Heine.     Berlin,  1857.     8°. 

—  ling.     Ofliccs;  tr.  by  C.  R.  Eduiopds.     London,  1850.     8°. 

—  French.     Les  oflices ;  tr.  par  [G.  Dubois].     Paris,  1()91.     8». 

If  tlio  original  is  not  in  the  library  tlie  translation  may  bo  arranged  either  by  the 
first  words  of  its  own  title  or  by  the  first  words  of  the  original  title  prefixed  in  brack- 
ets.   The  latter  order  is  to  be  preferred  when  most  of  the  other  titles  are  in  the  orig- 
inal hmguage.     When  the  list  of  entries  is  long  a  reference  should  be  made  from  any 
title  of  a  translation  which  is  alphabetically  much  separated  from  it-s  original  back  to 
the  original  title  under  which  it  is  to  be  found. 
Ex.  Hofland,  Mrs.  B.  (W.  H.).     [The  son  of  a  genius.     French:']  Ludovico  ;  tr.  par 
Mme.  de  Montolieu. 
Dudevant.     L'homme  de  neige. 

—  Fng,     The  snow  man. 

[58  titles  interposed.] 

—  The  snow  man.     See,  back,  L'homme  de  neige. 

An  original  text  with  a  translation  is  to  be  arranged  as  if  alone,  but  if  there  are 
many  editions  make  a  reference  from  among  the  translations  to  the  original.  If  there 
are  translations  into  two  languages  in  a  volume,  arrange  by  the  first,  and,  if  neces- 
sarj-,  refer  from  the  second. 

Polyglots  precede  all  other  editions. 

24:6.  Divide  the  works  about  a  person  when  numerous  by  collecting  the 
titles  of  lives  into  a  group. 

247.  When  a  writer  is  voluminous  insert  the  criticisms  or  notes  on  or 

replies  to  each  work  after  its  title;  othersvise  give  them  accord- 
ing to  §  240,  at  the  end  of  the  article. 

248.  Arrange  analyticals,  when  there  are  several  for  the  same  article, 

chronologically,  as  being  different  editions. 

Ex.  Pretty,  F.  Prosperous  voyage  of  Sir  T.  Cavendish.  {In  Purchas,  S.  Pil- 
grims, V.  1,  b.  2.  1625;  —  Harris,  J.  Col.,  v.  1.  1705;  audx,  1.  1764;  —  Callan- 
der, J.     Terra  Austr.,v.  1.  1768;     —  Hakluyt,  R.     Col.,  v.  4.  1811.) 

249.  If  the  library  has  a  work  both  as  part  of  another  work  and  inde- 

pendently, arrange  in  the  probable  order  of  publication, 
^x.  Cutter,  C:  A.     Common  sense  in  libraries.    (/?i  Library  journal,  v.  14.  1889.) 

—  Same.     {In  American  Library  Assoc.     Proceedings  at  St.  Louis,  1889.) 

—  Same,  separated. 

—  Same.     [Boston,  1889.]     Q. 

250.  Under  countries  arrange  titles  as  under  any  other  author. 

That  is,  put  first  the  country's  own  works  (governmental  publications),  then  the 
works  about  the  country;  and  as  we  put  the  criticisms  on  a  voluminous  author  after 
the  separate  writings  to  which  they  respectively  apply,  so  we  put  accounts  of.  or 
attacks  upon  any  branch  of  government  after  the  entry  of  the  branch. 

251.  In  arranging  government  publications  make  all  necessary  divisions 

but  avoid  subdivision. 


aukangi:mk\t  of  titlks. 


91 


It  is  much  clcarnr  —  and  it  is  the  dictionary  l)laii  — to  iiiakf  tin'  jiaitu  of  a  division 
themselves  independent  divisions,  referriti);  from  tlie  itu-iudiii^X  ilivision  to  the  siih- 
ordinate  one.     K.  g.  (to  take  part  of  the  headings  under  United  States): 


SubordiiKition. 


United  States. 


Hitter  orihr. 

U.   S.    Adjutant-(;rneral. 

Hureau  of  Kn^iueer.'*. 
linreaii  of  Iiulian  Allairs. 
Hureau  of  Navifration. 
liureau  of  Navy  Yards  and  Doeks. 
Hureau    of  Topofjraphical    Engi- 
neers. 
Commiissary-General. 
Department  of  thr  Interior. 
De])artment  of  th<«  Navy. 
Department  of  War. 
Freedmen's  Hureau. 
Hydrof^raphie  OtBie. 
Military  Academy. 
Naval  Academy. 
Naval  Asylum. 
Naval  Observatory. 
Patent  Office. 
Pension  Office. 
Pulilic  Lands. 


Dcjiartment  of  tlie  In- 
terior. 
Hureau  of  Indian  Af- 
fairs. 
Patent  Office. 
Pension  Office. 
Public  Land  Office. 
Depactment  of  the  Navy. 
Hureau  of  Navigation. 
Hydrographic  Office. 
Naval  Academy. 
Naval  Observatory. 
Bureau  of  Navy-Yards 
and  Docks. 
Naval  Asylum. 
Department  of  War. 
Adjutant-Geueral'sOf- 

tice. 
Bureau  of  Engineers. 
Bureau  of  Topograph- 
ical Engineers. 
Com  m  issary-Gen  eral'a 

Office. 
Freediueu's  Bureau. 
Military  Academy. 

The  subordination  of  bureaus  and  offices  to  departments  is  adopted  simply  for  con- 
venience, and  is  changed  from  time  to  time  as  the  exigencies  of  the  public  service 
demand.  There  is  no  corresponding  convenience  in  preserving  such  an  order  in  a 
catalogue,  but  inconvenience,  especially  in  the  case  of  the  above-mentioned  changes. 
The  alphabetical  arrangement  has  here  all  its  usual  advantages  without  its  usual 
disadvantage  of  wide  separation. 

252.  Insert  a  synopsis  of  the  arr«inp:eraeut  whenever  there  are  enongh 
titles  under  a  heading  to  require  it. 

This  applies  chielly  to  the  larger  countries  (as  France,  Great  Britain,  United 
StatCH),  the  more  voluminous  authors  (as  Cicero,  Shakespeare),  one  title-entry 
(Bible),  and  possibly  some  subjects  not  national.  The  arrangement  of  titles  under 
Bible  will  be  governed  by  'Jji  240,  242,  245,  and  247;  but  it  can  be  best  understood 
from  an  example  in  some  catalogue  which  has  many  titles  under  that  heading.  The 
synopsis  in  the  Boston  Athena-um  catalogue  is  as  follows: 

Whole  Bibles  (first  Polyglots,  then  single  languages  arranged  alphabetically). 

Works  illustrating  the  whole  Bible  (under  the  heads  Analysis,  Antiquities,  Bibli- 
ography, Biography,  Canon,  Catechisms,  historical  and  theological,  C«>mmcntarie8, 
Concordances,  Criticism,  Dictionaries,  Evidences,  authority,  etc.,  Geogra|>hy.  Herme- 
neutics.  History,  Insj)iration,  Introductions,  Natural  history.  Science  and  the  Bible, 
Theology,  morals,  etc..  Miscellaneous  illustrative  works). 

Selections  from  both  Testaments. 

Proi)hctical  books  of  both  Testaments. 

Old  Testament.   * 

Illustrative  wv>rks. 


92 


style:  akkangemknt  of  contents. 


Parts  of  the  Old  Tcstainont  (ariau<je<l  iu  the  order  of  the  Euglish  versiou),  and 
works  severally  illustrating  them 

Apocryj»ha, 

New  Testament. 

Illustrative  works. 

Parts  of  the  New  Testament,  and  works  illustrating  them. 

Under  each  part  the  order  is:  Pklitious  of  the  original  texts  chronologically  ar- 
ranged ;  —  Versions,  in  the  alphabetical  order  of  the  languages ;  — Illustrative  works. 


3.  Contexts. 


253.  Arrange  contents  either  iu  tbe  order, of  the  vohimes  or  alphabetic- 
ally by  the  titles  of  the  articles. 


Volume  order. 

Contents.  Vol.  1,  Musfcus,  a  monody 
to  the  memory  of  Mr.  Pope. —  Odes,  son- 
nets, epitaphs  and  inscriptions,  elegies. — 
The  English  garden. —  Religio  clerici. — 
Hymns  and  psalms.  2.  Elfrida,  a  dra- 
matic poem. —  Caractacus,  a  dramatic 
poem. —  Sappho. — Argentile  and  Curan,  a 
legendary  drama. —  Pygmalion,  a  lyrical 
scene.  3.  DuFresuoy's  art  of  painting. — 
Dryden's  preface  to  his  translation  of  Du 
Fresuoy. —  Chronological  list  of  painters 
to  1689. —  Essays  on  English  church  mu- 
sic. 4.  Sermons. —  Essay  on  the  meaning 
of  the  word  acgel,  as  used  by  St.  Paul. — 
Examination  of  the  prophecy  in  Matthew 
24  th. 


Alphabeiical  order. 

Contents.  Argentile  and  Curan;  a  legend- 
ary drama,  v.  2. 

Art  of  painting,  by  Du  Fresnoy, 
V.  3. 

Caractacus  ;  a  dramatic  poem, 
v.  2. 

Chronological  list  of  painters 
to  1689,  V.  3. 

Dryden's  preface  to  his  transla- 
tion of  Du  Fresuoy,  v.  3. 

Elegies,  v.  1. 

Elfrida  ;  a  dramatic  poem,  v.  2. 

Euglish  garden,  The,  v.  1. 

Epitaphs  and  inscriptions,  v.  1. 

Essay  on  tlie  meaning  of  the 
word  angel,  as  nsed  by  St. 
Paul,  V.  4. 

Essays  on  Euglish  church 
music,  V.  3. 

Examination  of  the  prophecy 
in  Matthew  24th,  v.  4. 

Hymns  and  psalms,  v.  1. 

Mus?eu8  :  a  monody  to  the  mem- 
ory of  Mr.  Pope,  v.  1. 

Odes,  V.  1. 

Pygmalion ;  a  lyrical  scene,  v.  2. 

Religio  clerici,  v.  1. 

Sappho  ;  a  lyrical  drama,  v.  2. 

Sermons,  v.  4. 

Sonnets,  v.  1. 

It  is  evident  how  much  much  more  compendious  the  second  method  is.  But  there 
is  no  reason  why  an  alphabetical  "contents"  should  not  be  run  into  a  single  para- 
graph. 

The  titles  of  novels  and  plays  contained  in  any  collection  ought  to  be  entered  iu 
the  main  alphabet;  it  is  difficult  then  to  see  the  advantage  of  an  alphabetical  ar- 
rangement of  the  same  titles  under  the  collection.  Many  other  collections  are  com- 
posed of  works  for  which  alphabetical  order  is  no  gain,  because  the  words  of  their 
titles  are  not  mnemonic  words,  and  it  is  not  worth  while  to  take  the  trouble  of  ar- 
ranging them  ;  but  there  are  others  composed  of  both  classes,  in  which  such  order  is 
very  convenient. 


AKKANOKMKNI     <)K    SUBJECTS.  9i) 

4.  SriuKCTs. 

254.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  mix  two  subjects  together  because  their 

names  are  spelled  in  the  same  way. 
TliiiH  Grace  lictbre  iiicals,  Qrace  of  body,  Grace  the,  musical  tt-rrii,  ami  Grace  tin* 
tbfologicul  term,  must  be  four  tliHtiuet  heiuliii^^H. 

255.  Under  subject-headings  group  titles  topicallv  wlicn  it  caii  be  done, 

otherwise  arrange  them  by  the  authors'  names. 

Alphabetical  arrungemeut  by  autliors'  names  is  useful  when  a  subject-entry  is  a 
eubstituto  for  a  title-entry,  but  otherwise  is  as  useless  as  it  is  inai>i>ro|iriate.  If  the 
authoi's  name  is  known  the  l»ook  should  be  looked  for  under  that,  not  under  the  sub- 
ject ;  if  it  is  not  known,  what  good  can  an  arrangement  by  authors  <lo  f  Sometimes, 
if  one  has  forgottew  the  Christian  name  of  an  author,  it  may  be  easier  to  lind  him 
under  a  subject  than  in  a  crowd  of  Smiths  or  Joneses  or  Miillers,  and  this  use  of  a 
subject-heading  is  impaired  by  grouping  or  by  chronological  order;  but  such  use  ia 
lufrequeut,  and  the  main  design  of  a  subject-entry  should  not  be  subordinated  to  this 
wide  advantage. 

It  is  even  urged  that  it  is  harder  to  find  a  work  treating  of  the  subject  in  any  special 
way  among  sul)division8  than  when  there  is  only  one  alphabet,  which  is  absurd.  On 
the  one  hand  one  must  look  over  a  list  of  books  embracing  tive  or  six  distinct  ilivis- 
ions  of  a  subject  and  select  from  titles  often  ambiguous  or  provokingly  uncounnuni- 
cative  those  that  seem  likely  to  treat  of  the  matter  in  the  way  desiied.  On  the  other 
plan  he  must  ruu  over  tive  or  six  headings  given  by  another  man,  and  representing 
that  man's  ideas  of  classification,  and  decide  under  which  of  them  the  treatise  he  is 
in  search  of  is  likely  to  be  put.  Which  system  gives  the  least  trouble  and  demands 
the  least  brain-work  f  Plainly  the  latter.  In  three  cases  out  of  four  he  can  compre- 
hend the  system  at  a  glance.  And  if  in  the  fourth  there  is  a  doubt,  and  he  in  com- 
pelled after  all  to  look  over  the  whole  list  or  several  of  the  divisions,  he  is  no  worse 
otr  than  if  there  were  no  divisions  ;  thi-  list  is  not  any  longer.  The  objection  then  to 
subdivisions  is  not  real,  but  fanciful.  The  reader  at  first  glance  is  frightened  by  the 
appearance  of  a  system  to  be  learned,  and  perversely  regards  it  as  a  hiuderance  in- 
stead of  an  assistance.  But  if  anyone  has  such  a  rooted  aversion  to  subdivisions  it 
is  very  easy  for  him  to  disregard  them  altogether,  and  read  the  list  as  if  they  were  not 
there,  leaving  them  to  be  of  service  to  wiser  men. 

As  the  number  of  titles  under  each  heading  increases  in  number  so  does  the  oppor- 
tunity and  need  of  division.  The  first  and  most  usual  groups  to  be  made  are  Bibliog- 
raphy and  its  companion  History,  and  the  "practical-form"  groups  Diclionari$M  and 
Periodicals  Under  countries  the  first  grouping  will  be  Description  and  Trarels,  Ilia- 
tory  and  Politics,  Language  and  Literature,  followed  by  Xatural  history,  etc.  For  exam- 
ples of  further  subdivisions  see  tlie  longer  catalogues.  It  is  not  worth  while  in  a 
printed  catalogue  to  make  very  minute  divisions.  The  object  aimed  at,—  enabling  the 
enquirer  to  find  quickly  the  book  that  treats  of  the  branch  of  the  subject  which  he 
IS  interested  in, —  is  attained  if  the  mass  of  titles  is  broken  up  into  sections  containing 
from  half  a  dozen  to  a  score.  Of  course  there  are  masses  of  titles  which  can  not  be 
so  broken  up  because  thi-y  all  treat  of  the  same  subject  in  the  same  way,  or  at  least 
show  no  ditferenco  of  treatment  that  admits  of  classification.  The  general  works  on 
the  Fine  Arts  in  a  library  of  IdO.OtJd  volumes  may  number  100  titles,  even  after  Peri- 
odicals and  Dictionarien  have  been  set  aside. 

There  is  one  objection  to  grouping, —  that  books  can  seldom  bo  made  to  fill  a::y  classi- 
fication exactly,  their  contents  overrunning  the  classes,  so  that  they  must  be  entered 
in  several  places,  or  they  will  fail  to  be  f»»und  iinilersome  of  the  subdivisions  of  which 
they  treat.  Thus  in  the  chronological  arrangement  o(  History,  whether  wo  arrange 
by  the  first  date,  tue  average,  or  the  last  date  of  each  work,  the  books  cover  j)erio»lB 
of  such  various  length  that  one  can  never  get  all  that  relaies  to  cue  period  together. 


94 


STYLE:    AKK'ANGKMKNT    OF    SUBJECTS. 


There  is  another  objection, — that  it  is  much  harder  to  iiiukc  a  catalogue  witli  sub- 
divisions, wliich  (if  course  require  a  knowledge  of  the  subject  and  examination  of  the 
hooks;  and  the  ditticulty  increases  in  proportion  to  the  number  of  the  books  and  tiie 
niiiuiteness  of  the  divisions. 

2r>0.  The  fiiibarrangeineut  in  groups  will  often  be  alplicabetical  by  au- 
thors ;  but  in  groups  or  subjects  of  a  historical  character  it  should 
be  chronological,  the  order  being  made  clear  by  putting  the  dates 
first  or  by  printing  them  in  heavy-faced  type. 

Thus  under  countries  the  division  Ifhtonj  will  l)o  arranged  according  to  the  period 
treated  of,  the  earliest  first;  so  under  lUHcripiion,  for  England  as  seen  by  foreigners 
in  the  days  of  Elizabeth  was  a  very  different  country  from  the  England  sucn  by  Prince 
Piiekler-Muskau  in  18'28,  or  satirized  by  Max  O'Rell  in  1883.  So  Statiafica  and  Litera- 
ture, and  other  divisions,  should  be  treated  when  they  are  long  enough. 

257.  When  there  are  many  cross-references  classify  them. 

Ex.  Architecture.    See  also  Arches;  — Baths;— Bridges;  — Cathedrals;  — Fonts; 

—  [and  many  other  things  built"] ; 
fl  Jso  Carpentry ;  —  Drawing ;  —  Metal-work ; — Painting ;  —  [  and  many  other 

means  or  methods  of  building]  ; 
aho  Athens ;— Berlin ;  —Boston ;— Milan ;— Rome ;— Venice ;  —Verona ; — 

[and  many  other  cities  whose  buildings  are  described]; 
also  Arabia ; —Assyria  ; — Egypt;— Prance;— Greece;— India;— Italy  ;  — 

[and  many  other  countries  whose  architecture  is  described]. 

258.  When  the  titles  are  numerous  under  a  subject-heading  divide  them, 

but  avoid  subdivision. 

It  may  not  be  best  to  adopt  strictly  the  same  method  in  the  subdivisions  under 
countries  that  was  recommended  for  government  public, itions.  There  are  advantages 
in  both  the  following  plans.  The  second  is  the  dictionary  plan  pure  and  simple;  the 
first  is  a  bit  of  classification  introduced  for  special  reasons  into  a  dictionary  cata- 
logue, and  perhaps  out  of  place  there.  It  is,  however,  the  one  which  I  have  adopted 
for  the  catalogue  of  the  Boston  Athenaeum. 

[Name  of      Administration, 
country.]  Agriculture. 
Antiquities. 
Architecture. 
Army. 
Art. 


[Name  of      Administration, 
country.]  Agriculture. 
Antiquities. 
Architecture. 
Army. 
Art. 
Biography. 
Botany. 
Calendar. 
Ceremonies. 
Charities. 
Climate. 
Colonies. 

Commerce  and  Trade. 
Costume. 

•Description  and  Travels 
Ecclesiastical  history. 
Education. 
Entomology. 
Finance. 
Folk-lore. 
Foreign  relations. 


Ballads  and  songs. 

Bibliography, 

Botany. 

Calendar. 

Ceremonies. 

Charities. 

Climate. 

Colonies. 

Commerce. 

Composition. 

Conversation  and  Phrases. 

Correspondence. 

Costume. 

Description  and  Travels. 

Dialects. 

Dialogues. 


AKKANGEMENT 

OF    SUBJKC'IS.                                       95 

[Name  of      (Jcoloj^'y. 

[Name  of 

Dictionaries. 

country.]  Heraldry. 

country.]  Drama. 

Herpotolojjy. 

lCciIe.sia.>sti<-al  hititory. 

History. 

lOdncation. 

Biblio^^rapliy. 

Eloquence  or  oratory. 

Geiu-ral  works. 

Entomology. 

Chronological        arraii^^- 

Etym.dogy. 

IllCllt. 

Ejiigrams. 

Ichthyology. 

Epitaphs. 

Industry. 

Ei>ithets. 

Langiiaj^t". 

Exercises. 

Bibliography. 

Fables. 

Geni'ral  and  misoellaueons 

Fairy  tales. 

works. 

Fiction. 

Composition. 

Finance. 

Convorsation  and  Phrases. 

Foreign  relations. 

Correspondence. 

Geology. 

Dialects. 

Grammar. 

Dictionaries. 

Heraldry. 

Epithets. 

Hcrpetology. 

Etymology. 

History. 

Exer.:i8e8. 

Bibliography. 

Grammar. 

General  works. 

Historical  grammars. 

Chronological         arrange- 

History. 

ment. 

Hoiiionyms. 

Homonyms. 

Pronunciation  and  spelling. 

Ichthyology. 

Prosody. 

Language. 

Readers   (for   foreign   lan- 

Bibliography. 

guages). 

History. 

Rhymes. 

General  and  miscellaneous 

Synonyms. 

works. 

Law. 

Law. 

Bibliography. 

Bibliography. 

History. 

History. 

General  works. 

General  and  miscellaneous 

Literature. 

works. 

rBlbliograj  hy. 
History         (including 

Legends. 

Letters. 

g         lives  of  authors). 

Literature. 

g  i  Collections. 

Bibliography. 

O 

Manuals. 

History. 

Selections  for  reading 

General  and  miscoUaueoas 

^     and  speaking. 

works. 

Ballads  and  songs. 

Collectiims. 

Dialogues. 

Malacology, 

Draiii;i. 

Manufactures. 

Eloiiuence  or  oratory. 

.Medicine. 

Epigrams. 

.MiiM  ralog}'. 

Epitaphs. 

Money. 

Essays. 

, 

Music. 

Fabres. 

Natne^. 

Fairy  tales. 

Natural  hJHtory. 

Fiction. 

Navy. 

Lei 

fends. 

Naval  liistory. 

96 


STYLE:    ARRANGEMENT    OF    SUBJECTS. 


[Name  of     Litfiatiire— Continued, 
country.]      Lt'tttTs. 

Parodies. 

Periodicals. 

Poetical  romances. 

Poetry. 

Popular  literature.* 

Prose  roniaucos.  t 
Satire. 
Sonnets. 
Wit  and  humor. 
Malacology. 
Manufactures. 
Medicine. 
Mineralogy. 
Money. 
Music. 
Names. 

Natural  history. 
Navy. 

Naval  history. 
Numismatics. 
Ornithology. 
Pahvontology. 
Philosophy. 
Politics. 
Population. 
Public  works. 
Registers. 
Religion. 
Sanitary  affairs. 
Science. 

Social  distinctions. 
Social  life,  Manners  and  cus- 
toms. 
Social  science. 
Statistics. 
Technology. 
Theatre. 
Theology. 
Zoology. 
Etc. 

Note,  however,  that  if  the  subordination  under  Language  and  Literature  is  objected 
to,  it  is  very  easy  to  make  them  independent  headings  in  the  main  alphabet,  having 
instead  of  the  headings 


[Name  of     Numismatics, 
country.]  Ornithology. 
Palieontology. 
Parodies. 
Periodicals. 
Philosophy. 
Poetical  romances. 
Poetry. 
Politics. 

Popular  literature.' 
Population. 
Pronunciation. 
Prose  romances.! 
Prosody. 
Public  works. 
Registers. 
Religion. 
Rhymes. 
Sanitary  affairs. 
Satire. 
Science. 

Social  distinctions. 
Social  life,  Manners  and  cus- 
toms. 
Social  science. 
Sonnets. 
Spelling. 
Statistics. 
Synonyms. 
Technology. 
Theatre. 
Theology. 
Wit  and  humor. 
Zoology. 
Etc. 


Italy. 


Description. 
History. 
Language. 
Literature. 
Natural  his  ton 


Italian  language. 
Italian  literature. 
Italy.     Description. 

History. 

Natural  history. 


Of  course  different  countries  will  require  different  divisions,  e.  g.,  Ecclesiastical 
history,  MythoJogi/,  Religion,  Theology  will  not  often  be  required  for  the  same  coun- 

*  Not  meaning  novels,  but  broadsides, chap-books,  and  the  like,—  the  literature  of  the  people  in  times 
past. 
t  Again  not  meaning  novels,  but  the  romances  of  chivalry,  etc. 


AKKANCJEMENT    OF    SUBJECTS.  97 

try.  Ami  uttoii  it  will  In-  expeditMit  to  coiiihiiii'  tlii>.-t«'  iliviMii»ns  in  which  there  are 
very  ffw  titles  into  one  more  j^eiienil ;  thus  llotnuij,  lliijwtolufjn,  Jclithi/olony,  Zoology, 
would  join  to  yive  Xutuiul  hit  Ion/ a  re.spect.ii)l(!  8i/.<s  ami  (irohujij,  Mini  raloi/y,  I'ulinnt- 
toluiji/,  I'hyxiiitl  ijeoijraiilui  would  conihiin-,  or  in  very  small  countries  all  them;  would 
go  toj;etlu«r  under  Dmcription.  Under  Nome  couiitrieH  other  divisions  will  he  rei|uired; 
m  the  list  are  jjiven  only  those  in  actual  use;  but  the  arran^^i'ment  Ih  elastic  and 
admits  of  new  divisiouH  whenever  they  arc  needed.  In  re;jard  to  a  few  (Hueh  an 
EpitapliH,  Fabhn,  Names,  Provei-bx)  there  in  room  for  douht  wlu-ther  they  ought  to  he 
under  countries;  whether  the  suliject  cohesion  is  not  much  stronger  than  the  national 
cohesion.  Many  others  are  not  usually  put  here  (as  yuinismaticx,  I'hiloMophy.  Ilvliij- 
iun,  Scitncc,  Theoloijy,  Zoiilixjy).  The  fornu-r  usage  was  to  put  umler  the  c<iunlry  only 
its  history,  travels  in  it,  and  the  general  descriptive  works;  and  hooks  that  tr«at*Ml 
of  the  Art,  Architecture,  IJallads,  Botany,  Drama,  etc.,  of  that' laud  were  put  with 
the  general  works  on  Art,  Architecture,  etc.  But  the  tendency  of  tlie  dictionary  cat- 
alogue is  towards  national  classilication ;  that  is,  in  separating  what  relates  to  the 
parts  of  a  subject,  as  is  required  by  its  upecific  principle,  it  necessarily  brings  together 
all  that  relates  to  a  country  in  every  aspect,  as  it  would  what  relates  to  any  other 
individual. 

It  may  be  asked  (1)  why  the  parts  of  Natural  history  are  here  separated  and  the 
parts  of  Language  and  Literature  not;  and  (2)  why  we  do  not  divide  still  more  (follow- 
ing out  the  dictionary  plan  fully),  so  as  to  have  divisions  like  Liliacew,  (.'own,  Ilorxes.  As 
to  {'i),  in  a  library  catalogue  of  a  million  volumes  it  would  no  doubt  be  best  to  adopt 
rigidly  this  specitic  mode  of  entry  for  the  larger  countries;  for  a  catalogue  of  one  or 
two  hundred  thousand,  arrangement  in  classes  is  as  well  suited  to  quicik  reference 
ami  avoids  the  loss  of  room  occasioned  by  numerous  headings.  With  few  books  mi- 
nute division  has  a  very  incomplete  appearance,  specialties  occurring  only  here  and 
there,  and  most  of  the  titles  being  those  of  general  works.  This  may  \n'  compared 
to  the  division  of  a  library  into  alcoves.  One  of  from  10,000  to  '20,000  volumes  ha.s  an 
alcove  for  Natural  History;  from  20,000  to  r)0,0li0  it  has  alcoves  for  Botany  and  for 
Zoology  ;  from  50,000  to  100,000  it  has  alcoves  for  Birds,  Kishes,  Insects,  Mammals, 
Keptik's,  but  it  must  be  either  very  large  or  very  special  before  it  allows  to  smaller 
divisions  of  Zoology  separate  apartments.  On  an  expansive  system  it  is  easy  to  make 
new  alcoves  as  they  are  wanted;  a  similar  multiplication  by  fission  is  possible  in  the 
successively  enlarging  editions  of  a  printed  catalogue.  A  card  catalogue,  designed 
for  continuous  growth,  should  have  more  thorough  division  than  can  be  put  into 
print,  because  it  must  look  into  the  future,  while  the  printed  catalogue  has  no  future. 
As  to  (I)  I  can  only  say  that  the  divisions  of  Language  seem  to  me  too  intimately 
connected  to  be  dispersed  in  catalogues  of  the  present  size,  but  that  those  of  Litera- 
ture have  a  more  8ub.stantiv.e  existence  and  ought  to  be  separated  sooner.  A  double 
subdivision,  however,  ought  to  be  avoided.  Under  Language  there  should  be  only 
one  alphabet.  It  is  better  to  arrange 
Greece.     Language. 

Accents.  than  Dietionariit,. 

Dictionaries.  Ktymologij. 

Ellipses.  Grammar. 

Etymology.  Jconls. 

(irammur.  Ellipsis. 

History.  Parlivlis. 

I'articlex.  Pleonasms. 

Pleonasms.  I'ronunciatio,:. 

Pronunciation.  SyntaJ'. 

SimtaJT.  History. 

Any  subdivision  n(  the  groups  under  countries  has  been  strongly  oppo.sed  as  being 
troublesome  to  makf,  useless,  and  even  confusing,  or  as  being  an  unlawful  mixture 
of  classed  and  diotinnaiy  cataloguing.     But  supjiose  you  have  four  or  tive  hundred 

4892  LI 7 


08  style:  sets,  kake  books,  etc. 

titles  iiiidtT  France.  History.  Will  you  break  them  n\>  into  yioiips  with  such  head- 
iiijis  as  Iloitst'  of  Hoiirbon,  Ihrolittion,  Empire,  Jicntoratioii,  etc.,  with  ret'erences  and 
other  deviees  for  those  works  which  treat  of  several  periods,  all  of  which  it  must  be 
confessed  is  a  little  formidable  at  lirst  glance,  or  will  you  leave  them  in  one  undivided 
mass,  so  that  he  who  wants  to  fiud  the  history  of  the  last  half  of  the  15th  century 
must  read  through  the  500  titles,  perhaps,  to  find  even  one  and  certainly  to  lind  all? 
Vou  would  divide  of  course.  It  is  true  that  grouping  may  mislead.  The  iuquirer 
must  still  be  careful  to  look  in  several  places.  The  history  of  France  during  the 
ascendency  of  the  House  of  Valois  is  to  be  found  not  merely  under  that  heading  but 
in  the  comprehensive  histories  of  the  country.  The  inquirer  may  be  a  little  less  likely 
to  think  of  this  because  the  titles  of  these  two  groups  are  separated  from  the  many 
other  titles  which  have  nothing  to  do  specially  or  generally  with  the  House  of  Valois, 
but  if  he  does  think  of  it  he  is  greatly  assisted  by  such  segregation. 

J.  Utc. 

259.  In  a  supplement,  catalogue  the  whole  of  a  continued  set,  not  merely 

the  volumes  received  since  the  first  catalogue. 

Ex.  If  V.  1-4  are  in  the  catalogue  and  v.  5-10  are  received  later,  enter  all  10  v.  in 
the  supplement.  It  takes  no  more  room,  and  it  is  useless  to  make  the  reader  look  in 
two  places  to  ascertain  how  much  of  the  vrork  the  library  has.  But  this  should  not 
be  <l()ue  when  it  will  take  up  much  space,  as  would  often  be  the  case  with  periodicals, 
owing  to  details  of  change  of  name,  number  of  volumes  missing,  etc.  Nor  should 
Contents  be  repeated ;  it  is  enough  to  refer. 

260.  When  there  are  many  editions  of  a  work  under  any  subject-head- 

ing omit  the  titles  and  merely  refer  to  the  author-entry. 

Much  space  may  thus  be  saved  at  little  inconvenience  to  the  reader. 
Ex.  Gaxd.     Cesar,  C.  J.     Commentaril  [b.c.  58-49].     .See  Caesar,  C.  J.     (pp.441, 
442)  ;  here  two  lines  do  the  work  of  forty. 

261.  Rare  books. 

American  libraries  and  especially  town  libraries  seldom  have  any  books  sufficiently 
rare  to  deserve  great  particularity  of  description.  If  for  any  reason  it  is  thought 
necessary  to  give  a  minute  account  of  a  book  or  of  a  collection  good  models  may  be 
found  in  Tromel's  Biblioth.  am6r.,  Lpz.,  1861,  8",  Stevens's  Historical  nuggets,  Lond., 
18fi2,  2  V.  16",  Weller's  Repertorium  bibliographicum,  Nordlingen,  1864,  8°,  Harrisse's 
Biblioth.  Amer.  vetustissima,  N.  Y.,  1866,  8°,  Tide's  M6m.  bibliog.  sur  les  jonrnauxdes 
navig.  ntSerlandaises,  Amst.,  1867,  8",  and  the  titles  of  the  rarer  books  in  Sabin's  Diet', 
of  books  rel.  to  America,  N.  Y.,  1868,  etc.  For  the  convenience  of  those  who  have 
not  these  works  at  hand  a  few  examples  are  given  here. 

Leonardus  de  Uiino  or  de  Belluno.  F\.  Sermones  aurei  de  Sanctis.  IColophon  :]  Ex- 
plicifit  Sermones  aurei  |  de  Sanctis  i)er  totu  annum  q^  |  copilauit  magister  Leonar  ; 
dusdeVtinosacretheologie  |  doctor.  . .  |  .  .  .  Adinstantiam  &  coplacentiamagnifice 
coitatis'l  Vtinensis.  .  .  |  .  .  .  |  M.  cccc.  xlvi  .  .  .  |  .  .  .  |  .  .  .  |  .  .  .  |  .  .  .  |  [Colonijeper 
Ulr.  Zell,]  M.  cccc.  Lxxiij.  f".  Registr?<)«  (47)  pp.,  (4)  pp.  blank.  Tabula  (1)  p., 
(244)  11.     In  2  coll.  of  36  lines. 

This  copy  has  the  leaves  numbered  in  ms.  and  a  Tabula  prefixed  to  the  2d  part  by 
a  contemporary  hand.  The  work  being  very  thick  was  probably  in  general  bound  in 
two  parts  and  is  rarely  complete  ;  Santander  describes  only  the  1st  part,  the  due  de 
la  Valliere  had  only  the  2d.  The  name  of  the  printer,  Zell,  is  found  in  only  three  or 
four  of  his  numerous  publications.  This  is  shown  to  be  his  by  the  type,  which  is  the 
same  as  that  used  in  the  Sermones  of  R.  Caracciolus  de  Litio  issued  in  the  same  year. 
The  present  work  went  through  10  editions  in  8  years.    According  to  Graesse  it  is 


APP.  I:    A.  L.  A.  RULES.  99 

probably  the  first  book  printed  out  of  Italy  wliicli  roiitaiiiH  a  liue  of  Italian  poi-try, 
"Trenta  foglio  ha  la  roaa",  at  the  euil  of  tli«'  iMt  part. 

Briuiet  V.  1022,  Gracsse  vi.  ii.  2:52,  Iliiiii  no.  lOPi-". 

(47)  pp.  iiicuns  47  uunuiiiliored  pat;o8,  11.  iiu'umh  IcavoH.     luilicizint,*  the  urn  in  RoKiotrum  Hij^nifliM 
that  thoso  lottera  are  expn-sned  in  the  caption  by  a  contraction  which  tho  printer  of  the  oataloKUO  hnn 
no  type  for. 
Huon  <f(^  ISordeaux.     Lea  gosteset  faict/.  |  inurueillenx  «lii  no  bio  Hiionde  Bordfaulx 

Per  de  France,  Due  de  Guj'enno.     Nontiellenient  redige  en  bon  |  FraiicoyH:  et  Im- 

priine  noimellenient  a  Pari.s   pour  Jean   Honfond.s  |  .  .  .  |  .  .  .  |  [  Ifuodcttt]  [Ending] 

Leqnel  linre  A  |  hyatoire  a  eate  nii.s  de  rime  en  pro.se  |  .  .  .  |  .  .  .  |  ,  .  .  |  .  .  .  |  .  .  . 

leqnel  fut  fait  «fe  parfait  le  vinte  |  nonfiesnie  ioiir  de  .laniiier.  Lan  |  mil.  cccc.  liiii  | 

...  I  ...  I  ...  I  ...  I  ..  .  Imprime  a  Paris  ponr  Jan  |  I?oiif<.nn  .  .  .  |  .  .  .     n.  d.     4". 

(8),  204  11.  'S  40  lines.    With  14  woodeuts  in  the  text,  an<l  the  printer's  mark. 

On  the  eighth  leaf  is  written  "  Johan  Moyuard  ino  possidet  1557,"  which  is  proba- 
bly not  far  from  tho  date  of  publication.  The  1st  dated  edition  appeared  in  1516. 
Brunet  mentions  two  other  editions  before  recording  the  pre.sent,  one  1550,  one  undated. 

Sold,  Essliug  [)b/r.,  Giraud  199 /r. 

APPENDIX  I. 
CONDENSED  RULES  FOR  AN  AUTHOR  AND  TITLE  CATALOG. 
Prepared  by  the  CoorEUATiox  Co.mmittee   of   tiik  A.mekican   LinuAitT  Asso- 

CIATIOX.' 


Books  are  to  be  entered  under  the  : 

Surnames  of  authors  when  ascertained,  the  abbreviation  ".l/jow."  be- 
ing added  to  the  titles  of  anonymous  works.  (la 

Initials  of  authors'  names  when  these  only  are  known,  the  last  initial 
beino-  jmt  first.  (lb 

Fseudonyms  of  the  writers  when  the  real  names  are  not  ascertained.     (Ic 

Xames  of  editors  of  collections,  each  separate  item  to  be  at  the  same 
time  sufficiently  catalogd  under  its  own  heading.  (lil 

Names  of  countries,  cities,  societies,  or  other  bodies  which  are  responsible 
for  their  publication.  (le 

First  word  (not  an  article  or  serial  number)  of  the  titles  of  periodicals 
and  of  anonymous  books,  the  names  of  who.se  authors  are  not  known. 
And  a  motto  or  the  designation  of  a  series  may  be  neglected  when  it 
begins  a  title,  and  the  entry  may  be  made  under  the  tirst  word  of  the 
real  title  following.  (If 

Commentaries  accompanying  a  text  and  translations  ate  to  W  entereil 
under  the  lieading  of  the  original  work;  but  commentaries  without 
the  text  under  the  name  of  the  commentator  A  book  entitlctl  "  Com- 
mentary on  ...  "  and  containing  the  text  should  be  put  under 
both.  (Ig 

'  C.  A.  Cutter,  S.  H.  Scuddor,  C.  B.  Tillinghast.  Reprinted  from  the  Library  journal, 
8:  251-254.  The  rulesof  the  Library  Association  of  the  United  Kingdom  were  printed 
in  {\w  LihranjjQurmil,  i\:  315-316.  The  Bodloian  cataloging  rules  are  given  iu  the 
Library  journal,  H:  2y?*-301. 


100  APP.  I:    A.  L.  A.  RULES. 

Tlie  liible,  or  any  part  of  it  (including  the  Apocrypha),  in  any  lan- 
f^'iiajio.  is  to  be  entered  under  the  word  Bible.  (Ih 

The  7\xhuufl  and  Koran  (and  parts  of  them)  are  to  be  entered  under 
those  words ;  the  sacred  hooks  of  other  religions  are  to  be  entered 
under  the  names  by  which  tliey  are  generally  known  ;  references  to  be 
given  from  the  names  of  editors,  translators,  etc.  (li 

The  respondent  or  defender  of  an  academical  thesis  is  to  be  considered 
as  the  author,  unless  the  work  unequivocally  appears  to  be  the  work 
of  the  praeses.  (Ij 

Books  having  more  than  one  author  to  be  entered  under  the  one  first 
named  in  the  title  with  a  reference  from  each  of  the  others.  (Ik 

Reports  of  civil  actions  are  to  be  entered  under  the  name  of  the  party  to 
the  suit  which  stands  first  on  the  title-])age.  Reports  of  crown  and 
criminal  proceedings  are  to  be  entered  under  the  name  of  the  defend- 
ant.  Admiralty  proceedings  relating  to  vessels  are  to  be  put  under 
the  name  of  the  vessel.  (11 

Noblemen  are  to  be  entered  under  their  titles,  unless  the  family  name  is 
decidedly  better  known.  (Im 

Ecclesiastical  dignitaries,  unless  popes  or  sovereigns,  are  to  be  entered 
under  their  surnames.  (In 

Sovereigns  (other  than  Greek  or  Eoman),  ruling  princes^  Oriental  icr iters, 
popes,  friars,  persons  canonized^  and  all  other  persons  known  only  by 
their  first  name,  are  to  be  enteredunder  this  first  name.  (lo 

Married  icomen,  and  other  persons  who  have  changed  their  names,  are 
to  be  put  under  th6  last  well-known  form.  (Ip 

A  pseudonyyn  may  be  used  instead  of  the  surname  (and  only  a  reference 
to  the  pseudonym  made  under  the  surname)  wl\en  an  author  is  much 
more  known  by  his  false  than  by  his  real  name.  In  case  of  doubt 
use  the  real  name.  (Iq 

A  society  is  to  be  entered  under  the  first  word,  not  an  article,  of  its  cor- 
porate .name,  with  references  from  any  other  name  by  which  it  is 
known,  especially  from  the  name  of  the  place  where  its  headquarters 
are  established,  if  it  is  often  called  by  that  name.  (Ir 

References. — When  an  author  has  been  known  by  more  than  one  name, 
references  should  be  inserted  from  the  name  or  names  not  to  be  used 
as  headings  to  the  one  used.  (Is 

References  are  also  to  be  made  to  the  headings  chosen : 
from  the  titles  of  all  novels  and  plays  and  of  poems  likely  to  be  asked 
for  by  their  titles  ;  (It 

from  other  striking  titles;  (lu 

from  noticeable  words  in  anonymous  titles,  especially  from  the  names 
of  subjects  of  anonymous  biographies  ;  (Iv 

from  the  names  of  editors  of  periodicals,  when  the  periodicals  are  gen- 
erally called  by  the  editor's  name;  (Iw 
from  the  names  of  important  translators  (especially  poetical  transla- 
tors) and  commentators ;  (Ix 


A.  L.  A.  liULES.  lOl 

from  the  title  of  an  ecclesiastiral  (li;,oiitiiry,  when  that,  and  not  thu 
family  name,  is  nsed  in  the  book  c.ataloj^d  ;  (ly 

and  in  other  cases  where  a  referen(!e  is  needed  to  insure  the  reiidy 
tindinji'  of  the  book,  (Iz 

HEADINGS. 

In  the  heading  of  titles,  the  names  of  anthors  are  to  be  given  in  full, 
and  in  their  vernacular  form,  except  that  the  Latin  form  may  be  nsed 
when  it  is  more  generally  known,  the  vcrna<;ular  form  being  added 
in  parentheses;  except,  also,  that  sovereigns  and  popes  may  begi%'en 
in  the  Hnglish  form.  (2a 

English  and  French  surnames  beginning  with  a  prefix  (except  the 
French  de  and  d')  are  to  be  recorded  under  the  prefix;  in  other  lan- 
guages under  the  word  following;  (lib 

English  compound  surnames  are  to  be  entered  under  the  last  part  of  the 
name;  foroign  ones  under  the  first  part ;  (2c 

Designations  are  to  be  added  to  dist'nujuiHh  writers  of  the  same  name 
from  each  other;  (2<l 

Prefixes  indicating  the  rank  or  profession  of  writers  may  be  added  in 
the  heading,  when  tliey  are  part  of  the  usual  designation  of  the 
writers.  (2e 

Names  of  places  to  be  given  in  the  English  form.  When  both  an  Eng- 
lish ami  a  vernacular  form  are  used  in  English  works,  prefer  the  ver- 
nncular.  (2f 

TITLES. 

The  title  is  to  be  an  exact  transcript  of  the  title-page,  neither  amended, 
translated,  nor  in  any  way  altered,  except  that  mottoes,  titles  of  au- 
thors, repetitions,  and   matter  of  an}'  kind  not  essential,  are  to  be 
omitted.     Where  great  accuracy  is  desirable,  omissions  arc  to  be  in- 
dicated by  three  dots  (...).     The  titles  of  books  especially  valuable 
for  antiquity  or  rarity  may  be  given  in  full,  with  all  practicable  pre- 
cision.   The  phraseology  and  spelling,  but  not  necessarily  the  punctu- 
ation, of  the  title  are  to  be  exactly  copied.  (3a 
Any  additions  needed  to  make  the  title  clear  are  to  be  supplied  and  in- 
closed by  brackets.                                                                                   (3b 
Initial  capitals  are  to  be  given  in  English  :  (3c 
to  proper  names  of  jiersons  and  personifications,  places,  bodies,  noted 
events,  and  periods  (each  separate  word  not  an  article,  conjunction, 
or  preposition,  may  be  capitalized  in  these  (tases) ;                          (3d 
to  adjectives  and  other  derivatives  from  proper  names  when  they  have 
a  ilirect  reference  to  the  person,  place,  etc.,  from  which  they  are 
derived;  (3e 
to  tlie  first  word  of  every  sentence  and  of  every  quoted  title;  (3f 
to  titles  of  honor  wiien  standin  g  instead  of  a  proper  name  (e.  *;.,  the 
Earl  of  Derby,  but  John  Stanley,  earl  of  Derby) ;                          (3g 


102  AIT.   l:    A.  L.  A.  KULES. 

In /(tninn  languages,  iiccordiug  to  the  local  usage;  (31i 

III  (loiibtrul  cases  capitals  are  to  be  avoided.  (31 

Fori'if/)!   languages. — Titles  in  foreign  characters  may  be  transliterated. 

The    languages  in  which  a  book  is  written  are  to  be  stated  when 

there  are  several,  and  the  fact  is  not  api)arent  from  the  title.  (3j 

[Ft)r  the  A.  L.  A.  transliteration  report,  see  i>ii.  108-114. 

IMPRINTS. 

After  the  title  are  to  be  given,  in  the  following  order,  those  in  [  ]  being 
optional  : — 
the  edition  ;  (4a 

the  ^;/rt6'e  of  publication  ;  (4b 

[and  the  j??<i//47ter's  name]  (these  three  in  the  language  of  the  title) ;  (4c 
the  year  as  given  on  the  title-page,  but  in  Arabic  figures ;  (4d 

[the  year  of  copyright  or  actual  publication,  if  known  to  be  different, 
in  brack*ets,  and  preceded  by  c.  or  p.  as  the  case  may  be] ;  (4e 

the  number  of  voliunes,  or  of  pages  if  there  is  only  one  volume ;       (4f 
[the  number  of  onajps,  portraits,  or  illustrations  not  included. in  the 
text];  (4g 

and  either  the  approximate  size  designated  by  letter  (see  Library 
journal,  3  :  19-20),  or  the  exact  size  in  centimeters:  (4h 

the  name  of  the  series  to  which  the  book  belongs  is  to  be  given  in  pa- 
rentheses after  the  other  imprint  entries.  (4i 
After  the  place  of  publication,  the  place  ofjrrinting  may  be  given  if  dif- 
ferent.    This  is  desirable  only  in  rare  and  old  books.                        (4j 
The  number  of  pages  is   to  be  indicated  by  giving  the  last  number  of 
each  paging,  connecting  the  numbers  by  the  sign  +  ;  the  addition  of 
unpaged  matter  may  be  shown  by  a  -|-,  or  the  number  of  pages  ascer- 
tained by  counting  may  be  given  in  brackets.     When  there  are  more 
than  three  pagiugs,  it  is  better  to  add  them  together  and  give  the 
sum  in  brackets. 
These  imprint  entries  are  to  give  the  facts,  whether  ascertained  from 
the  book  or  from  other  sources  ;  those  which  are  usually  taken  from 
the  title  (edition,  place,  publisher's  name,  and  series)  should  be  in  the 
language  of  the  title,  corrections  and  additions  being  inclosed  in 
brackets.     It  is  better  to  give  the  words,  "  maps,"  "  portraits,"  etc., 
and  the  abbreviations  for  "volumes"  and  "pages,"  in  English.    (4k 

CONTENTS,   NOTES. 

Notes  (in  English)  and  contents  of  volumes  are  to  be  given  when  nec- 
essary to  properl}'  describe  the  works.  Both  notes  and  lists  of  con- 
tents to  be  in  a  smaller  type.  (5a 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

A*  single  dash  or  indent  indicates  the  omission  of  the  preceding  head- 
ing; a  subsequent  dash  or  indent  indicates  the  omission  of  a  Sub- 
ordinate heading,  or  of  a  title.  (6a 


L.  A.  U.  K.  RULES.  103 

A  dash  cjonnectinp:  nninhors  si^jniflos  to  and  invluding  ;  following  a  miin- 

ber  it  sigiiilies  continuation.  (Ob 

A  !  following  ;i  word  or  entry  signiHes  ;>/•(>/><»/>/»/.  (60 

Brackets  inclose  words  addt'd  to  titles  or  imprints  or  changed  in  form. 

(<;d 

Arabic ,/tf7JnT,<f  are,  to  be  used  rather  tlninUonian;  but  small  capitals 
may  be  used  after  the  names  of  sovereigns,  princes,  and  popes.      (iJo 

A  list  of  abbreviations  to  be  used  was  given  in  th"  Library  journal,  li : 
16-20.  (Gf 

ARRANGEMENT. 

The  surname  when  used  alone  precedes  the  same  name  used  wirh  fore- 
names;  where  the  initials  only  of  the  forenames  are  given,  they  are 
to  precede  fully  written  forenames  beginning  with  the  san)e  initials 
(e.  (/.,  Brown  ;   Brown,  J.;  Brown,  J.  L. ;  lirowu,  James).  (7a 

The  prefixes  M  and  Mc,  S.,  St.,  Ste.,  Messrs.,  Mr.,  and  Mrs.,  are  to  be 
arranged  as  if  written  in  full,  Mac,  Sanctus,  tSaint,  8ainte,  Messieurs. 
Mister,  and  Mistress.  (7b 

The  works  of  an  author  are  to  be  arranged  in  the  following  onler : — 

1.  Collected  works.  (7c 

2.  Partial  collections.  (7d 

3.  Single  works,  alphabetically  by  the  first  word  of  the  title.  (7e 
The  order  of  alphabeting  is  to  be  that  of  the  English  alphabet.  (7f 
The  German  ae,  oe,  ue,  are  always  to  be  written  ii,  o,  ii,  and  arranged 

as  a,  o,  u.  (7g 

Names  of  persons  are  to  precede  similar  names  of  places,  which  in  tnrn 

precede  similar  first  words  t)f  titles.  (7h 

THE  RULES  OE  THE  EXGLLSH  LIBRARY  ASSOCIATION. 

The  cataloguing  rules  of  the  Library  Association  of  the  United  King- 
dom, as  revised  in  1883,  and  published  in  the  Library  Chronicle  of  Feb- 
ruary, 188."),  differ  from  the  A.  L.  A.  rules  in  the  following  points: 

1.  The  order  of  the  imprint  is  to  be:  edition,  number  of  volumes,  if 
only  one  volutue,  tlio  nurul)er  of  pages,  the  number  of  separate  illustra- 
tions, maps,  or  portraits,  the  size,  the  place  of  publication,  the  plare  of 
printing  when  different  from  that  of  publication,  the  publisher's  name, 
and  the  year. 

2.  All  anonymous  works  to  have  the  abbreviation  "Anon.''  added. 

3.  Entry  under  the  chief  subject-word  of  the  titles  of  anonymous 
books,  with  a  cross-reference,  where  advisable,  under  any  other  notice, 
able  word. 

4.  Service  and  Prayer  books  used  by  any  ndigions  community  are  to 
be  placed  uuder  the  he.id  of  Ij4turgies,  witii  a  snbhea<l  of  the  religious 
community. 

6.  Names  of  translators,  commentators,  e<litors,  and  i)refaee  writers, 
if  they  do  uot  occur  in  the  title-i»age.  may  be  added  within  square 
brackets,  a  cross-reference  being  made  in  each  case. 


104  APP.  I:    BODLEIAN    RULES. 

6.  It  should  be  noticed  that  sometimes  the  respondent  and  defender 
of  a  thesis  are  joint  authors. 

7.  All  persons  generally  known  by  a  forename  are  to  be  so  entered, 
the  English  form  being  used  in  the  case  of  sovereigns,  popes,  ruling 
princes,  Oriental  writers,  friars,  and  persons  canonized. 

[This  is  like  the  A.  L.  A.,  but  differently  expressed.] 

8.  [References  are  required  to  be  always  made  to  the  first  word  under 
which  a  society  is  entered]  from  the  name  of  the  place  where  its  head- 
quarters are  established. 

9.  Individual  works  to  be  arranged  under  an  author  in  alphabetical 
order  of  titles,  under  the  first  word,  not  an  article  or  a  preposition 
having  the  meaning  of  "  concerning." 

10.  The  German  a,  o,  ii,  ai'e  to  be  arranged  as  if  written  out  in  full  — 
ae,  oe,  ue. 

THE  BODLEIAN  LIBRARY  RULES. 

The  Bodleian  rules  differ  from  the  A.  L.  A.  in  the  following  points*: 

I.  All  omissions  to  be  indicated  by  a  group  of  three  dots  (...)•  The 
name  of  the  author  or  editor,  if  it  occur  on  the  title-page  in  the  same 
form  as  in  the  heading,  may  be  omitted  if  no  ambiguity  he  occasioned 
thereby. 

3.  Does  not  capitalize  titles  of  honor  when  standing  instead  of  a 
proper  name. 

G.  Puts  number  of  volumes  before  place  of  publication.  Does  not 
give  number  of  pages,  maps,  etc.  In  the  case  of  books  of  the  15th  and 
16th  centuries  or  of  si)ecial  value  or  rarity,  the  names  of  the  publisher 
and  printer  are  to  be  added  after  the  place. 

Books  are  to  be  entered: 

10.  Under  the  surnames  of  authors,  when  stated  on  the  title-page  or 
otherw.se  certainly  known,  followed  by  the  forename  and  other  neces- 
sary prefixes  in  round  brackets. 

II.  When  only  the  initials  or  pseudonym  of  an  author  occur  in  the 
book,  it  is  to  be  regarded  for  the  purpose  of  headings  as  anonymous  ; 
and  a  cross-reference  is  to  be  made  from  the  initials  or  ])seudonym  to 
the  first  heading,  the  last  initial  being  placed  first,  followed  by  the 
others  in  round  brackets. 

12.  Under  the  pseudonyms  of  the  writers,  unless  the  book  be  already 
entered  under  two  headings,  in  which  case  a  cross-reference  is  to  be 
made  from  the  pseudonym  to  the  first  heading. 

13.  Under  the  names  of  editors  of  collections,  and  under  the  catch- 
titles  of  such  collections;  the  parts  are  to  be  at  the  same  time  sufii- 
ciently  catalogued  under  their  own  headings. 

15.  Under  the  chief  word  or  words  of  the  titles  of  periodicals. 

16.  Under  the  first  striking  word  or  words  of  the  titles  of  anonymous 

*  It  will  be  seen  in  several  cases  that,  unlike  the  A-  L.  A,  rules,  they  are  designed 
for  a  library  that  has  no  subject  catalogue. 


BODLEIAN    KULKS.  1 U5 

works,  with  a  cross  reference,  wlitTc  advisable,  from  any  other  iiotico- 
able  word  or  catch-title.  If  th»5  iiatno  of  a  writer  occur  in  a  work  but 
not  on  the  title-pajjje,  the  work  is  also  to  be  rej^arded  for  the  purpose 
of  headin<,'s  as  anonynions. 

17.  Commentaries  with  the  text,  editions  of  the  text,  and  translations 
are  to  be  entered  (1)  under  the  heading,'  of  the  ori^'inal  work,  and  (2) 
uiuler  the  name  of  the  commentator,  editor,  or  translator;  <;ommentaries 
without  the  text  are  to  be  entered  under  the  saun'  two  headings,  the 
second  beinj;  placed  first. 

18.  Editions  of  the  entire  Bible,  with  or  without  the  Apocrypha,  are 
to  be  entered  under  the  wonl  Bible:  editions  of  parts  of  the  IJil>Ie 
comprisiufx  more  than  one  book  under  the  words  Testmnent  (Old),  Apoc- 
rypha, Testament  {Xew),  or  lesser  divisions  such  as  Pentateuch^  Histori- 
cal hooks,  Hagiographa,  Prophets,  Gospels,  Paul  the  apostle,  Epistles 
{General). 

21.  Service  and  prayer  books  of  the  Church  of  England  are  to  be 
entered  under  the  names  by  which  they  are  commonly  known,  such  as 
Prayer  {Book  of  Common),  Baptism  {Order  of),  Communion  (Holy),  etc.: 
those  of  the  Church  of  Rome  in  like  manner  under  Missal,  Br^riary^ 
Hours,  etc.,  with  a  subheading'  of  the  use.  Service-books  of  other  re- 
lijjious  communities  are  to  be  entered  under  the  head  of  Liturgies,  with 
a  subheading  of  the  religious  community. 

22.  Separate  musical  compositions,  accomi)anied  by  words,  are  to  be 
entered  under  the  names  of  the  authors  and  translators  of  the  words 
(unless  these  are  taken  from  the  Bil)le  or  a  i)ublic  service-book)  as  well 
as  under  those  of  the  authors  and  editors  of  the  music. 

24.  In  the  case  of  an  academical  thesis  the  praeses  is  to  be  considered 
as  the  author,  unless  the  work  unequivocally  appears  to  be  the  work  of 
the  respondent  or  defender. 

2G.  Catalogues  are  to  be  entered  under  the  name  of  the  compiler; 
also,  as  circumstances  require,  under  the  names  of  one  or  more  of  the 
institutions  or  persons  now  or  formerly  owning  the  collection,  and, 
wliere  desirable,  nnder  the  name  of  the  collection  i*^self. 

3'2.  English  and  French  surnames  beginning  with  a  j)retix  or  prelixes 
are  to  be  recorded  under  the  first  prefix,  and  surnames  in  other  lan- 
guages under  the  word  following  the  last  prefix — except  that  French 
names  beginning  with  dc  or  d^  are  to  be  enteretl  under  the  word  follow- 
ing de  or  d\ 

.'>;}.  English  compound  surnames,  not  connected  b^'an  hyphen,  are  to 
be  entered  under  the  last  i)art  of  the  names  [A.  L.  A. —  under  first  part]: 
foreign  ones,  with  or  without  hy|)hens,  under  the  entire  compound  name, 
cross-references  being  given  in  all  instances. 

35.  A  society  is  to  be  entered  under  the  leading  word  or  words  of  its 
corporate  name. 

'M.  Dashes  or  asterisks  in  names  and  titles  are  to  preirede  h'tters  of 
the  alphabet. 


106  APP.   I:    HUDLKIAN    KULES. 

.'iO.  The  works  of  an  author,  and  other  books  capable  of  similar  treat- 
ment, are  to  be  arranj^ed  in  the  following  order,  an  index  or  conspectus 
of  the  entii'C  article  being  i)retixed  when  expedient: 

(1)  General  cross-references. 

(2)  Collections  of  all  the  icorls  of  the  author  in  the  original  language^ 
whether  including  or  excluding  fragments,  and  whether  with  or  without 
translations  or  commentaries. 

(a)  Dated  editions  in  chronological  order. 

{b)  Editions  without  date  and  without  conjecturally  supplied  date ; 
but  if  known  to  be  of  the  loth  century  they  are  to  precede  the  dated 
editions. 

But  new  editions  of  a  work  by  the  same  editor  are  to  succeed  the  first 
entry  of  the  edition. 

(3)  Translations  without  the  text,  of  collected  works,  in  alphabetical 
order  of  languages,  cross-references  being  inserted  in  this  series  to  all 
editions  which  contain  the  original  text  as  well  as  a  translation.  Poly- 
glot editions  are  to  precede  all  others. 

(4)  Commentaries  without  the  text,  on  collected  works, in  chronological 
order.     Scholia  are  to  precede  all  other  commentaries. 

(5)  Selections  from  collected  works. 

(0)  Collections  of  ttco  or  more  uwrls  of  the  author,  in  alphabetical 
order  of  the  general  title  of  the  collection ;  or,  if  there  be  none,  of  the 
first  work  of  the  collection.  In  special  cases  entries  "which  would  in 
strictness  fall  under  this  division  may  be  placed  in  the  succeeding  para- 
graph, with  a  cross-reference. 

(7)  Separate  ivories,  or  entire  parts  of  a  separate  work,  in  chronologi- 
cal order  of  the  first  issues  of  the  works ;  in  any  difficult  cases  an  alpha- 
betical or  other  s'pecial  arrrangement  is  to  be  made. 

(S)  Fragments  of  the  author;  but  when  a  work  exists  only  in  frag- 
ments it  may  be  entered  under  preceding  paragraphs. 

(9)  {a)  Lexicons,  (&)  Indexes  and  concordances. 

(10)  Dissertations,  treatises,  imitations,  etc.,  which  do  not  fall  under 
preceding  heads,  in  chronological  order. 

(11)  Biographies. 

(12)  Bibliographies. 

N.  B.  The  principles  of  arrangement  in  the  preceding  paragraphs  are  to  be  nsed 
■where  applicable,  in  other  articles. 

40.  Biographies  are  to  be  entered  under  the  subjects  of  them,  as 
well  as  under  the  writers. 

41.  The  order  of  alphabetization  is  to  be  that  of  the  English  alphabet, 
except  that,  in  general,  I  and  U  before  a  vowel  are  to  be  arrranged  as 
J  and  V,  and  J  and  V  before  a  consonant  as  I  and  U,  with  such  cross- 
references  as  may  be  necessary. 

42.  Headings  composed  of  more  than  one  separate  word  are  not  to  be 
regarded  for  purposes  of  arrangement  as  a  single  word. 


MK.  DKWKV'S    liULKS.  107 

45.  Tin;  German  a,  «»,  it  are  to  be  arranj^ed  as  if  written  out  in  lull, 
ae,  oe,  ue. 

46.  Arabic  tij^ures  are  to  uscmI  rather  than  Uoinan  ;  bnt  Roman  li;:nit's 
may  be  used  after  the  names  of  ruling  princes  and  popes,  or  lo  desig- 
nate the  number  of  a  volume  or  chapter  when  followe<l  by  a  pa;:e  [or 
•iivision)  number  in  Arabic  lij^ures. 

5i».  \V»)rd-books,  grammars,  ami  alphabets  are  to  be  entered  nndrr  the 
names  of  the  lan;;uaj;es  to  which  they  relate,  as  well  as  under  tlie  names 
of  their  compilers  and  editors  —  exct'|>t  that,  where  a  word-book  relates 
to  two  lan};ua<j:es,  or  diale(!ts,  of  which  one  is  modern  literary  Enf^lish, 
no  sei)arate  entry  needs  l»e  made  in  respect  of  the  latter. 

51.  Lon;^- and  important  articles  are  to  have  an  index  pretixed,  and 
8ubheadin^^s  may  be  added  to  the  main  heading'  in  the  same  line,  for 
convenience  of  reference. 

52.  Gives  a  list  of  28  abbreviations  allowable  in  ordinary  entries. 

53.  The  general  rule  regulating  the  use  of  brackets  is  that  round 
brackets  include  notes  derived  from  the  work  itself,  while  scjuare  brack- 
ets include  notes  of  which  the  matter  or  form  is  indepeudeut  of  the 
work. 

54.  Single  sermons  are  to  have  a  note  of  the  text  added. 

MR.  DEWEY'S  RULES  FOR  A  CARD  CATALOGUE. 

Mr.  Dewey's  Rules  for  a  card  catalogue,  i)rinted  in  No.  2  of  the  Li- 
hrary  notes,  pp.  111-124,  and  reprinted  as  Columbia  catalog  rules,  Jios- 
ton,  1888,  and  again  as  Library  School  rules,  Boston,  1889.  "except  for 
the  enlargements,  ditler  from  the  A.  L.  A.  rules,"  he  says,  "only  in  the 
following  i)oints : 
We  enter  always  under  real  name,  omitting  the  exception  that  some 

books  may   go  under   pseudonyms.     [Xot   Eliot,  (i.,   but  Lewes  or 

Cross.]  (le 

We  follow  the  rule  recommended  as  best  in  Cutter's  rules  No.  40,  i)Ut- 

ting  under  the  name  of  the  i)lace  local  and  municipal  societies,  thoutjh 

the  corporate  name  may  not  hetiin  with  that  word.  (Is 

We  give  cities  in  their  vermicular  form  instead  of  in  English.     [Wien, 

not  Vienna.]  (2f 

We  do  not  capitalize  common  m)uns  in  German,  luit  follow  the  rule  <if 

the  Library  of  Congress.     [Wahrheit  und  dichtung.]  (5m 

We  give  place  ami  date  at  the  end  of  the  imi)rint  entries  instead  of 

after  edition,  thus  following  the  L.  A.  U.  K.  and  Ilodleian  rules,  the 

A.  L.  A.  minority  report,  and   the  Library  of  Congress  in  putting 

those  most  important  items  in  the  most  prominent  place,  instead  of 

burying  them  back  of  minor  items. 
We  give  editi<m  in   English  rather  than  in  the  language  of  the  title, 

[Kd.  2,  M<>«2"  Auri.]  (4c 

We  use  Arabic  figures  for  all  numerals,  unless  Roman  are  used  on  the 

title  after  munes  of  nders  and  popes."     [Charles  1,  Leo  13.]  (9b 


108  A.  L.  A.  TRANSLITERATION  REPORT. 

APPENDIX  II. 
REPORT  OF  THE  TRANSLITERATION  COMMITTEE. 

[See  $  36.  This  Report  was  made  to  the  American  Library  Association  in  1885,  and 
printed  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Lake  George  Conference,  and  in  the  Library  journal, 
10:302-8.] 

In  determining  the  principles  of  transliteration  it  must  be  remembered  that  a  cat- 
alogue is  not  a  learned  treatise  intended  for  special  scholars,  and  bound  to  an  erudite 
consistency,  at  whatever  cost  of  convenience.  It  is  simply  a  key  to  open  the  doors  of 
knowledge  to  a  partly  ignorant  and  partly  learned  public,  and  it  is  very  important 
that  such  a  key  should  turn  easily.  A  good  catalogue,  therefore,  will  be  a  compro- 
mise between  the  claims  of  learning  and  logic  on  the  one  baud,  and  of  ignorance, 
error,  and  custom  on  the  other.  Speaking  generally,  that  form  of  name  must  be 
chosen  with  which  people  now  are,  and  in  the  future  will  he,  most  familiar.  This  ref- 
erence to  the  future  is  important.  The  catalogue  must  not  be  in  advance  of  its  age  ; 
but,  on  the  other  hand,  it  will  not  be  well  that  it  should  be  behind  the  next  genera- 
tion. If,  therefore,  there  is  an  evident  current  of  progress  in  auy  direction  the  makers 
of  the  catalogue  will  do  well  to  be  a  little  before  the  present  practice,  in  the  hope  that 
the  world  will  soon  catch  up  with  them,  not  to  pass  them  before  the  catalogue  itself 
has  been  superseded  by  another.  The  larger  the  catalogue,  therefore,  and  the  less 
likely  to  be  soon  reprinted,  the  more  may  it  venture  to  be  ahead  of  the  times.  Never- 
theless the  maker  will  do  Avell  to  remember  that  the  future  is  very  uncertain. 

One  evident  current  of  progress  there  is, —  in  favor  of  adopting  the  continental  value 
of  tho  vowels,  representing  the  ou  sound,  for  instance,  not  by  ou  nor  by  oo  (as  does  Dr. 
Thomas),  but  by  u;  writing,  therefore,  Butau,  not  Boutau,  nor  Bootan,  Turgenef  and 
not  Tourgueneff ;  using  also  a  and  not  ah  for  the  sound  of  a  in  father,  papa  (I  speak  as 
a  New  Euglander) ;  usiug  the  i  for  the  English  e  sound  ;  and  giving  what  are  unfortu- 
nately called  the  corresponding  short  sounds  by  doubling  the  following  consonant; 
thus  Nana  would  be  spelt  with  one  n,  but  Nanny  with  two.  This  tendency,  which 
has  been  gathering  strength  for  some  time,  has  at  last  received  the  sanction  of  an  in- 
fluential body,  the  Royal  Geographical  Society,  and  can  be  followed  with  safety. 

The  following  notes  are  taken  mostly  from  Mr.  Heilpriu's  articles  in  the  Nation  : 

1.  For  ancient  Greek  names  use  the  Latin  forms,  e.  g.,  Homerus  not  Homeros,  Plato 
not  Platon,  Philippus  not  Philippos.  But  where  two  forms  are  in  common  use  choose 
that  which  is  nearest  the  Greek. 

2.  For  Egyptian  names  known  to  us  through  the  Greek,  both  the  Greek  and  the 
Eo-yptian  form  (as  Cheops  and  Shufu)  should  be  given,  with  a  reference  from  the  one 
which  is  not  chosen  for  the  main  entry. 

3.  Bihlical  names  are  to  be  written  as  we  find  theni  in  the  English  Bible,  and  the 
names  of  post-Biblical  Jews,  if  derived  from  the  Scriptures,  should  retain  their  An- 
glicized form.  On  the  other  hand,  a  strict  transliteration  is  demanded  of  rabbinical 
and  other  more  or  less  pure  Hebrew  names  which  are  not  taken  from  Scriptures,  and 
therefore  have  no  popular  English  forms,  to  which,  again,  there  is  an  exception  in  the 
case  of  a  few  celebrated  Jewish  authors,  as  Maimonides,  where  an  un-Hebrew  form 
has  been  fully  adopted  in  English  literature. 

East  Indian  names  have  such  long  accepted  forms  that  it  might  well  be  doubted 
whether  it  will  do  to  use  any  others.  Cashmere,  Mooltan,  Jellaleddin,  Punjaub,  have 
taken  their  places  in  literature  and  in  the  popular  mind.  Nevertheless,  as  the  better  sys- 
tem which  writes  Kashmir,  Multan,  Jalal  ud  Din,  Panjab,  is  now  adopted  in  most  his- 
tories, in  all  official  documents,  among  others  in  Hunter's  great  statistical  dictionary 
of  Bengal,  it  is  evident  that  it  is  the  coming  method,  and,  in  accordance  with  the 


A.  L.  A.  TKANSLriKKATloN    h'KI'olM, 


109 


principles  alri'iuly  laid  down,  wo  aro  iiicliiu-d  t<>  n-coiiiiiiciid  this  spelliii;;  ratlit-r  than 
tlui  (diiinsy  Kiij;lish  fa.Hhioii  of  tho  last  ymn^ration. 

All  otiur  .iHialir  and  .l/ricaii  nanii-s  slioiiiil  hti  t  ran  si  iterated  nccordinjj  to  tlio  rulea 
of  tht)  Itoyal  Geo-jtraphitial  Society,  which  wo  quote  hero  from  thtdr  I'roceedin>;8  for 

An-iist,  is<,  (pp.  r,r,,  r,:m). 

TheCoimcil  of  the  Koyal  Geographical  .Societj'  have  adopted  the  following  rules 
for  such  geoj^raphical  names aH  are  not,  in  the  countries  to  which  they  belong,  written 
in  the  Roman  character.  These  rules  are  identical  with  those  adopted  for  the  Ad- 
miralty charts,  and  will  henceforth  be  used  in  all  publications  of  the  society: — 

I.  No  change  will  be  made  in  tiic  orthography  of  foreign  names  in  countries  which 
use  Roman  lett<>rs:  thus,  Spanish,  Purtugucse.  Dutch,  etc.,  names  will  be  spelt  as  by 
I  lie  respective  nations. 

'J.  Neither  will  any  change  be  made  in  the  spelling  of  such  names  in  languages  which 
are  not  written  in  Roman  character  as  have  become  by  long  usage  familiar  to  English 
readers:  thus,  Calcutta,  Cutch,  Celebes,  Mecca,  etc.,  will  be  retained  in  their  present 
form. 

3.  The  true  sound  of  the  word,  as  locally  pronounced,  will  be  taken  as  the  basis  of 
tiie  spelling. 

4.  An  approximation,  liowever,  to  the  sound  is  alone  aimed  at.  A  sj'stem  which 
would  attempt  to  rej)resent  the  more  delicate  intlections  of  sound  and  accent  would 
1mi  so  comi)licated  as  only  to  defeat  itself. 

5.  The  broad  features  of  the  system  are,  that  vowels  are  pronounced  as  in  Italian 
and  consonants  as  in  English. 

C).  One  accent  only  is  used  —  the  acute  —  to  denote  the  syllable  on  which  stress  is 
laid. 

7.  Every  letter  is  pronounced.  When  two  vowels  come  together  each  one  is  sounded, 
though  the  result,  when  spoken  quickly,  is  sometimes  scarcely  to  be  distinguished 
from  a  single  sound,  as  in  ai,  an,  ei. 

8.  Indian  names  are  accepted  as  spelt  in  Hunter's  Gazetteer. 
The  amplitication  of  the  rules  is  given  below : 


i 

Pronunciation  and  rc- 
niarkH. 

Examples. 

- 

s 

1 

Pronunciation  and  re- 
marks. 

Examples. 

a 

ah.aMin/ather 

Java.  Bandna. 

ei 

is  the  sound  of  the  two 

Beirtit,BeUiiL 

e 

eh,  e  as  in  betiejit 

English   e  ,-  i  a.i  in    ra- 
vine ;  the  sound  of  ee 

Tel  el-Kebir.016- 
leh.Yezo.  Med- 
ina,     Levtika, 
Peru. 

Italian  vowels,  but  is 
frequently   slnrreil 
over,  when  it  JHseaiee- 
Iv  to  be(listin;:ui8hed 
from  cy  in  the  EuKlish 
they. 

in  beet. 

b 

Enelisb  b. 

Tbiis.   not  Feejee. 
but 

0 

is  always  soft,  but  is  so 

Celebea. 

Fiji.  Hindi. 

nearlv  the  sound  of  * 

o 

0  as  in  mote 

Tokio. 

that  It  Hhoiitd    be  Hel- 

u 

\onit  u,  as  in  Jlute  ;  the 
sounil  of  00  in  boot. 
Thus,  not    /ooloo. 

dom  used.    (It  ('•■Ube* 
were  not  alivadv  ree 
OfCni/.eil    it    would    be 

but 

Zuhi,  Sumatra. 

written  Selfbf*.) 

All  vowpIh  art' shortened 

Yarra,      Tanna, 

oh 

is  nlwiiys  Mofi   as   In     Chingcbln. 

ill  sound  hv  doubling 

Mecca.  Jidda, 

church. 

thit    following;    conso- 

Bonny. 

d 

Enclish  d. 

nant. 

f 

Eiisjlinh  .f.     ph   should 

Doiiolini:  of  a  vowel  is 

NnulUa,  Oosima. 

not    be   u8<Mi    for   the 

onl.v  nt'cessary  where 

sound  ol  f. 

there  is  11  distfiKt  rep- 
etition of  the   single 

Thus,  not  llaiphonij 

but 

Bnifonc,  Xafa. 

sound. 

e 

is  always  hanl      (Soft  g 
is  uiven  b.v>.) 

Galilpacos. 

ai 

English  1  n.s  in  «c« 

Shanghai. 

h 

is    alwiivx    jiMinounceil 

ail 

oto  as  in  how. 

when  inserted. 

Tliiis  not  ^orAow.biit 

FueliiUI. 

1 

Enelish   ;.      D)  Hhould     Japan,  JiDrbiien 

ao 

is  sliKhtly  ditferen  t  from 

Ma.a... 

never  be  put  for  this 

above. 

sound. 

no 


APr.  II:    A.  L.  A.  TRANSLITERATION    REPORT. 


£ 

Pronuuciation  and  re- 
marks. 

Examples. 

1 

Pronauciation  and  re- 
marks. 

Examples. 

p^ 

^ 

k 

English  k.    It  should 
always  bo  put  for  the 
hanlc. 

Thus,  not  Corea,  but 

Korea. 

}n»  in  English. 

kh 

the  Oriintal  guttural  .. 

Khan. 

Sawakin. 

gh 

is  another  guttural,  as 

Dagh,  Ghazi. 

1  

in  the  Turkish. 
) 

J  is  always  a  consonant, 
as  in  yard,  and  there- 
fore should  never  be 

•  ni 

Sasin  English. 

n 

S 

used  as  a  terminal,  t 

ng 

has  two  separate  sounds, 
the  one  hard  as  in  the 
English    word  fin<jer. 

ore  being  suhstitnted 
,    Thus,  not  J/iA-inddni/ 

Mikinddni. 

the  othpr  as  in  i.i»(jer. 

notKwaly.but 

Kwale. 

As  these  two  sounds 

z 

Englishz 

Zulu. 

are  rarely  employed  in 

Accents  should  not  gen- 

Tongat4bu, Gald, 

the  same  locality,  no 

erally    be    used,    but 

.    pagos,  Palawan, 

attempt  is    made    to 

when  there  is  a  very 

Sarawak. 

di.stinguish    between 

decided  emphatic  syl- 

them. 

lable  or  stress,  wliicli 

p 

as  in  English. 

aifects  the  sound   of 

q 

should    never    be   em- 
ployed ;  qu  is  given  as 

Kwangtung. 

the  word,  it  should  be 
marked  by  an  acute 
accent. 

A  few  points  ueed  to  be  emphasized.  Of  course  the  consonantal  sound  in  itch 
should  never  bo  expressed  iu  transliteration  by  the  Polish  cz,  nor  by  the  German  tsch. 
Teh  has  been  much  used  for  this  sound;  but  the  t  is  hardly  necessary  if,  as  the  Geo- 
graphical Society  recommend,  ch  is  always  used  with  this  sound  only  and  never  with 
the  sound  sh.  Of  course  there  is  no  reason  why  ch  should  be  used  in  foreign  names 
with  the  sound  sh  any  more  than_;  with  the  sound  zh.  All  that  was  needed  to  pre- 
vent ambiguity  was  tor  some  competent  authority  to  make  a  rule ;  and  these  rules 
of  the  Geographical  Society  will  no  doubt  soon  be  copied  into  all  manuals  and  fol- 
lowed by  the  majority.  In  this  connection  we  express  our  regret  that  a  new  edition 
of  Dr.  Thomas's  excellent  Dictionary  of  Biography  continues  to  give  his  support  to 
what  we  believe  is  an  obsolescent  system  of  transliteration. 

Nor  should  the  consonantal  sound  in  judge  be  rendered  by  the  English  d(j,  nor  the 
French  dj,  nor  the  German  dsch,  but  by  j  alone.  Likewise  the  consonantal  sound  in 
she  is  not  to  be  written  after  the  French  style,  ch,  or  as  the  Germans  do,  sch.  The 
sound  which  the  French  transliterate  by  J  we  must  express  by  zh  (e.g.,  Nizhni  Nov- 
gorod). Tz  is  best  to  use  in  Semitic  and  Slavic  names,  and  ts  in  Japanese  and  Chi- 
nese. For  the  Semitic  "  yod"  y  is  the  proper  equivalent,  and  not  the  Germany".  But 
after  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable  it  is  usual  to  change  the  y  to  i  (Biela  not  Byela), 
and  in  Russian  names  ai,  ei,  oi,  ui  are  used  instead  of  ay,  ey,  oy,  ity  (Alexei  not  Alexey). 
After  i  the  y  is  dropped  (Dobni  not  Dobniy).  TV  is  to  be  used  rather  than  i  in  Arabic 
names  (e.  </.,  Moawiyah).  But  the  Russian,  Serb,  Bulgarian,  and  Wallach  contain  no 
such  sound  or  letter  as  iv,  and  we  must  write  Paskevitch,  Vasili,  not  as  do  the  Ger- 
mans, Paskewitch,  Wasili.  In  the  last  syllable  of  names  of  places  (Azov,  Kiev)  ev 
and  ov  are  to  be  used,  because  the  Russians  used  the  corresponding  letter,  though 
they  pronounce  ef  and  of  (in  the  nominative  cases).  But  in  the  last  syllable  of  fam- 
ily names,  similarly  pronounced,  of  and  ef  may  be  used,  because  the  Russians  sign 
their  names  off  and  eff  when  using  Roman  characters.  The  last/,  which  they  use, 
may  be  omitted  as  being  plainly  not  required  to  express  the  sound,  and  not  corre- 
sponding to  the  Russian  character.  Eh  represents  the  full  guttural,  which  the  Ger- 
mans make  ch  and  the  Spanish  j  in  Slavic  and  Oriental  names.  H  answers  to  the 
softer  guttural  as  well  as  to  the  Hebrew  he.  E  answers  to  the  Semitic  Eaph  and 
Eoph. 

The  use  of  ei  for  the  sound  of  a  in  fate,  ea  in  great,  ai  in  trait,  is  not  altogether 
satisfactory.     It  is  not  easy  to  see  why  e  was  not  used  to  represent  this  sound,  and 


A.  L.  A.  TKANSLITKKATIOX    KKI'Oirr  1  1  1 

thf  short  €,  like  tho  short  a,  i,  o,  ami  it,  iii<licato<l  by  doubling  tint  foUowinjj  c<»n- 
sonant,  as  Yoddo,  Moddina. 

Th«  j^cneral  riiln,  thou,  is  to  use  the  consonauts  with  their  Eiif^lish  value,  the  vowels 
with  thi'ir  continental,  or,  to  speak  more  exactlj-,  their  Oornian  and  Italian  value, 
for  the  French  value  of  h  should  never  be  used,  and  the  short  Freiicii  a  requires  of  us 
a  doubled  consonant  after  it.  Their  nii  and  our  oo  is  quite  unnecessary  to  express 
tne  sound  of  the  last  syllable  of  Tinibuctu  or  Kliartuni. 

C:  A.  CfTTKit. 

C.  B.  TiMJNcaiAST. 

W:  C.  Lank. 

MiCUAKI.    IlKII.I'niN. 

Professor  Toy,  of  Harvard  University,  furnished  to  the  committee  a  trauHlitvratiou 
table  for  Semitic  lan^^uages,  Professor  Laniuan,  of  the  same  University,  one  for  San- 
skrit, and  Mr.  Ileilprin,  of  the  committee,  one  for  Russian. 

Professor  Lanmax  remarked  on  his  tabic: 

1.  It  will  be  observed  that  each  of  the  five  rows  numbered  1  to  .'>  consists  of  five 
letters;  the  second  and  fourth  in  each,  i.  e.,  the  aspirates,  are  often  written,  especially 
in  older  works,  thus,  k',  g\  c\f,  V,  d',  V,  d',p%  b';  that  is,  the  rough  breathing  takes 
the  place  of  the  h. 

2.  Write  long  vowels  with  <a  macron,  thus,  it,  i,  ft,  r,  and  not  with  a  ciniinillex. 

:{.  Wherever  you  find  the  combination  ri,  with  a  dot  under  the  r,  reduce  it  to  sim- 
ple {•,  since  it  is  a  sinii)le  unitary  sound. 

4.  The  palatals  (row  2)  are  often  written  by  means  of  the  gutturals  and  an  accent: 
thus,  we  Hud        k'  k'h  g'  g'h; 

for  c    ch  j  jh 

and  in  some  German  books  c  (which  has  the  sound  of  c^  in  church)  is  written  tsch,  and 
j  (=/  in  judge)  in  like  manner  dnch.  p-nrther,  c  and  ch  are  written  in  some  English 
works  as  ch  and  cch,  a  useless  waste  of  labor. 

5.  When  the  third  palatal  is  written  by  g,  it  is  common  among  the  Germans  to 
write  the  tirst  semi-vowel  by  ^^    The  last  semi-vowel  is  often  written  w  (instead  of  r). 

6.  The  transliteration  of  the  ^rsf  two  sibilants  is  very  fluctnatiug.  My  f,  is  written 
^  by  Monier  Williams  in  his  dictionary. 

The  second  sibilant  is  often  written  sh,  sometimes  if,  by  me  as  «,  like  the  other 
Unguals. 

7.  Finally  an  »  at  the  end  of  a  Sanskrit  word  is  converted  into  .-m  aspiration  called 
risarga,  and  written  thus  : ,  and  in  transliteration  is  written  in  this  manner,  h.  The 
nasality  of  a  vowel  is  marked  by  u  or  m  which  appears  in  the  Sanskrit  as  a  dot  above 
the  body  of  the  consonant. 

For  a  brief  and  lucid  discussion  of  the.se  matters  and  a  defense  of  the  system  of 
Profes.sor  Whitney,  of  Yale,  which  is  followed  in  his  grammar  and  in  Lanman's  Reader, 
see  The  Proceedings  of  the  American  Oriental  Society,  October,  IddO,  p.  xvii. 


112 


APP.  II:    SANSKHIT    TKANSLITERATION    REPORT. 


1  " 

<*< 

^5 

ae^r^'j'^*-^ 

5P- 

4- 

<»- 

^ 

Z3 

TT 

^ 

J 

a^jHu^rU> 

W 

T 

a 

A 

jU 

? 

/ 

$« 

T 

f 

i 

f 

\ 

T 

? 

^ 

71 

^ 

H 

fdaU^      I 

3 

-o 

u. 

C 

cA 

i 

i< 

?t 

3 

<?^ 

5 

^ 

^ 

T 
7 

7 

i 

7 

t4 

4 

1?- 

U^fJ^i   < 

^ 

A. 

i 

-N 
•^ 

A. 

SI 

t 

IT 

Z 

■^ 

71^ 

JUnU^    i\ 

^ 

\ 

0 

^ 

1 

ao^. 

^ 

^ 

^ 

U 

■R 

UvM.i 

^ 

p 

^ 

>(^ 

^ 

tn 

"i^c^    .SJJh*.    (T^Lu-    ««),. 

i^cjy 

^ 

•BT 

P 

? 

9 

/* 

/S 

-t 

SEMITIC 

TirANSLITK 

RATION. 

OaJm^k, 

>i4W 

h^ 

\A^ 

LyJ. 

1 

« 

) 

A 

•V 

:» 

3 

A 

I' 

v-" 

^ 

2- 

■* 

t 

w 

- 

r  i,i;^  ^  -^^^ 

Z  iy 

^'V 

^(,)        -^  ^V 

jL «;.  cuAi'     lixo^Uo. 

ZL 

♦ 

< 

t 

n 

ot* 

< 

< 

9 

n 

9 

A 

'i 

S 

- 

r 

I  Ct^'^tUv.') 

> 

•» 

r 

it. 

v- 

; 

? 

s 

H 

« 

tT 

u; 

i 

cT 

w 

^ 

i  L'it) 

V 

-a- 

t> 

^ 

4/^ 

»t^i 

■3 

^ 

4 

J* 

e 

? 

J> 

ta 

^ 

m 

t- 

^ 

*(. 

^ 

y 

*• 

0 

t 

t 

■^ 

^ 

1 

J 

>e7) 

r 

Yl 

i 

J 

V 

'-■^ 

/I 

I 

f 

/atfl) 

wo 

A 

ft^ 

0 

5h) 

V 

i 

% 

ir 

n 

tn 

*J 

i 

? 

1 

o 

d> 

V 

v5 

n 

mt 

£ 

1 

113 


+81)2  Ll 


1 14  API'.  II  :    RUSSIAN    TKANSLITKKATION. 


A.  L.  A.  BOOK    SlZi;    l.'.i:r<)KT.  Ho 

APPENDIX  III. 

REPORT  ON  HOOK  SIZES. 

A  Spfcial  Coinmitteo  on  Book  Sizes  of  tlu>  Aiiu-ricau  Library  AHSOciation  reported 
{Library journal,  3:  I'J,  'iU)  tlio  lollowiii^i  rule: 

Give  the  outside  height  in  centimeters,  using  friictiuiiK  (decimalK) 
where  extreme  accuracy  is  desired.  For  books  of  special  forms,  prutix 
sq.,  ob.,  or  nar,,  to  indicate  square,  oblong,  or  narrow,  or  else  givf  the 
actual  width  after  the  height.  Ad<l  a  small  "''"  to  tlie  figures  giving 
the  height,  except  when  followed  by  the  width.  In  the  latter  case  con- 
nect height  and  width  with  the  ordinary  symbol  x,  always  giving  the 
height  first.  If  fractions  are  not  used,  give  the  first  centimeter  above, 
e.  ^.,  all  books  between  18  and  19  mark  ID*',  because  they  fall  in  the 
19th  centimeter.  For  the  widtl),  measure  the  board  from  the  hinge  to 
the  edge,  not  inchidiug  the  round.  If  desirable  to  give  the  size  of  the 
paper  or  letter-press,  prefix  the  measurement  with  p(aper)  or  t(ype), 
including  in  the  ty,)e  neither  folio  nor  signature  lines. 

For  those  preferring  to  use  the  common  designations,  the  following 
rule  was  unanimously  recommended: 

Designate  each  size  by  its' initial  letter  or  letters  (followed,  if  pre- 
ferred by  the  cataloguer,  by  its  final  letter  "  o,"  superior  "°")  assigning 
the  size  by  the  following  table,  and  prefixing  stj.,  ob.,  nar.,  if  the  Ixtoka 
be  s(iuare,  oblong,  or  narrow.  Givii  the  exact  measurement  of  all  size- 
curiosities,  whether  very  large  or  very  small. 

Limit  of  out- 
side li('i);lit, 
cvntiiiR-ters. 
ID 

1-2.5 
15 
17.5 
'JO 
2.5 
30 
\0 
50 
»•)() 
70 
otc. 

Any  cataloguer  desiring  to  use  the  term  E  (18°)  may  do  so  by  calling 
the  smaller  S  (10»).  This  causes  no  confusion,  for  either  E  or  S  i.s  be- 
tween la  and  17^  cm.  in  height.  Hooks  from  LM>  to  40  cm.  high  may  be 
called  sm.  Q,  Q,  and  1.  Q  when  of  the  square  form,  but  (),  1.  O,  and  F, 
or  sm.  F,  when  of  the  ordinary  form.  Books  smaller  than  20  cm.,  and 
of  the  quarto  form,  are  marked  sq.  D,  etc.     •     •     • 

The  plan  of  giving  the  height  in  centimeters  has  the  advantage  that, 
once  stated,  it  will  never  be  forgotten.     l>v  it  the  size  is  more  i-asilv 


Nrnnerical 
formerly 

symbol 
used. 

Ablirpviation 
to  be  used. 

48° 

Fe 

32° 

Tt 

240 

T 

If)" 

8 

120 

D 

80 

0 

40 
fo 

Q 

F 
F» 
F» 
F» 

etc. 

IIG  APP.   IV:    MK.  EDMANDS    ON    ALl'llAliETl.NG. 

(U'lenniiKHl,  more  (iiiickl.v  recorded,  much  more  definite  in  its  descrip- 
tion, and,  most  important  of  all,  is  understood  by  all  users  of  catalogues 
alter  the  lirst  time,  while  the  other  systems  are  intelligible  only  to  those 
familiar  with  books.  The  committee  therefore  recommends  the  plan  of 
iu'licating  the  size  by  giving  the  size. 


APPENDIX  IV. 

MR.  EDMANDS  ON  ALPHABETICAL  ORDER. 

Mr.  J.  Edmands,  iu  "Rules  for  alfabetiug,"  read  at  the  meeting  of  the  American 
Library  Association  in  August,  1887,  and  published  in  the  Library  journal,  12:  326- 
341,  discussed  the  subject  carefully.  A. committee  of  the  Association  was  directed  to 
prepare  a  code  of  rules,  to  be  reported  in  the  Librarij  journal;  for  their  report  see 
14  :  273-274.  Their  code  coincides  with  mine  {^^  214-23'J),  except  (1)  that  they  adopt 
my  former  order,  "person,  place,  title,  subject  (except  person  and  place),  form,"  and 
not  the  present  rule  (^  214),  "person,  place,  followed  by  subject  (except  person  and 
place),  form  and  title,"  an  arrangement  which  probably  was  not  proposed  to  the 
committee;  and  (2)  that  when  two  or  more  names  are  spelled  exactly  alike  except 
for  the  umlaut  iu  names  in  which  the  German  ii,  iJ,  or  ii  may  occur,  the  committee 
put  all  the  names  having  the  umlaut  last,  e.  g.,  all  the  MuUers  after  the  Mullers.  I 
arrange  by  the  forenames. 

Mr.  Edmands  correctly  states  as  the  principle  of  alphabeting '•' S'o))!e?/aH(7/o/?ot(S 
nothing  ;  or,  conversely.  Nothing  before  something  ;■  thus  iu 

Art  of  living  In  clover 

Arthur  Incas 

the  art.  in  the  first  case,  and  the  in,  iu  the  second,  ar  followed  by  a  space,  i.  e.,  by 
nothing,  aud  so  precede  the  single  word  in  which  the  t  and  the  n  are  followed  bj-  a 
letter;  i.  e.,  by  something." 

His  Rules  agree  with  those  stated  or  implied  in  ^  214  and  following  sections,  with 
three  exceptions.     The  first  is  this  : 

"A  word  used  iudepeudeutly  as  a  subject  hediug  should  precede  the 
same  word  used  in  couuection  with  another.  And  if  tbis  word  is  coupled 
with  another  word  to  form  a  compouud  subject  heding,  it  should  follow 
the  simple  hediug.  And  if  this  word  used  as  a  simple  hediug  is  also 
used  a  substautiv  to  form  a  different  subject  hediug,  aud  is  also  used 
adjectivly  before  a  noun,  the  substantiv  use  should  precede  the  atljectiv 
use.     And  so  we  hav  this  order: 

Art 

Art  and  artists 

Art  of  conversation 

Art  amateur 

"  The  reasons  for  it  ar  clear  and  strong.  A  substantiv  should  precede  an  adjectiv,  as 
being  the  more  imjiortaut  word,  and  as  being  less  closely  connected  with  the  follow- 
ing than  an  adjectiv.  In  uttering  the  frases  Art  applied  to  indiTstry,  Art  of  conversa- 
tion, there  is  a  perceptible  susjieusion  of  the  voice  after  the  word  Art,  which  does  not 
occur  in  the  case  of  Art  journal,  art  aniateur." 

The  reason  is  not  strong  enough  to  justify  interfering  with  the  alphabetical  order, 
■which  demands  that  amateur  shall  precede  aud.  It  is  needless  to  compel  the  searcher 
to  stop  and  think  whether  the  word  "  art "  in  the  phrase  he  is  hunting  for  is  a  noun 


ALrilABKTING.  117 

or  ail  adjectiv*^;  indeed,  it  is  not  only  a  nsele8.s  refinement,  hnt  ]iopi lively  dangerous, 
aH  likely  occasionally  to  lead  liiin  to  overlook  an  entry  which  is  (nit  of  its  alphabet- 
ical order. 

The  sanio  objection  apidies  to  the  praeticeof  some  eataloj^nersof  pnttin^tlie  plnral 
i-uniediately  after  tlie  sin«;nlar,  even  when  the  alphabet  demands  that  it  shonid  pro- 
cede  (as  Charities,  Charity),  or  when  many  entries  mijilit  come  between  (as  between 
Bank  and  Banks).     This  |»r.ictice  Mr.  HdmaudH  con<IemnH. 

The  second  exeejition  is  this: 

"A  sinole  fiil  name  should  precede  a  <lonl»le  initial,  i.  e.,  a  Runiame 
with  one  Christian  name  should  stand  before  flic  sann;  surname  with 
two  Christian  names ;  thus, 

John,  not  J.  M., 

J.  M.  John. 

This  plainly  contradicts  tho  principle   "nothing  before  somethiug."    A  period  is 
too  trilling  a  matter  to  arrange  by,  and  neglecting  that 
J   followed   by  nothing  J 

shonid  precede  J  followed  by  o,  John. 

Tho  third  exception  is  this  : 

A  book  written  by  a  single  author  should  luecedeone  written  by  him 
and  another. 

(See  the  argument  in  the  note  to  ^  240.) 

The  rnles  which  agree  are  in  substance  as  follows: 

Netr.  Titles  with  the  initial  word  Xow  used  as  a  proper  adjective  fol- 
lowed by  a  common  noun,  and  those  in  which  it  forms  a  [»art  of  a  com  pound 
l)Iace  name  sliould  be  arranged  in  one  series,  alfabeting  by  the  la.st  part. 
(New  Amsterdau),  new  boat,  New  Canaan,  new  life.)  Single  words  be- 
ginning with  n  e  w,  whether  names  of  persons,  places,  or  things,  should 
be  arranged  in  a  following  alfabetical  series. 

Tho  hy/en  is  best  disregarded,  words  connected  by  it  being  arranged 
as  two  words. 

If  an  article^  which  belongs  before  a  word  used  as  a  heding,  is  inserted 
after  it,  it  is  not  to  be  taken  account  of  in  alfabeting. 

The  plural  in  s  should  follow  the  singular.  The  possessive  case  singu- 
lar should  follow  the  .singular  and  precede  the  i)lural  in  s.  The  se- 
(pience,  however,  may  not  in  either  ca.se  be  immediate.!  Several  entries 
mny  intervene.  Plurals  in  ies  of  words  eiuling  in  y  should  precede  the 
singular,  tho  not  neces.sarily  in  immediate  connection. 

Common  and  proper  nouns.  In  the  case  of  words  u.scd  sometimes  a*» 
cotiimoii  and  sometimes  as  i)n)per  nouns,  the  true  order  is  person,  place, 
ami  thing. 

iSurnames.  Whenever  a  single  n;ime.  Charles,  Flenry,  William,  is  used 
as  the  sole  designation  of  a  person,  this  should  pre<'ede  the  same  word 
used  as  a  surname.  If  .several  ranks  are  representetl  by  one  name,  pre- 
cedence should  be  given  to  those  bearing  the  iiighest  rank  in  this  order, 
I)ope,  emperor,  king,  noble,  saint.  If  these  represent  difVer«Mit  national- 
ities they  should  be  grou|»t  in  the  alfal>etical  order  of  the  countries j 
and  nuMierically  under  each  country,  as  Jolni  I.,  .John  II, 


J  18  AVI'.   l\   :    yUi.  KDMANI.'S    ON    ALPHAB1:TING. 

Family  naim*s  lliat  liav  tlio  saints  sound,  bat  adiffeient  si)elling,  ni'.ist 
be  Kt*i)arate(l,  but  the  reader  should  be  aided  as  much  as  we  can  by  a 
free  use  of  cross  relereiices. 

In  names  beginning' with  La,  Le,  and  De  —  not  French  names  —  wiit- 
teu  separately,  it  is  better  to  disregard  the  separation,  and  arrange 
these  words  as  if  they  were  written  solidly. 

Ahhreriations.  Names  beginning  with  M',  Mc,  St,  and  Ste  should  be 
arranged  as  if  written  out  in  ful,as  Mac,  Saint,  and  Sainte,  for  the  reason 
that  they  ar  uuiforndy  so  pronounct,  and  often  so  written.  And  for  the 
same  reason  entries  beginning  with  Dr.,  M.,..Mme.,  Mile.,  Mr.,  and  Mrs. 
should  be  treated  as  if  they  were  written. in  ful,  as  Doctor,  Monsieur, 
Madame,  Mademoiselle,  Mister,  and  Mistress. 

Forenames.  When  Christian  names  ar  given  in  ful,  the  arrangement 
should  be  in  strict  alfabetical  order,  following  the  surname.  And  use 
should  be  made  of  all  the  helps  which  the  cataloger  has  given  for  dis- 
tinguishing two  or  more  persons  whose  names  ar  identical. 

Titles,  such  as  Gen.,  Hon.,  Sir,  ar  to  be  allowed  to  stand,  but  not  to 
affect  the  arrangement. 

Nxnnerals  occurring  as  hedings  should  be  treated  as  if  written  out  in 
letters.     The  novel  "  39  men  for  one  woman  "  should  be  entered  under  t. 

initials.  If  the  cataloger  has  simply  followed  the  title-page  and  given 
only  initials  of  Christian  names,  the  only  safe  course  is  to  treat  every 
initial  as  a  name;  and,  on  the  axiom  "Nothing  before  something,"  the 
initial  should  precede  the  ful  name.  Thus  J.  precedes  James  even  tho, 
as  may  afterwards  be  learned,  the  J.  stands  for  Jehoshaphat. 

Dash.  In  order  to  save  space  in  printing,  and  for  distinctness  to  the 
eye,  it  is  wel  to  use  a  dash  to  represent  a  word  or  group  of  words  that 
might  otherwise  hav  to  be  repeated;  or  to  inset  the  words  that  come 
under  the  general  heding.  Care  should  be  taken  to  make  clear  what 
the  dash  stands  for,  and  to  confine  its  use  within  proper  bounds. 

It  may  be  used  when  we  hav  several  books  written  by  one  person : 
but  it  should  not  be  used  to  cover  another  person  of  the  same  surname. 

It  may  be  used  to  represent  a  word  or  group  of  words  that  iudicate.a 
definite  subject,  as  heat,  moral  science,  socialists  and  Fourierism,  society 
for  the  difl"usion*f  useful  knowledge.  But  it  should  not  be  used  to  rep- 
resent a  part  of  a  compound  subject-heding,  nor  a  part  of  a  title  ;  e.  g., 
in  the  en  tries  Historical  portraits.  Historical  reading,  the  word  Historical 
should  be  spelled  out  in  each  case. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


119 


APPENDIX  V. 
ABBREVIATIONS. 

The  list  of  abbreviations  orifjiually  ^ivcii  on  p.  57,  §  116,  was  onlarped 
in  the  report  of  the  committee  on  catah)«iiu'  ruh\s  of  the  American 
Library  Association  {Librari;  journal,  3:  1«-1!>).  It  there  inchnhMl  tlie 
abbreviations  for  the  most  usual  forenames  formed  by  the  initial  fol- 
lowed by  a  colon  for  men  and  by  two  periods  for  women  (as  J:=J<ihn, 
I\I..  =  ]\Iary),  devised  by  C:  A.  Cutter  and  first  published  in  tlie  Library 
journal,  1:  405  and  5:170.  It  was  republislied,  classified,  but  with 
many  omissions  and  additions,  by  Meivil  Dewey  in  Library  notes,  1: 
200-211,  and  also  ou  a  convenient  card.  It  is  here  reprinted  in  fidl  with 
his  additions. 

A  list  of  abbreviations  used  in  describing  bindings,  prepared  by  B. 
H.  Woodrufl^  was  published  in  the  Library  journal  for  May,  1S87. 


FORENAMK8. 

Aarou 

Aar. 

Barbara 

Barb. 

Abraham 

Ab. 

Barnard 

Ham. 

Adam 

Ad. 

Bartliolonians,  Bartholomew 

Bart. 

Adelbert 

Adlb. 

Basilins 

Ba=.. 

Adolf 

Adf. 

Beatrice 

B.. 

Adrian 

Adr. 

Beatrix 

Bx. 

Aoyidius 

Aeg. 

Belinda 

Bel. 

All.oit 

Alb. 

Honodict 

Bened. 

Albrecht 

Albr. 

Benjamin 

B: 

Alexander,  Alexandre 

Alex. 

Bernard 

Bern. 

Alfonso 

Alf. 

Bern hard 

Bernh. 

Alfred 

Alfr. 

Berthold 

Brth. 

Alpliouse 

Alph.' 

Bertram 

B<rt. 

Aniadens 

A  in  ad. 

B(»nifaco 

Boni. 

Ambrose,  Ambrosias 

Anib. 

Hrnno 

Bru. 

AnastasiuB 

Anast. 

Biirchard 

Bch. 

Andreas,  Andrew 

And. 

Anna 

A.. 

Cadwallader                  ^ 

CadwaL 

Ansi'lni 

Ans. 

Calel)                              m 

Clb. 

Antliony,  Antoiue,  Anton 

Ant. 

Calvin                             f 

Calv. 

Arcliibald 

Arch. 

Camillus 

Cam. 

Arnold 

Arn. 

Camilla 

Cnui. 

Arthnr 

Arj#. 

Carl,  Carlo,  CLarlee 

C: 

August,  AugUBtOB 

A: 

Caroline 

Care. 

Augusta 

A:  a 

Casimir 

Cas. 

Augustin 

A:  in 

Caspar 

C.p. 

Augustiuus 

A:  inus 

Catharine 

Cath. 

Anrelius 

Anr. 

Charlotte 

C. 

Austin 

Aust. 

Christian 

Chr. 

Cbristlieh 

Chli. 

Baldwin 

Bald. 

Christoph 

Cp. 

Baltiiasar 

Bait. 

Clarence 

Clar. 

Baptiste 

Bapt. 

Claude 

CI. 

120 


APP    V:    ABHREVIATIONS. 


FOKENAMES— contiuued. 


Claiidius 

Cls. 

Frederic,  Friedrich 

F: 

Cleiiifiis,  Clement 

Clem. 

Fiirchtegott 

.    Fchtg. 

Coinail 

Conr. 

Constantiii 

Const. 

Gabriel 

Gbr. 

Conlclia 

Cord. 

Gamaliel 

Gam. 

Coriu'lius 

Corn. 

Gasparo 

Gsp. 

Crisj.ian,  Crispin,  Crispns 

Crsp. 

Gaston 

Gast. 

Gebbard 

Gbh. 

Daniel 

Dan. 

Gftoffrey 

Geof. 

David 
Deborah 

D: 
Deb. 

Georg,  G^rge,  Georges 
Gerald 

G: 
Ger. 

Detlev 

Dtl. 

Gerbard 

Gh. 

Delia 

D., 

Gershora 

Gersh. 

Diana 

Di. 

Gertrude 

Gert. 

Dietrich 

Dt. 

Giacomo 

Giac. 

Dominicus 

Doui. 

Giam  Battista 

Gi.  bat. 

Donald 

Don. 

Gian  Giacomo 

Gi.  Giao. 

Dorothy 

Dor. 

Gian  Pietro 

Gi.  P: 

Dnncau 

Dune. 

Gideon 

Gid. 

Ebenezer 

Eb. 

Gilbert 

Gilb. 

Eberhard 

Ebb. 

Giovanni 

Gi. 

Edgar 

Edg. 

Giuseppe 

Gin. 

Edmund 

Edm. 

Godfrey 

Godf. 

Edonard,  Eduard,  Edward 

E: 

Gottfried 

Gf. 

Edwin 

Edu. 

Gotthard 

Gtbd. 

Egbert 

Egb. 

Gottbelf 

Ghf. 

Ehren  fried 

Ebrfr. 

Gotthold 

Gbld, 

iElias 

El. 

Gottlieb 

Gil. 

i^Elijah 

Elij. 

Gottlob 

Glo. 

^klizabeth               * 
,   Amanuelv^^5Wf_l^j::_^_:i 

E.. 

Gottschalk 

Gk. 

— Em.f--    1 

Grace 

Gregor,  Gregory 

G.. 

Epbraim 

^b?'^^- 

Gteg. 

Erdmann 

Erdm. 

Guillaume. 

Gull.. 

Erbard 

Erb. 

Glintber 

Gth. 

Eric,  Erich 

Er. 

Gustar,  Gustavus 

Gst. 

Ernest,  Ernst 

Ern. 

Hannah 

Ha. 

Engen,  Eugene 

Eug. 

Hans   . 

He. 

Eusobius               ^ 

Eus. 

Harold 

Hat. 

Eustace,  EnstachB 

Eust. 

Harriet 

Ht. 

Evelina                 ^ 

Evel. 

Hartmann 

Htm. 

Ezecbiel                  ' 

Ezech. 

Hartwig 

Htw. 

Ezra 

Ez. 

Hector 

Hect. 

Hedwig 

Hedw. 

Fanny 

P..    ■ 

Heinrich,  Henri,  Henry 

H: 

,    Felix 

i^.Y^ 

Helen 

H.. 

.Ferdinand           "^ 

..Fd.    1  ^ 

Herbert 

*.  Herb. 

Fitz  William 

FitzW,    • 

Herrmann 

Hm. 

Flatiua 

Flav. 

Hezekiah 

H7,k. 

•    Florence 

Flo. 

Hieronymus 

Hi. 

Francis 

Fs. 

Hippolyt** 

Hip. 

Frances 

Fes. 

Horace 

Hor. 

Frank 

Fk. 

Hubert 

Hnb. 

Franz               • 

Fz.. 

Hugh 

Hu. 

Al$HKi:VlAT10N8. 


121 


FORE.VAMES— lontiiined. 


Hugo 

Hk. 

Malachi 

Mai. 

Humphrey 

Hum. 

Marcus 

Mcs. 

Margaret 

Marg. 

IgnatiiiH,  Igiiaz 

Igu. 

Maria 

Mar. 

Immauiiel 

Ini. 

Marc,  Mark 

M: 

Iniiorcnz 

Inn. 

Martin 

Mt. 

Inaac 

I: 

Mary 

M.. 

Isal.ella 

I.. 

MathiiuH,  Matthew 

Mat. 

iMravl 

lar. 

Matilda 

Mta. 

Maurice 

Maur. 

Jacob 

Jac. 

Max,  Maximilian 

Mx. 

Jakob 

Jak. 

Mehitabel 

Mehit. 

James 

Ja. 

Melchior 

Mich. 

Jauo 

J.. 

Michael 

Mich. 

Jasper 

Jasp. 

Moriz 

Mor. 

Jededialf  •' 

J.-.l. 

Moses 

Mos. 

Jemima   ■ 

Jem. 

Jeremiah,  Jeremias,  Jeremy 

Jer. 

Nancy 

N.. 

Joachim 

Joac. 

Napoleon 

Nap. 

Jorl 

JI. 

Nathan 

Nat. 

Joliii,  Johauu,  Joau,  maac. 

J: 

Nathaniel 

Natl. 

Johannes 

Js. 

Nfluiuiab 

Neh. 

Jonathan 

Jona, 

Xt^ponnik 

Np. 

Joseph 

Jos. 

Nicodcmus 

Nicod. 

Joscplia 

Josa. 

Nicolas,  Nicolaus,  Nicole 

N: 

Ji>.sephiue 

Joso. 

Noah 

N... 

Joshua 

Josh. 

Norman 

Norm. 

Joszef 
Jules,  Julias 

J68Z,. 

Jul. 

Obadiah 

Ob. 

Julia 

Jla. 
Jit. 

Octavius 

Oct. 

Octavia 

Octa. 

Justin,  Justus 

Just. 

Oliver 

01. 

Olivia 

0.. 

i::>rl 

K: 

Orlando 

Orl. 

Kaspar 

Ksp. 

Oscar 

Osc. 

Kathariuo 

K.. 

Oswald 

Osw. 

Konrad 

Kour. 

Ottmar 

Ottm. 

Otto 

0: 

Laurence 

Laur. 

Patrick 

Pat. 

Lawrence 

L*Avr. 

Paul 

Pi. 

Lazarus 

Laz. 

P.. 
P: 

Leborecht,  Lebrecht 

Ll.r. 

Pauline 
*  Peter,  Pierre 

Lemuel 

Lem. 

Philip 

Ph. 

Phin. 

Pris. 

Leonard 

Leon. 

Leon hard 

Lb. 

Phiueas 
Priscilla 

L«!opold 

Lp. 

Lewis 

Lew. 

Rachel 

Rjk. 

'Louis,  Ludwig 

•    L: 

Kaimund,  Raymond 

Rmd. 

_Loniso                      f 

L.. 

Raphael 

Rapl. 

L<»begott 

LI>K'. 

Rebecca 

U.. 

Loronz 

Lor. 

Reginald 

R'g. 

^  Lot  bar 

Ltb. 

iC.Mnbard 

Kbd. 

Louisa 

L.. 

K.inbold 

Rbld. 

Ludolf 

Ldf. 

Reuben 

Reub. 

Kpk 

122 


APP.  V  :    ABBREVIATIONS. 


FOKEXAMKS— coiitimicd. 


Richard 

R: 

Titus 

Tir. 

Robert 

Rob. 

Tobias,  Tobiah 

Tob. 

Rotlolph 

Rod. 

Traugott 

Trg. 

Rofjer 
Rolaiul 

Rog. 
Rol. 

Ulrich 

U: 

Rudolf 

Rud. 

Ursula 

U.. 

Rutiis 

Ruf. 

Valentine 

Val. 

Riiport,Riii)rocht 

Riip. 

v.- it 

Vt. 

Salomon 

Sal. 

Victor 

If:      ^f^ 

Sal va tor 

Salv. 

Victoria 

v.. 

Samuel 

S: 

Viucentiiis 

Vine. 

Sarab 

S.. 

Virginia 

Virg. 

Severen 

Sev. 

Vol  k  mar 

Volkai 

Sebastian 

Seb. 

Siegfried 

Siegf. 
Sgsm. 

Waldemar 

Wald. 

Sifjismund 

Walther,  Walter 

Wa. 

Sigmund 

Sigm. 

Washiugtou 

Wash. 

Simeon,  Simou 

Sim. 

Weuzel 

Wz. 

Solomon 

Sol. 

Werner 

Wr. 

Sophia 

So. 

William,  Willem,Wilhel 

m            W: 

Stanislas 

Stan. 

Wilhelmina 

W.. 

Stephen 

Ste. 

Wiufred 

Winf. 

Susan 

Su. 

Winifred 
Woldemar 

Wiuif. 
Wold. 

Tabitha 

Tab. 

Wolfgang 

Wolfg. 

TemperanC' 
Tliaddeus 

Temp. 
Tbad. 

Xaver,  Xavier 

X: 

Theobald 

Thbd. 

Xenophon 

Xeu. 

Theodor 

Thdr. 

Xerxes 

Xerx. 

Theophilus 

Thph. 

Zacharias,  Zachary 

Zach. 

Theresa 

T.. 

Zebadiah,Zebedee 

Zeb.' 

Thomas,  Tomas 

Tomaso 

T: 

Zechariah 

Zech. 

Tiberius 

Tib. 

Zenobia 

Z.. 

Timotheus,  Timothy 

Tim. 

Zephauiah 

Zeph. 

COLON 

ABBREVIATIO 

>fS  FOR  FORENAT.IES. 

A: 

Augustus. 

A.. 

Anna. 

B: 

Beujamin. 

B. 

Beatrice. 

C: 

Charles. 

C. 

Charlotte. 

D: 

David. 

D.. 

Delia. 

E; 

Edward. 

E.. 

Elizabeth. 

F: 

Frederick. 

F.. 

Fanny. 

G: 

George. 

G.. 

Grace. 

H: 
I: 

Henry. 
Isaac. 

H.. 
I.. 

Helen. 
Isabella. 

J: 

John. 

J.. 

Jane, 

K: 

Karl. 

K.. 

Katharine. 

L: 

Louis. 

L.. 

Louise. 

M: 

Matthew. 

M.. 

Mary. 

N: 

Nicholas. 

N.. 

Nancy. 

O: 

Otto. 

0.. 

Olivia. 

P: 

Peter. 

P.. 

Pauline. 

R: 

Richard. 

R.. 

Rebecca. 

6: 

Samuel. 

S.. 

Sarah. 

AIJHKKVIATIUNS. 


123 


COLON   AHimKVlATION.S   KOK   KOKKNAMKS— COUtiuiU;d. 


T: 
V: 
V: 
W: 
X: 
Z: 


Thomas. 

Uriah. 

Victor. 

William. 

Xavier. 

ZtMias. 


T.. 
U.. 

v.. 

W.. 
Z.. 


Thert'«a. 

llrMiila. 

Victoria. 

Wilht'Iinina. 

Zcnuhiii. 


n«5rc  C:  is  nsod  both  for  Charles  and  Carlo,  H:  for  Honry,  Henri,  aud  Hi-iiirich,  and 
so  on.     Mr.  Dowey  for  groator  distiuctno-ss  advises  the  following  : 

VVIniro  :  'and  .  .  is  used  in  English  nam<^s,  use  ;  and  .  ,  for  tlm  Gorman  form,  ami  ; 
and  ,  .  for  the  French. 


KOK    IIK 

ADIMiS. 

al.ridgiT 

abr. 

pseudonym 

pselld. 

afterwards 

aftw. 

pnl)lishor 

pub. 

annotatei 

annot. 

superintendent 

enjit. 

born 

b. 

translator 

tr. 

collector 

col. 

United  States 

U.S. 

conii)any 

CO. 

venvo 

we. 

comniuntator 

comnuMit. 

wittwe 

wwo. 

compiler 

com  p. 

include  maiden   name  ol 

continuer 

contin. 

married  woman 

(   ) 

died 

d. 

include  words  or  \) 

arts  of 

department 

dept. 

words  8npplie<l. 

[   ] 

editor 

ed. 

probably,  perhaps 

T  after  a  word 

Great  Britain 

Or.  Br. 

Use  also  the  common  abbreviations  for  political,  mi 
ary  titles. 


itary,  professional,  auu  honor- 


Antiage,  Ausgabe 

FOR    IM1'KINT.>^ 

Auti.,  Ausg. 

AXI)   NOTES. 

paper 

pap. 

Baud 

Bd. 

photographs 

phol. 

Bidin's  scientific  library 

B.  S.  L. 

portrait  of  group 

por.  of  gr. 

calf 

cf. 

portrait,  portraits 

por. 

cloth 

cl. 

Roxltnrgh 

rxb. 

copyright 

c. 

sheep 

sh. 

0."  g.,  18-^2  [c  '80]. 

square 

sq. 

edited,  -ion,  -or 

ed. 

tables 

tab. 

fac-similes 

fac-sim. 

title-page 

t.-p. 

folios 

f. 

title-page  nnitilated,  wan 

group  of  portraits 

gr.  of  por. 

ing 

t.  p.  Ml.,  t.  p.  W. 

Harper's  family  library 

H.F.L. 

unbound 

unhd. 

illustrated,  -ions 

il. 

unpaged 

unp. 

leaves 

1. 

vellum 

vel. 

morocco 

mor. 

volume,  volumes 

V.  (in  the  im- 

mutilated 

mut. 

print).    VoL 

no  date  of  pub. 

u.  d. 

(in     the    ti- 

no i>hue  of  pub. 

n.  p. 

tle).' 

no  title-i)ago 

n.t.p. 

with  (before  words) 

w. 

page,  pages 

P- 

wanting  (after  worils) 

w. 

pamphlet,  pamphlets 

pam. 

la  notes  the  abbreviations  in  all  these  li 

sts  may  be  used. 

/.  «..  Vol.  1  but  2  V. 


124 


APP,  V  :    ABHRKVIATIONS. 


FOR  HOOK   TITLES. 


abridged 

abr. 

homoeopathic 

horn  05  op. 

abltreviations 

abbr.       . 

heransgegeben 

hrsg. 

account 

acct. 

I 

r-illnstrated,  -ions 

iMuS- 

additional,  -ons 

add. 

^ 

-imperfect, 

imp. 

Ainerican 

Anier.  or  Am 

_imi»roved 

impr. 

aiialyslH,  -tical 

ana!.               ' 

.  including 

iucl. 

aiionyiiioiis 

anon. 

t 

'increased 

incr. 

appended,  -ix 

app. 

t. 

-4ntorno 

int. 

aua  dem  Lateinischeu 

a.  d.  Lat. 

L* 

^introduction,  -ory 

in trod. 

born 

b. 

Italian 

Ital. 

biblical,    bibliographical 

juvenile 

juv. 

bibliotheca,  etc. 

bibl. 

Latin 

Lat. 

biographical,  -phy 

biog. 

*- 

-liltrary 

lib. 

book 

bk. 

f" 

-literary,  -ture 

lit. 

Christian 

Chr. 

medical,  -iue 

raed. 

chronological 

chron. 

memoir 

mem. 

claesical 

class. 

*■ 

miscellaneous 

misc. 

collected,    -ions,     college 

»> 

■  manuscript,  -ts 

ms.,  mss. 

colored 

col. 

^ 

^national,  natural 

nat. 

commerce,  -ial,  committee 

com. 

* 

•  new  series 

n.  s. 

compiled,  -er 

comp. 

•■ 

nonvelle 

nouv. 

concerning 

cone. 

^ 

-number, -s 

no.,  nos. 

containing,  contents,  con 

u 

oblong 

obi. 

tinned 

cont. 

1- 

preface,  -ed,  prefixed 

pref. 

copy,  copyrighted 

cop. 

• 

■  pseudonym,  -ous 

ps. 

corrected 

cor. 

i^ 

part 

pt. 

crown,  she  of  book 

cr. 

«■ 

published,  -er 

pub. 

cyclopaedia 

eye. 

t 

recensuit,  record 

rec. 

Danish         ^,v  i       , 
tiled              desy  *~ 

Dan. 

V 

relating,  relative 

rel. 

d. 

f 

report 

rept. 

department, 

dept. 

A 

'review,  revised,  -ion 

rev. 

domestic 

dom. 

Roman 

Rom. 

elementary,  -ts 

elem. 

Russian 

Rus. 

encyclopaedia 

eneyc. 

w 

siimmtlich 

saram. 

English 

Eng. 

^ 

science,  scientific 

sci. 

engraved,  -er,  -ings 

engr- 

selected,  -ions 

sel. 

enlarged 

eul. 

separate 

Sep. 

fiction 

fict. 

-t 

-series 

8.  or  ser. 

f(dios,  i.  e.,  leaves 

ff. 

V- 

small 

sm. 

Fre'^ch               f'^"f' 

fr. 

(■society 

soc. 

Fr. 

t- 

supplement,  -ary, 

-ing 

sup. 

geography 

geog. 

Swedish 

Swed. 

geology 

geol. 

theology 

theol. 

geometry 

geom. 

*■ 

tiansactious 

trans. 

German 

Germ. 

V 

.  translated,    -or. 

tracluit 

gesammelte,  gesammt 

ges. 

tradotto,  etc. 

tr. 

Geschicbte 

Ges.  or  Gesch 

> 

iibersetzt 

libers. 

grammar,  -tical 

gram. 

A 

.  und 

u. 

great 

gr- 

vocabulary 

vocab. 

Greek 

Gr.      • 

V 

.  von 

v. 

half 

hf. 

van  to  be  given  in 

full. 

historical,  -y 

hist. 

in,  contained  in 

() 

AHHKEVIATIONS. 
i-oit  lioDK  TITLES— con tiniu'd. 


words  added  to  title  [  ] 

to  and  iDcliided  in,  or  con- 
tinued — 
niatt«'r  omitted 
prolialtly,  perhaps  T 


end  of  lino  ou  title-page       | 
transition  to  anothertitlc- 

P»K«  II 

vo,  nu>,  to,  in  octavo,  duo- 
decimo, quarto  » 


125 


l-OK    I'LAIES   OF    rrni.ICATION. 

Use  first  form  on  cards.     In  accession  and  all  oflicial  records  use  shortest  form. 


Albany 

Alb. 

London 

L.  or  Load, 

Amsterdam 

Amst. 

Leyden 

Ley. 

lialtimore 

Bait. 

Leipzig 

Lpz. 

lierlin 

Ber. 

Lugduni  Batavorum 

Lug.  Bat. 

Hostcm 

B.  or  Bost. 

Milano 

Mil. 

Hraiinschweig 

Brns. 

Miinchen 

Mun. 

Cambridge 

Camb.  or  Cb.       ' 

New  Orleans 

N   O 

Chicago 

Chic,  or  Ch. 

New  York 

N.  Y 

Cincinnati 

Cin. 

Oxford 

Oxf 

Copenhagen 

Copng. 

Paris 

P.  or  Par. 

i-Minhurgh 

Ediii.  or  Ed. 

Philadelphia 

Ph.  ..1  Phil. 

England 

Eng. 

St.  Louis 

St.  L. 

Firenze 

Fir. 

St,  Petersburg 

St.  Pet.  or  St.  P 

F>ance 

Fr. 

San  Francisco 

San  Fran,  or  S  F 

(iermany 

Germ. 

Stuttgart 

Stut. 

(tla.sgow 

Glasg.  or  Gl. 

Torino    • 

Tor. 

(Jotinga 

Got. 

United  States 

U.S. 

Gottingen 

Got. 

Venice 

Vcn.  nr^. 

Kjohenhavn 

Kjob. 

Washington 

"W.  or  "Wash. 

Also  the  common 

abbreviations  for  the 

States.     Use  for  all 

anguages  when  the 

equivalent  name  contains  these  letters. 


TITLES,    .STATES,  ETC. 


bachelor  of  arts 

A.  B. 

baronet 

bart. 

archbishoj) 

abp. 

before  Christ 

B    C. 

year  of  our  Lord 

A.  D. 

bi.shop 

bp. 

adjutant 

adjt. 

brigadier  general 

brig,  gen 

admiral 

adm. 

California 

Calif. 

Alabama 

Ala. 

captain 

capt. 

Master  of  Arts 

A.  M. 

Colorado 

Col. 

American 

Am.  orAmer. 

Confederate      Stat 

es       « 

.f 

a.s.sociate    of    the     R 

lyal 

America  or  C.  S. 

army 

C.  S.  A. 

Academy 

A.  R.  A. 

C.  S.  navy 

C.  S.  N. 

attorney 

atty. 

Connecticut 

Ct. 

bachelor  of  arts 

B.  A. 

F.       Mr.       Ap.       My.       .1-.       J|.       Ag.       P.       <\       N.       D. 


Su.      M.       Tu.       W.       Th.       F.       St. 


126 


APP. 

VI:    OTHER 

CATALOGUES. 

SIZE 

NOTATION. 

Fold  siimbol. 

Si 

:c  letter. 

Outside  height. 

ver  ns<i  for  size, 

Never 

iis«  for  fold. 

In  centi  meters. 

•IS" 

Fi^ 

Up 

fo  10 

:!-j" 

Tt 

10 

"  12.5 

iil" 

T 

12.5 

"  15. 

l(i" 

S 

15 

"  17.5 

12<> 

D 

17.5 

"  20 

8° 

0 

20 

"  25 

40 

Q 

25 

"  30 

fo 

F 
F^ 
F* 

30 
35 
40 

"  35 
"  40 
"  50 

Prefix  nar.  if  width  is  less  than  ^  height. 

"      aq.  "  more  "     J       ** 

"      ob.  "  more  than  height. 

For  all  books  over  35<^™  high  the  superior  figures  show  in  which  10''™  of  height  the 
book  falls,  e.  g.,  F®  is  between  70  and  80^"'  high. 

Actual  size  method. 

Give  all  sizes  in  cm  (for  greater  accuracy  adding  decimals),  leaving  the  old  symbols 
and  names,  8°  and  Octavo  to  indicate  fold  only.  Give  height  first,  followed  by  h.  or 
by  X  and  width,  e.  g.,  23'>  or  23x14.  23'>  means  between  22  and  23,  i.  e.,  in  23'*  cm. 
AH  measures  are  taken  outside  the  cover.  Width  is  from  hinge  to  edge  not  including 
the  round.  To  measure  paper  or  letter-press,  prefix  p(aper)  or  t(ype)  to  figures,  in- 
cluding in  type  neither  folio  nor  signature  lines. 


APPENDIX  VI 

So  far  we  have  been  cousideriosr  only  the  catalogue  by  which  the 
library  commuuicates  with  the  public;  but  a  librarian  needs  several 
others  for  library  service:  (1)  The  Catalogue  of  books  ordered  ;  (2)  Tbe 
Accessions  catalogue;  (3)  The  Periodical- aud  continuation- book ;  (4) 
The  Shelf-list ;  (5)  The  Catalogue  of  books  missing;  (6)  The  Tract-cata- 
logue ;  (7)  The  Catalogue  of  duplicates  to  be  sold  ;  (8)  The  Catalogue  of 
duplicates  sold  or  exchanged. 

(2)  and  (8)  are  necessary  for  the  preservation  of  the  history  of  the 
library  aud  important  in  its  financial  management. 

(())  is  a  modification  of  (5).  It  is  a  list  of  the  tracts  contained  in  bound 
volumes,  by  which  the  abstraction  of  any  particular  tract  can  be  ascer- 
tained, or  the  extent  of  the  loss  if  the  whole  volume  disappears.  All  this 
miglit  be  entered  on  the  shelf-list,  but  it  is  more  convenient  to  keep  the 
record  of  the  tract-vobimes  together^^ometimes  part  of  a  tract-list  is 
inserted  in  the  public  catalogue.  Y^^ay  see  collections  of  pamphlets 
on  various  subjects  by  various  authorffecorded  under  a  made-up  bead- 
ing Tracts,  or  Pamphlets,  a  style  of  entry  that  is  nearly  useless.  The 
whole  of  the  Prince  cat^ilogue  of  1846  was  made  in  this  absurd  way.  A 
number  of  tracts  by  a  single  author  may  indeed  for  economy  be  cata- 
logued under  him  in  one  mass  like  a  "contents,"  and  the  same  may  be 


OTIIKK    CATALOGUES.  127 

doiH'  for  tracts  on  a  sinfxle  subject,  tlioujjh  there  are  objections  ovi'n  to 
tliis;  but  tocataloyiic  tlic  \vritiii;;s  of  sfvoral  antliors  under  an  arbitraiy 
hea(liiig(as  Plays, Speeches, French  Revolutiou).  [»>  wliicli  references  iiu-rely 
are  made  under  the  authors,  is  to  l»e  ('eonoinieal  at  alto^^ether  too  ;xreat 
an  expense  of  trouble  to  the  public, — to  say  nothiuj?  of  the  inconj,Muity 
of  a  form  or  subject  headinj;  for  an  author-entry. 

(4),  the  shelf-list,  oujjht  to  be  so  made  {a)  tiiat  the  entry  of  each  book 
in  the  catalo;;ue  can  be  readily  found  from  it;  (b)  that  the  book  can  be 
readily  identihe<l  with  the  entry  on  the  shelf-list;  (r)  that  at  theannnai 
examination  or  taking  account  of  stock  the  shelf-reader  shall  know  at 
once  what  book  is  meant  as  each  title  is  read  by  the  list-reader.  For 
these  reasons  the  list  should  contain  the  author's  name  (or  tirst  word, 
etc.,  if  the  book  is  anonymous),  part  of  the  real  title,  the  binder's  title 
(whi(;h  will  generally  be  the  same  as  the  real),  ami  the  place  and  date 
of  printing.  If  the  author's  name,  or  any  part  of  the  title,  is  not  on  the 
back  of  the  book  it  shouUl  be  inclosed  in  parentheses. 

Er.  Appuleius.     Mt't.imorpboseH,  tr.  Hc;ul.     L.  l-T)!.  1 

(Kt'iiiliardt      Artist's  JDuriioy.)  liost.  If^T'i.     1 

A  briefer  shelf  list  can  be  made  by  merely  entering  the  book's  number 
and  the  accessions  number,  so  that  the  full  title  can  be  found  if  needed 
by  referring  to  the  accessions-book. 

(2),  (3),  and  (8)  are  best  kept  in  books  ;  (4)  and  ((>)  on  separate  sheets 
of  pai)er;  (1).  (5),  and  (7)  on  cards.  When  the  catalogue  is  kept  on 
cards  (5)  can  be  made  by  merely  separating  the  cards  of  such  books  as 
are  missing. 

(1).  After  some  experiments  I  have  preferred  the  following  method  of 
keeping  the  order-list.  The  titles  of  books  projwsed  for  purchase  are 
type  written  on  ruled  slii)s  of  stiti'  paper  12i  cm.  long  by  .">  cm.  wide.  If 
approved  by  the  committee  a  check  is  made  at  the  left  of  the  title.  A 
searcher  then  ascertains  whether  the  library  already  has  the  book ;  if  it 
has,  the  card  is  destroyed  or  sent  with  this  information  to  the  person 
who  asked  for  the  book;  if  not,  the  searcher  puts  her  initials  and  the 
date  in  the  lower  left-hand  corner.  The  cards  are  then  sorted  into  par- 
cels for  the  English,  French,  or  German  agents;  and  an  order  is  written, 
the  writer  first  making  sure,  by  looking  among  the  cards  of  previous 
orders,  that  none  of  the  books  has  already  been  sent  for.  In  the  order 
a  running  number  is  given  to  each  title  and  a  corresponding  number  is 
put  on  the  card. 

The  name  of  the  author  is  entered  in  a  book  opposite  the  running 
nund)er,  and  the  date  is  ])ur  there  against  the  first  number  of  each  order.* 
The  cards  are  then  all  staniped  on  the  h'ft  with  the  date,  and  put  away 
in  a  drawer  alphabetically  with  other  cards  of  books  onlere<l.     When  a 

•.In.   1.  \<:>.    MOT  IJhick. 

IVM  Haiiiiiiond. 
UWGronville. 
1500  Sauiptwiii. 


128  APP,  VII:    AIDS    IN    CATALOGUING. 

box  of  books  comes,  tbe  correspondiug  cards  are  picked  out  and  stamped 
on  tbe  rij;bt  witb  tbe  date.  Tbey  receive  tbe  accessions -number  wben 
tbe  books  are  entered  on  tbe  accessions-catalogue,  tbe  cbiss-number 
wJKMi  tbe  books  are  pbiced,  and  are  corrected  wben  tbe  books  are  cata- 
lojiued;  lor,  baving  usually  been  written  from  advertisements,  tbese 
cards  are  often  incorrect.  Wben  a  number  bave  accumulated  tbey  are 
sorted  in  tbe  order  of  class-numbers  and  tbe  entry  on  tbe  class-cata- 
logue is  made  from  tbem.  Tliey  are  tlien  put  away  ali)babetically  in 
drawers  accessible  only  to  tbe  library-attendants,  and  form  tbe  index  of 
tbe  accessions-book.  Wben  a  duplicate  volume  is  exchanged  or  sold 
tbe  date,  its  price,  and  receiver  are  noted  on  tbe  order  card. 

Tbe  system  is  economical.  One  card  serves  many  purposes  and  with 
little  writing  answers  all  tbe  questions  likely  to  come  up:  Has  this 
book  been  proposed  to  tbe  Book  Committee'?  (Books  rejected  are  kept 
in  a  separate  drawer.)  Has  it  been  approved?  Ordered?  Wben? 
From  whom?  Who  is  responsible  for  tbe  error  if  it  turns  out  a  dupli- 
cate? When  was  it  received?  Where  is  it  entered  in  the  Accessions- 
catalogue  (that  we  may  ascertain  its  price  and  condition)  ?  Where  was 
it  first  located?  If  any  one  of  tbe  questions  is  not  to  be  asked  then 
tbe  corresponding  process  can  be  dispensed  with.  Tbe  list,  of  which  an 
example  is  given  in  the  note  below,  is  not  necessary  but  convenient. 

[Specimen.] 

Darwin,  Charles. 
IXHZ  Coral  reefs.     2d  ed.     London,  1874.     8". 

.  d3.5 
[On  tbe  back  of  tbe  card  is] 

•2915  [tbe  order  No.]  [Stamp,  witb  date  of  order.]  [Stamp,  w^itb  date  of  re- 
ceipt.]       39625  [tbe  accession  No,] 


APPENDIX  VII. 

SOME  WORKS  OF  KEFEEENCE. 

I  have  set  down  here  chiefly  those  works  which  I  find  to  be  of  con- 
stant use  in  cataloguing.  One  occasionally  needs  many  more,  even  for 
a  short  investigation.  A  complete  and  systematic  view  of  bibliograph- 
ical literature  is  given  in  Petzholdt's  "Bibliotheca  bibliographica. 
Leipzig,  18t)6,"  and  many  of  the  more  modern  works  may  be  found  in 
Vallee's  Biblioe:raphie  des  bibliographies,  Paris,  1883,  aud  supplement, 
1887.  Powers'  "Handy-book  about  books.  London,  1870,"  contains  a 
useful  list,  which  is  reprinted,  with  additions,  in  Sabin's  "American 
bibliopolist "  C:  H.  Hull's  "Help's  for  cataloguers  in  finding  full 
names"  in  the  Library  journal,  Jan.,  1889,  gives  an  excellent  classified 
list  with  descriptive  notes. 


AIDS    IN    CArAlJXJriNT,.  129 

Balliiorn.     Griiminiito<;r;ii)li,v.     Loud.,  ISOl.     ().     7.v.  6^/. 
Brunet.     Manuel.     5^'   cd.     I'iuis,    ISIJO-Uf).     (>  v.     ().     lliO  /r.,    and 
Supplement.     Par  Desc^liamps  et  Brunet.     Paris,  1S7H-.S0. 
L»  V.     (). 
HcKFER.     Nouvelle  bio-jraphie  ^'ciuTale.      Paris.   IS.IJ-OG.      10  v.     (>, 

184 /r. 
HoKNE.     Iritrod.  to  bibliography.     Lond.,  ISli.    2  v.    (>.    Antiq.l^.n. 
JoECiIER.      All{,'ciu.    Gelehrteii-Lexikon.      L|>z.,   l.S.lO-.'il,      4    v.,    (^., 

and  Fortsetzung.    Bremen,  1784-1810.    6  v.    Q.    Anti(j. 

40./?. 
Larousse.     Dictionnaire  nniversel.    Paris,  1SGG-S9.    15  v,  ami  2  siippl. 

().     (535 /r. 
Men  of  the  time.     12tli  ed.     Lond.,  1887.     D.     15«. 
MiCHAELis.     Vergleicbendes  VVorterbucb  der  gebniuchliclisten  Tauf- 

namen.     Berl.,  185G.     O.     15  Ngr. 
Oettinoer.     Moniteur  des  dates.      Dresde,   18GG-G8.      6  v.     Q.     .{5 

Thlr.     Supplement.     Lpz.,  1873-82.     3  v.     Q      !)(►  .][. 
RosSE.     Index  of  dates.     Lond.,  Bohn,  1858.     2  v.     O.     $2.50. 
Sanders.     Celebrities  of  the  Century.     Lond.,  1887.    O.    21.s. 
Thomas.     Universal  diet,  of  biography  an«l  mythology.     Phila.,  1870. 

2  V.     O.     $22,  or  1  V.  $15. 
ToWNSEND.     Manual  of  dates.     5tli  ed.     Loud.,  1877.     O.     18«. 
Vapereau.    Diet,  des  contemporains.    S**  6d.    Paris,  1880.    O.    '25  fr. 

Tht»  catalogues  of  the  follo\viii<j  lihraries:  Advocatp:s',  Astok,  Boston  Athe- 
naeum, liiUTisii  MusKUM,  Peahody  INSTITUTE  (Baltimore),  are  tbo  most  usi-lul. 

AMERICAN. 

Allibone.    Diet,  of  Eug.  literature.    Phila.,  1858-71.   3  v.    O.    m22.50. 
CrsiiiNG.     Anonyms.     Camb.,  1889.    2  pts.  |A-MainJ.     O. 
CrsHiNG.     Initials  find  pseudonyms.     N.  Y.,  1885.     O.,  and  2d  series. 

N.  Y.,  1888.     O. 
Dkake.     Diet,  of  Amer.  biog.     Rev.  ed.     Bost.,  1875.     ().     ^(',. 
IIarrisse.     Biblioth.  Amer.  vetustissima;  works  rel.  to  Amer.  pub. 

1402-1551.     N.  Y.,  18GG.     O.     $20. 
Leypoldt.     American  catalogue;  books  in  print  July  1,  1S7G.     N.  Y., 

1880-81.     2  V.     F.  —  187G-84.     N.  Y.,1 885.     2  v.     F. 
Sabin      Diet,  of  books  rel.  to  Amer.     N.  Y.,  18C8,  etc.     Q.     $5  per  vol. 
Bprague.     Annals  of  the  American  pulpit.     N.  Y.,  18.17-GO.   9  v.    (). 

$3G. 
Thomas.     History  of  printing  in  America.    2d  ed.    Albany,  IS74.   2  v. 

O."    $8. 

The  rollowiii;^  may  soiurtiint's  Ixj  of  iiso :   Ro.titit  veil's  BiMioth.  Amor..   lHJO-61. 
4  V,     O..  and  Kkli.y's  Amer.  catalo);iU',  l-iil-Tl.     N.  Y.,  Hi".)'.-?!.     2  v.     0;ainlfhe 
general  fatalo^ue.s  of  cilleges, 
4892  LI 9 


130  APP.   VII:    AIDS    IX    CATALOGUING. 

ANONYMS  AND  PSEUDONYMS. 

The  most  useful  books  are  nieiitioned  under  their  respective  hiu. 
pua^^es,  American  (Cusiiing),  Hu^^lish  (IIalkktt  and  Laing),  French 
(lUuiHER  and  (Juekahd).  A  list  of  new  <liscoveries  is  published  each 
month  in  the  Library  Journal. 

ART. 

Meyer.       AUgemeines    Kiinstler-Lexikon.       2.    Aufl.    vou    Xagler's 

Kiinstler-Lexikon.     l.-o.  Bd. :   A-Bez.     Lpz.,  1872-85. 

O. 
Nagler.     Die  Monogrammisteu.    Miincheu,  1858-79.     5  v.     O. 
Pollen.     Universal  catal.  of  books  on  art.     Lond.,  18C8-77.     2  v.  and 

supi)l.     sq.     O.     29s. 
Thies.    Catalogue  of  the  engravings  bequeathed  to  Harvard  College 

by  F.C.Gray.     Camb.,  18(J9.     Q. 

BELGIAN. 

Brussels.    Acad.  Roy.  de  Belgique.    Biographie  uatiouale  [A-H]. 
Brux.,  186G-87.     9  v.     O. 

DANISH. 

Bricka.     Dansk.  biog.    Lex.     1.     Bind  [A-BeaJ.    Kopenh.,  1887.    O. 

BOTANY. 

Paxton.    Botanical  dictionary.    Xew  ed.    Loudon,  1868.    O.    25s. 

DUTCH. 

KoBVS  and  Rivecourt.     Biog.  hand woordenboek.    Zutphen,  1854-61. 
3  V.    O.    About  $1. 

Convenient;  for  fuller  details  use 

Aa.    Biog.  woordenboek.     Haarlem,  1852-78.    21  v.     O. 

ENGLISH. 

Allibone.    Diet,  of  Eug.  literature.   Phila.,  1858-71.   3  v.   O.   $22.50. 

A  continuation  is  in  preparation. 

Burke.    Dormant  and  extinct  peerages.     New  ed.     Lond.,  1866.    O. 

42s. 
Burke.    Landed  gentry.    7th  ed.    Lond,  1886.    2  v,    O. 
Burke.     Peerage  and  baronetage.    51st  ed.     Lond.,  1888.     O.    38*. 
Collier.     Bibliog.  account  of  the  rarest  works  in  English.     Loud., 

1868.     2  V.     O.,  or  N.  Y.,  1868.    2  v.     O.     $16. 
Darling.    Cycloi)ajdia  bibliog. :  Authors.     Loud.,  1854.    O.    52s.  6d. 

Chielly  English  theol.  works. 


AIDS    IN    CATALOGUING.  131 

• 

DovLE.     Official  barouajje  of  England.     Loiul,  188G.     O.     8".     U)r,s. 

IJalkett  and  Laing.  Diet,  of  the  anon,  and  pscudon.  lit.  of  (ir.  Brit- 
ain.    Ediii.,  18S2-S8.     4  v.     O.     I(i8«. 

Haydn.     Book  of  dignities.     Lond.,  IS51.    O.    25«. 

Lowndes.  BiUliog.  manual  of  Enj;.  literature.  New  ed.,  fiil.  1>\  II.  (1. 
Bohn.     Lond.,  1857-(;t.     (i  v.     1).     'MU. 

Nicolas.     Uistoric  peerage.     Lond.,  18.">7.    ().    3(>.s. 

Stephen.  Diet,  of  national  biograpUj-.  Vol.  1 — 20:  A — (lariier. 
Lond.,  1885-89.     20  v.     O. 

Thomas.  Handbook  of  fictitious  names;  by  Olphar  Ilainst  [pseud.]. 
Lond.,  1808.     O.     7s.  Gil. 

Walford.    County  fiimilies.     New  ed.     Lond.,  1888.    O.    .")0s. 

Ward.     Men  of  the  reign.     Lond.,  1885.     1).     15.v. 

Watt.     Bibliotheca  Britannica.    Edin.,  1824.    4  v.    Q.    Anti<j.   CJl-lv. 

The  foUowiujj;  may  sometimes  be  of  use:  Low's  EukHhIi  ciit;ilo>;iie,  l'i.]o-40. 
Loud.,  18(54-8-2.*  3  v.  O.  117«.,  ami  Low's  [Subject]  index  to  the  British  cata- 
logue, 18:)7-80.     Loud.,  1858-84.     3  v.     O.     8(58. 

Crockford's  Clerical  directory,  the  Medical  directory  of  Great  Britaiu,  the  Army 
list,  aud  similar  registers  aftbrd  assistance. 

FRENCH. 

Bakbier.     Ouvrages  anonymes.      3«  ed.     Paris,  1872-79.     4  v.     O. 

GO/r. 
LoRENZ.     Catal.  g«§u.  de  la  Iil)rairie  frangaise,  depuis  1840.      Paris, 

l8()7-88.     11  V.     O.     330 /r. 
PoTiQUET.     L'Institut  National  de  France.     Paris,  1871.     O.     8 /V. 
QuEKARD.     La  France  litteraire.     Paris,  1827-39.     10  v.     O.     120 /r. 
QuERARD.     Supercheries  litteraires.     2«  ^d.     Paris,  1869-70.    3  v.     O. 

60, /v. 
QuERARD  and  others.    La  litterature  fran^aise  coutemporaiue.     Paris, 

1842-57.     6v.     O.     96 /r. 

GEOGRAPBTSr. 

Thomas  flHfZ  Baldwin.  Lippincott's  gazetteer.  New  ed.  Phila.,  1882, 
1.  U.     S12. 

GERMAN. 

Heinsius.  Allgem.  Biicher-Lexikon  ;  Yerzeichniss  aller  von  1700  bis 
1879  erschienenen  Biicher.     Lpz.,  1812-82.     16  v.     Q. 

Kay.ser.  Vollstiind.  Biicher-Lexikon,  1750-1886.  Lpz.,  1834-87. 
24  V.     (}.     About  860,  but  now  reduced  to  140  marks. 

The  foUowiug  are  also  often  u.seful  The  Brookhaus'  KoiivorHAt  ions- Lex  ikon,  13. 
Aud.,  Lpz.,  1882,  etc. ;  Pierer's  llniversal-Lexikon  ;  the  .Vllgomeino  dontH«;he  Bio- 
graphie,  Lpz.,  IST-V-^-^O,  which  has  reached  \l  in  itH'>th  vol.;  Zedler'nGnMW«  vollHt. 
Univ.-Lex.  173J-r>4,  (;8  v.  P*  (for  17th  ami  Ir^tli  century  writers);  ami  Wurzbach's 
Biog.  Lexikou  des  Kaiserihums  Oesterreicli.     Wi.ti.  I -.'.»'►--( ;.     .M  \ .     (). 


132  APP.  VII :    AIDS    1\    CATALOGUING. 

GREEK  AND  ROMAN. 

Smith.  Diet,  of  Gr.  aud  Rom.  biography  ami  mythology.  Lond.,  1849. 
3  V.     O.     115s.  6d.,  or  Bosl.  $30. 

For  subject-cataloguing,  the  Dictionary  of  the  Hible,  the  Diet,  of  Greek  and 
Roiiiiin  antiquities,  aud  the  Diet,  of  Greek  and  liouuin  geography  are  of  prime 
iiii]t()rtance. 

HEBREW. 

British  Museum.    Catal.  of  Hebr.  books.    Lond.,  1867.    O.    25«. 
FUEKST.     Biblioth.  Judaica.     Lpz.,  1 849-03.     3  v.     O.     14  Thlr. 

INCUNABULA. 

Berjeau.     Early  German,  Dutch,  and  Euglishi   inters' marks.    Loud., 

1866.     O.     10.9.  6d. 
Hain.     Repertorium  bibliogr.     Stiittg.,  1826-38.    2  v.     O.    20  Thlr. 
Panzee.    Annales  typogr.,  1457-1530.    Norimb.,  1793-1803.    11  v.    Q. 

Antiq.  42  Thlr. 

ITALIAN. 

GUBERNATIS.     Diziouario  biog.  degii  scrittori  contemp.     Firenze,  1879. 

1.  O. 
Melzi.     Diz.  di  opere  anon,  e  pseud.    Milano,  1848-59.    3  v.    O.    30 /r. 
TiRABOSCHi.     Storia  della  lit.  ital.     Mihiiio,  1822-26.     16  v.     O. 

LANGUAGE,  PHILOLOGY. 

EoKSTBiN.     Nomeuclator  philologicus.     Lpz.,  1871.     S. 
Vater.     Litteratur  der  Grammatiken,  Lexika,  u.s.w.    2.  Aufl.     Berl., 
1847.     O.     3  Thlr. 

LAW. 

BouviEE.     Law  dictionary.    15th  ed.    Phila.,  1884.    2  v.     O. 

MEDIiBVAL. 

Chassant.  Diet,  des  abreviations  lat.  et  frangaises.  3®  ed.  Paris, 
186'3.    D.    6fr. 

Chevalier,  G.  U.  J.  Rooertoire  des  sources  hist,  du  Moyen  Age. 
Paris,  187 i  -86.     O.,  and  SuppL,  1888.     >  -. 

Franklin,  A.  Diet,  des  noms,  surnoms,  et  pseudonymes  latins,  1100- 
1530.     Paris,  1875.     O.     10  fr. 

Graesse.  Orbis  Latinus;  Verzeichniss  d.  latein.  Benennungen  der 
Stiidte,  u.s.ic.    Dresden,  1861.    O.     1^  Thlr. 

PoTTHAST.  Biblioth.  historica  Medii  Aevi.  .Berlin,  1862.  O.,  and  sup- 
plement, 1868.     O.     9  Thlr. 

MEDICINE. 

DUNGLISON.     Medical  lexicon.     N.  Y.,  1873.     O.     $6.50. 
U.  S.  Surgeon-General.      Index-catalogue    of   the  library.     Vol. 
1-10:  A-Pfeutsch.     Wash.,  1880-89.     10  v.     1.  O. 


AIDS    IN  CM  ALOGIING.  133 

MUSICIANS. 

F^TIS.     Biofjj.  univ.  (les  miisiciciis.     L'"  ('d.  iiii<,Mii.     I'uris,  ISJJO-O").     8  v. 

O.     e4/V.     Supplriuciit.      I»;iris,  1S7S-S().     L'  v.      (). 
(iRovE.     Diet,  of  music  aiul   luusicians.     Limd.  and  N.   Y.,  1.S70-S7. 

4  V.     O. 
Mendel.     Musikaliscbes  Conversations-Lexikon   tort;,',  von  A:   KciHs- 

man.     2e   Aus^j.     liorl..   1880-82,    11  v.  (>,  and   Kr^^an- 

zungsband.    Bcil.,  1883.    O. 

PORTUGUESE. 

Barr().SA  INIACIIADO.     Bihliotlieca  lusitana.    Lisboa,  1741-.'iO.    4  v.    F. 
SiLVA.     Die.  biblio;'.  portuguez.     Lisl)oa,  1858-02.     7  v.,  and  Supi)l. 
1867-70.     2  V.     O. 

QUAKERS. 

Rmitii.     Bibliotb.  anti-Quakorana.     Loud.,  187.{.     O.     15.V. 
Smith.    Deacr.  eatal.  of  Friends'  books.     Lond.,  1867.    2  v.     O. 

SCIENCE. 

POGOENDORF.  Biog.-ljtorar.  llandwiirterbueh  zur  Gi'sch.  d.  exactcn 
Wissensebaftcn.    Lpz.,  1863.    2  v.    O.    UYf^  Thh: 

Royal  Society  of  London.  Catal.  of  seientitie  papers.  lso(»-(;3. 
Loud.,  1867-72.     6  v.     Q.     £6. 

SPANISH. 

Antonio.    Bibliotbeca  Hispana  vetu.s,  ad  a.  C.  md.    Matriti,  1788.    2  v. 

F.     Antiq  40  A  rA)/r. 
Antonio.     Same.     Bibliotbeca    Hi.spaiia    nova;    1.~>()0-1 6SL     Matriti, 

178.3-88.  2  V.    F.    Antiq.  40  ;\  50//-. 
Barrera.     Catal.  bibliog.  y  biog.  del  teatro  ant.  e.sp.  ba.sta  mumI.  del 

siglo  18.     Madrid,  1860.     1.  O. 
Boston  Public  Liurauy.    Catalogue  of  tbe  Spani.sb  an<i  Portuguese 

books  beqneatbed  by  G.  Ticknor;    by  J.  L.  Wbitney. 

Boston,  187!).     Q.  ;   , 

Latassa  Y  Or'I'IN.     Bibl.  ant.  de  los  escritores  aragonest'S.    Zarag«)za, 

1796.     2v.     Q. 
Latassa  y   Ortin.     Bib.  nova,   l.")00-[]S()2].     Panii>li»iia,    17!»S-1802. 

6v.    Q. 
TiOKNOR.     Hist,  of  Span.  lit.     4tli  <m1.     P.ost.,  1872,     3  v.     1.  O,     $10. 

^VOMBN. 

Hale.    Woman's  reeord.     N.  Y.,  18r>3.     1.  ().     $.1., 


N.  li. — All  INDEX,  ill  wliich  the  foregoing  riitcH  nn- ^iveiiiii  full  in  nil  alpliabctical 
irraii<i»'nn'nt,  is  in  pifpanitioii. 


ALPHABETICAL  INDEX. 


A'.Ap.     See  Prcllxes. 

A.  pp.  103, 1(V1,  l'>7. 

AbboH.ICzrft,  p.r?. 

AbbreviHtionH,fi  150,  18(1.  pp.  10.1,107, 

liBtof,  pp.  11H-111>. 

ftrranKenie'lt  of,  'i  239, 

Abri.Ipmon*,  J?  15()-lfiO,  p.  101. 

Acftilemles,  i  50. 

Accents,  ?  208. 

Acce8sioi\8  book,  pp.  120, 127, 128. 

Acts  of  legislntive  bodies,  ?  -11. 

Adaptations.    Sec  Kpitomess. 

Additions,  p.  101. 

Admiralty  proceedingrs,  p.  100. 

African  names,  p.  109. 

Almanacs,  fi,  7.3, 109. 

Alplial)etinK,  pp.  Kfi.lOO. 

.T:  Rdmands's  rules  for,  p.  110. 

Alplialwts.p.  107. 

Alternative  titles.  j;3  161, 2a5. 

Alumni.     Sre  ColleBes. 

.\mbiguity,  p.  104. 

American,  used  for  U.S., p. 5-1. 

.\meriean  Library  Assoc,  catalog  rules,  p.  99. 

.\meriean  reference  books,  p.  129. 

Analytical  reference'*.  J  20.3;  p.  1-1. 

when  to  l)e  made,  §3  05, 110, 12.5-128, 104. 

arrangement  of,  i,  218. 

date  of,  i  194. 

Annuals,^  73. 

Anonymous,  defined,  p.  9. 

Anonymous  biographies,  subject-woril  entry  for, 

i  87. 
Anonymous  works,  g3  2, 55, 0.8-72, 86  a,  87, 88a,  171)- 
173,  p.  103, 

author's  name  in  title  entry  of,  i,  173. 

changed  titles  of,  i,  82,  83. 

forming  parts  of  others,  3  71. 

when  considered  so,  p.  101. 

reference  books  for,  p.  130. 

Anthologies.    .Ve?  Collections,  form  entry. 

Apocrypha,  p.  100. 

Appended,  5  195. 

Apprentices'  Library,  N.  Y.,  p.  3. 

Arahiinumeral9,??I17,187.19l.vp.  103, 107. 

Arabic  writers,  19  e. 

transliteration  of  Arabic  names,  3  .3fl. 

Arrangement,  i  2I.3-2.5S,  pp.  Ir>3, 100. 
Art,  refcrenee  IxMiks  on,  p.  I.3li. 
Articles.  5^  76,  151,  1.52. 

place  of,  when  transposed,?  170. 

not  noticed  in  arrangement,  ;j  211,  p.  117. 

".\rticles  to  \>e  inquirol  of,"  i.  17. 


A.s.semblies,  §3  52,  .5.3. 

.\s8ociation».  ;50. 

Asterisks,  p.  105. 

Asyndetic,  defined,  p.  9, 

.\ttributed  books,  i  2. 

Auctioiicers,  ^  10. 

y\uthordefine<l,p.9. 

Author  entry,  p.  12.??  1-67, 120  c. 

.\uthor  nume,  arrangement  of  works  under,  p, 

103. 

when  omitted,  p.  llM. 

Authors  having  the  sutne  name,  how  to  dialin- 

guish,5.i;.  139. 1 II.  p.  101. 
uncertain,  i  -. 

Hanks,  ?  50  e. 

Raronet, title,?  111. 

Belgian  reference  books,  p.  1.30. 

Renevolent  societies,  3  56. 

Bible,?08.pp.liHM0.5. 

arrangement  of  titles  \mdcr,  ?  252, 

Biblical  names,  p.  108. 

Bibliographies,  p.  106. 

Bibliography,?  116. 

Binder's  title,  p.  U. 

Biographical  reference  from  fiction,? 87. 

Biographies, economy  in  entry  of,?  67. 

anonymous,  ?g  08,87. 

of  kings. etc.,?  91. 

In  collected  works,  126  d. 

arrangement  of,  ?  2-16,  p.  106. 

when  separated  from  criticisms,?? 216, 347, 

Bishops,  entry  of,  i  20  h. 

charges.  ?  17. 

Bodleian  Library, catalog  rules,  p.  lOJ. 

Book  sizes,  A.  L.  .\.  committee  on,  p.  115. 

Booksellers,  ?  10. 

Boston  Athenieum,  p.  7. 

lioston  Mercantile  Library,  p.  7. 

Itoston  I'ublic  Library,  p.  7. 

Botany,  reference  books  on,  p.  1.30. 

Brackets,??  165, 166,171-173,  2ii9,  210,  pp.  102,  108, 

1(VI.  107. 
Breviaries,  ?51,  p.  105. 
British  Museum,  p.  3. 
British  nobleuieu,  J2I- 
BuiMings,  J56o. 
Bureaus.    See  (tovcrnmcnt  publlcalions. 

Calendars  of  documents,  J  1.3. 
t'anoiisomit  forennines,  520 '>. 
Canonized  iMsrsona.     5m  .SAint*. 
Capes,  i  29. 

135 


13G 


ALPHABETICAL   INDEX. 


Capilftls.  ii.  2ft'>.  206,  pp.  101,  104. 

ill  (Jcniian,  p.  107. 

raption.  p.  I  J. 

Oirdiiiiils.     See  Ecclcs.  (linnitaries. 

('artoKr«pluT8,  ?  8. 

("uses,  oblique,  in  titles,  i  so. 

CntaloR  of  ftcoessions.  books  onlered,  missing, 

etcpp.  12r,,127. 
Cntnlojj  rules,  Amer.  Lib.  Assoc.,  p.  99. 

Bodleiiin  Library,  p.  \M. 

English  Lib.  Assoc,  p.  103. 

Mr.  Dewey's,  p.  107. 

CatuIoKJUK.  list  of  books  useful  in,  pp.  128-1.33. 
Catnlo-rs,  p.  105. 

how  entered,??  10,  11.  39. 

table  of  (Uflerent  kinds  of,  pp.  11, 12. 

Catch-word  entry,  p.  13. 

reference,  p.  14,  ??  86, 89. 

Catechisms,  g.'Sl. 

Cathedrals.    .See  Churches. 

Centimeters,  size  of  book  in,  pp.  102   115. 

Century,  not  given  in  early  books,  ?  18.5. 

ChanRcd  names,  ??22,60. 

Changed  titles  of  anonymous  works,  ??82,83. 

Charges,  episcopal,  ?47. 

Chrestomathies,  gl6. 

Christian  name,    f^ee  Forename. 

Chronograms,  ?  187. 

Chronological  arrangement  of  subjects,  g256. 

Church  of  England,  p.  105. 

Churches.  ??51.56. 

Cities,  MO,  pp.  99,107. 

cross-references  from,  ?119. 

Civil  actions,  ?114,  p.  100. 
Class,  defined,  p.  9. 

itsrelation  to  subject,  p.  11. 

Class  entry,  p.  11. 
Classed  oataloss.  pp.  11,12. 
Classes  of  citizens,  ?55. 

of  persons,  cross-refs.  from,  ?  119. 

Chissieal  names,  ??36.226,  p.  108. 
Cl.issifioation,  pp.  3.  9-12.  ?118. 
Collections.  ??.59,68,  p.  101. 

arrangement  of,  ?  149. 

form  entry  for,  ?  122. 

subject  entry  for,  ?92. 

of  an  author's  woi-ks,  arrangement  of,  p. 

106. 
Collective  titles,  ? 59  c. 
Collectors.  ?  59. 
College  societies,  §  56. 
Colleges,  ?. 56. 
Colon  names,  p.  122. 
Colophon,?  184. 

Columbia  College  catalog  rules,  p.  107. 
Commentaries,  ??  12, 60,  pp.  99, 105 ; 

arrangement  of,  p.  106. 

Commentators,  pp.  103, 10.5. 

Comments.?  115. 

Committees  and  commissions,  ?  54. 

Compilers.    .See  Editors. 

Composers  of  music,  ?  9.  o.  105. 

Compound  entries.??  106,  i07. 

Compound  names,  ??  23,  60,  106,  107,  227-232,  pp. 

101,10.5. 
Compound  subject-names,  inversion  of,?  107. 
Compound  words,  arrangement  of,  ?  232. 


Concordances,  §  17,  p.  106. 
Conferences,  ?  52. 
Confessions  of  faith.  ?  51. 
Congress,  ?  41. 
ConRresses,  ??  49, 60. 
(Contents,  ??  198-200,  p.  102. 

arrangement  of,?  2.53. 

Continuations.??  1.3,60. 

flenoied  by  dashes,  p.  103. 

Contractions.    See  Elisions. 

Conventions,  ??  .52, 00. 

Coopenitioii  committee,  .\.  L.  A.,p.99. 

Copyright,  date  of,  p.  102. 

Corporate  entry,  ??  .39-50,  p.  99. 

Corporations,  entered  under  name  or  place,  ;^  56. 

Correspondence,  writers  of  a.  ?  3. 

Councils,  ecclesiastical,  ??  53, 60. 

Countries,  p.  99. 

as  joint  authors,  ?  3. 

cross  rcfs.  from,  ?  119. 

arrangement  under.  ?  250-252,  258. 

Country  and  person,  choice  between,  ?  94. 
Country  and  event,  ?  95. 
Country  and  subject,  ?  96,  97. 
Courtesy  titles.    See  Titles  of  honor. 
Courts,  ?  40. 
Creeds,  ?  51. 
Criminal  trials,  p.  100. 
Criticisms  of  anon,  works,  ?  72. 
Criticisms,  when   to  be  separated   from  biog- 
raphies, ??  240,  240,  247. 
Cross  reference,  p.  14,  ??  117. 119,  257. 
Cyclopaedias.    See  Encyclopaedias. 

D',  de,  §  24,  p.  105. 

Daily,  §  78. 

Danish  names,  ?  36. 

Danish  i-eference  books,  p.  130. 

Dashes,  ?  146,  pp.  102,  103,  105,  118. 

Date  of  publication,  g?  184-191,  p.  102. 

Dates  in  title,  ?  154. 

Days,  abbreviations  for  names  of,  p.  125. 

De,  de  la,  ?  24,  p.  105. 

Debate,  participants  in  a,  ?  3. 

Defender  of  a  thesis,  ??  5,  60,  pp.  104,  105. 

Definitions  of  terms,  pp.  8-15. 

Denominations,  religious,  ?  51. 

Des,  ?  24,  p.  105. 

Designers.  ??  7,  8,  60. 

Dewey,  Melvil.  his  catalog  rules,  p.  107. 

Dialects,  p.  107. 

Dictionaries,  ?  124. 

Dictionary  catalog  defined,  p.  12. 

Dictionary  and  systematic  catalogs,  ?  118. 

Digests  of  laws,  ?  42. 

Dignitaries,  ??  19, 20,  p.  100. 

Directories.  ?  63. 

Dissertations.    .See  Theses. 

Distinctive  epithets,  language  of,  ?  143. 

Divisions,  under  headings,  ??  255, 256,  258. 

Documents,  calendars  of,  ?  43. 

Dots,  omissions  indicated  by,  pp.101, 104. 

Double  entry,  under  subjects  H  93-96,  108. 

Double  title  pages,  ?  91. 

Drama,  ??84,,122. 

Du,  ?  24,  p.  105.  * 

Duplicate  list,  p.  126. 


ALPHABETICAL    INDEX. 


13' 


Dutili  naiiieH.  i  3f>. 

nutcli  refereiue  books,  |>.  130. 

Dziatzko,  K:  §5. 

East  Indian  nnniPH,  'i,  19  t,  p.  108. 
Ecclesinsliial  c<miieiln,  'ii  53,r^(. 
EteleNiuHlical  diKnitnries,  'i^,  30 fc,  60,  p.  100. 
KooU'sin-Mtical  cJistrnlJt.  \  40. 
Econoniiea  in  niitlior  entry,  ?  62-67. 

in9ubjeotentr.v,?J'Jl,'J6.97, 108.110-112, 118, 

260. 
Editions,  ?,^  159, 176, 177.  p.  102. 

nrranKement  of.  Ji  iVl,  243, 260,  p.  106. 

liinKUiiKC  of,  p.  107. 

Editors,  ?i  Is,  1.37,  pp.  9. 99, 10.3. 104,  U«. 

of  periodicals,  \  3t»  n. 

Elisions,;  239. 

Edinaiid.s,  J:,  rules  foralphabetinK,  p.  116. 
EKyptian  names,  p.  los. 
EncycloptpdiBs,  p.  13,  \  121. 
EuKlish,  use  of  capitals  in,  p.  101. 
English  reference  books,  p.  130. 
EngrHvln};s,  ji  7,  8,  60. 
Entry,  defined,  p.  12. 

where  to  enter,  ?3  1-12S. 

how  to  enter,  ?^  129-261. 

Episcopal  charges,  'i  47. 
Epitomes,  j  14. 
Eschatology,  'i  117. 
Essays,  i  126  d. 
Evening,  I  78. 
Events,  \  95. 

Exact  copyinpr,  3  165,  p.  101. 
Excerpts,  ?  16. 
Extracts,  ss  74,  240. 

False  dates,  \  IfW. 
False  plac-e  of  publication,  'f,  188. 
Family  names.     .*»tc  Surnames. 
Fiction,  ii  75, 122. 

subject  entry  under,  \  87. 

Firms,  \  56  c. 

First  word,  what  it  is.  ^^  76-79. 

entry,  ^  75-80,  pp.  12, 99. 

reference,  p.  14,  j^  S4, 8.1. 

First  words  of  a  title  to  be  retained,  ^?  1.34. 162. 
Foreign  languages,  transliteration  in,  p.  102. 

rules  for  capitals  in,  \  2f)5,  ii.  102. 

Foreign  names,  ?^  23  /i,  r,  24,  p.  105.  109. 

Foreign  phrases  as  titles,  j|77. 

Forenames,  is  19. 130,139-141.  155,215.216.219-22.3. 

abbreviations  of,  p.  119. 

arrangement  of.  p.  lis. 

in  parentheses,  p.  104. 

persons  known  by,  p.  lOl. 

Form,  p.  13. 

Form,  typographical.    S<f  Size. 

Form  entry,  p.  13,  jj  122- 1:.'!. 

classification  by,  p.  10. 

Forts,  g26. 

Fragments,  p.  106. 

French  reference  books,  p.  131. 

Friars,  j^  19  <r,  (A),  pp.  100,  104. 

Friends,  Society  of.  reference  books  for.  p.  13!. 

Full,  defined,  p.  7. 

Future  life,  j  117. 


I   fJalleries,  ?'.'.. 
(JazetteerM,i,C.3. 

(Jeograpliy,  rcfpreiice  luvks  on,  p.  131. 
(Jcrman  names,  i  ;'".. 
(icriuan  reference  l)o<«kM.  p.  131. 
(iovcrnnu-nt  publications,  ^^1.  44-46,251. 

references  from,  J  89. 

Governors'  messagefl.  \\f>. 

Orammars,  ?124,  p.  107. 

ft  reek  and  Roman  reference  book-,  p.  132. 

Creek  names,  ^  36. 220,  p.  lOK. 

of  deities,  ^  lOO. 

(Grouping  of  subject-headings,  j§  255,  256. 
Guilds,  \  56. 

Half-titles,  p.  14. 
Harris,  W:  T.,p.  3. 
Harvard  College  Library,  p.  3. 
Heading  rcfiTcnce,  p.  14. 
Headings,  dclincd,  p.  13. 
abbreviations  of,  p   123. 

arrangement  of.  Ji  214-239. 

compound,  p.  106. 

style  of,  J,§  130-147. 

after  See  or  In,  type  for,  \  147. 

Hel)rew  names,  p.  108. 

reference  books,  p.  132. 

words,  transliteration,  pp.  108,  118. 

writers,  *  19  r. 

Heilprin,  M.,  p.  111. 

Historical  Action,  subject  entry  for,  \  84. 
Historical  grouping  of  titles  under  countriea. 

g  258  (end  of  note). 
Historical  societies,  ?  56. 
Homonyms,  ^^  105,  254. 
Hungarian  names.  ^  36,  219. 
Iluon  de  Bordeaux,  \  261. 
Hymns,  ?  109. 
Hyphened  words,  ?  233,  i>.  117. 

Illustrations,  p.  102. 

Imprinta,  pp.  l.i,  102,  gj  I7S-197. 

abbreviations  of,  p.  1 2.3. 

object  in  giving,  p.  I02. 

order  of.  pp.  ia3,  lOI.     ''  " 

Incomplete  names,  arrangement  of,  \  235. 
i   Incunabula,  '«  261. 

I   reference  books  for.  p.  132. 

I  Indention,  i,  146. 

Indexes.  Ji  1.3.  60,  124.  pp.  I(«,  107. 
I   Indian  names,  p.  109. 

Individual  subjects,  p.  II. 

Individual  works  of  an  author,  arningeinenl  of, 
p.  104. 

Initials,  entry  under.  ';   '•7,  <■".  p|>.  w,  l<k4. 

for  forenaiiit'S,  ;  1  I''. 

for  subject  liciidini;      l'"". 

arrangement  of,  pp.  117,  IH. 

Inscription,  single,  \  09. 

Interrogation  marks,  p.  103. 

Introductions,  ;  60  ( I:t-I6). 

Inversion  of  sul'ject  names.  >  107. 

Italian  reference  tM>ok«.  p.  132. 

Italics,  :-,-131.  174.211,212. 

Jri^3An«««    av»lU"n*^.    Jo  •'a.'    • 

.lewett,  f.  r..  p  .-..  ^ 

Jewish.     .Vrr  Hebrew 


138 


ALPHABETICAL    INDEX. 


Joint  authors,  fi  3,  1,  60,  127,  2-JO,  p.  100. 

nrran»;eii)>  nt  of  works  l)y,  I  240. 

.Tonrnnls,  of  IcKisliitivc  bodies,  §-11. 

of  conventions,  ^2. 

of  societies,  ^56. 

Kings,  works  written  by,?,iilO, 44. 

works  nbo\it,  g  94. 

Knijjlithood,  orders  of,  §§51,56. 
Koran,  p.  UK). 

I/,  la,  entry  of  f.  24  a. 

Lakes,  5, 26. 

Lady,  ns  title,  g  142. 

Lane.W:  C.p.lll. 

Lanjiuage,  classificalion  by,  p.  9. 

of  a  catalog,  g  2»M. 

of  a  book,  to  be  stated  in  the  title,  H 167, 168, 

p.  102. 

of  subject  names,  glOO. 

reference  books  for,  p.  1.32. 

Lannian,  C.  IJ.,  ]).  Ul. 
Latin  appellatives,  1 144. 
Latin  names,  §§  25, 27',  60, 226. 

of  Greek  deities,  §  100. 

Latinized  form  of  Greek  names,  §36. 
Law,  reference  books  for,  p.  132. 
Laws,  (;s  41, 42. 

digests  of,  §42. 

Le.  entry  of,  §  24  a. 
Leonnrdus  de  Utino,  §261. 
Lexicons.    Sec  Dictionaries. 
Libraries,  §  56  d. 

Library  Assoc,  of  the  United   Kingdom,    cat- 
alog rules,  _!>.  103. 
Library  catalogs,  p.  105. 
Library  school  catalog  rules,  p.  107. 
Literary  form,  p.  13. 
Literary  history,  §  116. 
Liturgies,  §  51 ,  pp.  103, 105. 
Lord,  as  title,  g  144. 

M',  Mc.,  etc..  §217. 
IManifestoes,  §  51. 
Maps,  p.  1U2. 

authors  of,  §8. 

ho-w  to  identify,  §  197. 

mentioned  in  imprint,  §  178. 

measurement  of,  §  197. 

Married  women,§§20c,  60,  p.lOO. 

titles  of,  §  142. 

Masonic  dates,  §  186. 

Mediteval  works,  §68. 

]Medicine,  reference  books  for,  p.  132. 

^Medium,  defined,  p.  7. 

Me moi is  of  societies, §§ 56, 73. 

their  subject  entry,  §92. 

Mercantile  library  associations,  §56. 
Messages,  Presidents'  or  governors',?  46. 
Middle  ages,  reference  books  for,  p.  132. 
Military  noblemen,  §21^. 
Minutes  of  legislative  liodies,  §41. 

or  conventions,  §52. 

:\Iissals,  §51,  p.  105. 

Missing-booklist,  pp.  126,127. 

Months,  abbreviations  or  names  of,  p.  125. 

Morning,  §78. 


Mottoes,  §  162,  p.  99. 

Mountains,  §26. 

Museums,  §56. 

ISfusical  works,  §9,  p.  105. 

Musicians,  reference  books  for,  p.  133. 

Name,  under  what  part  of,  to  enter,  §§  19-26. 

under  what  form  of,  to  enter,  §§27-38. 

entry  under  parts  of,  §§  57, 60. 

Names,  assumed,  §  135. 

changed,  §22. 

foreign,  §§  23  6,  c,  24. 

local,  as  headings,  §  39. 

naturalized,  §24  d. 

personal,  §§3-38. 

to  be  given  in  full  in  headings,  p.  101. 

of  subjects,  §§99-111. 

variety  of  spelling  in,  §§  30,31. 

transliteration  of.    See  Transliteration. 

Naturalized  names,  §24rf. 

New.  place  of  word  in  arranging,  p.  117. 

Newspapers,  §§73,78.          j    -J  ■        n  a  ^^ 

Nichols,  Th.,  p.  3.  -      '      >    '_2J^  • 

Noblemen,  §§21,60,  p.  100. 

Notes.  §201,  p.  102. 

abbreviations  of,  p.  123. 

Novels.     See  Fiction. 
Numbers.     See  Numerals. 
Numerals,  §157,  p.  118. 

arranged  as  if  written  out,  §  238. 

at  the  beginning  of  titles,  §  78. 

initial,  disregarded  in  arrangement,  §  244. 

0'.§24. 

Objects  of  a  dictionary  catalog,  p.  8. 
Oblique  cases  in  titles,  §  80. 
Official  writings,  entry  of,  §  44. 
Omissions.    See  Abridgment. 
Order  of  the  parts  of  an  entry,  §  207. 

of  the  parts  of  an  imprint,  §  17-!. 

of  place  and  date  in  imprint,  §  191. 

of  the  title  to  be  preserved,  §  148. 

Order  list,  pp.  126, 127. 
Orders,  military  and  religious,  §§  51, 56. 
Oriental  authors,  §§  19  e,  CO,  pp.  100, 104. 
names,  p.  109. 

Pages,  number  of,  §§  17S,  194,  p.  102. 

Pamphlets,  p.  :2(5. 

Parentheses,  §§  176, 209, 210,  pp.  104, 107. 

Parliament,  §  41. 

Parties,  political,  §  51. 

Patronymic  phrases,  §114. 

Periodical  list,  p.  126. 

Periodicals,  §  73,  pp.  99, 104. 

Periods  in  history,  §  95. 

Perkins,  F  :  B.,  p.  3,  §  63. 

Person  and  country,  choice  between,  for  subject 
entry,  §94. 

Personal  name,  §§  3-3S. 

Persons  and  places,  relative  position  in  arrange- 
ment, p. 103. 

Phrases,  used  as  subject  entry,  §§  93, 106. 

Place,  entry  of  that  part  of  a  body  which  be- 
longs to  a,   §  51. 

Place  and  date,  position  of,  p.  107. 

Place  of  publication,  §§  179,  182, 184,188, 189,  p.  102. 


ALPHABETICAL    INDEX. 


139 


Place  of  publication,  abbreviations  of,  p.  125. 
PlaceM,  nauiesof,  ^^33-.i5,  p.  Ml. 

entry  iiiiih-r,  iiHO.SG. 

'coinpound  names  of,  §  230. 

Plans,  aiithorsof,  J7. 

Plates,  mentioned  in  imprints,  i  178. 

Platforms,  ?  51. 

Plays,  i;^  84, 122. 

Plural  number,  p.  117. 

Poems,  g§  8-1, 122. 

PolyRraphic,  p.  13. 

Polytopical,  p.  13. 

Popes,  ji  19  n,  p.  101. 

Portraits,  p.  102. 

Portuguese  reference  books,  p.  133. 

Position,^  15S. 

Possessive  case,  ?  225. 

place  of,  p.  117. 

Practical  form,  p.  13. 

Prie8e8,jj5,(i0,p.  105. 

Prayer  books,  §51,  pp.  103, 105. 

Preface  writers,  p.  103. 

Prefixes    to   names,   j§  24,  60,  1-14,  217,   219,  227, 

pp.  101,  U5,  118. 

arrangement  of,  p.  103. 

Prepositions,  f,  76. 
Presidential  conventions,  J  52. 
President's  messages,  §  46. 
Princes,  'il  19  a,  60,  pp.  100,104. 
Prhitiiiif,  place  of,  p.  102. 

style  of,  for  headings  I  147. 

Proceedings,  ij,  56,73. 

their  subject  entry.?  92. 

Profession,  desiKnation  of,  p.  101. 

Proper  names,  gJ  205,  206. 

Pseudonyms,  entry  under,  ^s  0,58.60,  pp.  99,  100, 

104, 107. 

arrun|.;ement  of,  ?  234. 

reference  books  for,  p.  130. 

use  of  pseud.,  ii_  ia5, 13C.. 

Publication,  place  of.  j?  179-182, 184, 188, 189,  p.  102. 
Publishers'  names,  §  183,  p.  102. 
PublishiiiK  societies,  §  59  f. 
Punctuation,  i  207. 

Hank,  designations  of,  p.  101. 

Kare  books,  i,  2G1. 

"  Kcd-Uipe,"  indispensable  in  some  cases,  §  68. 

Reference  defmud,  p.  13. 

Kefereiice  books,  list  of,  p.  128. 

Keferences.  ii  147,  202, 203,  p.  100. 

author,  5^60,62. 

Hegesta,  j  4.3. 

Hi-Kisters,  I  63. 

KeigiiH,  histories  of,  i  94. 

Keligious  bodies,  §  51,  p.  105. 

Kepetilion  of  titles,  how  avoided.  §  146. 

Keplies  to  a  work.    See  Comments. 

Reporters,  'f.i  18,64. 

Reports,  governmental,  ii,  41,46,48. 

law,  p.  100. 

of  committees.  ?  54. 

of  conventions,  conferences,  etc.,  i,  52. 

Reprints.  ?  1U3. 

Respondent  of  a  thesis,  ii  5,60,  pp.  104,106. 

Revlews.^^llS,  126fJ. 

Revisions,  ii  15,242. 


Rivers,  ?  26. 

Romaic  names,   £36. 

Roman  (,'Htliolie  Church,  p.  105. 

Roman  numerals,  'i  157,  pp.  10.(,  107. 

Rome,  reference  Imoks  for,  p.  132. 

Royal  Ueographical  Hociety,  p.  109. 

Russian  words,  transliteration  of,  pp.  llu,  114. 

Sacred  books,  p.  100. 

St.  Louis  Public  School  Library,  p.  3. 

Saints,  (i,  19  h,  60,  pp.  100, 104. 

Same.f,  159. 

Sanscrit  language,  p.  111. 

Scholia,  p.  106. 

Schools,  j  56. 

Schwartz,.!.,  p. 3. 

Science,  reference  l)ook»  for,  p.  133. 

See  and  See  niso,  ^  202. 211. 

Selections,  p.  106. 

Semitic  languages,  p.  111. 

Serials,  not  tu  be  confounded  with  periodicals, 

g73. 
Series  entry,  '(■  59'/. 

for  calendars,  §  43. 

Series  name,  transposition  of,  §  149. 

Sermons,  p.  107. 

Service  books,  p.  103, 105. 

Sets  of  works,  'ii  125, 126. 

Seven  Sages,  history  of,  §68. 

Shah  of  Persia,  g  60  (21  b). 

Shelf  lists,  pp.  126,  127. 

Ships,  iifH,  113. 

Short,  deRned,  p.  7. 

Sic,  use  of,  g  166. 

Signatures,  g  196  (note). 

Signs  used  as  headings,  'i  57. 

arrangement  of,  §  236. 

Size  or  typographical  form,  g  196,  pp.  102,  115. 

A.  L. -V.  rules  for,  §  190  (note). 

notation  for,  p.  126. 

Slavic  languages,  transliteration  of,  p.  110. 
Societies,  gj  56, 125, 126,  pp.  99, 100, 105.  107. 

publishing,  g  59  «. 

references  to  works  under  the  names  of, 

references  to,  from  places,  p.  104. 

names  of,  how  arrange*!,  i  231. 

Sovereigns,  ii  19  a,  CO.  pp.  lOO,  KM. 
Spanish  names,  §36. 
Spanish  reference  books,  p.  13S. 
Specific  entry,  pp.  II,  12,  14,  §93. 
Spelling,  variety  of,  i},  30. 31, 60, 79. 

of  foreign  names,  p.  109. 

Spurious  works.  §  240. 
States,  abbreviations  for  names  of,  p.  125. 
Style  of  entry,  (,i  l.JO-261. 
Subarran'.;ement,chr(>nuiogical,  i  256. 
Subdivisions  under  countries  U^-  '"'   ""■'  "f 
note),  2.'>1,  258. 

under  other  subjects,  ifi  255-25- 

Subject,  deflned,  p.  14. 

olassiticiition  by,  p.  |o. 

its  relation  to  class,  p.  1 1 . 

and  country,  choice  l>clwcen,  :i  96,  97. 

Subject  entry,  p.  13,  ?3. 92-121,  126  d. 

choice  between  general  and  s|iecillo,  {M. 

object  of,  wrongly  stated,  {ItfO  (nol«). 


140 


ALPHAIJETK'AL    INDEX. 


Subject  entry,  references  between  specific  iintl 

general,  ^^  il'.i.  I'iO. 
Subject    lieiidings    spelleil    alike,    how    distin- 

Kiiished,  ^  US; 

iirranKement  of,  p.  116. 

Subject  word  and  subject,  s  104. 

not  occurrinjj  in  title,  '(,  104. 

entry,  p.  13,  j87. 

reference,  p.  15,  §63. 

for  iinonymous  works,  p.  103. 

Subject  words,  inversion  of  compound,  §10". 

rules  yjoverninf?  determination  of,  §  107. 

Subjects,  ftrrangement  of,  g^  ■J54-258. 

case  of  overlapping,  §98. 

opposite,  §  103. 

synonymous,  §§  101-103. 

Sub.slitute  for  author's  name,  §§57-59. 

Supplements,  §259. 

Surnames,  §§  20, 1:58, 139,  p.  99, 101, 104. 

masculine  and  feminine  forms  of,  §  29. 

and   forenames,   place   of,   in   arranging, 

p.  117. 

with  a  prefix,  pp.  105, 118. 

Swedish  names,  §36. 

Syndelic,  p.  14. 

Synonymous  subject  names,  §§  101-10.3. 

Synoptical  table,  §  121. 

Synopsis  of  arrangement,  when   to   be  given, 

§252. 
Syriac  words,  transliteration  of,  p.  113. 
Systematic  and  dictionary  catalogs,  p.  57. 

Talmud,  p.  100. 

Theological  libraries,  subject  headings  in,  §117. 

Theses,  §§5,  60,  pp.  100,  104,  105. 

Tillinghast,  C.  B.,  p.  111. 

Title, defined,  p.  14. 

its  influence  on  entry,  p.  15,  it  1,  3.  104. 

Title  editions,  §177. 

Title  entries,  arrangement  of,  §  237. 

Title  entry,  p.  12,  §§68-83. 

Title  page,  loss  of,  568. 

Title  pages,  double,  §  91. 

bibliographers'  cult  of,  p.  15. 

Title  references,  §§  81-91. 

analytical,  §  127. 

Titles,  abbreviations  in,  p.  124. 

alternative,  §§  101,  205. 

arrangement  of,  §5  210-252. 

exact  copying  of,  §  165,  p.  lul. 

first  word.s  of,  to  be  retained,  §  162 

how  to  supply  missing,  §68. 


Titles,  not  to  be  taken  for  names,  j  19e. 

style  of,  §§  U8-I7.i. 

Titles  of  honor,  p.  104,  125. 

arrangement  of,  §224,  p.  118. 

capitals  for,  §§205,  zm,  p.  101. 

italicised  in  headings,  §  131. 

not  italicised  in  titles,  §  174. 

Towns,  §40. 
Toy,  C.  II.,  p.  111. 
Tract  catalog,  p.  126. 
Transactions  of  societies,  §§56,  73. 

their  subject  entry,  §  92. 

Translations,  §§  168.16'.»,  pp.  9'.<,  105. 

arrangement  of,  §  245,  p.  106. 

of  anonymous  works,  §  72. 

Trau!*lator.s,  §§  18,60.i>p.  103,  105. 
Transliteration,  §§  36,  .37,  .38, 175, 179,  p.  102. 
Transliteration  committee  of  A.  L.  A.,  report  of, 

p.  108. 
Treaties,  §  50. 
Trials,  §§  64, 113, 114,  p.  100. 
Type,  §§  130-134. 
Typographical  form.    .See  Size. 

U.    See  Umlaut. 

Umlaut,  German,  pp.  103,104,107. 
Undated  editions,  arrangement  of,  §  243. 
Uniformity,  importance  and  unimportance  of, 
?129. 

want  of,  in  catahjgs,  §  97. 

Universities,  ^  56. 

Unmarried  women,  titles  of,  §  142/,  g. 

Unnecessary  words,  to  be  omitted,  §§  152, 153. 

Van,  §24  6,0 

Vernacular,  to  be  used  In  spelling.  \  27,  p.  101. 

Vessels.    See  Ships. 

Volume, defined,  p.  15. 

Volumes,  number  of. ;  195, p.  WZ. 

Von,  §  24  6,  c. 

Water  lines,  §  19(p  (note  1. 

Weekly,  §78. 

Whitney,  W:  D.,p.Ul. 

Williams,  Monier,  p.  1  i  1. 

Wister,  Mrs.  A.  L.,  her  translations,  §  60  (18). 

Women,  reference  books  on,  p.  133. 

married,  §§  20  c.  60, 142,  p.  100. 

unmarried,  titles  of,  5  142  /,  g. 

Word  books,  p.  107. 


Young  Men's  Christian  Associations,  §  56. 


r 


^-y-*"    OF  THE        ■ 

I7BRSIT71 


CO 


^  o 

- 

O 

r 

•    1— H 

i 

= 

c 

o 

^   s' 

•  1— ( 

o 

= 

;-H 

2     ■ 

= 

CD 

/— ( 

~ 

Oh 

u    ■ 

: 

o 

Q     ■ 

2    : 

-»— * 

X! 

a:    1 
^   'P    ^ 

^-^ 

if)    1 

r:H 

2     i 

0     i 

OJ 

h     i 

^    *■ 

[ij 

•   1       ( 

l-M 

1      ^ 

a:    ^ 

■> 

«— i 

*  u 

f— 4 

<L> 

Pu 

o 

6 

O 

%^/SI 


CD 


OJ 


CD 

O 

6 

o 


:ll  HP    III  liiliilf     m      ; 

:  =  ^     til!       !  1 1    I  ?  5  f  11 « j        II 5      II 


0  ? 

^  2  -  - 

OT  =  1  I  I 

Z  I  ^  ■:  t 

0  IN  " 

h  I  i  i  I 

o  1 4  i  :: 

DC  ■' '  " 

5 


5    II    a    g    £    11    S    1   2    E    = 


s  B 


t| 


lllliilifiifiilll  I 

£  ".  i  .  °  s  s  g  I  I  5  a  I  s  ■:  I  ^    ,f.  I  i  !  s  ^  S  a  i  s  i  i  ■"  "  °  B  I     ? 

iHniiSiiifiiiyiiiiijj^pl    ii  ^ 
nitiiiiiiiiiiiiir^tilli'^  '    II I 


.  =i  ^  I  s ! « - « 

1    ilM 


1 1 ! ' "  I  f  I     ^  1 1 1  - 

S  ,S   2  •S        2*5  ■?    S    g 


'^^mr 


r 


n 


%¥r 


rOfeT^^ 


RETURN       LIBRARY  SCHOOL  LIBRARY 

TOi^       2  South  Hall  642-2253 


LOAN  PERIOD  1 


ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 


DUE   AS  STAMPED   BELOW 


i^^AR  2  5  1977 


i^^^]§ei 


DEC  15  1987 


-w^ 


CEIVED 


APR    ;  1  1996 


■if^GULATION  DEPT. 


FORM  NO   DD  18,  45m    6'76  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 

BERKELEY,  CA   94720 


■^ff^''' 


CDBOfiSbSm 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY  T 


